Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of The art of decorating dry
goods windows and interiors
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The art of decorating dry goods windows and interiors
A complete manual of window trimming, designed as an
educator in all the details of the art, according to the best
accepted methods, and treating fully every important subject
Author: L. Frank Baum
Release date: May 11, 2024 [eBook #73606]
Language: English
Original publication: Chicago: The Show Window Publishing
Company, 1900
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/73606
Credits: Richard Tonsing, Mary Glenn Krause, Beinecke Rare Book
and Manuscript Library at Yale University, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ART OF
DECORATING DRY GOODS WINDOWS AND INTERIORS ***
goods windows and interiors
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The art of decorating dry goods windows and interiors
A complete manual of window trimming, designed as an
educator in all the details of the art, according to the best
accepted methods, and treating fully every important subject
Author: L. Frank Baum
Release date: May 11, 2024 [eBook #73606]
Language: English
Original publication: Chicago: The Show Window Publishing
Company, 1900
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/73606
Credits: Richard Tonsing, Mary Glenn Krause, Beinecke Rare Book
and Manuscript Library at Yale University, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ART OF
DECORATING DRY GOODS WINDOWS AND INTERIORS ***
Page 4
Transcriber’s Note:
New original cover art included with this eBook is
granted to the public domain.
New original cover art included with this eBook is
granted to the public domain.
Page 5
THE Art of Decorating
Dry Goods Windows and Interiors.
By L. FRANK BAUM.
A Complete Manual of Window Trimming, designed as an Educator in all
the Details of the Art, according to the best accepted methods, and treating
fully every important subject.
FULLY ILLUSTRATED.
CHICAGO:
The Show Window Publishing Company,
1900.
Dry Goods Windows and Interiors.
By L. FRANK BAUM.
A Complete Manual of Window Trimming, designed as an Educator in all
the Details of the Art, according to the best accepted methods, and treating
fully every important subject.
FULLY ILLUSTRATED.
CHICAGO:
The Show Window Publishing Company,
1900.
Page 6
COPYRIGHTED
1900
BY L. FRANK BAUM.
1900
BY L. FRANK BAUM.
Page 7
INTRODUCTION.
The peddlars, or packmen, of ancient days, who were the first recognized
merchants, realized fully the advantage of displaying their wares before
prospective customers. Gaining entry to a castle, a palace, or a mansion, the
packman spread his goods upon the floor to best advantage and then
awaited patiently while the assembled bevy of women gazed enraptured
upon the treasures at their feet. If he could not obtain permission to open his
pack his visit was fruitless of result.
In old Bagdad arose the custom of open booths built before the entrances
of houses, wherein was attractively displayed the merchandise offered for
sale. This custom is still extensively followed in Eastern countries.
At Cheapside, in London, the method was to hang upon iron hooks along
the front of the building such articles as might induce the observer to buy,
or entice him to enter the shop.
The same custom was prevalent in the Colonial days in America, and is
not yet fully obsolete.
Thus from the earliest days merchants well knew the value of display,
and the modern show window is the logical outcome or development of that
knowledge.
Careful research fails to determine where the show window was first
utilized as an adjunct to merchandizing. It is probably a gradual
development from the small, many-paned front window of the merchant
shop, following the natural transformation of shops into stores and of crude
green-glass panes into clear plate-glass fronts.
However it came about, the modern mercantile establishment, whether
located in a retired village or upon the main street of a thriving city, is to-
day deemed incomplete without a front of the clearest and best plate-glass.
The peddlars, or packmen, of ancient days, who were the first recognized
merchants, realized fully the advantage of displaying their wares before
prospective customers. Gaining entry to a castle, a palace, or a mansion, the
packman spread his goods upon the floor to best advantage and then
awaited patiently while the assembled bevy of women gazed enraptured
upon the treasures at their feet. If he could not obtain permission to open his
pack his visit was fruitless of result.
In old Bagdad arose the custom of open booths built before the entrances
of houses, wherein was attractively displayed the merchandise offered for
sale. This custom is still extensively followed in Eastern countries.
At Cheapside, in London, the method was to hang upon iron hooks along
the front of the building such articles as might induce the observer to buy,
or entice him to enter the shop.
The same custom was prevalent in the Colonial days in America, and is
not yet fully obsolete.
Thus from the earliest days merchants well knew the value of display,
and the modern show window is the logical outcome or development of that
knowledge.
Careful research fails to determine where the show window was first
utilized as an adjunct to merchandizing. It is probably a gradual
development from the small, many-paned front window of the merchant
shop, following the natural transformation of shops into stores and of crude
green-glass panes into clear plate-glass fronts.
However it came about, the modern mercantile establishment, whether
located in a retired village or upon the main street of a thriving city, is to-
day deemed incomplete without a front of the clearest and best plate-glass.
Page 8
These windows are not intended to light the interior of a store, although
indirectly they may serve such purpose. Their prime object is to sell goods.
Without advertising the modern merchant sinks into oblivion. The busy
world forgets him, and he is left to himself—to rust, to vegetate, or to fail
ignominiously.
Merchants of olden times stood in front of their shops and cried “buy!—
buy!” in imploring tones. Modern merchants still cry “buy!—buy!” but they
do it in a different way. They advertise in newspapers and display their
wares in their show windows.
These are the three grades—the three developments in advertising. The
street crier, the newspapers, the show window. The last mode of inducing
trade is the modern one, and therefore the best. More goods are sold
through window display than through newspaper advertising. It is more
direct. The newspaper advertisement says: “We have goods to sell.” The
show window says: “Here they are!”
But the judicious use of advertising through newspapers must not be
discouraged. Every man, woman and child in town does not pass your
windows. Those who do not may read in the newspaper of your attractive
display of goods, and so be induced to pass your way.
The most successful of modern merchants use the newspapers to
announce their window displays. This combination of the two greatest
forces in advertising has been found to succeed beyond any other method.
To make a display of goods in your window that is most attractive, that
will sell readily the articles exhibited, is to-day acknowledged an art.
Many things are to be considered. There are the technicalities to be
learned, judgment and good taste to be exercised, color harmony to be
secured; and, above all, there must be positive knowledge as to what
constitutes an attractive exhibit, and what will arouse in the observer
cupidity and a longing to possess the goods you offer for sale.
It has been said that a window decorator is born, and not made. Yet we
find that those “born” decorators must acquire knowledge of technicalities
and detail work before they can succeed. Who shall determine which are
“born,” and which are “made” decorators? The “born musician” must,
unfortunately, learn to play the fiddle, and the “born blacksmith” must be
taught to shoe a horse. And the worldly cynic will tell you that under proper
indirectly they may serve such purpose. Their prime object is to sell goods.
Without advertising the modern merchant sinks into oblivion. The busy
world forgets him, and he is left to himself—to rust, to vegetate, or to fail
ignominiously.
Merchants of olden times stood in front of their shops and cried “buy!—
buy!” in imploring tones. Modern merchants still cry “buy!—buy!” but they
do it in a different way. They advertise in newspapers and display their
wares in their show windows.
These are the three grades—the three developments in advertising. The
street crier, the newspapers, the show window. The last mode of inducing
trade is the modern one, and therefore the best. More goods are sold
through window display than through newspaper advertising. It is more
direct. The newspaper advertisement says: “We have goods to sell.” The
show window says: “Here they are!”
But the judicious use of advertising through newspapers must not be
discouraged. Every man, woman and child in town does not pass your
windows. Those who do not may read in the newspaper of your attractive
display of goods, and so be induced to pass your way.
The most successful of modern merchants use the newspapers to
announce their window displays. This combination of the two greatest
forces in advertising has been found to succeed beyond any other method.
To make a display of goods in your window that is most attractive, that
will sell readily the articles exhibited, is to-day acknowledged an art.
Many things are to be considered. There are the technicalities to be
learned, judgment and good taste to be exercised, color harmony to be
secured; and, above all, there must be positive knowledge as to what
constitutes an attractive exhibit, and what will arouse in the observer
cupidity and a longing to possess the goods you offer for sale.
It has been said that a window decorator is born, and not made. Yet we
find that those “born” decorators must acquire knowledge of technicalities
and detail work before they can succeed. Who shall determine which are
“born,” and which are “made” decorators? The “born musician” must,
unfortunately, learn to play the fiddle, and the “born blacksmith” must be
taught to shoe a horse. And the worldly cynic will tell you that under proper
Page 9
instruction and with a desire to learn, any son of Adam can play the fiddle
or shoe a horse.
I have never known a man who desired to learn the art of decorating fail
to attain skill and subsequent success. Perhaps it is only those “born” ones
who desire to learn.
It is true that a clumsy man, a man without judgment or taste, a man
destitute of knowledge of the requirements of modern merchandizing,
might prove a lamentable failure as a store decorator. But I have never
known such a man desire to learn the art.
The object of this book is to place before the novice the instructions
necessary to fit him for successful work. The author believes that this
volume contains all information necessary to enable a student to acquire
proficiency in the Art of Decorating Dry Goods Windows and Interiors. The
field of merchandizing is so broad that this work is confined to dry goods
decorating, although many of the chapters will be of service in decorating
windows with other lines of goods.
Much of the information offered has been gained by personal experience,
yet I am greatly indebted to many brother decorators, and especially to
prominent members of The National Association of Window Trimmers of
America, for assistance in my attempt to place clearly before my readers the
many details of the art.
Practical methods have in every instance been preferred to theoretical.
The simplest and easiest way of accomplishing any work is always the best.
I am hopeful that those desiring to attain skill in decorating will find
much useful information in these pages, and if this book proves of real
assistance to its readers my object in writing it will have been
accomplished.
Most Sincerely,
L. FRANK BAUM.
or shoe a horse.
I have never known a man who desired to learn the art of decorating fail
to attain skill and subsequent success. Perhaps it is only those “born” ones
who desire to learn.
It is true that a clumsy man, a man without judgment or taste, a man
destitute of knowledge of the requirements of modern merchandizing,
might prove a lamentable failure as a store decorator. But I have never
known such a man desire to learn the art.
The object of this book is to place before the novice the instructions
necessary to fit him for successful work. The author believes that this
volume contains all information necessary to enable a student to acquire
proficiency in the Art of Decorating Dry Goods Windows and Interiors. The
field of merchandizing is so broad that this work is confined to dry goods
decorating, although many of the chapters will be of service in decorating
windows with other lines of goods.
Much of the information offered has been gained by personal experience,
yet I am greatly indebted to many brother decorators, and especially to
prominent members of The National Association of Window Trimmers of
America, for assistance in my attempt to place clearly before my readers the
many details of the art.
Practical methods have in every instance been preferred to theoretical.
The simplest and easiest way of accomplishing any work is always the best.
I am hopeful that those desiring to attain skill in decorating will find
much useful information in these pages, and if this book proves of real
assistance to its readers my object in writing it will have been
accomplished.
Most Sincerely,
L. FRANK BAUM.
Page 10
THE ART OF DECORATING.
Page 11
CHAPTER I.
HOW TO PLAN STORE FRONTS.
In building a store on modern principles the front is more important than
any other detail. For, a store being intended for the sale of merchandise, the
front is the first thing that meets the public eye, and by its appearance the
entire establishment is judged.
The size and shape of the windows depends, of course, upon the size and
location of the store, but the principle consideration is to obtain as large an
expanse of window as possible, and convenient entrances.
In single store fronts, which we shall use as examples, the ordinary
arrangement is similar to that in diagram A, having the entrance, with
double doors, in the center. This gives two good sized windows, if the front
is of fair breadth, and admits the customer to the central aisle.
To avoid dividing the expanse of window, and to render the display more
impressive, a popular arrangement is that in diagram B, having the entrance
at one side. Which side to place the entrance is determined by the trend of
traffic, the entrance being placed nearest to the busy portion of the street, as
more convenient to the customer. Exception.—It is argued by some
merchants that it is better to place the entrance furthest from the crowded
portion of the street, as in this case the people must first pass before the
window.
HOW TO PLAN STORE FRONTS.
In building a store on modern principles the front is more important than
any other detail. For, a store being intended for the sale of merchandise, the
front is the first thing that meets the public eye, and by its appearance the
entire establishment is judged.
The size and shape of the windows depends, of course, upon the size and
location of the store, but the principle consideration is to obtain as large an
expanse of window as possible, and convenient entrances.
In single store fronts, which we shall use as examples, the ordinary
arrangement is similar to that in diagram A, having the entrance, with
double doors, in the center. This gives two good sized windows, if the front
is of fair breadth, and admits the customer to the central aisle.
To avoid dividing the expanse of window, and to render the display more
impressive, a popular arrangement is that in diagram B, having the entrance
at one side. Which side to place the entrance is determined by the trend of
traffic, the entrance being placed nearest to the busy portion of the street, as
more convenient to the customer. Exception.—It is argued by some
merchants that it is better to place the entrance furthest from the crowded
portion of the street, as in this case the people must first pass before the
window.
Page 12
It will be noted that people intending to enter the store will not be
influenced by the window display, in which case the location of the
entrance is immaterial.
Diagram B shows the bevelled entrance, slanting diagonally from the
front window to the door, and thus giving the public a glance at the small
side window in passing or entering. In diagram D we show the curved front,
in which the side window is a curved or semi-circular pane. This style is
very attractive, but more expensive, and is more liable to be broken than the
flat pane.
Diagram C shows one of the most popular arrangements of store fronts.
This allows for a double entrance, with a broad expanse of window
between. In wide fronts these entrances are double doors, in narrower fronts
a single door is sufficient. Variations of this front which has bevelled
entrances, are shown in diagrams E and F. The first has the semi-circular
end panes, which are recommended as especially imposing, and the latter
shows a square perfectly rectangular turn for the side panes. The advantage
influenced by the window display, in which case the location of the
entrance is immaterial.
Diagram B shows the bevelled entrance, slanting diagonally from the
front window to the door, and thus giving the public a glance at the small
side window in passing or entering. In diagram D we show the curved front,
in which the side window is a curved or semi-circular pane. This style is
very attractive, but more expensive, and is more liable to be broken than the
flat pane.
Diagram C shows one of the most popular arrangements of store fronts.
This allows for a double entrance, with a broad expanse of window
between. In wide fronts these entrances are double doors, in narrower fronts
a single door is sufficient. Variations of this front which has bevelled
entrances, are shown in diagrams E and F. The first has the semi-circular
end panes, which are recommended as especially imposing, and the latter
shows a square perfectly rectangular turn for the side panes. The advantage
Page 13
claimed for this method is that it attracts the attention of those approaching
the window more quickly than will the slant or curve, but this does not
appear likely unless the front projects beyond the line of the building.
The large central pane, with double or single side entrances, is a very
successful style of front, and is strongly endorsed by those who have used
them.
It sometimes happens that thick pillars of masonry obstruct the front, as
shown in diagram G. In this case the window panes should be set at the
outer edge of the pillars, rather than against the inner edge, as much of the
effect of the front would be lost by the projecting pillars. The entrance,
however, should be set at the inner edges of the pillars, as indicated.
Posts are always to be avoided in window spaces, and there is seldom an
occasion where they are really necessary. But where a front is rebuilt or
altered and posts cannot be avoided, they should invariably be set directly
back of the window frames, as shown in diagram H. When they are placed
in this manner each window has a clear space back of the pane, and the
decorator has an opportunity of putting one distinct trim in each window.
But if the posts occupy the center, or even the sides of the window, no
decorator on earth can trim the space properly or effectively.
Diagram H also illustrates the continuous front, where many windows are
placed side by side. Any of the fronts previously described can be so
extended indefinitely.
There are many other styles of store fronts, but most of them come under
the head of “freak fronts,” and are only appropriate for the special buildings
for which they were designed.
The main points to consider in building a front, are, (a) to get as large an
expanse of glass as possible; (b) to use iron framework, occupying the least
space where the panes join; (c) to avoid the use of posts back of the panes,
the window more quickly than will the slant or curve, but this does not
appear likely unless the front projects beyond the line of the building.
The large central pane, with double or single side entrances, is a very
successful style of front, and is strongly endorsed by those who have used
them.
It sometimes happens that thick pillars of masonry obstruct the front, as
shown in diagram G. In this case the window panes should be set at the
outer edge of the pillars, rather than against the inner edge, as much of the
effect of the front would be lost by the projecting pillars. The entrance,
however, should be set at the inner edges of the pillars, as indicated.
Posts are always to be avoided in window spaces, and there is seldom an
occasion where they are really necessary. But where a front is rebuilt or
altered and posts cannot be avoided, they should invariably be set directly
back of the window frames, as shown in diagram H. When they are placed
in this manner each window has a clear space back of the pane, and the
decorator has an opportunity of putting one distinct trim in each window.
But if the posts occupy the center, or even the sides of the window, no
decorator on earth can trim the space properly or effectively.
Diagram H also illustrates the continuous front, where many windows are
placed side by side. Any of the fronts previously described can be so
extended indefinitely.
There are many other styles of store fronts, but most of them come under
the head of “freak fronts,” and are only appropriate for the special buildings
for which they were designed.
The main points to consider in building a front, are, (a) to get as large an
expanse of glass as possible; (b) to use iron framework, occupying the least
space where the panes join; (c) to avoid the use of posts back of the panes,
Page 14
but where they are necessary to place each post behind the point where two
large plate-glass panes are joined together.
A new idea in show window fronts is to allow the two sheets of glass to
come together at the corners, where they are held by brass braces and set
screws so that there is no corner space at all. This arrangement looks well
and has several advantages. The glass is less liable to break than when set
against a post or frame; and all shadows in the window are avoided.
Last, if you have an old-fashioned front, get your landlord to take it out
and replace it with a modern, plate-glass front. If he refuses, move
elsewhere. You cannot afford to be in the mercantile business without good
windows to back up your enterprise.
large plate-glass panes are joined together.
A new idea in show window fronts is to allow the two sheets of glass to
come together at the corners, where they are held by brass braces and set
screws so that there is no corner space at all. This arrangement looks well
and has several advantages. The glass is less liable to break than when set
against a post or frame; and all shadows in the window are avoided.
Last, if you have an old-fashioned front, get your landlord to take it out
and replace it with a modern, plate-glass front. If he refuses, move
elsewhere. You cannot afford to be in the mercantile business without good
windows to back up your enterprise.
Page 15
CHAPTER II.
THE SHOW WINDOW.
In attempting to explain the fundamental principles of successful store
decoration, the window is the first thing to be considered, and there are all
kinds of windows, little and big, upright and oblong, cramped and spacious.
Some are hard to get at; some have big, awkward posts in them; but no
matter what they are or how undesirable they seem, remember that anything
with a pane of glass before it may be made a show window.
Build a window floor on a level with the lower edge of the glass; build it
strongly and make it as deep as you are able. Three feet is a fair depth; six
feet is not too deep.
THE SHOW WINDOW.
In attempting to explain the fundamental principles of successful store
decoration, the window is the first thing to be considered, and there are all
kinds of windows, little and big, upright and oblong, cramped and spacious.
Some are hard to get at; some have big, awkward posts in them; but no
matter what they are or how undesirable they seem, remember that anything
with a pane of glass before it may be made a show window.
Build a window floor on a level with the lower edge of the glass; build it
strongly and make it as deep as you are able. Three feet is a fair depth; six
feet is not too deep.
Page 16
BOXING A WINDOW.
In order to produce a good window there must be a proper foundation to
work upon. An open-backed window is an impossibility as considered from
a window trimmer’s standpoint, save in very few cases where articles are
small and only require a window shelf to display them.
All windows should have a substantial board backing and sides extending
about one-half the height of the window itself. A door should be made in
this at one side, to permit the trimmer easy entrance and enable you to reach
any goods you may wish to withdraw from the window. Above this backing
it is desirable to have a sash reaching to the ceiling, which will serve to
admit light and prevent dust reaching the trim.
The distance of the backing from the glass is a matter of choice. Some
prefer very deep window embrasures, and for furniture, carpets, stoves and
like bulky articles, they are undoubtedly best. For displays of light, small
articles, a shallow window is very desirable, and furnishings, notions, etc.,
may be effectively arranged in thirty inches space. For the general window,
however, where various classes of merchandise are required to be exhibited,
a depth of from four to five feet is best; and even six feet, especially for a
clothing or cloak trim, is not considered too deep for good effects.
The floor of the window embrasure should be made perfectly level, as
this will admit of more substantial framework than an incline. A removable,
sloping floor may be provided for use when desired.
Against the solid backing brackets and shelves may be secured, their
arrangement being altered as occasion demands. It also admits of tacking
the draperies in a substantial manner, and there is a satisfaction in knowing
your window is solid and that any fragile articles displayed are perfectly
safe.
In order to produce a good window there must be a proper foundation to
work upon. An open-backed window is an impossibility as considered from
a window trimmer’s standpoint, save in very few cases where articles are
small and only require a window shelf to display them.
All windows should have a substantial board backing and sides extending
about one-half the height of the window itself. A door should be made in
this at one side, to permit the trimmer easy entrance and enable you to reach
any goods you may wish to withdraw from the window. Above this backing
it is desirable to have a sash reaching to the ceiling, which will serve to
admit light and prevent dust reaching the trim.
The distance of the backing from the glass is a matter of choice. Some
prefer very deep window embrasures, and for furniture, carpets, stoves and
like bulky articles, they are undoubtedly best. For displays of light, small
articles, a shallow window is very desirable, and furnishings, notions, etc.,
may be effectively arranged in thirty inches space. For the general window,
however, where various classes of merchandise are required to be exhibited,
a depth of from four to five feet is best; and even six feet, especially for a
clothing or cloak trim, is not considered too deep for good effects.
The floor of the window embrasure should be made perfectly level, as
this will admit of more substantial framework than an incline. A removable,
sloping floor may be provided for use when desired.
Against the solid backing brackets and shelves may be secured, their
arrangement being altered as occasion demands. It also admits of tacking
the draperies in a substantial manner, and there is a satisfaction in knowing
your window is solid and that any fragile articles displayed are perfectly
safe.
Page 17
HOW TO WASH WINDOWS.
A clean window pane is a necessity in a show window. Nothing destroys
the attractiveness of a really good display so readily and effectively as a
streaked, flyspecked glass in front of it.
Many merchants dread window washing day. It shouldn’t be a bugbear
when a simple method like the following is understood. Wait until the sun is
off the window, for if the sun is shining on the glass it will look streaked
after drying, irrespective of the amount of muscle expended in the rubbing.
Dust the window thoroughly, inside and out, and don’t touch the glass until
after the inside woodwork has been cleansed. Use nothing but warm water,
mixed with sufficient ammonia in washing the glass. Steer clear of soap.
Dry the windows with the rubber cleaner or soft cotton cloth. Linen leaves
lint on the glass. Polish with paper; that’s all that’s necessary.
A clean window pane is a necessity in a show window. Nothing destroys
the attractiveness of a really good display so readily and effectively as a
streaked, flyspecked glass in front of it.
Many merchants dread window washing day. It shouldn’t be a bugbear
when a simple method like the following is understood. Wait until the sun is
off the window, for if the sun is shining on the glass it will look streaked
after drying, irrespective of the amount of muscle expended in the rubbing.
Dust the window thoroughly, inside and out, and don’t touch the glass until
after the inside woodwork has been cleansed. Use nothing but warm water,
mixed with sufficient ammonia in washing the glass. Steer clear of soap.
Dry the windows with the rubber cleaner or soft cotton cloth. Linen leaves
lint on the glass. Polish with paper; that’s all that’s necessary.
Page 18
TO PREVENT WINDOWS FROM FROSTING.
One of the merchant’s greatest trials is the sweating and frosting of
windows in cold weather, rendering them useless for display purposes at the
very season when they are most valuable.
Much has been written concerning methods of prevention of frost, but
most of them are theoretical, and, while they work well in some instances,
are absolute failures in others.
One of the merchant’s greatest trials is the sweating and frosting of
windows in cold weather, rendering them useless for display purposes at the
very season when they are most valuable.
Much has been written concerning methods of prevention of frost, but
most of them are theoretical, and, while they work well in some instances,
are absolute failures in others.
Page 19
THE CAUSE.
Scientists will tell you that the reason a window sweats is because there
is an uneven temperature on the opposite sides of the window pane. The
cold air outside chills the pane, which condenses the moisture in the warm
air inside as it strikes the glass, and the moisture is deposited in the form of
“sweat” upon the inner surface of the glass. It then freezes, producing
“frost.” Occasionally, when there is moisture in the outer air, a deposit is
also made upon the outer surface of the glass, but in either case the frost
arises from the uneven temperature of the air inside and outside the window
glass.
Scientists will tell you that the reason a window sweats is because there
is an uneven temperature on the opposite sides of the window pane. The
cold air outside chills the pane, which condenses the moisture in the warm
air inside as it strikes the glass, and the moisture is deposited in the form of
“sweat” upon the inner surface of the glass. It then freezes, producing
“frost.” Occasionally, when there is moisture in the outer air, a deposit is
also made upon the outer surface of the glass, but in either case the frost
arises from the uneven temperature of the air inside and outside the window
glass.
Page 20
THE REMEDY.
The foregoing cause of the evil being understood, it is also plain that any
arrangement which will render the temperature of the air the same on both
sides of the pane will remedy the difficulty. Any other method is obviously
imperfect and ineffectual. If the temperature within and without the window
is the same the glass cannot sweat or frost.
To obtain an even temperature it is absolutely necessary to box the
window. It must be cut off entirely from the other part of the store.
FIG. 1.
The space under modern show windows is used largely for ventilating
cellars. Our sketch shows half of this space used for ventilating cellar, and
other half as a cold air passage to allow the outside air to pass through the
double perforated window floor, thereby keeping the air within the window
enclosure approximately the same temperature as the outside, and thereby
preventing the sweating and freezing, so annoying to the trimmer.
The foregoing cause of the evil being understood, it is also plain that any
arrangement which will render the temperature of the air the same on both
sides of the pane will remedy the difficulty. Any other method is obviously
imperfect and ineffectual. If the temperature within and without the window
is the same the glass cannot sweat or frost.
To obtain an even temperature it is absolutely necessary to box the
window. It must be cut off entirely from the other part of the store.
FIG. 1.
The space under modern show windows is used largely for ventilating
cellars. Our sketch shows half of this space used for ventilating cellar, and
other half as a cold air passage to allow the outside air to pass through the
double perforated window floor, thereby keeping the air within the window
enclosure approximately the same temperature as the outside, and thereby
preventing the sweating and freezing, so annoying to the trimmer.
Page 21
FIG. 2.
A A, open space between double perforated bottom, to be filled with
loose cotton to permit the air to pass, but dense enough to keep back the
dust from the street.
The floor of the window should be made of boards, perforated and made
to fit in snugly without fastening down, so they can be taken up
occasionally to clean out the dust that will accumulate in time.
FIG. 3.
Fig. 3 shows how boards may be used without being perforated. Small
pieces of wood are nailed on one edge of each board, say about one-eighth
inch thick, so as to keep the boards about that distance apart.
C is a small door that opens into the store room to reach the cold air
space, for cleaning occasionally.
A A, open space between double perforated bottom, to be filled with
loose cotton to permit the air to pass, but dense enough to keep back the
dust from the street.
The floor of the window should be made of boards, perforated and made
to fit in snugly without fastening down, so they can be taken up
occasionally to clean out the dust that will accumulate in time.
FIG. 3.
Fig. 3 shows how boards may be used without being perforated. Small
pieces of wood are nailed on one edge of each board, say about one-eighth
inch thick, so as to keep the boards about that distance apart.
C is a small door that opens into the store room to reach the cold air
space, for cleaning occasionally.
Page 22
B, opening for lighting and ventilating the cellar. A trap door may be
arranged to fit over the opening B, but a better arrangement is to have two
sashes of glass to fit the front of the openings immediately back of the wire
screens shown in Fig. 2. If hinged at the top, they can be opened by pulling
back with a cord or chain from the inside of the room.
Fig. 2 shows a wire screen now much used instead of the more expensive
iron grille work formerly in vogue.
When possible, a glass roof should be used to inclose the window, in
which case the lights may be arranged above the glass. This prevents
heating the window. In using floor drapings, employ only cheesecloth, or
some light material that will allow air to pass through.
All this may seem to require considerable trouble and alteration of your
windows, but wherever this method has been used it has been found
thoroughly practical and an absolute prevention of frost.
arranged to fit over the opening B, but a better arrangement is to have two
sashes of glass to fit the front of the openings immediately back of the wire
screens shown in Fig. 2. If hinged at the top, they can be opened by pulling
back with a cord or chain from the inside of the room.
Fig. 2 shows a wire screen now much used instead of the more expensive
iron grille work formerly in vogue.
When possible, a glass roof should be used to inclose the window, in
which case the lights may be arranged above the glass. This prevents
heating the window. In using floor drapings, employ only cheesecloth, or
some light material that will allow air to pass through.
All this may seem to require considerable trouble and alteration of your
windows, but wherever this method has been used it has been found
thoroughly practical and an absolute prevention of frost.
Page 23
OTHER METHODS.
(1) An electric fan kept constantly in motion in a corner of the window is
said to avoid frosting by keeping the atmosphere in circulation, and thus
preventing condensation upon the surface of the glass. In a large window
there should be two fans, in opposite corners, and these may be easily
concealed from view.
(2) Electric Heaters.—As almost every store is now provided with
electric light service, and electric heaters can be purchased in all sizes on
the open market, the interest in this new application of electric heating is
universal. All that is necessary is to place a small electric heater in the
window in any concealed position, and to connect it with the lighting
mains.
(3) Several washes for the window glass have been recommended, but
our observation has been that these usually fail to prevent frosting.
It is true that one method will succeed with a merchant, and fail when
utilized by his next door neighbor. It is hard to explain this fact, save for the
different atmospheric conditions of the two rooms. It is not unusual to see
one window as opaque as a sheet of felt and another loom up as transparent
as a crystal, when both are apparently under the same conditions. One sees
a window free from frost where it is entirely enclosed, and that seems to
explain the reason. But a few doors further on another window similarly
enclosed is covered with ice. Some windows that have a half-length
enclosure inside are clear and others are frosty, and some that are entirely
open to receive the heat of the store room are clear while others are not.
Among the various washes are pure glycerine, in which a flannel cloth is
dipped, ammonia and salt, and alcohol and water. As said before, these are
seldom effective in preventing frosting. The safest and best remedy will be
found in ventilation, as above described.
(1) An electric fan kept constantly in motion in a corner of the window is
said to avoid frosting by keeping the atmosphere in circulation, and thus
preventing condensation upon the surface of the glass. In a large window
there should be two fans, in opposite corners, and these may be easily
concealed from view.
(2) Electric Heaters.—As almost every store is now provided with
electric light service, and electric heaters can be purchased in all sizes on
the open market, the interest in this new application of electric heating is
universal. All that is necessary is to place a small electric heater in the
window in any concealed position, and to connect it with the lighting
mains.
(3) Several washes for the window glass have been recommended, but
our observation has been that these usually fail to prevent frosting.
It is true that one method will succeed with a merchant, and fail when
utilized by his next door neighbor. It is hard to explain this fact, save for the
different atmospheric conditions of the two rooms. It is not unusual to see
one window as opaque as a sheet of felt and another loom up as transparent
as a crystal, when both are apparently under the same conditions. One sees
a window free from frost where it is entirely enclosed, and that seems to
explain the reason. But a few doors further on another window similarly
enclosed is covered with ice. Some windows that have a half-length
enclosure inside are clear and others are frosty, and some that are entirely
open to receive the heat of the store room are clear while others are not.
Among the various washes are pure glycerine, in which a flannel cloth is
dipped, ammonia and salt, and alcohol and water. As said before, these are
seldom effective in preventing frosting. The safest and best remedy will be
found in ventilation, as above described.
Page 24
CHAPTER III.
SOME PRACTICAL HINTS.
Those who are inexperienced in window decoration will need a few
general instructions before attempting to trim in a practical and successful
manner. Experience has taught us several things which apply so forcibly to
the art of decoration that they may be considered in the nature of rules, and
must be studied carefully and thoroughly by the novice.
SOME PRACTICAL HINTS.
Those who are inexperienced in window decoration will need a few
general instructions before attempting to trim in a practical and successful
manner. Experience has taught us several things which apply so forcibly to
the art of decoration that they may be considered in the nature of rules, and
must be studied carefully and thoroughly by the novice.
Page 25
SUGGESTIONS.
The trouble with most window trimmers and beginners is that they ignore
all suggestions offered, from the fact that they are window trimmers, and
are supposed to know it all, which is a grave mistake (for no man knows it
all). From experience, you will find that by listening to any and all
suggestions offered, there will be a time when you will be glad to accept
them. If you do not take to the suggestion, pass it up, but in all cases it pays
to listen and act accordingly.
The trouble with most window trimmers and beginners is that they ignore
all suggestions offered, from the fact that they are window trimmers, and
are supposed to know it all, which is a grave mistake (for no man knows it
all). From experience, you will find that by listening to any and all
suggestions offered, there will be a time when you will be glad to accept
them. If you do not take to the suggestion, pass it up, but in all cases it pays
to listen and act accordingly.
Page 26
SIMPLICITY.
There is nothing more “fetching” in a window than the simple artistic
arrangement of a few attractive goods. Simplicity has been urged by almost
every writer upon window trimming, yet it is generally disregarded. More
err in crowding a window than in displaying insufficient goods.
A good background, throwing out a few articles that are good values or
distinct novelties, may be relied upon to arrest the attention of the passing
shopper. It is poor policy to display expensive and inexpensive merchandise
in the same window, or to exhibit what is called a “mixed” window. A
crowded window bewilders the beholder, and while he may admire the
general arrangement and wealth of color, no one item will sufficiently
attract him to induce him to enter the store, or will impress his mind so far
that he will recollect it when occasion arises to purchase. The most
successful show windows are those where a few goods are well displayed.
It is bad advertising to display too many lines in one window. The most
effective window usually contains but one line of goods. Dress goods never
show to advantage when mixed with other articles, and silks and calicos, in
the same window, each detract from the other.
Special windows always win more attention, and are more easily
trimmed and more quickly changed when they have served their purpose.
There is nothing more “fetching” in a window than the simple artistic
arrangement of a few attractive goods. Simplicity has been urged by almost
every writer upon window trimming, yet it is generally disregarded. More
err in crowding a window than in displaying insufficient goods.
A good background, throwing out a few articles that are good values or
distinct novelties, may be relied upon to arrest the attention of the passing
shopper. It is poor policy to display expensive and inexpensive merchandise
in the same window, or to exhibit what is called a “mixed” window. A
crowded window bewilders the beholder, and while he may admire the
general arrangement and wealth of color, no one item will sufficiently
attract him to induce him to enter the store, or will impress his mind so far
that he will recollect it when occasion arises to purchase. The most
successful show windows are those where a few goods are well displayed.
It is bad advertising to display too many lines in one window. The most
effective window usually contains but one line of goods. Dress goods never
show to advantage when mixed with other articles, and silks and calicos, in
the same window, each detract from the other.
Special windows always win more attention, and are more easily
trimmed and more quickly changed when they have served their purpose.
Page 27
DETAIL AND WORKMANSHIP.
I will here say a few words upon the subject of detail work in window
trimming. I have always found that anything which was worth doing at all
was worth doing well. It may take a little more time and cost a little more
money, but you will obtain the desired results in the end, and your window
will be the means of increased sales of the goods displayed.
I have had a great deal of experience with window trimmers, and have
found that the great majority of them do not pay that strict attention to detail
which is so necessary in a perfectly dressed window. They will say, “Oh,
that is good enough,” “No one will notice that,” etc., when they detect some
omission in the detail of the work. But they are wrong, for a great many of
those whose attention is attracted to the display will as quickly note the
defect as the skilled window trimmer himself.
One of the greatest troubles the window trimmer has to contend with is
the lack of time necessary to do complete and perfect work. The house
wants the window changed, and wants it immediately, ignoring the fact that
it requires time, both to take out the old and put in the new display, and on
that account it is absolutely necessary that a great deal of the work should
be done in the workshop before going into the window at all. You may find
a picture or model that would make a good subject for a novelty window of
certain kinds of goods, and it could be worked out in fine style if only
sufficient time were given for detail work, that is, making all of the
different parts of the subject in their proper place, and leaving out of the
work not the slightest detail necessary to make the finished work identically
like the picture or model. This would, necessarily, require considerable time
and labor, but when the trimmer gets advanced in the work he will become
so interested that he will not be satisfied until he has it complete in detail.
The special efforts of the most successful window trimmers are directed
toward the carrying out of the small details, without which there can be no
perfect specimen of the window trimmer’s art, and for lack of which so
many windows present a crude and unfinished appearance.
I will here say a few words upon the subject of detail work in window
trimming. I have always found that anything which was worth doing at all
was worth doing well. It may take a little more time and cost a little more
money, but you will obtain the desired results in the end, and your window
will be the means of increased sales of the goods displayed.
I have had a great deal of experience with window trimmers, and have
found that the great majority of them do not pay that strict attention to detail
which is so necessary in a perfectly dressed window. They will say, “Oh,
that is good enough,” “No one will notice that,” etc., when they detect some
omission in the detail of the work. But they are wrong, for a great many of
those whose attention is attracted to the display will as quickly note the
defect as the skilled window trimmer himself.
One of the greatest troubles the window trimmer has to contend with is
the lack of time necessary to do complete and perfect work. The house
wants the window changed, and wants it immediately, ignoring the fact that
it requires time, both to take out the old and put in the new display, and on
that account it is absolutely necessary that a great deal of the work should
be done in the workshop before going into the window at all. You may find
a picture or model that would make a good subject for a novelty window of
certain kinds of goods, and it could be worked out in fine style if only
sufficient time were given for detail work, that is, making all of the
different parts of the subject in their proper place, and leaving out of the
work not the slightest detail necessary to make the finished work identically
like the picture or model. This would, necessarily, require considerable time
and labor, but when the trimmer gets advanced in the work he will become
so interested that he will not be satisfied until he has it complete in detail.
The special efforts of the most successful window trimmers are directed
toward the carrying out of the small details, without which there can be no
perfect specimen of the window trimmer’s art, and for lack of which so
many windows present a crude and unfinished appearance.
Page 28
WHAT TO DISPLAY.
The mission of the show window is not to display unsaleable goods, but
to sell goods. If you can’t make a pretty picture and sell goods at the same
time let the picture go, but make a display that will sell the goods. But don’t
forget that if you can make the window attractive enough to arrest the gaze
of the passerby your goods are half sold. This may appear to you ambiguous
at first, but a little thought will teach you never to lose sight of the fact that
goods must be sold, and that an attractive window will help sell them. But a
“picture window,” in which the value or utility of the goods is sacrificed to
make the picture, is not art, but foolishness.
In the selection of goods for your window two classes are best. First, new
goods, of which there is ample stock; for, being new and seasonable, they
are in demand and can be sold with profit and the money reinvested.
Second, old goods which must be disposed of, probably at a sacrifice, in
order that the money tied up in them may be used to better advantage.
These last are “bargain” windows and each article must bear its price ticket.
Cut the price sufficiently to interest people. Bear in mind that these goods
might lie on your shelves years without moving if there was no show
window to dispose of them. Properly displayed and properly priced, the
show window will sell them like hot cakes, even though they are old
enough to have gray whiskers. People dearly love bargains.
Don’t make the mistake of selecting a variety of goods for your display.
Confine it to one line as much as possible, and when that is impossible
confine it to kindred lines. You don’t need so very many goods if you know
how to display them. Some of the best windows I ever saw contained very
few goods; but, bear in mind, every piece stood out as distinctly as a wart
on a man’s nose. At the same time a well-filled, or “stocky” window, as it is
called, frequently is quite as effective as any, and a reputation for carrying a
full stock is a desirable thing for any merchant. Unto them that have goods
shall be given trade. You can’t sell what you haven’t got.
The mission of the show window is not to display unsaleable goods, but
to sell goods. If you can’t make a pretty picture and sell goods at the same
time let the picture go, but make a display that will sell the goods. But don’t
forget that if you can make the window attractive enough to arrest the gaze
of the passerby your goods are half sold. This may appear to you ambiguous
at first, but a little thought will teach you never to lose sight of the fact that
goods must be sold, and that an attractive window will help sell them. But a
“picture window,” in which the value or utility of the goods is sacrificed to
make the picture, is not art, but foolishness.
In the selection of goods for your window two classes are best. First, new
goods, of which there is ample stock; for, being new and seasonable, they
are in demand and can be sold with profit and the money reinvested.
Second, old goods which must be disposed of, probably at a sacrifice, in
order that the money tied up in them may be used to better advantage.
These last are “bargain” windows and each article must bear its price ticket.
Cut the price sufficiently to interest people. Bear in mind that these goods
might lie on your shelves years without moving if there was no show
window to dispose of them. Properly displayed and properly priced, the
show window will sell them like hot cakes, even though they are old
enough to have gray whiskers. People dearly love bargains.
Don’t make the mistake of selecting a variety of goods for your display.
Confine it to one line as much as possible, and when that is impossible
confine it to kindred lines. You don’t need so very many goods if you know
how to display them. Some of the best windows I ever saw contained very
few goods; but, bear in mind, every piece stood out as distinctly as a wart
on a man’s nose. At the same time a well-filled, or “stocky” window, as it is
called, frequently is quite as effective as any, and a reputation for carrying a
full stock is a desirable thing for any merchant. Unto them that have goods
shall be given trade. You can’t sell what you haven’t got.
Page 29
ROBBING WINDOWS.
Frequently a merchant finds his stock so reduced that the only size, color
or style of a certain article remaining is that displayed in his window trim.
When you have a call for such an article do not rob your window display,
but take the customer’s name and address and agree to send the article C. O.
D. when you change your window.
This method has been adopted by all the large stores, and has proven very
satisfactory. The effectiveness of your window remains unimpaired, and
usually a customer is willing to wait in order to secure the desired article. In
rare instances, when there is danger of a good sale being lost, this rule may
be abrogated, and the article taken from the display; but if it is understood
by your patrons that no goods will be removed from your windows until the
trim is changed, they will readily see the advisability of such action, and be
willing, in most cases, to wait a reasonable length of time.
Frequently a merchant finds his stock so reduced that the only size, color
or style of a certain article remaining is that displayed in his window trim.
When you have a call for such an article do not rob your window display,
but take the customer’s name and address and agree to send the article C. O.
D. when you change your window.
This method has been adopted by all the large stores, and has proven very
satisfactory. The effectiveness of your window remains unimpaired, and
usually a customer is willing to wait in order to secure the desired article. In
rare instances, when there is danger of a good sale being lost, this rule may
be abrogated, and the article taken from the display; but if it is understood
by your patrons that no goods will be removed from your windows until the
trim is changed, they will readily see the advisability of such action, and be
willing, in most cases, to wait a reasonable length of time.
Page 30
WINDOW TRIMMERS’ ROOM.
Every window trimmer should have a fair sized room for the sole
purpose of keeping his fixtures, wax figures, a work bench, etc. It should
have plenty of light, with one portion set aside for ticket writing; a place
with a door to keep out the dust, in which to keep his cardboard, cut in the
desired sizes for his use; a place to keep wax figures when they are not in
the windows (dust proof stalls, large enough for each figure, are best); a
sign in the room to read, “A place for everything and everything in its
place.” Keep your room locked and carry the key in your pocket.
Every window trimmer should have a fair sized room for the sole
purpose of keeping his fixtures, wax figures, a work bench, etc. It should
have plenty of light, with one portion set aside for ticket writing; a place
with a door to keep out the dust, in which to keep his cardboard, cut in the
desired sizes for his use; a place to keep wax figures when they are not in
the windows (dust proof stalls, large enough for each figure, are best); a
sign in the room to read, “A place for everything and everything in its
place.” Keep your room locked and carry the key in your pocket.
Page 31
TOOLS.
A proper outfit or kit of tools is a necessity. For carpenter work, such as
building your own framework, you will require cross-cut and rip saws,
chisels, screwdrivers, awls and a hammer. Don’t attempt to make very fine
joints; it is unnecessary, since the frame will all be covered. But be sure
your work is substantial and will not pull apart. In order to preserve your
lumber for future use and to obtain strength in your structure, use screws
wherever possible, first boring a hole with a small bit, or, if the material is
thin, using an awl to make the holes for your screws. In your tool box have
partitions for all sizes of screws, nails and tacks, and keep each size
separate.
For upholstery work, such as pleating, puffing, draping and covering the
frame with cloth, you will need a large pair of shears and an upholsterer’s
hammer, which has a long, extended head. Also provide yourself with a
small pincushion, 3 or 4 inches square, and put a loop of tape on opposite
corners. These loops can be placed over two buttons of your vest, to hold it
firmly in place, or you can pin the cushion by the loops to any part of your
person. Don’t loan your tools to anyone. Keep them locked up in your tool
box. Carry the box into the window with you, for then you have everything
at hand you will be likely to need. Keep a supply of screw eyes and hooks,
wire and cord in your box, for you will often need them. Tools for electrical
work will be explained in the chapter on electrical designs.
A proper outfit or kit of tools is a necessity. For carpenter work, such as
building your own framework, you will require cross-cut and rip saws,
chisels, screwdrivers, awls and a hammer. Don’t attempt to make very fine
joints; it is unnecessary, since the frame will all be covered. But be sure
your work is substantial and will not pull apart. In order to preserve your
lumber for future use and to obtain strength in your structure, use screws
wherever possible, first boring a hole with a small bit, or, if the material is
thin, using an awl to make the holes for your screws. In your tool box have
partitions for all sizes of screws, nails and tacks, and keep each size
separate.
For upholstery work, such as pleating, puffing, draping and covering the
frame with cloth, you will need a large pair of shears and an upholsterer’s
hammer, which has a long, extended head. Also provide yourself with a
small pincushion, 3 or 4 inches square, and put a loop of tape on opposite
corners. These loops can be placed over two buttons of your vest, to hold it
firmly in place, or you can pin the cushion by the loops to any part of your
person. Don’t loan your tools to anyone. Keep them locked up in your tool
box. Carry the box into the window with you, for then you have everything
at hand you will be likely to need. Keep a supply of screw eyes and hooks,
wire and cord in your box, for you will often need them. Tools for electrical
work will be explained in the chapter on electrical designs.
Page 32
THE SCREEN.
Professional window trimmers prefer usually to work during the night or
early morning, when they are uninterrupted by either employes, customers
or curious groups who delight in watching them from without.
It is, however, often necessary to work during the day, and in this case a
screen of muslin or cambric is stretched across the window to insure
privacy. This screen is almost a necessity to the merchants in smaller cities,
where all work is done in daytime, and may be utilized to good advantage
in attracting the curiosity of passers-by.
One merchant we know of has painted across his screen in big, black
letters, “Watch This Window!” Another uses the following: “We are Getting
Ready to Surprise You.” And still another: “This Window is Dead To-day,
but will be Alive To-morrow!” Many texts may be selected, but a sign of
some sort upon the window screen is certainly a good advertisement.
Professional window trimmers prefer usually to work during the night or
early morning, when they are uninterrupted by either employes, customers
or curious groups who delight in watching them from without.
It is, however, often necessary to work during the day, and in this case a
screen of muslin or cambric is stretched across the window to insure
privacy. This screen is almost a necessity to the merchants in smaller cities,
where all work is done in daytime, and may be utilized to good advantage
in attracting the curiosity of passers-by.
One merchant we know of has painted across his screen in big, black
letters, “Watch This Window!” Another uses the following: “We are Getting
Ready to Surprise You.” And still another: “This Window is Dead To-day,
but will be Alive To-morrow!” Many texts may be selected, but a sign of
some sort upon the window screen is certainly a good advertisement.
Page 33
OPEN WINDOW TRIMMING.
Many decorators of late have found a distinct advantage in leaving
shades up and dispensing with screens. They work in plain view of the
crowds that congregate to watch them. This would be embarrassing to the
beginner or the modest man, but its advantage lies in being an added
attraction for the store. People are often curious to know how a window
display is built up and arranged, and enjoy watching the workman. Often
the people attracted are the loafers of a town, and those who, having no
business of their own, would not be likely to bring business to the store. But
in cities where the streets are crowded, the open window may be considered
a distinct attraction to the casual observer and the general public.
The last three chapters are preparatory to the real work of decorating, and
should be read with care by the student of the art.
Many decorators of late have found a distinct advantage in leaving
shades up and dispensing with screens. They work in plain view of the
crowds that congregate to watch them. This would be embarrassing to the
beginner or the modest man, but its advantage lies in being an added
attraction for the store. People are often curious to know how a window
display is built up and arranged, and enjoy watching the workman. Often
the people attracted are the loafers of a town, and those who, having no
business of their own, would not be likely to bring business to the store. But
in cities where the streets are crowded, the open window may be considered
a distinct attraction to the casual observer and the general public.
The last three chapters are preparatory to the real work of decorating, and
should be read with care by the student of the art.
Page 34
CHAPTER IV.
FRAMEWORK.
The beginning of any work is always its most important period. Begin
right and you may succeed; begin wrong and you are certain to fail.
When a window display is conceived in the fertile brain of the artist, his
first work is to erect the framework for his creation. He must have
something to build upon. Many trimmers—even some experienced ones
who ought to know better—go to the wood pile when they wish to erect a
framework. I advise every one to carry on hand a stock of standard pieces
for frames. Almost any one who can handle a saw can make them himself,
but a carpenter may be employed where necessary. Not a great variety of
pieces are required, and the number of them depends on how many
windows you have to trim. But with a supply of the regulation standard
pieces you may construct an endless array of arches, pillars, shelving,
centerpieces, pedestals, etc.
The trimmer who is driven to attack the wood pile when he starts to make
a display is not only to be pitied, but is badly handicapped in his work. The
amount of time consumed in building each special fixture in your window
is detrimental to profitable trimming, and annoying to yourself and your
employer. A well equipped fixture room is a money maker, as well as a time
and labor saver.
The first system of standard pieces I will explain is that adapted and
invented by the veteran decorator, Charles W. Morton. It is very simple. In
many cases these fixtures for framework may be covered and trimmed in
your room, in sections, and afterwards taken to the window, where they are
easily put together. This is a wonderful assistance in making a rapid change.
FRAMEWORK.
The beginning of any work is always its most important period. Begin
right and you may succeed; begin wrong and you are certain to fail.
When a window display is conceived in the fertile brain of the artist, his
first work is to erect the framework for his creation. He must have
something to build upon. Many trimmers—even some experienced ones
who ought to know better—go to the wood pile when they wish to erect a
framework. I advise every one to carry on hand a stock of standard pieces
for frames. Almost any one who can handle a saw can make them himself,
but a carpenter may be employed where necessary. Not a great variety of
pieces are required, and the number of them depends on how many
windows you have to trim. But with a supply of the regulation standard
pieces you may construct an endless array of arches, pillars, shelving,
centerpieces, pedestals, etc.
The trimmer who is driven to attack the wood pile when he starts to make
a display is not only to be pitied, but is badly handicapped in his work. The
amount of time consumed in building each special fixture in your window
is detrimental to profitable trimming, and annoying to yourself and your
employer. A well equipped fixture room is a money maker, as well as a time
and labor saver.
The first system of standard pieces I will explain is that adapted and
invented by the veteran decorator, Charles W. Morton. It is very simple. In
many cases these fixtures for framework may be covered and trimmed in
your room, in sections, and afterwards taken to the window, where they are
easily put together. This is a wonderful assistance in making a rapid change.
Page 35
These standard pieces are mostly made of half inch wood, and are
covered with black cambric or painted. They are light in weight, strong and
durable.
Each piece represents a useful stand in itself, and there is no limit to the
variety of designs obtainable. The following is a brief description of the
pieces:
Nos. 1, 2 and 3 on the first illustration are pedestals (or boxes). The size
of smallest is one foot square (or a cube). The second size is one foot square
and two feet high. The largest size is one foot square and three feet high.
No. 4 is a circle, two feet six inches in diameter, and made of 1-inch
board.
No. 5 is a half circular stand, three feet high and one foot six inches in
diameter, and covered with heavy paper.
No. 6 is what I call a cap. It measures one foot square at small end, three
feet square at large end, and one foot six inches deep. It is a good fixture for
laces, embroideries or notions.
No. 7 is a 1-inch pine board, one foot wide and eight feet long, or any
length suitable for the window to be trimmed.
No. 8 is a round pillar, eight inches in diameter, and three feet six inches
high.
No. 9 is a cap, eight inches in diameter at bottom, twelve inches at top,
and ten inches high.
No. 10 is three half circles, each made one foot square, and boxed in, the
small one measuring three feet six inches in diameter (outside
measurement). The second one is five feet six inches in diameter, and the
largest half circle seven feet six inches in diameter.
No. 11 is a half circle box, one foot high and two feet in diameter. The
pyramid is one foot square at the base, and two feet high.
The second illustration shows a few devices, made of ½-inch wood, and
measure about three feet high, and will suggest themselves for showing
many lines, such as notions, jewelry, cutlery, hardware, etc.
The other illustrations give you a few examples of the many designs
obtainable from this modern combination fixture.
covered with black cambric or painted. They are light in weight, strong and
durable.
Each piece represents a useful stand in itself, and there is no limit to the
variety of designs obtainable. The following is a brief description of the
pieces:
Nos. 1, 2 and 3 on the first illustration are pedestals (or boxes). The size
of smallest is one foot square (or a cube). The second size is one foot square
and two feet high. The largest size is one foot square and three feet high.
No. 4 is a circle, two feet six inches in diameter, and made of 1-inch
board.
No. 5 is a half circular stand, three feet high and one foot six inches in
diameter, and covered with heavy paper.
No. 6 is what I call a cap. It measures one foot square at small end, three
feet square at large end, and one foot six inches deep. It is a good fixture for
laces, embroideries or notions.
No. 7 is a 1-inch pine board, one foot wide and eight feet long, or any
length suitable for the window to be trimmed.
No. 8 is a round pillar, eight inches in diameter, and three feet six inches
high.
No. 9 is a cap, eight inches in diameter at bottom, twelve inches at top,
and ten inches high.
No. 10 is three half circles, each made one foot square, and boxed in, the
small one measuring three feet six inches in diameter (outside
measurement). The second one is five feet six inches in diameter, and the
largest half circle seven feet six inches in diameter.
No. 11 is a half circle box, one foot high and two feet in diameter. The
pyramid is one foot square at the base, and two feet high.
The second illustration shows a few devices, made of ½-inch wood, and
measure about three feet high, and will suggest themselves for showing
many lines, such as notions, jewelry, cutlery, hardware, etc.
The other illustrations give you a few examples of the many designs
obtainable from this modern combination fixture.
Page 36
Another set of standard pieces which has been quite largely used and is
recommended by many decorators, is illustrated below.
The first illustration shows how to make pillars, stands, etc. They will
need little explanation, but I will mention, for example, that A is made from
two circular pieces of wood, 1, joined together by strips of wood, or lath.
These circular pieces are very useful. The cone, C, is made by connecting
the pieces 5 and 3 by strips or lath. D is a standard having 3 for its top. F is
a useful stand employing the pieces 1 to 5 connected by short standards.
STANDARD PIECES FOR FRAMEWORK—FIRST
ILLUSTRATION.
recommended by many decorators, is illustrated below.
The first illustration shows how to make pillars, stands, etc. They will
need little explanation, but I will mention, for example, that A is made from
two circular pieces of wood, 1, joined together by strips of wood, or lath.
These circular pieces are very useful. The cone, C, is made by connecting
the pieces 5 and 3 by strips or lath. D is a standard having 3 for its top. F is
a useful stand employing the pieces 1 to 5 connected by short standards.
STANDARD PIECES FOR FRAMEWORK—FIRST
ILLUSTRATION.
Page 37
STANDARD PIECES FOR FRAMEWORK—SECOND
ILLUSTRATION.
ILLUSTRATION.
Page 38
STANDARD PIECES FOR FRAMEWORK—THIRD
ILLUSTRATION.
ILLUSTRATION.
Page 39
One thing is important. Do not use nails larger than is necessary to hold
the structure together. Many novices spike their pieces together as firmly as
if they were to endure to the end of time, and the consequence is that many
pieces are broken and destroyed in taking the framework apart. Temporary
security is all that is required, and by the exercise of a little care the frames
will last for years.
The second illustration shows the use of circles for arches, domes, etc.,
which may be built into a bewildering variety of effects. The stock pieces
required are the full circle, A, the half circle, B, and the quarter circle, C.
These should be sawed from 1-inch lumber, in a variety of sizes, and in
connection with the uprights, for pillars, will enable you to make any sort of
arch or dome you may desire.
the structure together. Many novices spike their pieces together as firmly as
if they were to endure to the end of time, and the consequence is that many
pieces are broken and destroyed in taking the framework apart. Temporary
security is all that is required, and by the exercise of a little care the frames
will last for years.
The second illustration shows the use of circles for arches, domes, etc.,
which may be built into a bewildering variety of effects. The stock pieces
required are the full circle, A, the half circle, B, and the quarter circle, C.
These should be sawed from 1-inch lumber, in a variety of sizes, and in
connection with the uprights, for pillars, will enable you to make any sort of
arch or dome you may desire.
Page 40
The third illustration depicts the most useful centerpieces and fixtures
known in window trimming. The stairs, or shelves, may be taken down and
used in a variety of windows, and the same will apply to the other fixtures
shown.
All the frames described are best made of pine, as soft wood is easier to
tack or pin to. Provided they are perfect in form, they need not be well
finished, as they will be covered with puffings, pleatings and draperies.
These pieces may be added to by the preparation of smaller ones to be
used as shown in the fourth and fifth illustrations. These can be used in
almost endless variety and occasions will often arise when a corner or
section of your window will appear bare, and may be furnished with some
small, attractive design made from your stock pieces.
known in window trimming. The stairs, or shelves, may be taken down and
used in a variety of windows, and the same will apply to the other fixtures
shown.
All the frames described are best made of pine, as soft wood is easier to
tack or pin to. Provided they are perfect in form, they need not be well
finished, as they will be covered with puffings, pleatings and draperies.
These pieces may be added to by the preparation of smaller ones to be
used as shown in the fourth and fifth illustrations. These can be used in
almost endless variety and occasions will often arise when a corner or
section of your window will appear bare, and may be furnished with some
small, attractive design made from your stock pieces.
Page 41
However, the first set of fixtures described is recommended as the most
perfect and therefore the best for general use.
perfect and therefore the best for general use.
Page 42
CHAPTER V.
HARMONY OF COLORS.
After erecting the framework the decorator proceeds to cover it, in order
to complete his background. But before doing this the harmony of color
must be considered, as the real success of his window will depend upon the
good taste and arrangement of the colors employed.
No man need be frightened at facing this frequent bugbear to the novice:
—color harmony. Any one will readily understand it after reading this
chapter.
“What is color?” you ask.
Nothing but common daylight deprived of some of its wonderful
properties.
When this is understood the subject is robbed of its terrors, for we know
we are facing a natural effect, and nature is simplicity itself.
When light strikes any object, such as a blade of grass or leaf, the rays of
white light are separated or decomposed; part are absorbed by the grass or
leaf and the others reflected to the eye, causing the sensation of color; in
this case green, the grass or leaf having reflected the blue and yellow rays
and absorbed the red. To understand this thoroughly a little scientific
experiment will demonstrate clearly. Go into a dark room, shutters, doors,
etc., closed tight. Now make a very small hole through a shutter to the outer
daylight, when a fine pencil of light will penetrate the darkness. Into this
ray of light place a prism of glass, when the ray, after passing through the
prism, will be diverged and separated, showing the solar spectrum in all its
beauty.
The colors thus shown are the elementary colors of white light,
commonly called the “primary” colors. The red, blue, and yellow are the
HARMONY OF COLORS.
After erecting the framework the decorator proceeds to cover it, in order
to complete his background. But before doing this the harmony of color
must be considered, as the real success of his window will depend upon the
good taste and arrangement of the colors employed.
No man need be frightened at facing this frequent bugbear to the novice:
—color harmony. Any one will readily understand it after reading this
chapter.
“What is color?” you ask.
Nothing but common daylight deprived of some of its wonderful
properties.
When this is understood the subject is robbed of its terrors, for we know
we are facing a natural effect, and nature is simplicity itself.
When light strikes any object, such as a blade of grass or leaf, the rays of
white light are separated or decomposed; part are absorbed by the grass or
leaf and the others reflected to the eye, causing the sensation of color; in
this case green, the grass or leaf having reflected the blue and yellow rays
and absorbed the red. To understand this thoroughly a little scientific
experiment will demonstrate clearly. Go into a dark room, shutters, doors,
etc., closed tight. Now make a very small hole through a shutter to the outer
daylight, when a fine pencil of light will penetrate the darkness. Into this
ray of light place a prism of glass, when the ray, after passing through the
prism, will be diverged and separated, showing the solar spectrum in all its
beauty.
The colors thus shown are the elementary colors of white light,
commonly called the “primary” colors. The red, blue, and yellow are the
Page 43
most dominant in the spectrum, and in consequence always understood
when we speak of “primary” colors; the intermediate rays shade into the
various colors of the spectrum and are called “complimentary colors.” They
show all the tints of the rainbow, which is in fact a gigantic solar spectrum.
The blade of grass has appropriated the red rays of the spectrum (or light)
and leaves us only the blue and yellow, which, being reflected and blended,
give us the sensation of green instead of white.
Every color affects the eye (or optic nerve) with a different vibration,
which enables the optic nerve to inform the brain of the color. In this way
we get the sensation of color. Black is the absence of all color; that is to say,
it absorbs all the rays and returns none. White is the reflection of all the
rays, none being absorbed.
The “primary colors,” red, blue, and yellow, have their “secondary
colors,” which is the combination of any two primaries; as a mixture of blue
and red make purple, the complementary (or contrast) of yellow, blue and
yellow make green, which makes red the complementary or contrast.
Yellow and red make orange, the complementary of blue. The secondary
colors are therefore purple, green and orange.
The tertiary colors are those obtained by a mixture of all the primary
colors (one proportion of which produces black), making what are called
“broken tones.”
The “secondary colors,” produced as above, make the perfect contrast or
complementary colors of the primary set, and the “tertiary colors,” or
“broken tones,” produced as above, enable us to carry out harmony effects.
No harmony of color is perfect unless it contains all three primaries in
some proportion or other. Thus, green (blue and yellow) and red are correct,
having the three primaries in the composition. For simplicity I will not go
into shades, which are simply lighter tints of the primary colors; but I may
add that in harmony of color the color value or intensity of the shades must
be carefully noted, to be effective; that is, a brilliant orange (red and
yellow) will not be complementary to light blue, but would be correct with
blue of same intensity. All the innumerable shades or tones are produced
from the three primary colors, by reducing the strength of tint; that is,
making it lighter, and the tones are produced by admixture of black, etc., or,
rather, the admixture of the three primary colors, in different proportions,
when we speak of “primary” colors; the intermediate rays shade into the
various colors of the spectrum and are called “complimentary colors.” They
show all the tints of the rainbow, which is in fact a gigantic solar spectrum.
The blade of grass has appropriated the red rays of the spectrum (or light)
and leaves us only the blue and yellow, which, being reflected and blended,
give us the sensation of green instead of white.
Every color affects the eye (or optic nerve) with a different vibration,
which enables the optic nerve to inform the brain of the color. In this way
we get the sensation of color. Black is the absence of all color; that is to say,
it absorbs all the rays and returns none. White is the reflection of all the
rays, none being absorbed.
The “primary colors,” red, blue, and yellow, have their “secondary
colors,” which is the combination of any two primaries; as a mixture of blue
and red make purple, the complementary (or contrast) of yellow, blue and
yellow make green, which makes red the complementary or contrast.
Yellow and red make orange, the complementary of blue. The secondary
colors are therefore purple, green and orange.
The tertiary colors are those obtained by a mixture of all the primary
colors (one proportion of which produces black), making what are called
“broken tones.”
The “secondary colors,” produced as above, make the perfect contrast or
complementary colors of the primary set, and the “tertiary colors,” or
“broken tones,” produced as above, enable us to carry out harmony effects.
No harmony of color is perfect unless it contains all three primaries in
some proportion or other. Thus, green (blue and yellow) and red are correct,
having the three primaries in the composition. For simplicity I will not go
into shades, which are simply lighter tints of the primary colors; but I may
add that in harmony of color the color value or intensity of the shades must
be carefully noted, to be effective; that is, a brilliant orange (red and
yellow) will not be complementary to light blue, but would be correct with
blue of same intensity. All the innumerable shades or tones are produced
from the three primary colors, by reducing the strength of tint; that is,
making it lighter, and the tones are produced by admixture of black, etc., or,
rather, the admixture of the three primary colors, in different proportions,
Page 44
lowering the tone, and making lighter. Thus all the shades are made, each
having its proper complementary color or contrast.
All colors, when brought into close proximity, affect each other by
reflection or absorption, and the nearer they are in tone the more they will
suffer. The difference in tone should be considerable, or a neutral line of
black, white or gray placed between them; otherwise you have reds in
proximity to blue appearing yellow, the complementary of red and blue.
Red in proximity to green (its complementary) is purer and brighter. Red in
proximity to black becomes duller. Red in proximity to white appears
lighter (pink). Red in proximity to gray becomes brighter; so that the same
red will appear of different shades according to its arrangement with regard
to other colors adjacent. The same law governs the arrangement of all
colors. If red and white are placed in contact, the white becomes tinged with
the complementary of red (green), and the red appears deeper and brighter.
White placed beside a color strengthens its tone. Black dulls it. Black
surfaces appear faintly tinted with the complementary of the adjacent color,
because of its low reflective power.
Black and white are commonly said to be complementary to each other,
and to harmonize with all the other colors.
having its proper complementary color or contrast.
All colors, when brought into close proximity, affect each other by
reflection or absorption, and the nearer they are in tone the more they will
suffer. The difference in tone should be considerable, or a neutral line of
black, white or gray placed between them; otherwise you have reds in
proximity to blue appearing yellow, the complementary of red and blue.
Red in proximity to green (its complementary) is purer and brighter. Red in
proximity to black becomes duller. Red in proximity to white appears
lighter (pink). Red in proximity to gray becomes brighter; so that the same
red will appear of different shades according to its arrangement with regard
to other colors adjacent. The same law governs the arrangement of all
colors. If red and white are placed in contact, the white becomes tinged with
the complementary of red (green), and the red appears deeper and brighter.
White placed beside a color strengthens its tone. Black dulls it. Black
surfaces appear faintly tinted with the complementary of the adjacent color,
because of its low reflective power.
Black and white are commonly said to be complementary to each other,
and to harmonize with all the other colors.
Page 45
THE WINDOW.
Our first consideration is the background. White is too harsh for general
work, but is good when the window is so dark that it makes much glare and
reflection. In this case it will heighten the light, render the display more
distinct, and assist in avoiding reflections. Black (flat or gloss) painting of
the interior, or a black cloth background, is objectionable because it makes
the window a veritable “camera obscura” and reflects everything. It also
renders the colors of the goods dull or broken. Something between white
and black will therefore be found better, such as a warm French gray (if
painted, flat of course), not light enough to appear nearly white, but as
nearly “neutral” as possible. A background like this will brighten up most
colors to some extent, and will not interfere with any adjacent color. It also
assists in avoiding reflections and glare.
In the arrangement of your window there are two points to keep in mind,
the “near view,” which takes in only one window, or part of it, and the
“further view,” which will embrace the entire trim, making all the windows
as one. In the front part of the window take care of the harmony, or contrast,
and only use such colors as are not a light shade of compound color, such as
lavender, etc., which are easily faded. For the second row arrange it so that
when viewed over or between it and the first row, you get a proper contrast,
harmony or broken tone, that will act as a “neutral” and avoid “killing” the
three colors at once. The arrangement by contrast is usually the best and
easiest.
The “further view” should not have any startling color effect at one end,
and nothing to balance it at the other, but should have a similar effect of
harmony or color. When the center is of lower or broken tones, usually
esteemed neutral, or if there be three color effects, make them one of
harmony and two of contrast, or vice versa. Relieve them with neutral
colors, and add a touch of ribbon, flowers, etc., of the complementary
neutral, to arrest the eye a moment.
To decide the color of a fabric, study what colors it is composed of. Then
it becomes easy to find the complementary. For instance, a fabric of dull
green (broken tone) with an allover pattern of black, covering 25 per cent of
Our first consideration is the background. White is too harsh for general
work, but is good when the window is so dark that it makes much glare and
reflection. In this case it will heighten the light, render the display more
distinct, and assist in avoiding reflections. Black (flat or gloss) painting of
the interior, or a black cloth background, is objectionable because it makes
the window a veritable “camera obscura” and reflects everything. It also
renders the colors of the goods dull or broken. Something between white
and black will therefore be found better, such as a warm French gray (if
painted, flat of course), not light enough to appear nearly white, but as
nearly “neutral” as possible. A background like this will brighten up most
colors to some extent, and will not interfere with any adjacent color. It also
assists in avoiding reflections and glare.
In the arrangement of your window there are two points to keep in mind,
the “near view,” which takes in only one window, or part of it, and the
“further view,” which will embrace the entire trim, making all the windows
as one. In the front part of the window take care of the harmony, or contrast,
and only use such colors as are not a light shade of compound color, such as
lavender, etc., which are easily faded. For the second row arrange it so that
when viewed over or between it and the first row, you get a proper contrast,
harmony or broken tone, that will act as a “neutral” and avoid “killing” the
three colors at once. The arrangement by contrast is usually the best and
easiest.
The “further view” should not have any startling color effect at one end,
and nothing to balance it at the other, but should have a similar effect of
harmony or color. When the center is of lower or broken tones, usually
esteemed neutral, or if there be three color effects, make them one of
harmony and two of contrast, or vice versa. Relieve them with neutral
colors, and add a touch of ribbon, flowers, etc., of the complementary
neutral, to arrest the eye a moment.
To decide the color of a fabric, study what colors it is composed of. Then
it becomes easy to find the complementary. For instance, a fabric of dull
green (broken tone) with an allover pattern of black, covering 25 per cent of
Page 46
the surface will amount to very dull green; but if the black covers 75 per
cent of the surface, it will be a greenish black, although the green will
appear more prominent than it really is, the black being non-luminous, or a
poor reflector.
In light shades care must be taken to define the color, as pink, yellow or
rose cast, light blue, green or purple cast. Inattention to this will mar the
color effect, as the complementary selected will most likely be incorrect.
It is well always to remember that there are but three primary or
elementary colors (red, yellow and blue-green), and that there cannot be
harmony of color arrangement if either one is wanting. Also that the
distinction of harmony depends on the predominance of one, and the
subordination of the other two.
cent of the surface, it will be a greenish black, although the green will
appear more prominent than it really is, the black being non-luminous, or a
poor reflector.
In light shades care must be taken to define the color, as pink, yellow or
rose cast, light blue, green or purple cast. Inattention to this will mar the
color effect, as the complementary selected will most likely be incorrect.
It is well always to remember that there are but three primary or
elementary colors (red, yellow and blue-green), and that there cannot be
harmony of color arrangement if either one is wanting. Also that the
distinction of harmony depends on the predominance of one, and the
subordination of the other two.
Page 47
A COLOR CHART.
In order to be sure that your color combinations are harmonious, the
accompanying diagram of a “color scheme” will be a safe guide. Color
combinations are governed by set laws, and, as is the case with all other
natural laws, it is both foolish and disastrous to ignore them. The center of
the chart is white, for white harmonizes with any color. The most distinct
combinations are found by consulting the extremities of each straight line,
whether dotted or plain. But every dotted line will harmonize with every
other dotted line as well, and these are the combinations of strong colors.
The triangle connects the three basic colors, blue, red and yellow, which are
distinct contrasts. The other plain lines show the tints which harmonize
together, but not with strong colors. If ever in doubt as to a suitable
combination, consult the chart. By following the directions of its lines you
cannot fail to be right.
In order to be sure that your color combinations are harmonious, the
accompanying diagram of a “color scheme” will be a safe guide. Color
combinations are governed by set laws, and, as is the case with all other
natural laws, it is both foolish and disastrous to ignore them. The center of
the chart is white, for white harmonizes with any color. The most distinct
combinations are found by consulting the extremities of each straight line,
whether dotted or plain. But every dotted line will harmonize with every
other dotted line as well, and these are the combinations of strong colors.
The triangle connects the three basic colors, blue, red and yellow, which are
distinct contrasts. The other plain lines show the tints which harmonize
together, but not with strong colors. If ever in doubt as to a suitable
combination, consult the chart. By following the directions of its lines you
cannot fail to be right.
Page 48
MATCHING CHART.
The following color chart is used by some trimmers for matching colors.
As already explained, the modern window calls for a variety of colorings,
and it is in the matching of these colors, such as the compound shades,
drabs, buffs, sages, with their different hues, that considerable work and
patience is called for. With such colors as these a number of points are to be
considered before a definite conclusion can be obtained. Some of the
shades, for example, are very sensitive to the various qualities of daylight.
A dark, cloudy day, a sunny, bright day, a hazy day, etc., all have their effect
upon the colorings in the window design. There are other conditions which
come in to interfere with the proposed color adjustment of the window
trimmer.
Colors may appear so and so to the eye when placed in the design with
certain other colors. A blue setting, for instance, may match each other if
the combination includes several shades of blue. When the design is placed
in its place in the window, alongside of a yellow, for example, the yellow
offsets certain of the blue shades, producing tints of a yellowish green of
some of the blues, while blueish greens are developed in others. This, of
course, disorders the proposed color plan and the result is discouraging
unless it is known how to overcome or avoid such troubles. Furthermore,
certain colors which match by daylight are made quite the reverse as soon
as the electric light or the gas light is turned on in the window. All this is
perplexing to the window artist, but there are remedies. Use charts 1, 2 and
3. In the first are the standard color chart line, A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H.
These represent the color lines of the solar spectrum. Along the side of the
chart are figures 1, 2 and 3. The first indicates the absorption spectrum of
yellow color. By following the chart lines it will be seen that this yellow
absorbs violet and blue, while it transmits red, green and yellow. In 2 we
can see that the blue which this division represents absorbs orange red,
yellow green and yellow, and transmits blue, violet and part of the green.
Division 3 represents green, which results as a combination of the two
former divisions.
In Fig. 2 is a chart for representing the absorption of ruby glass and a
single green shade. In this it can be seen that division 1 involves
The following color chart is used by some trimmers for matching colors.
As already explained, the modern window calls for a variety of colorings,
and it is in the matching of these colors, such as the compound shades,
drabs, buffs, sages, with their different hues, that considerable work and
patience is called for. With such colors as these a number of points are to be
considered before a definite conclusion can be obtained. Some of the
shades, for example, are very sensitive to the various qualities of daylight.
A dark, cloudy day, a sunny, bright day, a hazy day, etc., all have their effect
upon the colorings in the window design. There are other conditions which
come in to interfere with the proposed color adjustment of the window
trimmer.
Colors may appear so and so to the eye when placed in the design with
certain other colors. A blue setting, for instance, may match each other if
the combination includes several shades of blue. When the design is placed
in its place in the window, alongside of a yellow, for example, the yellow
offsets certain of the blue shades, producing tints of a yellowish green of
some of the blues, while blueish greens are developed in others. This, of
course, disorders the proposed color plan and the result is discouraging
unless it is known how to overcome or avoid such troubles. Furthermore,
certain colors which match by daylight are made quite the reverse as soon
as the electric light or the gas light is turned on in the window. All this is
perplexing to the window artist, but there are remedies. Use charts 1, 2 and
3. In the first are the standard color chart line, A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H.
These represent the color lines of the solar spectrum. Along the side of the
chart are figures 1, 2 and 3. The first indicates the absorption spectrum of
yellow color. By following the chart lines it will be seen that this yellow
absorbs violet and blue, while it transmits red, green and yellow. In 2 we
can see that the blue which this division represents absorbs orange red,
yellow green and yellow, and transmits blue, violet and part of the green.
Division 3 represents green, which results as a combination of the two
former divisions.
In Fig. 2 is a chart for representing the absorption of ruby glass and a
single green shade. In this it can be seen that division 1 involves
Page 49
transmission of the red in A to the orange red in C, and the remaining colors
are absorbed. In 2 is an absorption of all the colors except green, yellow
green, blue and blue violet. In 3 is the result of combining the colors, in
which case this setting permits no rays to pass, resulting in full black or
darkness. In chart 3 is another plan for color setting in which 1 indicates the
absorption spectrum of yellow, 2 in which violet shows the absorption in
yellow and yellow green, 3 the compound of green rays with the absorption
of the remainder of the spectrum.
are absorbed. In 2 is an absorption of all the colors except green, yellow
green, blue and blue violet. In 3 is the result of combining the colors, in
which case this setting permits no rays to pass, resulting in full black or
darkness. In chart 3 is another plan for color setting in which 1 indicates the
absorption spectrum of yellow, 2 in which violet shows the absorption in
yellow and yellow green, 3 the compound of green rays with the absorption
of the remainder of the spectrum.
Page 50
Page 51
AN EYE FOR COLORS.
A window trimmer who has an eye for color is usually able to group
colors quite satisfactorily without the assistance of charts and regulations,
but there are very few who possess the qualification, although perhaps
many think they do. The reason that many suppose this is because the color
plan of their window is pleasing to their own eyes, though it may be
distasteful to others. Hence the necessity of applying to color charts, etc., to
avoid discords to the eye of the practiced colorist. If you seek to produce
white light from any of the color rays, add thereto the complementary ray. If
yellow be absorbed the resultant color will be violet. If blue and yellow rays
are absorbed the reflected ray will be red. If red is absorbed then we get
green. If yellow and red be absorbed the result will be a blue. In window
trimming two colors of striped goods placed in juxtaposition will always
heighten each other’s color effect. Suppose that two stripes of a certain
color fabric are arranged parallel with two stripes of another color it will be
seen that the color of the four stripes differ if we look at them from a certain
distance. This is because the coloring of the two inside stripes serve as
terms of comparison to judge the modifications of these two interior stripes
in their juxtaposition. For example, it will be found that red will be
modified, inclining to violet, and orange is modified inclining to yellow,
when the stripes are made up of red and orange. If we use a combination of
blue and violet in a window design we will find that the blue will be
modified to a greenish blue, and the violet to a reddish color. It is a good
idea to cut out some four-inch wide strips of fabric and experiment, before
going ahead with your color scheme.
A window trimmer who has an eye for color is usually able to group
colors quite satisfactorily without the assistance of charts and regulations,
but there are very few who possess the qualification, although perhaps
many think they do. The reason that many suppose this is because the color
plan of their window is pleasing to their own eyes, though it may be
distasteful to others. Hence the necessity of applying to color charts, etc., to
avoid discords to the eye of the practiced colorist. If you seek to produce
white light from any of the color rays, add thereto the complementary ray. If
yellow be absorbed the resultant color will be violet. If blue and yellow rays
are absorbed the reflected ray will be red. If red is absorbed then we get
green. If yellow and red be absorbed the result will be a blue. In window
trimming two colors of striped goods placed in juxtaposition will always
heighten each other’s color effect. Suppose that two stripes of a certain
color fabric are arranged parallel with two stripes of another color it will be
seen that the color of the four stripes differ if we look at them from a certain
distance. This is because the coloring of the two inside stripes serve as
terms of comparison to judge the modifications of these two interior stripes
in their juxtaposition. For example, it will be found that red will be
modified, inclining to violet, and orange is modified inclining to yellow,
when the stripes are made up of red and orange. If we use a combination of
blue and violet in a window design we will find that the blue will be
modified to a greenish blue, and the violet to a reddish color. It is a good
idea to cut out some four-inch wide strips of fabric and experiment, before
going ahead with your color scheme.
Page 52
CHAPTER VI.
MATERIAL FOR BACKGROUNDS.
Not less important than the framework is the background and the
decoration of your framework. Indeed, many trimmers regard the subject of
backgrounds as the most important in window trimming. There is a
distinction between framework and background, although the frame often
constitutes the backing of a portion of your window. Thus, a step, a table, or
anything that supports the goods, is a part of the framework. An arch,
puffed and pleated to make up your picture, is part of your background.
A background may be upholstered in any fabric from cheesecloth to
velvet, or it may be a painted scene, or an imitation of nature, or simply
covered with wall paper, or panelled to represent a room. It is the frame to
your picture, and all pictures cannot be framed alike.
Of fabrics, cheesecloth is most in vogue. It is pretty, easily worked, and
cheap. Whatever color or combination is selected, you must use to cover
your floor, your framework, and the backing wherever it is visible from the
front. It may be simply spread over your woodwork, or pleated, or puffed;
and the same material may be used for draperies where they are required.
The best effect is obtained by using light color or even plain white, and
edging with a darker color that is harmonious, or a darker shade of the same
color. White goods require a dark backing as a foil; dark goods of all kinds
require a light backing. Of course there are exceptions. Pure white goods
are effectively shown on a backing of cream or any other delicate tint.
Some people have said that cheesecloth is not appropriate for
backgrounds, and recommended richer fabrics. A few trimmers for large
and wealthy concerns have obtained permission to use expensive drapery in
the place of cheesecloth, and are covering their backgrounds with plushes,
raw silks, satins and upholstery goods. These make the windows appear
MATERIAL FOR BACKGROUNDS.
Not less important than the framework is the background and the
decoration of your framework. Indeed, many trimmers regard the subject of
backgrounds as the most important in window trimming. There is a
distinction between framework and background, although the frame often
constitutes the backing of a portion of your window. Thus, a step, a table, or
anything that supports the goods, is a part of the framework. An arch,
puffed and pleated to make up your picture, is part of your background.
A background may be upholstered in any fabric from cheesecloth to
velvet, or it may be a painted scene, or an imitation of nature, or simply
covered with wall paper, or panelled to represent a room. It is the frame to
your picture, and all pictures cannot be framed alike.
Of fabrics, cheesecloth is most in vogue. It is pretty, easily worked, and
cheap. Whatever color or combination is selected, you must use to cover
your floor, your framework, and the backing wherever it is visible from the
front. It may be simply spread over your woodwork, or pleated, or puffed;
and the same material may be used for draperies where they are required.
The best effect is obtained by using light color or even plain white, and
edging with a darker color that is harmonious, or a darker shade of the same
color. White goods require a dark backing as a foil; dark goods of all kinds
require a light backing. Of course there are exceptions. Pure white goods
are effectively shown on a backing of cream or any other delicate tint.
Some people have said that cheesecloth is not appropriate for
backgrounds, and recommended richer fabrics. A few trimmers for large
and wealthy concerns have obtained permission to use expensive drapery in
the place of cheesecloth, and are covering their backgrounds with plushes,
raw silks, satins and upholstery goods. These make the windows appear
Page 53
rich, but not especially attractive. They are stiff and unpliable and must
hang loosely in draping. The risk of loss in soiling will not allow of using
light colors, and the dark shades and figured goods soon become tame to
the spectators. They are not nearly so effective a foil to merchandise as
cheesecloth. Only the richest goods can be used with such backgrounds, for
ordinary goods would look very cheap by comparison.
It is true cheesecloth is a flimsy, cheap material, looking very coarse
upon close inspection, but it is an ideal cloth for decorations. It lends itself
to puffing, pleating and all modes of draping with great pliability. It is made
in every tint and color. It has a way of rendering itself unobtrusive while
serving as a capital foil for almost any grade of merchandise. And it is
cheap. Find any other material which has these qualifications, and trimmers
will readily adopt it. Many houses cannot afford more expensive material.
Cheesecloth has figured prominently in the evolution of show windows.
Had merchants been forced to adopt a more expensive material for
backgrounds and floor coverings, it is probable that many of them would
not be decorating their windows even to-day.
Then, its bright and varied colorings allow of many combinations and
perfect harmony. It makes a window attractive enough to stop pedestrians,
who, glancing at the display, unconsciously note that the goods on
exhibition are thrown prominently into the foreground, while the coloring
that made them pause has modestly retired, and serves only as a foil for the
articles of merchandise.
Jewelry, bric-a-brac and silverware assuredly need a richer background to
display them harmoniously; but cheesecloth is appropriate for nine-tenths of
the window trims throughout the country, and there is absolutely nothing to
take its place.
hang loosely in draping. The risk of loss in soiling will not allow of using
light colors, and the dark shades and figured goods soon become tame to
the spectators. They are not nearly so effective a foil to merchandise as
cheesecloth. Only the richest goods can be used with such backgrounds, for
ordinary goods would look very cheap by comparison.
It is true cheesecloth is a flimsy, cheap material, looking very coarse
upon close inspection, but it is an ideal cloth for decorations. It lends itself
to puffing, pleating and all modes of draping with great pliability. It is made
in every tint and color. It has a way of rendering itself unobtrusive while
serving as a capital foil for almost any grade of merchandise. And it is
cheap. Find any other material which has these qualifications, and trimmers
will readily adopt it. Many houses cannot afford more expensive material.
Cheesecloth has figured prominently in the evolution of show windows.
Had merchants been forced to adopt a more expensive material for
backgrounds and floor coverings, it is probable that many of them would
not be decorating their windows even to-day.
Then, its bright and varied colorings allow of many combinations and
perfect harmony. It makes a window attractive enough to stop pedestrians,
who, glancing at the display, unconsciously note that the goods on
exhibition are thrown prominently into the foreground, while the coloring
that made them pause has modestly retired, and serves only as a foil for the
articles of merchandise.
Jewelry, bric-a-brac and silverware assuredly need a richer background to
display them harmoniously; but cheesecloth is appropriate for nine-tenths of
the window trims throughout the country, and there is absolutely nothing to
take its place.
Page 54
FIREPROOF DECORATIONS.
Not infrequently we hear of a bad fire occasioned by draperies or
decorations catching from a lighted match or other similar cause, the
inflammable nature of the material used causing a rapid spread of flames
and consequent damage to property. Whether this occasions great loss of
life, as was the case at the great bazaar in Paris, or is a minor blaze, such as
often occurs in a window when a lighted gas jet approaches too near the
trimmings, such accidents are desirable to avoid.
Quite recently a method has been discovered of treating material used to
decorate halls, booths and windows, which absolutely precludes the
possibility of a blaze. The material is simply dipped into a solution of
tungstate of soda and allowed to dry. Bunting, cheesecloth and other
material so treated are slow burning when ignited, and never blaze up.
Therefore they are easily extinguished and cannot readily set fire to
woodwork or other substances. No hall or booth where people congregate
should be decorated without using this simple and effective precaution
against fire, and all loss in a show window may be avoided in like manner.
The solution does not injure the fabric.
Not infrequently we hear of a bad fire occasioned by draperies or
decorations catching from a lighted match or other similar cause, the
inflammable nature of the material used causing a rapid spread of flames
and consequent damage to property. Whether this occasions great loss of
life, as was the case at the great bazaar in Paris, or is a minor blaze, such as
often occurs in a window when a lighted gas jet approaches too near the
trimmings, such accidents are desirable to avoid.
Quite recently a method has been discovered of treating material used to
decorate halls, booths and windows, which absolutely precludes the
possibility of a blaze. The material is simply dipped into a solution of
tungstate of soda and allowed to dry. Bunting, cheesecloth and other
material so treated are slow burning when ignited, and never blaze up.
Therefore they are easily extinguished and cannot readily set fire to
woodwork or other substances. No hall or booth where people congregate
should be decorated without using this simple and effective precaution
against fire, and all loss in a show window may be avoided in like manner.
The solution does not injure the fabric.
Page 55
CHAPTER VII.
PLANNING A WINDOW.
There are two ways to plan a window. One is to draw on paper a diagram
of your framework and lay out your plan as carefully as an architect will
design a house. Another is to plan as you build, and gradually add to your
window until it is completely trimmed. Both ways are practiced by the best
trimmers, and each method has been defended by its votaries as the best.
At first thought it would seem best to make a plan of your window, but
sometimes it will not look as well when completed as the plan would seem
to indicate. And, again, if you build up a window without any forethought,
it is just as liable to be a disappointment as a success. Perhaps it is best to
have some plan formulated if only in your mind, and then work as closely
to it as your window and your material will allow. If you see a chance to
improve it as you work, you may easily do so. Often I have carefully
thought out a window, and, after fairly starting, changed its plan by degrees
until it was totally different from what I had first intended.
For a symmetrical window a centerpiece is always necessary. It may be
an arch, a pair of steps, a circular recess, or whatever you choose, but the
center is always the most important point of your trim. Good windows are
sometimes made by building out the sides uniformly and drawing them
toward the center, but it requires much skill to do this successfully, and even
then you cannot ignore the center, where the eye of the observer rests first
and most frequently. This is the reason a small window is often as effective
as a large one. A large window can, of course, show more goods and more
detail, but all this is accessory to the centerpiece, and the main idea of any
big window can always be reproduced in a smaller one by leaving out some
of the details and accessories, and, perhaps, reducing the size of the
centerpiece. Circles or sections of circles are best for frameworks, as
PLANNING A WINDOW.
There are two ways to plan a window. One is to draw on paper a diagram
of your framework and lay out your plan as carefully as an architect will
design a house. Another is to plan as you build, and gradually add to your
window until it is completely trimmed. Both ways are practiced by the best
trimmers, and each method has been defended by its votaries as the best.
At first thought it would seem best to make a plan of your window, but
sometimes it will not look as well when completed as the plan would seem
to indicate. And, again, if you build up a window without any forethought,
it is just as liable to be a disappointment as a success. Perhaps it is best to
have some plan formulated if only in your mind, and then work as closely
to it as your window and your material will allow. If you see a chance to
improve it as you work, you may easily do so. Often I have carefully
thought out a window, and, after fairly starting, changed its plan by degrees
until it was totally different from what I had first intended.
For a symmetrical window a centerpiece is always necessary. It may be
an arch, a pair of steps, a circular recess, or whatever you choose, but the
center is always the most important point of your trim. Good windows are
sometimes made by building out the sides uniformly and drawing them
toward the center, but it requires much skill to do this successfully, and even
then you cannot ignore the center, where the eye of the observer rests first
and most frequently. This is the reason a small window is often as effective
as a large one. A large window can, of course, show more goods and more
detail, but all this is accessory to the centerpiece, and the main idea of any
big window can always be reproduced in a smaller one by leaving out some
of the details and accessories, and, perhaps, reducing the size of the
centerpiece. Circles or sections of circles are best for frameworks, as
Page 56
nothing is so graceful as a circle. Squares, triangles, etc., are stiff as
compared to circles, and are difficult to trim. Even steps, or series of
shelving, are best made in circular form. Pillars are useful in many ways.
They support arches or platforms, and may be used independently for many
lines of goods.
Aim to have the heaviest part of your trim in the center. The extreme
sides, or ends, of your window may be next heaviest or fullest. Between the
center and the ends the trim should be lightest; but this depends
considerably on the shape of your window and the character of the trim. If
you have no judgment don’t attempt to trim windows. Aside from an artistic
eye and deft workmanship the only other requisite of a successful trimmer
is common sense.
Do not place your trim too near the window pane, as it destroys the effect
of the best display. Unless goods are very small indeed they will look better
the farther they are removed from the pane. The floor space in front of the
main trim may always be utilized to good advantage.
And, speaking of floors, I am not in favor of what are called “floor trims”
in any line of merchandise. They do not attract one unless he deliberately
stops to gaze into a window, and few people do that in this busy age. Raise
your trim to the center of the window, even if it is composed of small wares,
and then it will arrest the gaze of the passerby.
The suggestions I have offered are of necessity general in their scope,
and I advise you to study all the good windows you may see. Don’t be
content to copy them, however, but improve upon them. Some other man’s
idea will frequently give you an idea of your own that is vastly better.
Originality alone does not always win. It is better to copy a good window
than to originate a poor one. And to originate a good window is better yet.
Where the window dresser is required as a salesman during the day, the
decorating is done late in the evening, when a screen is not at all necessary.
compared to circles, and are difficult to trim. Even steps, or series of
shelving, are best made in circular form. Pillars are useful in many ways.
They support arches or platforms, and may be used independently for many
lines of goods.
Aim to have the heaviest part of your trim in the center. The extreme
sides, or ends, of your window may be next heaviest or fullest. Between the
center and the ends the trim should be lightest; but this depends
considerably on the shape of your window and the character of the trim. If
you have no judgment don’t attempt to trim windows. Aside from an artistic
eye and deft workmanship the only other requisite of a successful trimmer
is common sense.
Do not place your trim too near the window pane, as it destroys the effect
of the best display. Unless goods are very small indeed they will look better
the farther they are removed from the pane. The floor space in front of the
main trim may always be utilized to good advantage.
And, speaking of floors, I am not in favor of what are called “floor trims”
in any line of merchandise. They do not attract one unless he deliberately
stops to gaze into a window, and few people do that in this busy age. Raise
your trim to the center of the window, even if it is composed of small wares,
and then it will arrest the gaze of the passerby.
The suggestions I have offered are of necessity general in their scope,
and I advise you to study all the good windows you may see. Don’t be
content to copy them, however, but improve upon them. Some other man’s
idea will frequently give you an idea of your own that is vastly better.
Originality alone does not always win. It is better to copy a good window
than to originate a poor one. And to originate a good window is better yet.
Where the window dresser is required as a salesman during the day, the
decorating is done late in the evening, when a screen is not at all necessary.
Page 57
CHAPTER VIII.
SHOW WINDOW UPHOLSTERY.
HOW TO DRAPE.
Unless a window dresser is thoroughly conversant with the art of draping
he will not be recognized as accomplished. Yet there are many professional
trimmers who, it must be admitted, create wonders in their line while
unable to put up an effective drape. This statement may be denied by many
trimmers, and it surely sounds rather strange. However, I wish to argue on
this subject and shall at the same time endeavor to give those not fully
posted on the knack of draping some practical hints and suggestions.
If a man in a smaller town who takes care of the show windows is not
acquainted with this branch of trimming, you need not feel surprised, as he
has little or no chance to see and learn. It is naturally easier for him to learn
pleating, puffing, and to make his wooden fixtures, than to put up an artistic
drape, simply because he can acquire great ability and skill in these lines of
work without being instructed, while many men will never learn how to
drape until they are shown how to do it.
Draping is the foundation of the art of window trimming.
There is no window in which some kind of a drape could not be applied
to good advantage. It gives the window an artistic and pleasing effect and is
always appropriate. Draping is as old as the history of decorating itself, and
it will never become old fashioned.
While the prettiest and most artistic effects are produced by draping, it is
simple in itself, and, as in some tricks, “easy if you know how.”
SHOW WINDOW UPHOLSTERY.
HOW TO DRAPE.
Unless a window dresser is thoroughly conversant with the art of draping
he will not be recognized as accomplished. Yet there are many professional
trimmers who, it must be admitted, create wonders in their line while
unable to put up an effective drape. This statement may be denied by many
trimmers, and it surely sounds rather strange. However, I wish to argue on
this subject and shall at the same time endeavor to give those not fully
posted on the knack of draping some practical hints and suggestions.
If a man in a smaller town who takes care of the show windows is not
acquainted with this branch of trimming, you need not feel surprised, as he
has little or no chance to see and learn. It is naturally easier for him to learn
pleating, puffing, and to make his wooden fixtures, than to put up an artistic
drape, simply because he can acquire great ability and skill in these lines of
work without being instructed, while many men will never learn how to
drape until they are shown how to do it.
Draping is the foundation of the art of window trimming.
There is no window in which some kind of a drape could not be applied
to good advantage. It gives the window an artistic and pleasing effect and is
always appropriate. Draping is as old as the history of decorating itself, and
it will never become old fashioned.
While the prettiest and most artistic effects are produced by draping, it is
simple in itself, and, as in some tricks, “easy if you know how.”
Page 58
PLAIN FESTOON DRAPERY.
One edge of the fabric is first pinned along the line to be draped, the
distance being spaced equally, and it is an advantage to have little wooden
spindles projecting a few inches, where each rosette would come, so that
the material hangs clear of the wall instead of flat against it. Whatever the
distance is between the pins, two or three times the same length of cloth
should be allowed to make the festoon. About eight or ten inches below the
pin the material is tied together tightly with a piece of string, the surplus
material thus gathered together being for the purpose of forming the rosette.
Removing the pin, the cloth is lifted up and the pin inserted at the same
place again, but in such a way as to hold the fabric just where the knot was
tied. Tacks may be more easily managed than pins. The rosette finally
almost forms itself, as the bunch of surplus fabric is simply turned inside
out, and pulled or patted into shape. The process is quite simple, and should
be clearly understood by an inspection of the drawing, which shows at one
end the fabric pinned up; the next loop has the string tied around it, and the
third is finished with a neat rosette, the folds of the fabric hanging in a
graceful cascade.
Quite recently a drapery hook has been invented which forms the rosettes
automatically, thus simplifying the above process.
One edge of the fabric is first pinned along the line to be draped, the
distance being spaced equally, and it is an advantage to have little wooden
spindles projecting a few inches, where each rosette would come, so that
the material hangs clear of the wall instead of flat against it. Whatever the
distance is between the pins, two or three times the same length of cloth
should be allowed to make the festoon. About eight or ten inches below the
pin the material is tied together tightly with a piece of string, the surplus
material thus gathered together being for the purpose of forming the rosette.
Removing the pin, the cloth is lifted up and the pin inserted at the same
place again, but in such a way as to hold the fabric just where the knot was
tied. Tacks may be more easily managed than pins. The rosette finally
almost forms itself, as the bunch of surplus fabric is simply turned inside
out, and pulled or patted into shape. The process is quite simple, and should
be clearly understood by an inspection of the drawing, which shows at one
end the fabric pinned up; the next loop has the string tied around it, and the
third is finished with a neat rosette, the folds of the fabric hanging in a
graceful cascade.
Quite recently a drapery hook has been invented which forms the rosettes
automatically, thus simplifying the above process.
Page 59
COMBINATION DRAPERY.
The drape shown in the first illustration consists of cheesecloth and is
constructed in the following way: Take a thin bendable strip of wood,
perhaps ¼ to ⅛ by 1½ inch, fix the lengths according to the size of your
window, puff it with cheesecloth, bend it into the shape of a semi-circle, and
place it in the center of your window. You may place it horizontally,
vertically or slanting, to suit your fancy. If your window measures 3 yards,
take from 9 to 12 yards of cheesecloth and allow 1 to 2 yards extra on each
side to hang down. The festoons as shown in the sketch require about 3½
times as much cloth as the distance from one rosette to the next one. If you
desire to drape deeper, allow about four times as much cloth instead of 3 or
3½ times as much for the festoons. Take the piece of cloth, divide it in two
equal parts and pin it up at the middle by the edge, on the center of the
semi-circle. After this form the festoons one after the other, one to right and
one to left. The rosettes are made in this manner: After the cloth is pinned
up and divided as indicated, take hold of it at about one foot below the pins,
fold it into many pleats, each about 1½ inch wide, lift the cloth up to the pin
and drive a second pin through the pleats, thus pinning it against the
background. This leaves a bunch of cloth for the rosette, which you turn
inside out, pull it apart and form it into the shape of a rose. After you have
made the second rosette the festoon has formed itself almost to perfection,
and if not your fingers must help out and complete the process by pulling
and pushing the folds into proper shape, which is then easily done. The
other part of the drape in our first sketch is like the one No. 3, and will be
treated later. The sections No. 1a and No. 1b are made of separate pieces of
cloth thrown over a short piece of curtain pole, which is projected about a
foot from the background. These sections are more adaptable to silk drapery
and require a square piece of very wide cloth, not narrower than 36 inches.
To construct No. 1a this piece of cloth is laid upon the counter in diamond
shape—like a napkin—and the cloth turned over from either end into wide
pleats to and fro until the extreme points are thus folded. No. 1b is the same
with the only difference that the diamond shaped piece of cloth is folded or
cut into triangle shape and folded only from one side. These pieces, thus
prepared, are folded again in the middle and thrown over the fixture,
The drape shown in the first illustration consists of cheesecloth and is
constructed in the following way: Take a thin bendable strip of wood,
perhaps ¼ to ⅛ by 1½ inch, fix the lengths according to the size of your
window, puff it with cheesecloth, bend it into the shape of a semi-circle, and
place it in the center of your window. You may place it horizontally,
vertically or slanting, to suit your fancy. If your window measures 3 yards,
take from 9 to 12 yards of cheesecloth and allow 1 to 2 yards extra on each
side to hang down. The festoons as shown in the sketch require about 3½
times as much cloth as the distance from one rosette to the next one. If you
desire to drape deeper, allow about four times as much cloth instead of 3 or
3½ times as much for the festoons. Take the piece of cloth, divide it in two
equal parts and pin it up at the middle by the edge, on the center of the
semi-circle. After this form the festoons one after the other, one to right and
one to left. The rosettes are made in this manner: After the cloth is pinned
up and divided as indicated, take hold of it at about one foot below the pins,
fold it into many pleats, each about 1½ inch wide, lift the cloth up to the pin
and drive a second pin through the pleats, thus pinning it against the
background. This leaves a bunch of cloth for the rosette, which you turn
inside out, pull it apart and form it into the shape of a rose. After you have
made the second rosette the festoon has formed itself almost to perfection,
and if not your fingers must help out and complete the process by pulling
and pushing the folds into proper shape, which is then easily done. The
other part of the drape in our first sketch is like the one No. 3, and will be
treated later. The sections No. 1a and No. 1b are made of separate pieces of
cloth thrown over a short piece of curtain pole, which is projected about a
foot from the background. These sections are more adaptable to silk drapery
and require a square piece of very wide cloth, not narrower than 36 inches.
To construct No. 1a this piece of cloth is laid upon the counter in diamond
shape—like a napkin—and the cloth turned over from either end into wide
pleats to and fro until the extreme points are thus folded. No. 1b is the same
with the only difference that the diamond shaped piece of cloth is folded or
cut into triangle shape and folded only from one side. These pieces, thus
prepared, are folded again in the middle and thrown over the fixture,
Page 60
showing only one-half of their entire length. If you wish to have them reach
down lower take a longer piece of cloth, cut the ends into diamond or
triangle shape and proceed the same way. The effect of this style of draping
is greatly increased by trimming the edges with tassels or fringes.
Drape No. 2 is one of the most effective, and consists of two pieces of
cheesecloth, silkaline or light silk. Two contrasting but harmonizing colors
are very desirable. It is the plain festoon and rosette drape projected from
the wall by heavy knitting needles. These you drive in first and start with
pinning up your cloth at one end (right end first) and continue with it until
the left end is reached. When commencing with the second bolt of cloth do
not unroll any more of it at the time than necessary to push the bolt
alternately through the loops of the first piece. After you have thus covered
your background, proceed to form the rosettes; pull, push and pat the folds
of the drape into proper shape and you have produced a pretty and artistic
effect.
Drape No. 3 can only be constructed with heavy plush-velour or rich
drapery silk or any goods with two right sides—as both sides are shown—
unless you cut the goods. It consists, like No. 2, of two pieces, and an
down lower take a longer piece of cloth, cut the ends into diamond or
triangle shape and proceed the same way. The effect of this style of draping
is greatly increased by trimming the edges with tassels or fringes.
Drape No. 2 is one of the most effective, and consists of two pieces of
cheesecloth, silkaline or light silk. Two contrasting but harmonizing colors
are very desirable. It is the plain festoon and rosette drape projected from
the wall by heavy knitting needles. These you drive in first and start with
pinning up your cloth at one end (right end first) and continue with it until
the left end is reached. When commencing with the second bolt of cloth do
not unroll any more of it at the time than necessary to push the bolt
alternately through the loops of the first piece. After you have thus covered
your background, proceed to form the rosettes; pull, push and pat the folds
of the drape into proper shape and you have produced a pretty and artistic
effect.
Drape No. 3 can only be constructed with heavy plush-velour or rich
drapery silk or any goods with two right sides—as both sides are shown—
unless you cut the goods. It consists, like No. 2, of two pieces, and an
Page 61
endless variety of different designs may be formed with this style of
drapery. The sections No. 1a and No. 1b are very appropriate with this
drape, and separate rosettes, heavy silk cords, tassels and fringes will
greatly enrich it. To put up this drape requires more skill and taste than the
former two, as, unless it is executed to perfection it is unattractive. Throw
your goods over a curtain pole projected from the background and let the
first end drop down to the floor. Then fold the goods carefully into about 4
to 7 folds and form the loops as shown in illustration without ever letting
the folds become uneven or irregular, something which is more difficult to
avoid than the sketch exposes.
All in all, draping is easily learned, and no ambitious amateur will rest
until he has acquired full ability to put up an artistic drape.
drapery. The sections No. 1a and No. 1b are very appropriate with this
drape, and separate rosettes, heavy silk cords, tassels and fringes will
greatly enrich it. To put up this drape requires more skill and taste than the
former two, as, unless it is executed to perfection it is unattractive. Throw
your goods over a curtain pole projected from the background and let the
first end drop down to the floor. Then fold the goods carefully into about 4
to 7 folds and form the loops as shown in illustration without ever letting
the folds become uneven or irregular, something which is more difficult to
avoid than the sketch exposes.
All in all, draping is easily learned, and no ambitious amateur will rest
until he has acquired full ability to put up an artistic drape.
Page 62
HOW TO PUFF.
It will take about four times the length and width of cloth to puff any
given space. If your background is 12 feet long and 3 feet wide it will
require four strips each a yard wide and 48 feet long. Very coarse puffing
may be made by using as little as three times the amount of cloth that will
cover the space, but for puffing such as is shown in our illustration four
times the amount is required.
There are two ways to puff. For large spaces it is quicker and cheaper to
cover the backing with bookbinder’s paste, and puff upon that. Always
begin at the left-hand upper corner. Turn the edge of your cloth, to start with
for, raw edges always look badly. Support the cloth with your right hand,
and with the left spread out your thumb and fingers and claw the cloth
together into an irregular puffed effect. Do not be too particular about each
handful—the total effect will be all right. Work quickly and your puffing
will be more uniform than when done cautiously and slowly.
It will take about four times the length and width of cloth to puff any
given space. If your background is 12 feet long and 3 feet wide it will
require four strips each a yard wide and 48 feet long. Very coarse puffing
may be made by using as little as three times the amount of cloth that will
cover the space, but for puffing such as is shown in our illustration four
times the amount is required.
There are two ways to puff. For large spaces it is quicker and cheaper to
cover the backing with bookbinder’s paste, and puff upon that. Always
begin at the left-hand upper corner. Turn the edge of your cloth, to start with
for, raw edges always look badly. Support the cloth with your right hand,
and with the left spread out your thumb and fingers and claw the cloth
together into an irregular puffed effect. Do not be too particular about each
handful—the total effect will be all right. Work quickly and your puffing
will be more uniform than when done cautiously and slowly.
Page 63
If you are not covering a very large space it is best to pin your puffing.
Start the same as directed for pasted puffing. Fasten a small pincushion,
well covered with pins, to your vest, and use a small upholsterer’s hammer
to tack with. Keep the hammer in your right hand. Push up the cloth and pin
it, driving the pin in lightly with your hammer. Be sure to puff close enough
to hide the pins.
Start the same as directed for pasted puffing. Fasten a small pincushion,
well covered with pins, to your vest, and use a small upholsterer’s hammer
to tack with. Keep the hammer in your right hand. Push up the cloth and pin
it, driving the pin in lightly with your hammer. Be sure to puff close enough
to hide the pins.
Page 64
PUFFING FOR HEADINGS AND ORNAMENTAL DESIGNS.
First take cloth or bunting, fold into 9-inch strips, fasten end to wall or
counter by small wire nail (with head filed off and pointed), take other end,
pull tight and fasten at first; next take sharp knife or scissors (knife
preferable) and cut along folds to end. (This will give you a straight, clean
edge.) Take 9-inch strips, pleat into small pleats and fasten as in beginning,
step back eight or ten feet, place pin into pleats, then start at beginning or
end and pin every five or six inches apart and so on full length of cloth.
This may be made day previous to using in window. Now to apply it to
design, start at right hand corner and tack pins every three inches apart, or
according to size of puffs desired, continue until all is on, then start at
beginning and pull out puffs. When completed you will find that your puffs
are even and of a uniform size, and the time taken will be a great deal less
than anticipated.
This puffing can be used on every shaped design imaginable and with
very best of results.
First take cloth or bunting, fold into 9-inch strips, fasten end to wall or
counter by small wire nail (with head filed off and pointed), take other end,
pull tight and fasten at first; next take sharp knife or scissors (knife
preferable) and cut along folds to end. (This will give you a straight, clean
edge.) Take 9-inch strips, pleat into small pleats and fasten as in beginning,
step back eight or ten feet, place pin into pleats, then start at beginning or
end and pin every five or six inches apart and so on full length of cloth.
This may be made day previous to using in window. Now to apply it to
design, start at right hand corner and tack pins every three inches apart, or
according to size of puffs desired, continue until all is on, then start at
beginning and pull out puffs. When completed you will find that your puffs
are even and of a uniform size, and the time taken will be a great deal less
than anticipated.
This puffing can be used on every shaped design imaginable and with
very best of results.
Page 65
THE SHOGRAN PUFFING.
This wonderfully popular and useful puffing is named after its inventor,
Leonard Shogran.
I feel confident the usefulness and labor saving qualities of this idea,
together with the neat and artistic effect which can be obtained by its use,
will be appreciated by all my readers. In connection herewith I wish to
state, that the value and usefulness of this decorating device is becoming so
pronounced that many decorators have begun to use it almost exclusively to
give a finished effect to their decorations, where cheesecloth is used. The
reason of this popularity is no doubt due to the fact that with it a display can
be beautifully finished in one-tenth the time consumed in puffing the old
way.
This puffing is the result of a great deal of scheming as to how to lessen
the time and labor in finishing up a job of cheesecloth work. It is generally
done by taking the cheesecloth loosely in the hand and pinning or tacking it
in position, representing small rosettes, the tiresome and tedious operation
of which every window trimmer will admit.
This wonderfully popular and useful puffing is named after its inventor,
Leonard Shogran.
I feel confident the usefulness and labor saving qualities of this idea,
together with the neat and artistic effect which can be obtained by its use,
will be appreciated by all my readers. In connection herewith I wish to
state, that the value and usefulness of this decorating device is becoming so
pronounced that many decorators have begun to use it almost exclusively to
give a finished effect to their decorations, where cheesecloth is used. The
reason of this popularity is no doubt due to the fact that with it a display can
be beautifully finished in one-tenth the time consumed in puffing the old
way.
This puffing is the result of a great deal of scheming as to how to lessen
the time and labor in finishing up a job of cheesecloth work. It is generally
done by taking the cheesecloth loosely in the hand and pinning or tacking it
in position, representing small rosettes, the tiresome and tedious operation
of which every window trimmer will admit.
Page 66
I have used this puffing with telling effect in building booths and floats
and decorating halls, etc. In short, it has become an indispensable article
with me, as well as all who have learned to use it.
In preparing this puffing, tear a length of ten-cent cheesecloth into eight
strips or, if wider puffing is desired, tear it into six strips, according to width
wanted. Sew them into tubes, or what I would call long sleeves, and turn
them on a thin stick or rod, so the ragged edges will be on the inside. Then
full them over a strip of muslin about one and one-half inches wide, and
thus the article is made.
and decorating halls, etc. In short, it has become an indispensable article
with me, as well as all who have learned to use it.
In preparing this puffing, tear a length of ten-cent cheesecloth into eight
strips or, if wider puffing is desired, tear it into six strips, according to width
wanted. Sew them into tubes, or what I would call long sleeves, and turn
them on a thin stick or rod, so the ragged edges will be on the inside. Then
full them over a strip of muslin about one and one-half inches wide, and
thus the article is made.
Page 67
If you wish to use it in covering the ragged edge of some pleated work,
where tacks and pins are usually in plain view, fasten one end of the muslin
strip at a point where you intend to begin, then draw the puffing back about
two feet from where you fastened the muslin; then we draw the puffing over
it nicely, not too full, and fasten the puffed part in place; next, draw the
surplus puffing back another two feet, and repeat the operation; and so on
until finished. An illustration of this will be found in the accompanying
sketches. Should the strip of muslin prove too short, pin another to it, and
draw the puffing over. The sketches will give an idea of how easily it can be
draped and festooned, or worked into any artistic scroll or design the
inventive mind of a decorator may dictate.
Decorators who try this idea will be surprised to see how quickly the
goods can be made and applied. The seam is sewn very rapidly on a sewing
machine, and it is a pleasure to work with this ever ready and very pliable
material.
where tacks and pins are usually in plain view, fasten one end of the muslin
strip at a point where you intend to begin, then draw the puffing back about
two feet from where you fastened the muslin; then we draw the puffing over
it nicely, not too full, and fasten the puffed part in place; next, draw the
surplus puffing back another two feet, and repeat the operation; and so on
until finished. An illustration of this will be found in the accompanying
sketches. Should the strip of muslin prove too short, pin another to it, and
draw the puffing over. The sketches will give an idea of how easily it can be
draped and festooned, or worked into any artistic scroll or design the
inventive mind of a decorator may dictate.
Decorators who try this idea will be surprised to see how quickly the
goods can be made and applied. The seam is sewn very rapidly on a sewing
machine, and it is a pleasure to work with this ever ready and very pliable
material.
Page 68
EDGES.
Pleated backgrounds with puffed edges are very popular. To puff an edge
use about one-third or one-half the width of your material, and puff and pin
as before directed, taking care to turn under all the raw edges, or better yet,
use the Shogran puffing.
There is upon the market a prepared puffing of colored and white
cheesecloth, sewn upon strips of heavy paper. It is sold at a small advance
over the cost of raw material. When you wish to put in a window in a hurry
this prepared puffing is valuable; but I advise everyone to learn the art of
puffing, for only by being able to do all the detail work yourself can you
become a successful trimmer, and wholly independent of the supply houses.
Pleated backgrounds with puffed edges are very popular. To puff an edge
use about one-third or one-half the width of your material, and puff and pin
as before directed, taking care to turn under all the raw edges, or better yet,
use the Shogran puffing.
There is upon the market a prepared puffing of colored and white
cheesecloth, sewn upon strips of heavy paper. It is sold at a small advance
over the cost of raw material. When you wish to put in a window in a hurry
this prepared puffing is valuable; but I advise everyone to learn the art of
puffing, for only by being able to do all the detail work yourself can you
become a successful trimmer, and wholly independent of the supply houses.
Page 69
TO MAKE SUNBURSTS.
A “Sunburst” is the effect created by a form of pleating radiating in all
directions from a central point.
Sunbursts, while they look difficult to make, are comparatively easy. It
matters not what shape you wish to construct, whether round or square, the
system is always the same. First measure your outside edge of frame, then
cut off your strips of cheesecloth the different lengths required, pleat in
center of them all and tie firmly with string, nailing them to the center of
the frame. Then stretch them to the outer edge of the frame.
A “Sunburst” is the effect created by a form of pleating radiating in all
directions from a central point.
Sunbursts, while they look difficult to make, are comparatively easy. It
matters not what shape you wish to construct, whether round or square, the
system is always the same. First measure your outside edge of frame, then
cut off your strips of cheesecloth the different lengths required, pleat in
center of them all and tie firmly with string, nailing them to the center of
the frame. Then stretch them to the outer edge of the frame.
Page 70
SMOCKING.
One of the prettiest effects in backgrounds is made by “smocking,” or
catching the material into little squares, as is shown in the illustration. I
have used this method in many windows, and always with good success.
For paneling, pillars, etc., it will be found very desirable and attractive.
First cut your goods one-fifth larger than the space you wish to cover,
sewing breadths neatly together. Then lay the cloth in even folds, and on
each fold make dots with colored chalk or pencil, to show where the
squares are to be caught up. These squares show plainly in the picture. They
should be caught together with a needle and thread of a color to match the
cloth. If the work is neatly done it will more than repay you for your
trouble; and, indeed, once you have caught the knack of doing it, you will
find it easy and quick work. So little material is used that it is the least
expensive of any fancy background. I generally use bleached muslin, but
the light shades of bunting or surah silk are equally adaptable.
One of the prettiest effects in backgrounds is made by “smocking,” or
catching the material into little squares, as is shown in the illustration. I
have used this method in many windows, and always with good success.
For paneling, pillars, etc., it will be found very desirable and attractive.
First cut your goods one-fifth larger than the space you wish to cover,
sewing breadths neatly together. Then lay the cloth in even folds, and on
each fold make dots with colored chalk or pencil, to show where the
squares are to be caught up. These squares show plainly in the picture. They
should be caught together with a needle and thread of a color to match the
cloth. If the work is neatly done it will more than repay you for your
trouble; and, indeed, once you have caught the knack of doing it, you will
find it easy and quick work. So little material is used that it is the least
expensive of any fancy background. I generally use bleached muslin, but
the light shades of bunting or surah silk are equally adaptable.
Page 71
Page 72
HOW TO PLEAT.
Pleating is more of a trick than it appears to the uninitiated. Good
pleating is very beautiful, but poor pleating is worse than none at all. The
secret of good pleating is uniformity.
I will acknowledge that pleating was one of the most difficult things for
me to learn; but I finally invented a little scheme that assisted me
wonderfully.
It was nothing more or less than a clothespin, but it accomplished the
work accurately. Start at the left-hand upper corner, first turning under the
raw edge. Then place the slot of the clothespin over the edge and turn it half
around to the right. Place your finger against the fold thus made, pull out
your clothespin and tack or pin in place. Move your clothespin a given
distance to the right, turn again and pin as before. The pleating will be
absolutely uniform. In single pleating the folds are all one way; box
pleating is made by turning first to the right, then to the left, as in
illustration.
Pleating is more of a trick than it appears to the uninitiated. Good
pleating is very beautiful, but poor pleating is worse than none at all. The
secret of good pleating is uniformity.
I will acknowledge that pleating was one of the most difficult things for
me to learn; but I finally invented a little scheme that assisted me
wonderfully.
It was nothing more or less than a clothespin, but it accomplished the
work accurately. Start at the left-hand upper corner, first turning under the
raw edge. Then place the slot of the clothespin over the edge and turn it half
around to the right. Place your finger against the fold thus made, pull out
your clothespin and tack or pin in place. Move your clothespin a given
distance to the right, turn again and pin as before. The pleating will be
absolutely uniform. In single pleating the folds are all one way; box
pleating is made by turning first to the right, then to the left, as in
illustration.
Page 73
Page 74
SINGLE PLEATING.
If you have a good eye for distances you won’t need the clothespin, but
beginners may use it to good advantage.
Where you have a pleated background the edges of your framework may
also be pleated closely, and then, say every six inches, pull out the pleating
into the form of a rosette. The effect is very pretty.
BOX PLEATING.
If you have a good eye for distances you won’t need the clothespin, but
beginners may use it to good advantage.
Where you have a pleated background the edges of your framework may
also be pleated closely, and then, say every six inches, pull out the pleating
into the form of a rosette. The effect is very pretty.
BOX PLEATING.
Page 75
CHAPTER IX.
THE BACKGROUND.
A good background is a necessity. It is the frame of your picture. Many
goods, desirable in themselves, need a color effect to throw them out
properly. Practical window trimmers devote much study to designing their
backgrounds, frequently relying upon them to arrest the eye of the passing
throng and so direct attention to the goods themselves.
No matter how artistic a window display may be, it loses more than half
its attraction if not suitably backed. The background affords relief to the
trim, and is as necessary as the scenery to a stage setting or the sky line to a
landscape. It completes your picture, and, frequently, attracts the eye sooner
than the goods.
Therefore too much attention cannot be given backgrounds, and were
there a school of window trimming, the proper use of the background would
be one of the first things taught.
THE BACKGROUND.
A good background is a necessity. It is the frame of your picture. Many
goods, desirable in themselves, need a color effect to throw them out
properly. Practical window trimmers devote much study to designing their
backgrounds, frequently relying upon them to arrest the eye of the passing
throng and so direct attention to the goods themselves.
No matter how artistic a window display may be, it loses more than half
its attraction if not suitably backed. The background affords relief to the
trim, and is as necessary as the scenery to a stage setting or the sky line to a
landscape. It completes your picture, and, frequently, attracts the eye sooner
than the goods.
Therefore too much attention cannot be given backgrounds, and were
there a school of window trimming, the proper use of the background would
be one of the first things taught.
Page 76
STOCK BACKGROUNDS.
Many trimmers construct their backgrounds in the windows, which takes
considerable time, and when completed, they hurry in the goods to be
shown, not giving themselves time to show them properly, feeling they have
spent too much time on the background. Consequently, the window is not
what it should be. To obviate this I would advise the using of portable stock
backgrounds. They are not expensive, and are easily constructed. The time
saved in trimming a window is a very important factor. A few frames made
of light strips, covered with cheap muslin, forms an excellent groundwork.
They can be decorated with cheesecloth in sunbursts, pleating—or, in fact,
there is no limit to the variety of ways to treat them. The frames can be
made in convenient sizes to fit your windows, so that they can be easily
handled and put together quickly in the window. Both sides of the frames
should be decorated, so that after you have used one you can turn your
frame, showing a different style and color entirely.
These backgrounds are also to be commended as examples of good taste
and elegance of design without being elaborately ornate. A very great
mistake is not infrequently made in trying to gain a great effect by using an
overdone and complicated background which results in distracting the eye
from the rest of the display, just as an extremely simple and beautiful
picture is often killed because it has been put into a huge gilded Rococo
frame.
There are almost countless materials which may be used in making
backgrounds, which will give just the finishing touch needed to complete a
harmonious window; for instance, Japanese Grass Cloth, which can be
procured from most of the large wall paper houses. This is a combination of
thread and fine straw, woven together, and backed with tough paper. It
comes in just the colors which will harmonize with any other color without
predomination,—rich olive green and golden browns, or even beautiful dull
reds.
The Oriental mattings and cloths of unique weave and pattern may also
be used.
Many trimmers construct their backgrounds in the windows, which takes
considerable time, and when completed, they hurry in the goods to be
shown, not giving themselves time to show them properly, feeling they have
spent too much time on the background. Consequently, the window is not
what it should be. To obviate this I would advise the using of portable stock
backgrounds. They are not expensive, and are easily constructed. The time
saved in trimming a window is a very important factor. A few frames made
of light strips, covered with cheap muslin, forms an excellent groundwork.
They can be decorated with cheesecloth in sunbursts, pleating—or, in fact,
there is no limit to the variety of ways to treat them. The frames can be
made in convenient sizes to fit your windows, so that they can be easily
handled and put together quickly in the window. Both sides of the frames
should be decorated, so that after you have used one you can turn your
frame, showing a different style and color entirely.
These backgrounds are also to be commended as examples of good taste
and elegance of design without being elaborately ornate. A very great
mistake is not infrequently made in trying to gain a great effect by using an
overdone and complicated background which results in distracting the eye
from the rest of the display, just as an extremely simple and beautiful
picture is often killed because it has been put into a huge gilded Rococo
frame.
There are almost countless materials which may be used in making
backgrounds, which will give just the finishing touch needed to complete a
harmonious window; for instance, Japanese Grass Cloth, which can be
procured from most of the large wall paper houses. This is a combination of
thread and fine straw, woven together, and backed with tough paper. It
comes in just the colors which will harmonize with any other color without
predomination,—rich olive green and golden browns, or even beautiful dull
reds.
The Oriental mattings and cloths of unique weave and pattern may also
be used.
Page 77
The accompanying plates illustrate how quickly these backgrounds can
be put together.
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATES 1 AND 2.
be put together.
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATES 1 AND 2.
Page 78
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATE 3.
Plate No. 1.—The pleated frames explain themselves. Palms add much to
the finish of almost any background.
Plate No. 2.—Shows some excellent sunburst effects.
Plate No. 3.—Gives an excellent idea of the utility of frames, with the
addition of a few palms. This represents an Easter egg, made of strips
covered with heavy paper; the outside in white cheesecloth, the inside with
lavender China silk, with baby dressed in white. There are dozens of other
ideas that will suggest themselves to you, suitable to the season. The egg is
only one suggestion.
Plate No. 1.—The pleated frames explain themselves. Palms add much to
the finish of almost any background.
Plate No. 2.—Shows some excellent sunburst effects.
Plate No. 3.—Gives an excellent idea of the utility of frames, with the
addition of a few palms. This represents an Easter egg, made of strips
covered with heavy paper; the outside in white cheesecloth, the inside with
lavender China silk, with baby dressed in white. There are dozens of other
ideas that will suggest themselves to you, suitable to the season. The egg is
only one suggestion.
Page 79
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATE 4.
Plate No. 4.—The lattice work can be made with white tape, ribbon or
strips of wood painted. A hoop nailed to the outer strips will make a good
frame. Any style of ornament can be cut out of heavy cardboard, or wood
ornaments obtained from almost any saw mill at a little cost. A plain box
with blocks nailed top and bottom, covered with cloth in any color desired,
with a panel of gilt picture moldings, makes a good pedestal.
Plate No. 5.—Shows how one frame can be used in front of another to an
advantage, and good effects obtained.
Plate No. 6—Suggests an excellent background for windows. The bottom
of the pillars is covered with a strip of lincrusta, painted white and touched
up with bronze. A plain cap can be used instead of the fancy ones, either
square or round, with a band of lincrusta to match the bottom.
These backgrounds can be produced at little cost, and are a great help to
the trimmer who has many windows. With a little ingenuity and adaptation
one can form an endless variety of artistic backgrounds.
The backgrounds shown were designed by Charles W. Morton.
Plate No. 4.—The lattice work can be made with white tape, ribbon or
strips of wood painted. A hoop nailed to the outer strips will make a good
frame. Any style of ornament can be cut out of heavy cardboard, or wood
ornaments obtained from almost any saw mill at a little cost. A plain box
with blocks nailed top and bottom, covered with cloth in any color desired,
with a panel of gilt picture moldings, makes a good pedestal.
Plate No. 5.—Shows how one frame can be used in front of another to an
advantage, and good effects obtained.
Plate No. 6—Suggests an excellent background for windows. The bottom
of the pillars is covered with a strip of lincrusta, painted white and touched
up with bronze. A plain cap can be used instead of the fancy ones, either
square or round, with a band of lincrusta to match the bottom.
These backgrounds can be produced at little cost, and are a great help to
the trimmer who has many windows. With a little ingenuity and adaptation
one can form an endless variety of artistic backgrounds.
The backgrounds shown were designed by Charles W. Morton.
Page 80
AN OPEN BACKGROUND.
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATE 5.
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATE 5.
Page 81
STANDARD BACKGROUNDS—PLATE 6.
Where it is desirable to admit light to the store, the window may be
draped in a style that is called “an open background.” At the back of the
window tack a width or double width of cheesecloth or other material to the
top and bottom of the window; not too tightly, but with slack enough to
allow for gathering at the middle, as is shown in the illustration. It is not
necessary to pleat the material at the top and bottom, as the gathering gives
an effect of fullness, but if a single width is used it gives a fuller appearance
when pleated. Tie the centers together with bows of bright ribbon. Hanging
baskets of flowers and vines suspended in the center of the spaces add to
the effect. This style of backing is very neat, and much better than no
background at all for drug and jewelry displays.
Where it is desirable to admit light to the store, the window may be
draped in a style that is called “an open background.” At the back of the
window tack a width or double width of cheesecloth or other material to the
top and bottom of the window; not too tightly, but with slack enough to
allow for gathering at the middle, as is shown in the illustration. It is not
necessary to pleat the material at the top and bottom, as the gathering gives
an effect of fullness, but if a single width is used it gives a fuller appearance
when pleated. Tie the centers together with bows of bright ribbon. Hanging
baskets of flowers and vines suspended in the center of the spaces add to
the effect. This style of backing is very neat, and much better than no
background at all for drug and jewelry displays.
Page 82
Page 83
LATTICE WORK.
For lattice work erect a light framework, wind with cloth, and use strips
of curtain cloth, white tape or ribbon for lattice. Run all the strips one way
before you put in the cross strips, and these should run back of the first,
before the next, and so alternating until you have reached the end. The next
strip should reverse the order, running before the first.
For lattice work erect a light framework, wind with cloth, and use strips
of curtain cloth, white tape or ribbon for lattice. Run all the strips one way
before you put in the cross strips, and these should run back of the first,
before the next, and so alternating until you have reached the end. The next
strip should reverse the order, running before the first.
Page 84
CHAPTER X.
FIXTURES.
Having erected a proper framework and covered it in an artistic manner,
the background is complete, and the decorator next turns to the subject of
proper fixtures on which to display his goods.
The writer is a firm believer in good window fixtures, for they assist
greatly in making a handsome display, and thus selling goods. Therefore an
adequate supply of substantial brass and nickel fixtures is not an
extravagance, but a necessity. I said an adequate supply. The big city store
needs a great variety of fixtures, for there are many windows to trim. The
small store cannot afford more than enough to be used to good advantage.
Side brackets, or arms, must be provided amply, and enough uprights and
rods to make whatever racks or trees may be required for small goods.
Special display require special fixtures, and where the fixture cannot be
entirely covered, a homemade erection would be out of place. When a need
arises for a good fixture the expense should not be considered.
From a town of 50,000 inhabitants a merchant writes: “I can no more
expect my trimmer to create a good window without proper fixtures than a
carpenter to make a good piece of cabinet work without tools. Windows that
will attract attention to our goods are necessary; therefore we buy every
fixture that is required.” A firm in a town one-half the size of the above,
states: “If we were forced to choose between inside fixtures and window
fixtures the window fixtures would get them every time. We could sell
goods off a dry goods box when once we had brought the people into our
store; but without a good window display we fear we could induce very few
to enter.”
FIXTURES.
Having erected a proper framework and covered it in an artistic manner,
the background is complete, and the decorator next turns to the subject of
proper fixtures on which to display his goods.
The writer is a firm believer in good window fixtures, for they assist
greatly in making a handsome display, and thus selling goods. Therefore an
adequate supply of substantial brass and nickel fixtures is not an
extravagance, but a necessity. I said an adequate supply. The big city store
needs a great variety of fixtures, for there are many windows to trim. The
small store cannot afford more than enough to be used to good advantage.
Side brackets, or arms, must be provided amply, and enough uprights and
rods to make whatever racks or trees may be required for small goods.
Special display require special fixtures, and where the fixture cannot be
entirely covered, a homemade erection would be out of place. When a need
arises for a good fixture the expense should not be considered.
From a town of 50,000 inhabitants a merchant writes: “I can no more
expect my trimmer to create a good window without proper fixtures than a
carpenter to make a good piece of cabinet work without tools. Windows that
will attract attention to our goods are necessary; therefore we buy every
fixture that is required.” A firm in a town one-half the size of the above,
states: “If we were forced to choose between inside fixtures and window
fixtures the window fixtures would get them every time. We could sell
goods off a dry goods box when once we had brought the people into our
store; but without a good window display we fear we could induce very few
to enter.”
Page 85
A general merchant in a town of 5,000 writes: “I never paid any attention
to my windows until a year ago, when I instructed one of my clerks who
was going to the city, to buy whatever fixtures we might need to trim a
window properly. To my horror he purchased nearly $200 worth of fixtures,
including a jointed form. I felt like sending the goods back, but, at the
clerk’s earnest solicitation, decided to keep them. To-day I would not part
with them for double the amount they cost. My windows are talked of all
over the country, and my competitors are making frantic efforts to imitate
my style of trimming windows.”
Another merchant writes: “I never bought a window fixture that did not
prove a good investment.”
to my windows until a year ago, when I instructed one of my clerks who
was going to the city, to buy whatever fixtures we might need to trim a
window properly. To my horror he purchased nearly $200 worth of fixtures,
including a jointed form. I felt like sending the goods back, but, at the
clerk’s earnest solicitation, decided to keep them. To-day I would not part
with them for double the amount they cost. My windows are talked of all
over the country, and my competitors are making frantic efforts to imitate
my style of trimming windows.”
Another merchant writes: “I never bought a window fixture that did not
prove a good investment.”
Page 86
HOMEMADE FIXTURES.
The decorator more frequently finds a lack of fixtures to be his stumbling
block than any other detail of window trimming. Dearth of proper fixtures
is more fruitful of complaint, contention and ill feeling between the trimmer
and his employer than all other causes combined; and, while there are many
unreasonable and “stingy” employers, on the other hand, it may be observed
that in very many cases the more indolent and incompetent the trimmer the
louder are his complaints; and to such a degree does he sometimes carry
this that his colleagues become wearied of his “hobby,” he becomes persona
non grata with his employer, resulting finally in being driven out to make
room for one with more tact, better temper and a larger store of latent
resources, enabling him to make the best of the, perhaps, meager supply of
materials at hand.
Did any one ever know of an incompetent and unsuccessful trimmer who
did not lay all his troubles and failures to the lack of fixtures; or a capable
and successful one who did not climb to the top in spite of his handicaps of
this kind? Again, there are many ambitious young men who do make an
effort to surmount these difficulties, regarding this as the “make-shift
period,” sighing the while for the time when they can take their place in the
great establishment, that “promised land” where their troubles will have
ended, where there are fixtures galore for every wrinkle, and where they
must but say, “presto, change,” and the marvelous creations they dream
about will be complete. It is no secret with experienced men that this state
of things exists only in dreams, for, if the great store is replete with all the
modern appliances, so, also, are the requirements multitudinous in
proportion, and the trimmer who has failed to cultivate to the utmost his
inventive faculties while occupying his humbler sphere cannot hope to
succeed in the greater one; and, yet again, it has been proven that the
average store, doing a business of $100,000 a year, is as fully equipped in
the fixture line, in proportion to volume of business done, as is the great
metropolitan establishment whose sales run into the millions.
It is well to agitate the fixture question in every proper way with the
employer, and to try to obtain those that are necessary; and it is well, also,
to keep an eye on the lumber pile, for with saw and hammer one can rig up
The decorator more frequently finds a lack of fixtures to be his stumbling
block than any other detail of window trimming. Dearth of proper fixtures
is more fruitful of complaint, contention and ill feeling between the trimmer
and his employer than all other causes combined; and, while there are many
unreasonable and “stingy” employers, on the other hand, it may be observed
that in very many cases the more indolent and incompetent the trimmer the
louder are his complaints; and to such a degree does he sometimes carry
this that his colleagues become wearied of his “hobby,” he becomes persona
non grata with his employer, resulting finally in being driven out to make
room for one with more tact, better temper and a larger store of latent
resources, enabling him to make the best of the, perhaps, meager supply of
materials at hand.
Did any one ever know of an incompetent and unsuccessful trimmer who
did not lay all his troubles and failures to the lack of fixtures; or a capable
and successful one who did not climb to the top in spite of his handicaps of
this kind? Again, there are many ambitious young men who do make an
effort to surmount these difficulties, regarding this as the “make-shift
period,” sighing the while for the time when they can take their place in the
great establishment, that “promised land” where their troubles will have
ended, where there are fixtures galore for every wrinkle, and where they
must but say, “presto, change,” and the marvelous creations they dream
about will be complete. It is no secret with experienced men that this state
of things exists only in dreams, for, if the great store is replete with all the
modern appliances, so, also, are the requirements multitudinous in
proportion, and the trimmer who has failed to cultivate to the utmost his
inventive faculties while occupying his humbler sphere cannot hope to
succeed in the greater one; and, yet again, it has been proven that the
average store, doing a business of $100,000 a year, is as fully equipped in
the fixture line, in proportion to volume of business done, as is the great
metropolitan establishment whose sales run into the millions.
It is well to agitate the fixture question in every proper way with the
employer, and to try to obtain those that are necessary; and it is well, also,
to keep an eye on the lumber pile, for with saw and hammer one can rig up
Page 87
fixtures with which he can make a creditable display of any class of
merchandise, and at the same time train himself to become a man of
resources; for, far and away ahead of all other gifts the successful trimmer
is always resourceful, and the ability to hastily construct necessary fixtures
is twin brother to the gift that enables a man to handle every kind of goods
given him in all the ways it is capable of being displayed at short notice
which is the characteristic stamp of the true artist, and determines his value
to his employer as well as his standing in the profession.
Here are one or two illustrations:
IDEAS FOR HOMEMADE FIXTURES.
If you have been asked to show underwear, for instance, and metal
fixtures are not obtainable, don’t entertain a trimmer get some curtain poles,
saw into required lengths, procure some three-pronged metal towel racks
from house furnishing department, screw them on pole, as seen in cut, and
you have a fixture that the goods will sufficiently cover, so that no one will
guess it was not originally manufactured for the purpose.
To make a very effective centerpiece for a linen or handkerchief window,
cut from any old boards the shape of a vase, say thirty-six inches high. Pad
one side of this to the shape of a vase with old papers, excelsior or any old
rubbish; cover with muslin, then puff all over with cheesecloth; now two
merchandise, and at the same time train himself to become a man of
resources; for, far and away ahead of all other gifts the successful trimmer
is always resourceful, and the ability to hastily construct necessary fixtures
is twin brother to the gift that enables a man to handle every kind of goods
given him in all the ways it is capable of being displayed at short notice
which is the characteristic stamp of the true artist, and determines his value
to his employer as well as his standing in the profession.
Here are one or two illustrations:
IDEAS FOR HOMEMADE FIXTURES.
If you have been asked to show underwear, for instance, and metal
fixtures are not obtainable, don’t entertain a trimmer get some curtain poles,
saw into required lengths, procure some three-pronged metal towel racks
from house furnishing department, screw them on pole, as seen in cut, and
you have a fixture that the goods will sufficiently cover, so that no one will
guess it was not originally manufactured for the purpose.
To make a very effective centerpiece for a linen or handkerchief window,
cut from any old boards the shape of a vase, say thirty-six inches high. Pad
one side of this to the shape of a vase with old papers, excelsior or any old
rubbish; cover with muslin, then puff all over with cheesecloth; now two
Page 88
feet from your dark background stretch from floor to ceiling coarse, black
tarletan; place the flat side of vase against this and pin your handkerchiefs
or napkins on in vine and flower effect. The tarletan is entirely invisible and
the goods have the appearance of “growing” right out of the vase.
To make an effective and artistic arch quickly, nail your uprights to the
floor, cover with carpet padding; over this puff, pleat or stretch plain
cheesecloth or whatever you wish to cover it with. Now get some flour-pail
lids for caps, procure some barrel hoops, cut out about one-third and nail
either end to the side of post caps. The space can be filled in by puffing or
pleating.
These methods are shown in outline in the above diagram.
Another, more elaborate arch is made as follows: Go to the lumber room,
where old boxes and barrels are kept, and there are usually a saw and
hammer about the store. That’s enough. Remove the wooden hoops
carefully from your barrels, and save the heads. If you have not enough
pieces among the boxes to serve for uprights purchase a few 2 × 4s, and
also a bundle of lath. If you wish to make an arch, use the 2 × 4s for
uprights, run a board across the top, and nail blocks in such a position that
by bending lath or light strips, and nailing them to the blocks, the circle of
the arch will be formed. See illustration. Puff cheesecloth upon cardboard
or the thin wood used for backing pictures, and fasten it to the circle of the
tarletan; place the flat side of vase against this and pin your handkerchiefs
or napkins on in vine and flower effect. The tarletan is entirely invisible and
the goods have the appearance of “growing” right out of the vase.
To make an effective and artistic arch quickly, nail your uprights to the
floor, cover with carpet padding; over this puff, pleat or stretch plain
cheesecloth or whatever you wish to cover it with. Now get some flour-pail
lids for caps, procure some barrel hoops, cut out about one-third and nail
either end to the side of post caps. The space can be filled in by puffing or
pleating.
These methods are shown in outline in the above diagram.
Another, more elaborate arch is made as follows: Go to the lumber room,
where old boxes and barrels are kept, and there are usually a saw and
hammer about the store. That’s enough. Remove the wooden hoops
carefully from your barrels, and save the heads. If you have not enough
pieces among the boxes to serve for uprights purchase a few 2 × 4s, and
also a bundle of lath. If you wish to make an arch, use the 2 × 4s for
uprights, run a board across the top, and nail blocks in such a position that
by bending lath or light strips, and nailing them to the blocks, the circle of
the arch will be formed. See illustration. Puff cheesecloth upon cardboard
or the thin wood used for backing pictures, and fasten it to the circle of the
Page 89
arch, allowing it to run down as far as the pillow. Allow the top board to
project a trifle beyond the face of the arch, and cover or puff this edge. For
the pillars take heavy carpet paper, or roofing paper, and cut it the length
you wish the height of the pillar to be. Cover the surface of this paper with
cloth or velvet. Then bend the paper in cylindrical form, around the upright,
fastening at the back with brass paper fasteners. It will have the appearance
of a solid and substantial pillar. Twine smilax or ivy about this and you will
be surprised at the effect.
project a trifle beyond the face of the arch, and cover or puff this edge. For
the pillars take heavy carpet paper, or roofing paper, and cut it the length
you wish the height of the pillar to be. Cover the surface of this paper with
cloth or velvet. Then bend the paper in cylindrical form, around the upright,
fastening at the back with brass paper fasteners. It will have the appearance
of a solid and substantial pillar. Twine smilax or ivy about this and you will
be surprised at the effect.
Page 90
PEDESTALS.
Barrel heads may be fastened together with light strips and then nailed to
the top of an upright to form a pedestal on which any class of goods may be
displayed. The top and standards may be closely covered with cloth, or
draped from the edge of the top to the floor. Another way is to put a barrel
head at the top and bottom and drape in hour-glass shape, drawing the cloth
together at the center and tying with a bow of bright ribbon, or other
material.
Barrel heads may be fastened together with light strips and then nailed to
the top of an upright to form a pedestal on which any class of goods may be
displayed. The top and standards may be closely covered with cloth, or
draped from the edge of the top to the floor. Another way is to put a barrel
head at the top and bottom and drape in hour-glass shape, drawing the cloth
together at the center and tying with a bow of bright ribbon, or other
material.
Page 91
OTHER FIXTURES.
Page 92
Page 93
By winding hoops with cheesecloth you can use them in a variety of
ways. In an illustration is shown a suspended hoop fixture which makes a
good centerpiece. The pins in the center, which are to hold merchandise of
various kinds—hats, bonnets, shoes, etc.,—are pieces of broom handle
nailed to the flat of the hoop. Another good homemade fixture is in easel
form, one-third of each hoop being cut away, as shown in the picture. A
standard with half-hoops fastened to the sides makes a good fixture for
showing laces, furnishing goods, etc. These are all outline drawings and do
not show the fixtures covered, but when they are wound with cloth they
present a very neat appearance, and are certainly useful.
ways. In an illustration is shown a suspended hoop fixture which makes a
good centerpiece. The pins in the center, which are to hold merchandise of
various kinds—hats, bonnets, shoes, etc.,—are pieces of broom handle
nailed to the flat of the hoop. Another good homemade fixture is in easel
form, one-third of each hoop being cut away, as shown in the picture. A
standard with half-hoops fastened to the sides makes a good fixture for
showing laces, furnishing goods, etc. These are all outline drawings and do
not show the fixtures covered, but when they are wound with cloth they
present a very neat appearance, and are certainly useful.
Page 94
Knitting needles driven into an upright standard, make neat and
serviceable bars for displaying furnishing goods.
serviceable bars for displaying furnishing goods.
Page 95
HOMEMADE CORSET FORM.
The country trimmer is frequently at a loss to make a good corset
window. Boxes of goods may be piled up, to be sure, but that requires a
great deal of stock, and never looks very well, either. A dozen corsets,
properly placed, will make an excellent display, and will sell more goods
than a mass of rolled and boxed corsets. Have a dozen oval pieces of 1-inch
board sawed, of a size that just fits the bust of the corset. A corresponding
number of pieces should be made to fit the waist measurement. Connect
these two pieces by means of a standard, and lace the corsets lightly over
this improvised form. By extending some of the standards you can have the
real corsets of your display set up, so that all may be plainly seen. Allow the
The country trimmer is frequently at a loss to make a good corset
window. Boxes of goods may be piled up, to be sure, but that requires a
great deal of stock, and never looks very well, either. A dozen corsets,
properly placed, will make an excellent display, and will sell more goods
than a mass of rolled and boxed corsets. Have a dozen oval pieces of 1-inch
board sawed, of a size that just fits the bust of the corset. A corresponding
number of pieces should be made to fit the waist measurement. Connect
these two pieces by means of a standard, and lace the corsets lightly over
this improvised form. By extending some of the standards you can have the
real corsets of your display set up, so that all may be plainly seen. Allow the
Page 96
top of the corset to project several inches above the bust piece, and upon the
shelf thus formed put a puffing of bright colored stuff, or place a potted
palm. For a narrow window such a display is especially desirable, and it
may also be adapted to any shaped window to advantage.
Perhaps the above suggestions will give the reader ideas of utilizing the
lumber room to good advantage. In another chapter a variety of suggestions
is offered, many of which will require more or less ingenuity on the part of
the decorator to prepare properly.
shelf thus formed put a puffing of bright colored stuff, or place a potted
palm. For a narrow window such a display is especially desirable, and it
may also be adapted to any shaped window to advantage.
Perhaps the above suggestions will give the reader ideas of utilizing the
lumber room to good advantage. In another chapter a variety of suggestions
is offered, many of which will require more or less ingenuity on the part of
the decorator to prepare properly.
Page 97
ONYX STANDARDS.
There is a paper with surface printed in close imitation of onyx, which is
being utilized by many window trimmers to manufacture onyx standards
upon which to display goods. Take a round pole, three feet long and about
three inches in diameter, and nail upon either end a 12 × 12 square of 1-inch
boarding. Cover all surfaces with the onyx paper, and set several of these
stands in the window. Over them lay suits of clothing, pieces of dress
goods, or place upon the tops pairs of shoes or other articles. A pretty effect
is created by twining smilax around the standards. Onyx columns to support
backgrounds may be made in a similar way. The paper may be obtained
from any first-class stationer, and when viewed from the sidewalk closely
resembles real onyx.
There is a paper with surface printed in close imitation of onyx, which is
being utilized by many window trimmers to manufacture onyx standards
upon which to display goods. Take a round pole, three feet long and about
three inches in diameter, and nail upon either end a 12 × 12 square of 1-inch
boarding. Cover all surfaces with the onyx paper, and set several of these
stands in the window. Over them lay suits of clothing, pieces of dress
goods, or place upon the tops pairs of shoes or other articles. A pretty effect
is created by twining smilax around the standards. Onyx columns to support
backgrounds may be made in a similar way. The paper may be obtained
from any first-class stationer, and when viewed from the sidewalk closely
resembles real onyx.
Page 98
PALM STANDS.
When showing small articles in a window effective accessories may be
employed by using draped stands of irregular heights scattered about the
window, upon each of which is placed a palm plant. If the stands are draped
in red or yellow they show off the green palms to good advantage. Smilax
may be twined about the bases.
When showing small articles in a window effective accessories may be
employed by using draped stands of irregular heights scattered about the
window, upon each of which is placed a palm plant. If the stands are draped
in red or yellow they show off the green palms to good advantage. Smilax
may be twined about the bases.
Page 99
GLASS SHELVES.
Have strips of single or double thick window glass cut to the size you
desire. Place two 1-inch screw eyes in your frame or window side, and rest
the edge of the glass upon them. Fasten the ends of two pieces of picture
cord, or chain, to the screw eyes, draw them over the outer edge of the glass
and fasten them about a foot or eighteen inches above the shelf. This
fastening is easily made and removed, and the shelves will be found very
substantial.
Have strips of single or double thick window glass cut to the size you
desire. Place two 1-inch screw eyes in your frame or window side, and rest
the edge of the glass upon them. Fasten the ends of two pieces of picture
cord, or chain, to the screw eyes, draw them over the outer edge of the glass
and fasten them about a foot or eighteen inches above the shelf. This
fastening is easily made and removed, and the shelves will be found very
substantial.
Page 100
CHAPTER XI.
DRESS GOODS DRAPINGS.
DRESS GOODS DRAPINGS.
Page 101
There are almost as many ways to drape dress goods as there are varieties
of the goods themselves, and many of them are good ways, too. Ask any
window trimmer, no matter what experience he has had, if he can drape
dress goods, and he will answer “certainly!” and be surprised at the
of the goods themselves, and many of them are good ways, too. Ask any
window trimmer, no matter what experience he has had, if he can drape
dress goods, and he will answer “certainly!” and be surprised at the
Page 102
question. But how well he can drape is another question. Whether his
drapings are modern and up-to-date is also worth investigating. An
experienced trimmer finds himself inventing new drapings almost daily, and
these are more or less serviceable. It is a good plan to use those methods
that commend themselves to you and that you find you are able to
reproduce easily.
drapings are modern and up-to-date is also worth investigating. An
experienced trimmer finds himself inventing new drapings almost daily, and
these are more or less serviceable. It is a good plan to use those methods
that commend themselves to you and that you find you are able to
reproduce easily.
Page 103
The stands have much to do with your success. In fact, there can be no
real success without proper fixtures. We show a diagram of an excellent
dress goods stand, which is suitable as well for silks or almost any class of
dry goods. The frame work is light and made of soft pine and covered with
heavy roofing paper. The measurements are shown in the drawing. By
referring to Plate No. 1, accompanying this article, you will find that
draping No. 4 is made on this stand. In Plate No. 2 drapings Nos. 10, 11 and
12 are also made on the dress goods stand. Plate No. 3 shows six styles of
drapes made over this same stand. The illustrations are from photographs
and are so distinct that even the novice will find little difficulty in
understanding the folds. For an “all-round” stand I recommend this highly.
It should be made in three heights, 3 feet, 4 feet and 5 feet, and is then
suitable for blankets, comfortables, muslin underwear, tablecloths, and
many other lines. At the right of the dress goods stand is a diagram of my
silk stand, which will be found useful where many silks are shown. Its size
renders it especially appropriate for silk widths and by referring to drapes
Nos. 5 and 6 in Plate No. 1, and drapes Nos. 7, 8 and 9 in Plate No. 2, you
will find examples of drapings over this stand. The dimensions are plainly
given in the drawing.
real success without proper fixtures. We show a diagram of an excellent
dress goods stand, which is suitable as well for silks or almost any class of
dry goods. The frame work is light and made of soft pine and covered with
heavy roofing paper. The measurements are shown in the drawing. By
referring to Plate No. 1, accompanying this article, you will find that
draping No. 4 is made on this stand. In Plate No. 2 drapings Nos. 10, 11 and
12 are also made on the dress goods stand. Plate No. 3 shows six styles of
drapes made over this same stand. The illustrations are from photographs
and are so distinct that even the novice will find little difficulty in
understanding the folds. For an “all-round” stand I recommend this highly.
It should be made in three heights, 3 feet, 4 feet and 5 feet, and is then
suitable for blankets, comfortables, muslin underwear, tablecloths, and
many other lines. At the right of the dress goods stand is a diagram of my
silk stand, which will be found useful where many silks are shown. Its size
renders it especially appropriate for silk widths and by referring to drapes
Nos. 5 and 6 in Plate No. 1, and drapes Nos. 7, 8 and 9 in Plate No. 2, you
will find examples of drapings over this stand. The dimensions are plainly
given in the drawing.
Page 104
DRESS GOODS DRAPINGS—PLATE 1.
Examples 1, 2 and 3 are made over the Skirt Stand.
Example 4 is made over the Dress Goods Stand.
Examples 5 and 6 are made over the Silk Stand.
Examples 1, 2 and 3 are made over the Skirt Stand.
Example 4 is made over the Dress Goods Stand.
Examples 5 and 6 are made over the Silk Stand.
Page 105
DRESS GOODS DRAPINGS—PLATE 2.
Drapings 7, 8 and 9 are made over the Silk Stand.
Drapings 10, 11 and 12 are made over the Dress Goods Stand.
Drapings 7, 8 and 9 are made over the Silk Stand.
Drapings 10, 11 and 12 are made over the Dress Goods Stand.
Page 106
DRESS GOODS DRAPINGS—PLATE 3.
Six Modern Drapes, all made over the Dress Goods Stand and suitable for displaying almost any
material for Dress Goods.
In all large stores a skirt stand is an important factor in displaying goods.
The one I use is easily made, is light and durable, and answers the purpose
admirably. The illustration shows it perfectly and gives the dimensions.
Drapings Nos. 1, 2 and 3, in Plate 1 are examples of the use of this stand.
Six Modern Drapes, all made over the Dress Goods Stand and suitable for displaying almost any
material for Dress Goods.
In all large stores a skirt stand is an important factor in displaying goods.
The one I use is easily made, is light and durable, and answers the purpose
admirably. The illustration shows it perfectly and gives the dimensions.
Drapings Nos. 1, 2 and 3, in Plate 1 are examples of the use of this stand.
Page 107
For the convenience of decorators I give herewith a number of
illustrations of drapings in common use. These need not be described in
detail, for it would be a task well-nigh impossible. Each man must, by
practice and study, work out the various details of draping for himself, for
the graceful folds we so often see and admire cannot really be taught. If you
ask a trimmer what his method is for making a certain effective draping, he
will stare at you in bewilderment and say, “Why—why, I just give it a push
here, and a twist there, and a yank sideways—and it’s done.” As a matter of
fact, he don’t know how he does it, any more than a painter can tell you
what particular sweep of the brush created his masterpiece. A delicate touch
—an artistic eye; that’s about all there is to it. I show herewith many pretty
styles of drapings, but beyond describing the materials you must work with
and giving you the pictures to study, I can assist you no further. But do not
be discouraged; try them. A little practice will no doubt enable you to
duplicate any of them, and then I suggest you invent new drapings of your
own, that fit your peculiar style and taste, for dress goods are susceptible to
innumerable methods of display.
FIG. 4.
illustrations of drapings in common use. These need not be described in
detail, for it would be a task well-nigh impossible. Each man must, by
practice and study, work out the various details of draping for himself, for
the graceful folds we so often see and admire cannot really be taught. If you
ask a trimmer what his method is for making a certain effective draping, he
will stare at you in bewilderment and say, “Why—why, I just give it a push
here, and a twist there, and a yank sideways—and it’s done.” As a matter of
fact, he don’t know how he does it, any more than a painter can tell you
what particular sweep of the brush created his masterpiece. A delicate touch
—an artistic eye; that’s about all there is to it. I show herewith many pretty
styles of drapings, but beyond describing the materials you must work with
and giving you the pictures to study, I can assist you no further. But do not
be discouraged; try them. A little practice will no doubt enable you to
duplicate any of them, and then I suggest you invent new drapings of your
own, that fit your peculiar style and taste, for dress goods are susceptible to
innumerable methods of display.
FIG. 4.
Page 108
FIG. 4.
Given the proper stands, as before illustrated, draping is not so difficult
as at first appears. In Fig. 4 I show a cylinder stand, with an upright
attached that is used for many of the drapings that have a raised heading.
The cylinder is made from papier mache or heavy straw board. Some forms
are made to spread at the bottom, in the style a woman’s dress is hung. And
sometimes a flat board, or a cross-bar is required, as will be explained
further on. For fastening the material to the cardboard form use artist’s
tacks, as they are convenient and do not injure the cloth. Fig. 4 (a) shows
the cylinder with an upright stick tacked upon it to hold the puffed heading;
(b) shows the first process in draping, (c) the second, and (d) the method of
gathering the puffing at the head. In Fig. 4 (e) is shown the completed
Given the proper stands, as before illustrated, draping is not so difficult
as at first appears. In Fig. 4 I show a cylinder stand, with an upright
attached that is used for many of the drapings that have a raised heading.
The cylinder is made from papier mache or heavy straw board. Some forms
are made to spread at the bottom, in the style a woman’s dress is hung. And
sometimes a flat board, or a cross-bar is required, as will be explained
further on. For fastening the material to the cardboard form use artist’s
tacks, as they are convenient and do not injure the cloth. Fig. 4 (a) shows
the cylinder with an upright stick tacked upon it to hold the puffed heading;
(b) shows the first process in draping, (c) the second, and (d) the method of
gathering the puffing at the head. In Fig. 4 (e) is shown the completed
Page 109
drape, which is both new and highly artistic. Fig. 5 is also very effective,
and its construction may be followed in (a) and (b), and in the full draping
(c). Fig. 6 is certainly an odd effect, and one that is just now growing
popular. The method of gathering the fold is shown in (a), and the result in
Fig. 6 (b). Fig. 7 recently originated in Germany, and is very graceful and
pleasing. The method may be followed in (a) and (b) to the full draping in
(c). In Fig. 8 the pansy, fans and butterflies are made from fancy silks
arranged at the top of draped dress goods. Of course the colors must all
harmonize. Simpler forms of draping are those in Figs. 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and
14, and these are all made over cylinder form, and only skillful
manipulation is needed to enable you to duplicate them. Figs. 15, 16, 17 and
18 are made over a cross-bar and the folds held in place by pins. This cross-
bar may be fastened to a simple upright standard, or you may use a flat
board, which is somewhat better. Fig. 19 shows a neat method of stacking
piece goods, the top piece being used for the puffing. Fig. 20 is called a
floor draping, and is made up over an upright standard.
FIG. 5. (a)
and its construction may be followed in (a) and (b), and in the full draping
(c). Fig. 6 is certainly an odd effect, and one that is just now growing
popular. The method of gathering the fold is shown in (a), and the result in
Fig. 6 (b). Fig. 7 recently originated in Germany, and is very graceful and
pleasing. The method may be followed in (a) and (b) to the full draping in
(c). In Fig. 8 the pansy, fans and butterflies are made from fancy silks
arranged at the top of draped dress goods. Of course the colors must all
harmonize. Simpler forms of draping are those in Figs. 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and
14, and these are all made over cylinder form, and only skillful
manipulation is needed to enable you to duplicate them. Figs. 15, 16, 17 and
18 are made over a cross-bar and the folds held in place by pins. This cross-
bar may be fastened to a simple upright standard, or you may use a flat
board, which is somewhat better. Fig. 19 shows a neat method of stacking
piece goods, the top piece being used for the puffing. Fig. 20 is called a
floor draping, and is made up over an upright standard.
FIG. 5. (a)
Page 110
FIG. 5. (b)
Page 111
FIG. 5. (c)
FIG. 6. (a)
To describe in detail every fold in the above drapings would be tedious,
even were it possible to make myself understood. Any trimmer will readily
catch the ideas from the pictures and be able to utilize them in his own way.
Some of the drapings shown have been in use for some time, but the
FIG. 6. (a)
To describe in detail every fold in the above drapings would be tedious,
even were it possible to make myself understood. Any trimmer will readily
catch the ideas from the pictures and be able to utilize them in his own way.
Some of the drapings shown have been in use for some time, but the
Page 112
majority are this fall’s productions, and all of them are graceful and pretty
and will bear reproduction.
FIG. 6. (b)
and will bear reproduction.
FIG. 6. (b)
Page 113
FIG. 7. (a)
FIG. 7. (b)
FIG. 7. (b)
Page 114
FIG. 7. (c)
FIG. 8.
FIG. 8.
Page 115
FIG. 9.
Page 116
FIG. 10.
FIG. 7. (b)
FIG. 7. (b)
Page 117
FIG. 13.
Page 118
FIG. 14.
FIG. 15.
FIG. 15.
Page 119
FIG. 16.
FIG. 17.
FIG. 17.
Page 120
FIG. 18.
Page 121
FIG. 19.
Page 122
FIG. 20.
Page 123
THE FLEUR-DE-LIS.
1. In making this unique pattern, called the Fleur-de-Lis, a common
millinery stand 25½ inches high is used, as seen in Fig. 1.
1. In making this unique pattern, called the Fleur-de-Lis, a common
millinery stand 25½ inches high is used, as seen in Fig. 1.
Page 124
2. Nine inches from the top is fastened a piece of silk of 8 folds,
containing 1¼ yards to the fold. When this is fastened it must be the center
of the fold as seen in Fig. 2.
containing 1¼ yards to the fold. When this is fastened it must be the center
of the fold as seen in Fig. 2.
Page 125
3. Then each fold is brought down and made to form a loop fold, at the
base of the stand, as seen in Fig. 4.
4. Figure 3 shows the pattern after the hidden end of the silk is brought
over the top of the stand and is securely fastened, and also is made to form a
girdle, so as to cover the meeting place of top folds.
base of the stand, as seen in Fig. 4.
4. Figure 3 shows the pattern after the hidden end of the silk is brought
over the top of the stand and is securely fastened, and also is made to form a
girdle, so as to cover the meeting place of top folds.
Page 126
5. This girdle must be 4 inches across the center, and 10 inches in
diameter.
6. From tip to tip of the farthest point of the bottom fold is 32 inches. The
width of top fold is 13 inches.
7. Any height stand and any length silk may be used.
diameter.
6. From tip to tip of the farthest point of the bottom fold is 32 inches. The
width of top fold is 13 inches.
7. Any height stand and any length silk may be used.
Page 127
LINEN DECORATIONS.
A pretty decoration may be made to accompany a window display of
linens as follows:
Take insulated copper wire and use as a base for stems in making
flowers, thistles, etc. The thistle being entirely new and very attractive, I
will describe the process of making it: Cut strips of coarse linen 1¼ inches
wide and unravel each edge until a fringe is formed ⅜ of an inch on either
side. Wind this strip about the wire for the stems, as shown in C of the
illustration, where a part of the strip is left unwound. For the thistles, cut
strips 15 inches long and 1¾ inches wide, and unravel one edge until a
fringe 1¼ inches deep is formed. (See A.) Fasten one end to the stem where
the thistle is to be formed, and then roll the cloth tightly, allowing the fringe
to remain loose, as in B. Now take white linen thread and wind tightly
around the cloth at the head of the fringe, as shown in the completed thistle
flower. D and E show the strips of cloth before winding.
In making a fence of linens, the rails should be wound with strips 2
inches wide, unravelled to a depth of 1¼ inches, leaving ¾ of an inch of the
plain cloth. (See F.) The pickets are wound with another 2-inch strip which
is unraveled on either side, leaving only ¾ of an inch in the center of the
cloth, as shown in G.
A pretty decoration may be made to accompany a window display of
linens as follows:
Take insulated copper wire and use as a base for stems in making
flowers, thistles, etc. The thistle being entirely new and very attractive, I
will describe the process of making it: Cut strips of coarse linen 1¼ inches
wide and unravel each edge until a fringe is formed ⅜ of an inch on either
side. Wind this strip about the wire for the stems, as shown in C of the
illustration, where a part of the strip is left unwound. For the thistles, cut
strips 15 inches long and 1¾ inches wide, and unravel one edge until a
fringe 1¼ inches deep is formed. (See A.) Fasten one end to the stem where
the thistle is to be formed, and then roll the cloth tightly, allowing the fringe
to remain loose, as in B. Now take white linen thread and wind tightly
around the cloth at the head of the fringe, as shown in the completed thistle
flower. D and E show the strips of cloth before winding.
In making a fence of linens, the rails should be wound with strips 2
inches wide, unravelled to a depth of 1¼ inches, leaving ¾ of an inch of the
plain cloth. (See F.) The pickets are wound with another 2-inch strip which
is unraveled on either side, leaving only ¾ of an inch in the center of the
cloth, as shown in G.
Page 128
THE THISTLE LINEN DECORATION.
These strips may be utilized in many different ways, and many beautiful
effects can be obtained by their use. These designs add attraction to any
display of linens.
These strips may be utilized in many different ways, and many beautiful
effects can be obtained by their use. These designs add attraction to any
display of linens.
Page 129
CHAPTER XII.
THE ART OF CARD WRITING.
INTRODUCTION.
Show cards, to a business man, are a necessity. Everything depends upon
the way he advertises, and he cannot advertise judiciously without the aid of
signs. Some one must make his signs. If his business is on a small scale,
and he cannot afford a regular sign writer, perhaps he would like to do it
himself; or, if he hasn’t sufficient time, why not employ a window trimmer
who can do both?
A window trimmer who can make his own tickets increases his value to
his employer and can demand more money than one who does not; at any
rate, sign writing, as a side issue, will do no one any harm, and very often it
can be used to great advantage.
The art of show card making can be acquired by any one with very little
teaching, a reasonable amount of patience, and plenty of practice.
Do not become discouraged at your first attempt. Your card will look
badly, of course, but that is to be expected. You cannot do good work at the
first attempt—it is impossible. Improvements will be gradual. Each card
will prove better than the last, and with a little practice you will be surprised
at the results.
Were it not for the interesting variations and numerous opportunities to
display artistic ability, card-writing would be very monotonous; as it is, a
person with the least bit of artistic taste will find it a pleasant occupation as
well as a convenient and profitable one.
A sign maker must find where the sign is to be used and the sizes of his
lettering must be varied according to the distance it is to be placed from the
THE ART OF CARD WRITING.
INTRODUCTION.
Show cards, to a business man, are a necessity. Everything depends upon
the way he advertises, and he cannot advertise judiciously without the aid of
signs. Some one must make his signs. If his business is on a small scale,
and he cannot afford a regular sign writer, perhaps he would like to do it
himself; or, if he hasn’t sufficient time, why not employ a window trimmer
who can do both?
A window trimmer who can make his own tickets increases his value to
his employer and can demand more money than one who does not; at any
rate, sign writing, as a side issue, will do no one any harm, and very often it
can be used to great advantage.
The art of show card making can be acquired by any one with very little
teaching, a reasonable amount of patience, and plenty of practice.
Do not become discouraged at your first attempt. Your card will look
badly, of course, but that is to be expected. You cannot do good work at the
first attempt—it is impossible. Improvements will be gradual. Each card
will prove better than the last, and with a little practice you will be surprised
at the results.
Were it not for the interesting variations and numerous opportunities to
display artistic ability, card-writing would be very monotonous; as it is, a
person with the least bit of artistic taste will find it a pleasant occupation as
well as a convenient and profitable one.
A sign maker must find where the sign is to be used and the sizes of his
lettering must be varied according to the distance it is to be placed from the
Page 130
eye of the public.
Don’t attempt over originality in signs. The majority are not familiar with
signs. They have seen only a few designs. That which may be conventional
to you, because you study signs, will be original to the majority of people.
Inaugurate a system of uniformity in your card-writing, by which all your
work (styles of lettering, etc.), have a certain amount of similarity.
If at any time you wish to change your styles of cards or lettering, let the
new styles appear all over the store at the same time. It does not look well
to use a mixture of types or color; it has a tendency to confuse the public—
whereas, a system will teach them to know your particular style of work at a
glance, and it will not only be more readable, but will establish for you a
personality.
Don’t attempt over originality in signs. The majority are not familiar with
signs. They have seen only a few designs. That which may be conventional
to you, because you study signs, will be original to the majority of people.
Inaugurate a system of uniformity in your card-writing, by which all your
work (styles of lettering, etc.), have a certain amount of similarity.
If at any time you wish to change your styles of cards or lettering, let the
new styles appear all over the store at the same time. It does not look well
to use a mixture of types or color; it has a tendency to confuse the public—
whereas, a system will teach them to know your particular style of work at a
glance, and it will not only be more readable, but will establish for you a
personality.
Page 131
THE WORK ROOM.
The first requirement is a place to work; then you must be equipped. It is
impossible to do justice to your work unless you are properly fitted out.
Walk around the store until you find a suitable window, and anchor there,
provided you will be allowed, for you will find sunlight much better than
artificial light, both for the eyes and coloring.
Next get a table. Tilt it forward slightly, as in this position you will find
that work can be done better than if a level surface were used.
For those who will go to the small expense of building a table, I show it
in Figure 2.
The first requirement is a place to work; then you must be equipped. It is
impossible to do justice to your work unless you are properly fitted out.
Walk around the store until you find a suitable window, and anchor there,
provided you will be allowed, for you will find sunlight much better than
artificial light, both for the eyes and coloring.
Next get a table. Tilt it forward slightly, as in this position you will find
that work can be done better than if a level surface were used.
For those who will go to the small expense of building a table, I show it
in Figure 2.
Page 132
RULING.
You can use a Tee Square much more rapidly and accurately than an
ordinary rule. The inches can be marked off on your tee in order to center
the card.
You can use a Tee Square much more rapidly and accurately than an
ordinary rule. The inches can be marked off on your tee in order to center
the card.
Page 133
FOR LINING.
Soft charcoal is the best on coated cardboard. Should your cardboard be a
little rough, a delicate lead pencil mark will be better. Charcoal marks on
coated boards can be easily erased with a soft piece of cloth; or, better still,
a piece of chamois.
Soft charcoal is the best on coated cardboard. Should your cardboard be a
little rough, a delicate lead pencil mark will be better. Charcoal marks on
coated boards can be easily erased with a soft piece of cloth; or, better still,
a piece of chamois.
Page 134
MIXING.
Use a palette knife with a flexible blade, about ½ × 3½ inches. Find a
square piece of glass, or, not having a square piece, use any shape you have
handy. I will explain later to what use the glass is to be put.
Use a palette knife with a flexible blade, about ½ × 3½ inches. Find a
square piece of glass, or, not having a square piece, use any shape you have
handy. I will explain later to what use the glass is to be put.
Page 135
PAINTS.
Mixing forms an important part of sign work, which, however, is
considerably lessened of late, by reason of several manufacturers having
placed on the market prepared colors which meet the requirements
satisfactorily. I would advise their use if it is possible to obtain them.
One very important thing is, do not use oil paint on cardboard. It does not
work well and will cause much trouble. No experienced marker uses oil
paints, unless it is black asphaltum to fill in and outline letters; such as
several large department stores are using at the present time. The glossy
effect of this class of work is considered by many to be very attractive.
The drawback to this method is, the cards require a double handling and
consequently the work is very slow.
Drop black, in distemper, is the cleanest and most handy preparation for
card work. It is sold in most cities in jars containing one pound. All that is
required for making it ready is a little dissolved gum arabic and water.
Take your palette knife and mix these thoroughly on the piece of glass, to
about the consistency of a thick paste; it will then be ready for use.
All colors can be purchased in this form. To those who would prefer to
mix their own paint here are given a few hints on mixing.
Mixing forms an important part of sign work, which, however, is
considerably lessened of late, by reason of several manufacturers having
placed on the market prepared colors which meet the requirements
satisfactorily. I would advise their use if it is possible to obtain them.
One very important thing is, do not use oil paint on cardboard. It does not
work well and will cause much trouble. No experienced marker uses oil
paints, unless it is black asphaltum to fill in and outline letters; such as
several large department stores are using at the present time. The glossy
effect of this class of work is considered by many to be very attractive.
The drawback to this method is, the cards require a double handling and
consequently the work is very slow.
Drop black, in distemper, is the cleanest and most handy preparation for
card work. It is sold in most cities in jars containing one pound. All that is
required for making it ready is a little dissolved gum arabic and water.
Take your palette knife and mix these thoroughly on the piece of glass, to
about the consistency of a thick paste; it will then be ready for use.
All colors can be purchased in this form. To those who would prefer to
mix their own paint here are given a few hints on mixing.
Page 136
BLACK PAINT.
Lamp-black, ground thoroughly with water and gum arabic, a few drops
of alcohol added, will make a fairly good black. All dry colors can be mixed
in this way.
Lamp-black, ground thoroughly with water and gum arabic, a few drops
of alcohol added, will make a fairly good black. All dry colors can be mixed
in this way.
Page 137
WHITE PAINT.
Fill a tin cup about ¼ full of whiting, thin it with water, add ½ ounce of
pulverized glue—boil slowly, continually stirring until the glue is
thoroughly dissolved; this, when cool, will make an excellent paint for dark
boards.
At another using, should you find it has become stiff, a little heating will
thin it to the proper consistency.
Fill a tin cup about ¼ full of whiting, thin it with water, add ½ ounce of
pulverized glue—boil slowly, continually stirring until the glue is
thoroughly dissolved; this, when cool, will make an excellent paint for dark
boards.
At another using, should you find it has become stiff, a little heating will
thin it to the proper consistency.
Page 138
COMPOUND COLORS.
The following tints can be formed by mixing the colors as below. The
shades can be made to suit any taste by the exercise of a little judgment in
proportioning the colors.
Cream—White, yellow and red.
Drab—White, Prussian blue and vermillion.
Flesh—Lake, white and vermillion.
Fawn—White, stone ochre and vermillion.
Grey—White, Prussian blue, and very little black.
Light green—White, mixed with verdigris.
Grass green—Yellow, pink, mixed with verdigris.
Pea green—White and Paris green.
Dark green—Black and chrome green.
Olive green—Prussian blue and yellow.
Jonquil—Yellow, pink and white.
Lead—Prussian blue and white.
Olive—Red, green, or black and yellow.
Pearl—Dark red mixed with violet.
Purple—White, Prussian blue and vermillion.
Stone—White with a little spruce ochre.
Straw—White and yellow.
Snuff—Yellow, sienna and red.
Slate—White, black, red and blue.
Steel—Cerise, Prussian blue and vermillion.
Salmon—White, yellow and red.
Light yellow—French yellow and white.
Dark yellow—French yellow and red.
Lemon yellow—Yellow pink, with Naples yellow.
The following tints can be formed by mixing the colors as below. The
shades can be made to suit any taste by the exercise of a little judgment in
proportioning the colors.
Cream—White, yellow and red.
Drab—White, Prussian blue and vermillion.
Flesh—Lake, white and vermillion.
Fawn—White, stone ochre and vermillion.
Grey—White, Prussian blue, and very little black.
Light green—White, mixed with verdigris.
Grass green—Yellow, pink, mixed with verdigris.
Pea green—White and Paris green.
Dark green—Black and chrome green.
Olive green—Prussian blue and yellow.
Jonquil—Yellow, pink and white.
Lead—Prussian blue and white.
Olive—Red, green, or black and yellow.
Pearl—Dark red mixed with violet.
Purple—White, Prussian blue and vermillion.
Stone—White with a little spruce ochre.
Straw—White and yellow.
Snuff—Yellow, sienna and red.
Slate—White, black, red and blue.
Steel—Cerise, Prussian blue and vermillion.
Salmon—White, yellow and red.
Light yellow—French yellow and white.
Dark yellow—French yellow and red.
Lemon yellow—Yellow pink, with Naples yellow.
Page 139
BRUSHES.
Nine-tenths of the inexperienced markers are using camels’ hair brushes,
which do not have the required elasticity for good work.
Much depends upon your brush. A good sign writer cannot turn out a
respectable sign with a poor brush; therefore, a beginner cannot expect to
acquire efficiency unless he uses the proper kinds of tools.
The proper kinds of brushes can be obtained of any brush dealer. For
ordinary work, a ¾ long No. 5 brush will answer, the cost being about 20
cents. Purchase a set of about six assorted sizes, which will answer for all
work.
Use great care in selecting your brushes. See that the hairs are of an equal
length and that the ends are even when the brush is flattened.
Train your brushes flat by always using the same two sides. Rinse them
in a glass of clean water after each using, and give them a thorough
cleansing—with soap and water about twice a week. This will keep them in
good condition.
Nine-tenths of the inexperienced markers are using camels’ hair brushes,
which do not have the required elasticity for good work.
Much depends upon your brush. A good sign writer cannot turn out a
respectable sign with a poor brush; therefore, a beginner cannot expect to
acquire efficiency unless he uses the proper kinds of tools.
The proper kinds of brushes can be obtained of any brush dealer. For
ordinary work, a ¾ long No. 5 brush will answer, the cost being about 20
cents. Purchase a set of about six assorted sizes, which will answer for all
work.
Use great care in selecting your brushes. See that the hairs are of an equal
length and that the ends are even when the brush is flattened.
Train your brushes flat by always using the same two sides. Rinse them
in a glass of clean water after each using, and give them a thorough
cleansing—with soap and water about twice a week. This will keep them in
good condition.
Page 140
Figure 3 shows the exact sizes of a set of brushes, which will answer for
all purposes.
all purposes.
Page 141
CARDBOARD.
Your own judgment should be sufficient to know good cardboard. The
more you pay the better goods you get, that is, if you deal with a reputable
house.
Use a pure white, heavy coated board from 6 to 10 ply, according to the
size of the sign you are making. See that your board is of sufficient
thickness to prevent warping. If you use frames, of course your board need
not be so heavy.
Colored card-boards are well enough, occasionally, but as a rule use plain
white; people do not tire of it so easily.
Your own judgment should be sufficient to know good cardboard. The
more you pay the better goods you get, that is, if you deal with a reputable
house.
Use a pure white, heavy coated board from 6 to 10 ply, according to the
size of the sign you are making. See that your board is of sufficient
thickness to prevent warping. If you use frames, of course your board need
not be so heavy.
Colored card-boards are well enough, occasionally, but as a rule use plain
white; people do not tire of it so easily.
Page 142
LAYOUT.
The laying out of a sign requires almost as much study as the making. It
is impossible to make a good sign if your layout is bad. Always allow
plenty of margin to your card and do not crowd or spread your wording.
Measure off an equal distance all around your card from the margin, and
keep your lettering within these lines.
The laying out of a sign requires almost as much study as the making. It
is impossible to make a good sign if your layout is bad. Always allow
plenty of margin to your card and do not crowd or spread your wording.
Measure off an equal distance all around your card from the margin, and
keep your lettering within these lines.
Page 143
HOW TO HANDLE THE BRUSH.
The following illustrations show two views of how to hold the brush. It is
held very similar to the ordinary position of holding a pen or pencil, except
that the brush must be held more upright.
After the brush is well rubbed in paint (on your glass) practice holding it
as shown in the illustration. Rest your hand on your little finger. The flat
side of the brush should be horizontal to the line. In making the Devinne
series of lettering, your horizontal lines are always fine, while the down
strokes are heavy. To make this letter it is unnecessary to move the brush in
your fingers, hold it firmly, and as you become accustomed to handling it
you will find that a very little pressure while making the heavy line will
produce the desired effect.
In making solid letters of the same thickness throughout, a little practice
will enable you to revolve the brush in your fingers (as in making an O) so
that you can produce the curved portion of a letter the thickness of your
brush without removing it from your card. To do this requires considerable
practice and “if at first you don’t succeed” try several times; don’t give it up
—you may do it correctly the next attempt.
The following illustrations show two views of how to hold the brush. It is
held very similar to the ordinary position of holding a pen or pencil, except
that the brush must be held more upright.
After the brush is well rubbed in paint (on your glass) practice holding it
as shown in the illustration. Rest your hand on your little finger. The flat
side of the brush should be horizontal to the line. In making the Devinne
series of lettering, your horizontal lines are always fine, while the down
strokes are heavy. To make this letter it is unnecessary to move the brush in
your fingers, hold it firmly, and as you become accustomed to handling it
you will find that a very little pressure while making the heavy line will
produce the desired effect.
In making solid letters of the same thickness throughout, a little practice
will enable you to revolve the brush in your fingers (as in making an O) so
that you can produce the curved portion of a letter the thickness of your
brush without removing it from your card. To do this requires considerable
practice and “if at first you don’t succeed” try several times; don’t give it up
—you may do it correctly the next attempt.
Page 144
In making the rapid brush letters, hold the flat side of the brush at the
same angle as your letter; the down strokes must be fine, the upper and
lower ones heavy. To a beginner this style will come very easy.
same angle as your letter; the down strokes must be fine, the upper and
lower ones heavy. To a beginner this style will come very easy.
Page 145
SPACING.
Treats of the arrangement of letters and words at the proper distances.
Good taste requires that the letters and words should look about the same
distance apart; the space on the line which the words occupies should be
evenly filled. If this is neglected the lettering will look “patchy”—crowded
in one place, scattered in another.
If, in making your sign, you find that you have “run out,” do not attempt
to crowd the word or words into a limited space, but separate them, and
begin a new line. Have all your wordings to begin and end so that
perpendicular marks can be drawn through the first and last letters of each
line. This will give your sign a symmetrical appearance and add greatly to
the neatness of the layout.
Treats of the arrangement of letters and words at the proper distances.
Good taste requires that the letters and words should look about the same
distance apart; the space on the line which the words occupies should be
evenly filled. If this is neglected the lettering will look “patchy”—crowded
in one place, scattered in another.
If, in making your sign, you find that you have “run out,” do not attempt
to crowd the word or words into a limited space, but separate them, and
begin a new line. Have all your wordings to begin and end so that
perpendicular marks can be drawn through the first and last letters of each
line. This will give your sign a symmetrical appearance and add greatly to
the neatness of the layout.
Page 146
SHADING.
To look well, and to add to the beauty of your work, shading must be
carefully executed in both lining and coloring.
Do not use a dark color for shading, as it will give the letter an
appearance of bulkiness.
Always use a delicate tint for shade lines, such as light grey, which gives
a very pretty tone to a sign. This shade can be made by mixing black, white
and Prussian blue.
Shade on two sides only; the left side of your perpendicular stroke and
underneath the horizontal one; or, vice versa.
Do not crowd the shade lines into your letter. Leave a space between
them about the thickness of the line in the letter itself.
To look well, and to add to the beauty of your work, shading must be
carefully executed in both lining and coloring.
Do not use a dark color for shading, as it will give the letter an
appearance of bulkiness.
Always use a delicate tint for shade lines, such as light grey, which gives
a very pretty tone to a sign. This shade can be made by mixing black, white
and Prussian blue.
Shade on two sides only; the left side of your perpendicular stroke and
underneath the horizontal one; or, vice versa.
Do not crowd the shade lines into your letter. Leave a space between
them about the thickness of the line in the letter itself.
Page 147
A NEW WINDOW CARD.
The panel cards, as shown above, can be made very artistic and
appropriate for any article you may wish to show.
For the illustration, should you possess the ability to execute a water
color or pen drawing of sufficient merit to place before the public, well and
good; otherwise, do not attempt it; a poor drawing will not improve your
card.
Among the monthly trade journals can be found any number of very
artistic designs, which may be cut out, pasted on a card and placed in
position back of the small opening. If this is done with proper care, it will
be almost impossible to detect the deception through the window, and the
drawing will have the appearance of being made expressly for that card.
In the larger opening, place your wording in small, neat letters.
The panels can be made any desired size—the ones shown here are 12 ×
15 outside, the large opening is 6 × 8 inches, the small one 4 × 8 inches.
The panel cards, as shown above, can be made very artistic and
appropriate for any article you may wish to show.
For the illustration, should you possess the ability to execute a water
color or pen drawing of sufficient merit to place before the public, well and
good; otherwise, do not attempt it; a poor drawing will not improve your
card.
Among the monthly trade journals can be found any number of very
artistic designs, which may be cut out, pasted on a card and placed in
position back of the small opening. If this is done with proper care, it will
be almost impossible to detect the deception through the window, and the
drawing will have the appearance of being made expressly for that card.
In the larger opening, place your wording in small, neat letters.
The panels can be made any desired size—the ones shown here are 12 ×
15 outside, the large opening is 6 × 8 inches, the small one 4 × 8 inches.
Page 148
LETTERING.
Before going further into technical instructions, it may be well to explain
the various styles of letters, and the uses for which they are required. It is
always best to use one general style of lettering for all your cards, as the
cards thus become identified with your establishment and form a sort of
trade mark which people quickly recognize. What style of letter you adopt
depends much upon your own taste and the skill and facility you acquire in
making any certain letters. While each of the styles shown in this article has
its special use, any one of them may be adapted for your work.
The letters and sample cards have all been drawn by William Lee Jukes,
who is acknowledged one of the leading card writers of America. He has
given us every useful style of letter known to the craft.
DE VINNE STYLE OF LETTERING.
Before going further into technical instructions, it may be well to explain
the various styles of letters, and the uses for which they are required. It is
always best to use one general style of lettering for all your cards, as the
cards thus become identified with your establishment and form a sort of
trade mark which people quickly recognize. What style of letter you adopt
depends much upon your own taste and the skill and facility you acquire in
making any certain letters. While each of the styles shown in this article has
its special use, any one of them may be adapted for your work.
The letters and sample cards have all been drawn by William Lee Jukes,
who is acknowledged one of the leading card writers of America. He has
given us every useful style of letter known to the craft.
DE VINNE STYLE OF LETTERING.
Page 149
But bear in mind that a plain, stylish, characteristic letter is the best—
something that people will read without noting the letter itself, that will
enable them to understand what the card says, without stopping to realize
whether the letter itself is well or poorly executed. That is the acme of
perfection in card writing. An illegible card loses all its intended effect. A
poorly executed card makes people notice that it is not well done. A fancy
card calls attention to the card itself and induces the reader to forget what
the card says. You don’t want to show what a fancy card you are able to
execute—at least the business firm that employs you doesn’t care a rap for
your skill. But you do want to impress a fact concerning your goods upon
the minds of a possible customer. Therefore, strive to make a neat card, a
modest card, and at the same time one attractive enough to arrest the
attention and induce people to read what it says.
This may appear a hard task to the novice, but by exercising good
judgment and experimenting in various styles of lettering you will be able
to get very close to the ideal you are seeking.
The requisites of a good card are simply these:
1. It must be sufficiently attractive to be noticed, to draw the eye of the
prospective customer.
2. It must be worded briefly and concisely, so that every word counts,
and you do not say too little or too much.
3. It must be so neatly and modestly lettered that the words are impressed
upon the mind of the reader without his realizing just how the letters are
formed.
Having impressed this upon you I will now describe the different styles
of lettering.
De Vinne letters are shown on the preceding page. This style of letter
makes a very neat and stylish card, and is used extensively by department
stores as a fixed style. Although it has the appearance of simplicity it is a
very difficult letter to make correctly, and I would advise beginners to use a
more simple style.
The capitals and small letters of a rapid brush lettering are also illustrated
in the engraving upon this page. It it is a very neat letter, easily made, and
much used where rapid work is necessary.
something that people will read without noting the letter itself, that will
enable them to understand what the card says, without stopping to realize
whether the letter itself is well or poorly executed. That is the acme of
perfection in card writing. An illegible card loses all its intended effect. A
poorly executed card makes people notice that it is not well done. A fancy
card calls attention to the card itself and induces the reader to forget what
the card says. You don’t want to show what a fancy card you are able to
execute—at least the business firm that employs you doesn’t care a rap for
your skill. But you do want to impress a fact concerning your goods upon
the minds of a possible customer. Therefore, strive to make a neat card, a
modest card, and at the same time one attractive enough to arrest the
attention and induce people to read what it says.
This may appear a hard task to the novice, but by exercising good
judgment and experimenting in various styles of lettering you will be able
to get very close to the ideal you are seeking.
The requisites of a good card are simply these:
1. It must be sufficiently attractive to be noticed, to draw the eye of the
prospective customer.
2. It must be worded briefly and concisely, so that every word counts,
and you do not say too little or too much.
3. It must be so neatly and modestly lettered that the words are impressed
upon the mind of the reader without his realizing just how the letters are
formed.
Having impressed this upon you I will now describe the different styles
of lettering.
De Vinne letters are shown on the preceding page. This style of letter
makes a very neat and stylish card, and is used extensively by department
stores as a fixed style. Although it has the appearance of simplicity it is a
very difficult letter to make correctly, and I would advise beginners to use a
more simple style.
The capitals and small letters of a rapid brush lettering are also illustrated
in the engraving upon this page. It it is a very neat letter, easily made, and
much used where rapid work is necessary.
Page 150
RAPID BRUSH LETTERING.
Modern Roman is a comparatively new face, and has lately been
extensively used for out-door advertising. The unfinished, outlined letters
will give an idea as to the manner in which this style of letter is made. It is
well to draw the outlines first and fill the letter in solid afterwards.
Modern Roman is a comparatively new face, and has lately been
extensively used for out-door advertising. The unfinished, outlined letters
will give an idea as to the manner in which this style of letter is made. It is
well to draw the outlines first and fill the letter in solid afterwards.
Page 151
MODERN ROMAN STYLE OF LETTERING.
Modern Egyptian—A bold letter is naturally a useful letter. The one here
shown is easily made and easily read. I recommend it as especially suitable
for show cards announcing a sale, or for like purposes. The letters must be
made a trifle irregular in order to be fully effective.
Script—This is one of many familiar styles of script. While this class of
lettering is fast losing its popularity, it is still preferred by many for show
cards. One who is a good penman may become very efficient in this style of
lettering with very little practice.
Modern Egyptian—A bold letter is naturally a useful letter. The one here
shown is easily made and easily read. I recommend it as especially suitable
for show cards announcing a sale, or for like purposes. The letters must be
made a trifle irregular in order to be fully effective.
Script—This is one of many familiar styles of script. While this class of
lettering is fast losing its popularity, it is still preferred by many for show
cards. One who is a good penman may become very efficient in this style of
lettering with very little practice.
Page 152
MODERN EGYPTIAN STYLE OF LETTERING.
AN ALPHABET OF SCRIPT LETTERS.
Unique Letters—The novice will, at first glance, consider this a very
difficult letter to make, but, on the contrary, it will be found very easy of
execution. The vertical lines must be heavy; the perpendicular ones light.
This face has no established regularity. The ribbons can be run through the
letters promiscuously to suit the taste of the writer. The centers may be
AN ALPHABET OF SCRIPT LETTERS.
Unique Letters—The novice will, at first glance, consider this a very
difficult letter to make, but, on the contrary, it will be found very easy of
execution. The vertical lines must be heavy; the perpendicular ones light.
This face has no established regularity. The ribbons can be run through the
letters promiscuously to suit the taste of the writer. The centers may be
Page 153
filled in, as in the word “cards,” or the letters outlined and shaded, as in the
word “signs.”
UNIQUE RIBBON LETTERING.
If you will practice on these letters you will acquire more or less of
proficiency in their use.
word “signs.”
UNIQUE RIBBON LETTERING.
If you will practice on these letters you will acquire more or less of
proficiency in their use.
Page 154
THE BLOCK LETTER.
OLD ENGLISH TEXT.
OLD ENGLISH TEXT.
Page 155
Block Letter—The block letter is scarcely appropriate for show cards,
although there are some occasions when you may use it. A large window
ticket or interior sign may be made with this letter, which is so severe and
regular that it will show distinctly a long distance. It is the most popular of
all letters for outside sign work. By spacing off a number of squares,
according to the size of the sign you wish to make (using a lead pencil so
that the lines may be afterwards erased), and following out the idea as
shown in our illustration, you will be surprised to find how easily block
letters may be made.
MEDIAEVAL LETTERS.
Old English Text—This style of letter is always popular, and always has
been and always will be. It is especially suitable for writing testimonials,
diplomas, charts, etc., or for initials or monograms—in fact, it is useful for
a hundred and one purposes. Most people know the letter and read it easily,
thus giving it a decided advantage over many complex fancy letters.
although there are some occasions when you may use it. A large window
ticket or interior sign may be made with this letter, which is so severe and
regular that it will show distinctly a long distance. It is the most popular of
all letters for outside sign work. By spacing off a number of squares,
according to the size of the sign you wish to make (using a lead pencil so
that the lines may be afterwards erased), and following out the idea as
shown in our illustration, you will be surprised to find how easily block
letters may be made.
MEDIAEVAL LETTERS.
Old English Text—This style of letter is always popular, and always has
been and always will be. It is especially suitable for writing testimonials,
diplomas, charts, etc., or for initials or monograms—in fact, it is useful for
a hundred and one purposes. Most people know the letter and read it easily,
thus giving it a decided advantage over many complex fancy letters.
Page 156
MEDIAEVAL LETTERS.
The mediaeval style of lettering, of which I show an illustration, is a new
face with an old-style appearance. You will find it a very neat letter for
show cards, and often used in connection with cards bearing illustration. Its
chief merit lies in the fact that it is black and legible, while at the same time
it presents an antique, stylish appearance. I shall show next month some
illustrations of fancy show card work in which this face is used to
advantage.
ANTIQUE ROMAN LETTERS.
The Speech Makers—These silhouette forms are now very popular and
are appropriate for show cards with suggestive headings, such as “Behold
our Fall Garments!” or “Allow me to introduce you to ——,” or “Here they
are!” and similar catch phrases. It does not require an artist to draw them. A
little practice will enable you to copy the outlines and then they are simply
filled in with the brush.
The mediaeval style of lettering, of which I show an illustration, is a new
face with an old-style appearance. You will find it a very neat letter for
show cards, and often used in connection with cards bearing illustration. Its
chief merit lies in the fact that it is black and legible, while at the same time
it presents an antique, stylish appearance. I shall show next month some
illustrations of fancy show card work in which this face is used to
advantage.
ANTIQUE ROMAN LETTERS.
The Speech Makers—These silhouette forms are now very popular and
are appropriate for show cards with suggestive headings, such as “Behold
our Fall Garments!” or “Allow me to introduce you to ——,” or “Here they
are!” and similar catch phrases. It does not require an artist to draw them. A
little practice will enable you to copy the outlines and then they are simply
filled in with the brush.
Page 157
THE SPEECH MAKERS.
Page 158
FIGURES.
FIGURES FOR THE DIFFERENT LETTERS.
In the illustration of figures shown, I have presented five distinct faces,
which may be used in connection with any style of lettering. The top row of
figures is Roman; the second Roman outlined; and here attention should be
paid to the method of shading, that the figures may stand out boldly. The
third line of figures is Egyptian, the fourth antique Roman and the fifth De
Vinne. This last is the best all-round figure you can adopt, as the De Vinne
is the best all-round letter. It is not an easy face to make, but once mastered
will prove of inestimable benefit to the card writer.
FIGURES FOR THE DIFFERENT LETTERS.
In the illustration of figures shown, I have presented five distinct faces,
which may be used in connection with any style of lettering. The top row of
figures is Roman; the second Roman outlined; and here attention should be
paid to the method of shading, that the figures may stand out boldly. The
third line of figures is Egyptian, the fourth antique Roman and the fifth De
Vinne. This last is the best all-round figure you can adopt, as the De Vinne
is the best all-round letter. It is not an easy face to make, but once mastered
will prove of inestimable benefit to the card writer.
Page 159
INDEX INITIALS.
INDEX INITIALS.
INDEX INITIALS.
Page 160
RIGHT AND LEFT INDEXES.
Page 161
SPECIMEN OF ORNAMENTAL CARD.
Page 162
EXAMPLES OF PANELS AND FANCY CARDS.
These indexes, which may be used in connection with any style letter,
will be found valuable. The hand should be outlined before the letter is
made. There is a general similarity in all the letters, and once you have
mastered drawing the hand you can easily apply it to any shaped letter. It is
intended to be used as an initial letter, an example being its connection with
the words, “We point with pride,” etc., at the end of the series. In the same
illustration is an example of a simply made but very attractive border.
These indexes, which may be used in connection with any style letter,
will be found valuable. The hand should be outlined before the letter is
made. There is a general similarity in all the letters, and once you have
mastered drawing the hand you can easily apply it to any shaped letter. It is
intended to be used as an initial letter, an example being its connection with
the words, “We point with pride,” etc., at the end of the series. In the same
illustration is an example of a simply made but very attractive border.
Page 163
Page 164
RIGHT AND LEFT INDEXES.
In this cut may be seen plain index fingers, pointing to right and left.
Also several small ornaments that will be useful for decorations and are not
too difficult for the beginner to master.
In this cut may be seen plain index fingers, pointing to right and left.
Also several small ornaments that will be useful for decorations and are not
too difficult for the beginner to master.
Page 165
FANCY CARDS.
The making of a fancy card is not as difficult as one would think.
The difficulty lies in the layout. If you can lay out and color a card
artistically, the lettering (no matter how poorly executed) will be offset by
the artistic arrangement. On the contrary, if these good and bad qualities
should be reversed, the good effect would be entirely lost. You will note a
reproduction of the card reading, “Early Spring Blossoms,” from which a
fair copy can be made. Of course in print the card loses half its artistic
value, from the fact that the colors cannot be shown. Spring puts one in
mind of dainty blossoms, consequently let your colorings be in harmony,
and the wording breezy and new.
EXAMPLE OF AN ARTISTIC LAYOUT.
The making of a fancy card is not as difficult as one would think.
The difficulty lies in the layout. If you can lay out and color a card
artistically, the lettering (no matter how poorly executed) will be offset by
the artistic arrangement. On the contrary, if these good and bad qualities
should be reversed, the good effect would be entirely lost. You will note a
reproduction of the card reading, “Early Spring Blossoms,” from which a
fair copy can be made. Of course in print the card loses half its artistic
value, from the fact that the colors cannot be shown. Spring puts one in
mind of dainty blossoms, consequently let your colorings be in harmony,
and the wording breezy and new.
EXAMPLE OF AN ARTISTIC LAYOUT.
Page 166
The illustration represents a card 14 × 18 inches (a good window size).
The body is lilac, on which is pasted a sheet of cream water color paper,
torn around the edge, leaving a margin of two inches. After tearing the
paper so as to leave a raw edge, touch the edge lightly with gold; then lay
out your work with light lead pencil marks. Copy the layout shown in the
illustration as closely as possible, changing the wording to suit. Next make
a series of graceful scrolls, taking care not to get them stiff, using a pale
lilac. Next daub on a cluster of blossoms, using several shades of purple;
that is, mix white with the purple, until it becomes very delicate. The wreath
is of a delicate lilac. Make letters and figures purple, shaded with lilac.
Paste paper on card, leaving space on same so that the right hand upper
corner may be slightly curled. Tip letters slightly on top with gold, and you
will have an artistic card.
The card reading “Japanese Garden,” will be seen ornamented entirely
with Japanese characters. It is a point to be remembered that the decorations
of a fancy card should always be in harmony with the wording. It is a bad
art and bad policy to have your ornaments foreign to the tone of the card.
Another illustration, “Signs,” shows an example of an artistic layout. The
same design may be used for other purposes, such as to advertise jewelry,
laces, wall paper or any decorative goods. But you will see at a glance it
would be inappropriate for teas, soaps or flatirons.
The alphabet illustrated is called an antique Roman face. It is an excellent
show card style, rather irregular, neat and easily made.
The body is lilac, on which is pasted a sheet of cream water color paper,
torn around the edge, leaving a margin of two inches. After tearing the
paper so as to leave a raw edge, touch the edge lightly with gold; then lay
out your work with light lead pencil marks. Copy the layout shown in the
illustration as closely as possible, changing the wording to suit. Next make
a series of graceful scrolls, taking care not to get them stiff, using a pale
lilac. Next daub on a cluster of blossoms, using several shades of purple;
that is, mix white with the purple, until it becomes very delicate. The wreath
is of a delicate lilac. Make letters and figures purple, shaded with lilac.
Paste paper on card, leaving space on same so that the right hand upper
corner may be slightly curled. Tip letters slightly on top with gold, and you
will have an artistic card.
The card reading “Japanese Garden,” will be seen ornamented entirely
with Japanese characters. It is a point to be remembered that the decorations
of a fancy card should always be in harmony with the wording. It is a bad
art and bad policy to have your ornaments foreign to the tone of the card.
Another illustration, “Signs,” shows an example of an artistic layout. The
same design may be used for other purposes, such as to advertise jewelry,
laces, wall paper or any decorative goods. But you will see at a glance it
would be inappropriate for teas, soaps or flatirons.
The alphabet illustrated is called an antique Roman face. It is an excellent
show card style, rather irregular, neat and easily made.
Page 167
You will notice that I illustrate some examples of artistic layouts. These
will form the basis for fancy show cards, and serve to attract attention.
When designs of so elaborate a character are used the letters themselves
should be especially plain and distinct.
A “sign shop” is an important requisite of a department store, and to
establish one in the proper way requires no little skill and judgment.
Difficulties and disputes are continually arising between the painter and the
heads of departments, which render it necessary to run the sign shop on a
strictly systematic basis, in order that the signwriter may do justice to his
work.
will form the basis for fancy show cards, and serve to attract attention.
When designs of so elaborate a character are used the letters themselves
should be especially plain and distinct.
A “sign shop” is an important requisite of a department store, and to
establish one in the proper way requires no little skill and judgment.
Difficulties and disputes are continually arising between the painter and the
heads of departments, which render it necessary to run the sign shop on a
strictly systematic basis, in order that the signwriter may do justice to his
work.
Page 168
THE DEPARTMENT STORE SIGN SHOP.
Mr. Jukes writes as follows concerning department store sign shops:
“I will point out a few of the difficulties I have found, and the way they
may be overcome. For instance, one morning I arrived at the store during
the busy season and found, to my surprise, no less than six individuals
(from cash boys up), each of whom possessed a scrap of paper, which they
forthwith fluttered in my face. I will not attempt to write the orders,
instructions, threats, etc., that I underwent. Suffice to say, that each one
insisted on his signs being made immediately, and all had been instructed to
wait for them.”
Mr. Jukes writes as follows concerning department store sign shops:
“I will point out a few of the difficulties I have found, and the way they
may be overcome. For instance, one morning I arrived at the store during
the busy season and found, to my surprise, no less than six individuals
(from cash boys up), each of whom possessed a scrap of paper, which they
forthwith fluttered in my face. I will not attempt to write the orders,
instructions, threats, etc., that I underwent. Suffice to say, that each one
insisted on his signs being made immediately, and all had been instructed to
wait for them.”
Page 169
SOME NOVELTIES IN PRICE TICKETS.
“Now, roughly figuring on the six orders, I found that it would take at
least four hours to get the work out. This is but one example of the many
little worries which tend to make up the everyday troubles of a department
store sign writer. I therefore believe that it is absolutely necessary to run the
shop under rules, an outline of which follows.”
Write up an order form and have printed and tableted, as our illustration
shows.
“Now, roughly figuring on the six orders, I found that it would take at
least four hours to get the work out. This is but one example of the many
little worries which tend to make up the everyday troubles of a department
store sign writer. I therefore believe that it is absolutely necessary to run the
shop under rules, an outline of which follows.”
Write up an order form and have printed and tableted, as our illustration
shows.
Page 170
Scraps of paper are very easily mislaid or lost, and you will find an order
blank of the below description a very necessary acquisition to your shop.
Charging the cards to their respective departments will teach your
customers to be caretaking, hence your work will be considerably lessened.
The cause is obvious.
It is well to make it a standing rule that no one should wait while signs
are being made. This rule may be easily enforced by a promise of their
prompt delivery when completed.
Signs should be made according to the order in which they are received;
that is, every one should wait his or her turn. This rule need not apply to
window tickets.
Make a sign for your shop to be read as below and after having signed by
some one in authority, hang it in a conspicuous place and conform rigidly to
its rules.
blank of the below description a very necessary acquisition to your shop.
Charging the cards to their respective departments will teach your
customers to be caretaking, hence your work will be considerably lessened.
The cause is obvious.
It is well to make it a standing rule that no one should wait while signs
are being made. This rule may be easily enforced by a promise of their
prompt delivery when completed.
Signs should be made according to the order in which they are received;
that is, every one should wait his or her turn. This rule need not apply to
window tickets.
Make a sign for your shop to be read as below and after having signed by
some one in authority, hang it in a conspicuous place and conform rigidly to
its rules.
Page 171
RULE I.
All orders must be written on the order blank provided for that purpose
and approved by the head of the department.
All orders must be written on the order blank provided for that purpose
and approved by the head of the department.
Page 172
RULE II.
Sale sign orders must be in the sign shop at least four hours in advance of
sale.
Sale sign orders must be in the sign shop at least four hours in advance of
sale.
Page 173
RULE III.
No one allowed to wait for signs or loaf in sign shop.
No one allowed to wait for signs or loaf in sign shop.
Page 174
RULE IV.
All work must be done in the order in which it is received. This rule does
not apply to window tickets.
All work must be done in the order in which it is received. This rule does
not apply to window tickets.
Page 175
PEN WRITING.
The up-to-date card writer has adopted the pen to do a great deal of his
work, and, indeed, it is often used to excellent advantage. A card written
with the pen is decidedly neat and novel, and is very effective. Perhaps it is
not so bold in appearance as a card written with a brush, but for a change
(and to be up-to-date) it may serve you to give the pen a trial.
It requires but little practice to obtain the mastery of this style of show
card writing. Buy a bottle of Sanford’s gloss black ink, and a few of
Soennecke’s round-writing pens, which may be procured from any
stationer, and see what you can accomplish. You will find it easy and
pleasant work, and soon be able to do very effective lettering. Learn to
make the simple strokes first, and then follow the style of lettering shown
you in the illustrations, as this letter lends itself easily and gracefully to pen
formation. Embellishments may be added to the letters to suit the fancy of
the artist.
The up-to-date card writer has adopted the pen to do a great deal of his
work, and, indeed, it is often used to excellent advantage. A card written
with the pen is decidedly neat and novel, and is very effective. Perhaps it is
not so bold in appearance as a card written with a brush, but for a change
(and to be up-to-date) it may serve you to give the pen a trial.
It requires but little practice to obtain the mastery of this style of show
card writing. Buy a bottle of Sanford’s gloss black ink, and a few of
Soennecke’s round-writing pens, which may be procured from any
stationer, and see what you can accomplish. You will find it easy and
pleasant work, and soon be able to do very effective lettering. Learn to
make the simple strokes first, and then follow the style of lettering shown
you in the illustrations, as this letter lends itself easily and gracefully to pen
formation. Embellishments may be added to the letters to suit the fancy of
the artist.
Page 176
Page 177
MARKING OUTFIT.
Fig. 1 is a section of a color mining stone bowl, which can be purchased
at paint goods stores. Fig. 2 is a piece of smooth marble, eight by ten inches
in size, on which to mix colors. The color mixing knife is also shown. Fig. 3
includes a set of camel’s hair brushes, assorted sizes. Fine brush A, is for
outlines; broad ones, B and C, for filling in. The color pots, 4, should be
provided with brush supports, D, so as to keep the brushes from the paint
when not in use. A triangle, 5, a square, 6, flat rule, 7, and a compass, 8, are
also required.
Fig. 1 is a section of a color mining stone bowl, which can be purchased
at paint goods stores. Fig. 2 is a piece of smooth marble, eight by ten inches
in size, on which to mix colors. The color mixing knife is also shown. Fig. 3
includes a set of camel’s hair brushes, assorted sizes. Fine brush A, is for
outlines; broad ones, B and C, for filling in. The color pots, 4, should be
provided with brush supports, D, so as to keep the brushes from the paint
when not in use. A triangle, 5, a square, 6, flat rule, 7, and a compass, 8, are
also required.
Page 178
THE USE OF STENCILS IN WINDOW TRIMMING.
As accessories to window trimming, stencils have come to perform a
useful part in that art of decoration. Where a number of show cards are to be
lettered in the same manner, no more effective or expeditious way of getting
them out is to be found than by stenciling the same, unless it is to have the
cards printed, a much more expensive process. Furthermore, aside from the
mere lettering on the card, the trimmer may add and reproduce any
ornament or device he choose, and there again avoid the expense of having
a cut engraved. The experienced window trimmer finds many uses for his
stenciling, and this process is especially valuable in decorating the
background of a trim, where plain white papers, colored cartridge papers,
cheap white cloth, burlaps and numerous other materials may be patterned
or lettered at very little expense and in such a manner as to add to the
attractiveness of the trim.
To begin with, the window trimmer needs but few things for cutting and
applying his stencils: a very sharp knife, any kind of extra thick paper (this
must be coated with shellac varnish or oiled to prevent the paint from
soaking into it), some paint brushes, oil and water color paints of the
desired colors, and a bottle of turpentine. After the pattern or lettering
chosen or designed is traced or drawn upon the paper, care being taken that
the design introduces cross strips to hold all together, it is cut away. Then
the varnish is applied. When dry it is taken up and the edges of the stencil
carefully cut here and there where the varnish may have run over, as it is
necessary to keep them clear and sharp. Next the desired colors are gotten
out; a large plate will serve for a palette, though separate saucers for each
color are preferable. The colors, if oil, are mixed with a great deal of
turpentine, but water colors should be applied “stiff.” Next the stencil is
held firmly against the fabric to be lettered or decorated, and quickly but
neatly painted over, care being taken that the stencil pattern does not slip
and rub the design, and that part of the fabric appearing through the stencil
each time is thus stamped. The design can be repeated on the fabric at will
and in any arrangement the window trimmer sees fit. On cards and thin
papers it is better to use thickly mixed water colors in place of oil colors, as
these latter are liable to spread. In the cities one can get stencils already cut,
As accessories to window trimming, stencils have come to perform a
useful part in that art of decoration. Where a number of show cards are to be
lettered in the same manner, no more effective or expeditious way of getting
them out is to be found than by stenciling the same, unless it is to have the
cards printed, a much more expensive process. Furthermore, aside from the
mere lettering on the card, the trimmer may add and reproduce any
ornament or device he choose, and there again avoid the expense of having
a cut engraved. The experienced window trimmer finds many uses for his
stenciling, and this process is especially valuable in decorating the
background of a trim, where plain white papers, colored cartridge papers,
cheap white cloth, burlaps and numerous other materials may be patterned
or lettered at very little expense and in such a manner as to add to the
attractiveness of the trim.
To begin with, the window trimmer needs but few things for cutting and
applying his stencils: a very sharp knife, any kind of extra thick paper (this
must be coated with shellac varnish or oiled to prevent the paint from
soaking into it), some paint brushes, oil and water color paints of the
desired colors, and a bottle of turpentine. After the pattern or lettering
chosen or designed is traced or drawn upon the paper, care being taken that
the design introduces cross strips to hold all together, it is cut away. Then
the varnish is applied. When dry it is taken up and the edges of the stencil
carefully cut here and there where the varnish may have run over, as it is
necessary to keep them clear and sharp. Next the desired colors are gotten
out; a large plate will serve for a palette, though separate saucers for each
color are preferable. The colors, if oil, are mixed with a great deal of
turpentine, but water colors should be applied “stiff.” Next the stencil is
held firmly against the fabric to be lettered or decorated, and quickly but
neatly painted over, care being taken that the stencil pattern does not slip
and rub the design, and that part of the fabric appearing through the stencil
each time is thus stamped. The design can be repeated on the fabric at will
and in any arrangement the window trimmer sees fit. On cards and thin
papers it is better to use thickly mixed water colors in place of oil colors, as
these latter are liable to spread. In the cities one can get stencils already cut,
Page 179
but there is no reason why the window trimmer should not design and cut
his own, as very little practice in this art makes perfect, and one’s own
designs are, for many purposes, generally more applicable. Stencil,
alphabets of various sizes can be bought, costing all the way from fifty
cents to $1.50 a set, according to their size. These the window trimmer will
find very valuable aids in lettering his show and price cards.
THE USE OF STENCILS IN WINDOW TRIMMING
THE STENCIL PLATE.
An exceedingly pretty effect was noticed in a down town New York shoe
dealer’s window, gotten by giving the trim for a background a screen of
light olive burlaps, upon which the monogram of the firm was placed in
stenciled pattern in metallic colors. A little ingenuity along this line cannot
fail to produce equally valuable effects. If the spaces left by a stenciled
letter are objected to, these spaces may be easily filled in with a brush, as is
shown in the letter “R” in the illustration. By the use of stencils many pretty
backgrounds may be made. Paper the sides and back of your window with
his own, as very little practice in this art makes perfect, and one’s own
designs are, for many purposes, generally more applicable. Stencil,
alphabets of various sizes can be bought, costing all the way from fifty
cents to $1.50 a set, according to their size. These the window trimmer will
find very valuable aids in lettering his show and price cards.
THE USE OF STENCILS IN WINDOW TRIMMING
THE STENCIL PLATE.
An exceedingly pretty effect was noticed in a down town New York shoe
dealer’s window, gotten by giving the trim for a background a screen of
light olive burlaps, upon which the monogram of the firm was placed in
stenciled pattern in metallic colors. A little ingenuity along this line cannot
fail to produce equally valuable effects. If the spaces left by a stenciled
letter are objected to, these spaces may be easily filled in with a brush, as is
shown in the letter “R” in the illustration. By the use of stencils many pretty
backgrounds may be made. Paper the sides and back of your window with
Page 180
common white print paper, and then stencil a pretty border around them,
with ornaments to suit your fancy. Stenciled ornaments may also be used to
decorate your card work. If you have a neat monogram of the firm’s initials
cut, you can use it in the corner of all your show cards.
A STENCILED BORDER.
THE STENCILED LETTER.
with ornaments to suit your fancy. Stenciled ornaments may also be used to
decorate your card work. If you have a neat monogram of the firm’s initials
cut, you can use it in the corner of all your show cards.
A STENCILED BORDER.
THE STENCILED LETTER.
Page 181
CHAPTER XII.
LINEN AND HANDKERCHIEF DRAPINGS.
LINEN DISPLAYS.
The month of January is generally considered “Linen Month,” and
special pains are taken by wide awake merchants to interest buyers by
means of attractive displays of these goods. We show with this several
modes of folding napkins. Fig. 1 shows a method of wrapping a fringed
napkin or doyly closely about a stiff wire rod. This may be used in many
forms of arches and grille work.
FIG. 1.
LINEN AND HANDKERCHIEF DRAPINGS.
LINEN DISPLAYS.
The month of January is generally considered “Linen Month,” and
special pains are taken by wide awake merchants to interest buyers by
means of attractive displays of these goods. We show with this several
modes of folding napkins. Fig. 1 shows a method of wrapping a fringed
napkin or doyly closely about a stiff wire rod. This may be used in many
forms of arches and grille work.
FIG. 1.
Page 182
FIG. 2.
FIG. 3.
The regular fan-shaped fold is well known to everyone. Our illustration
shows methods of varying the simple fan by producing the single and
double circles. What is called the “bishop’s mitre” is next illustrated, the
three folds being very simple and easily executed.
SAMPLES OF ARTISTIC TOWEL DRAPING.
We also show some samples of artistic towel draping, suitable for both
interior and window displays.
FIG. 3.
The regular fan-shaped fold is well known to everyone. Our illustration
shows methods of varying the simple fan by producing the single and
double circles. What is called the “bishop’s mitre” is next illustrated, the
three folds being very simple and easily executed.
SAMPLES OF ARTISTIC TOWEL DRAPING.
We also show some samples of artistic towel draping, suitable for both
interior and window displays.
Page 183
HOW TO FOLD HANDKERCHIEFS.
The following is a description of the handkerchief folds, the numbers
corresponding with these in the illustration “A”:
No. 1:—Pleat the handkerchief from corner to corner, and pin it in the
center. This will form a double leaf.
No. 2.—Fold the handkerchief once, forming a triangle; then pleat on the
straight edge, forming a single leaf.
No. 3.—First fold the handkerchief into a small square, turn the corner
over, forming a small triangle, then pleat as in No. 2. This will form a small
leaf.
Nos. 4 and 5.—Fold each corner to the center of handkerchief, turn the
handkerchief over and fold the corners again to the center, then pull out the
corners to the outside edge, forming a puff.
No. 6.—Pleat in some pleats across the handkerchief, as indicated in the
drawing, pin about two inches from each end, and draw the corners to the
center, forming a double circle.
The following is a description of the handkerchief folds, the numbers
corresponding with these in the illustration “A”:
No. 1:—Pleat the handkerchief from corner to corner, and pin it in the
center. This will form a double leaf.
No. 2.—Fold the handkerchief once, forming a triangle; then pleat on the
straight edge, forming a single leaf.
No. 3.—First fold the handkerchief into a small square, turn the corner
over, forming a small triangle, then pleat as in No. 2. This will form a small
leaf.
Nos. 4 and 5.—Fold each corner to the center of handkerchief, turn the
handkerchief over and fold the corners again to the center, then pull out the
corners to the outside edge, forming a puff.
No. 6.—Pleat in some pleats across the handkerchief, as indicated in the
drawing, pin about two inches from each end, and draw the corners to the
center, forming a double circle.
Page 184
HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY, SHOWING VARIOUS
FOLDS.—Morton.
FOLDS.—Morton.
Page 185
THE HANDKERCHIEF FOLDS, NUMBERED.—A.
Nos. 7 and 13.—Fold the handkerchief twice, making a small square;
then turn the sides to the center, as shown in drawing.
No. 8.—Fold as in No. 6. Draw both the ends over, and pin so as to form
a double half circle.
No. 9.—Pleat from corner to corner, leaving one end a little short, and
pin. This will form a double leaf.
Nos. 10 and 20.—Take a small nickel rod or smooth stick the thickness
you wish, commence from the corner of the handkerchief and roll, then pin
and slide off the rod.
No. 11.—Fold the handkerchief twice, making a small square—then turn
one of the corners over, showing the complete border.
No. 12.—Pleat the handkerchief in small pleats, as shown in drawing No.
8. Then bend in the center, which will form a small circle.
Nos. 7 and 13.—Fold the handkerchief twice, making a small square;
then turn the sides to the center, as shown in drawing.
No. 8.—Fold as in No. 6. Draw both the ends over, and pin so as to form
a double half circle.
No. 9.—Pleat from corner to corner, leaving one end a little short, and
pin. This will form a double leaf.
Nos. 10 and 20.—Take a small nickel rod or smooth stick the thickness
you wish, commence from the corner of the handkerchief and roll, then pin
and slide off the rod.
No. 11.—Fold the handkerchief twice, making a small square—then turn
one of the corners over, showing the complete border.
No. 12.—Pleat the handkerchief in small pleats, as shown in drawing No.
8. Then bend in the center, which will form a small circle.
Page 186
DESIGNS IN FOLDED HANDKERCHIEFS.—B.
Page 187
DESIGNS IN FOLDED HANDKERCHIEFS.—C.
Nos. 14 and 19.—Pleat as in No. 8, and draw both ends together. This
will form a large half circle—two pinned together form No. 14.
Nos. 15, 16 and 17.—Fold the corners to the center of handkerchief, then
turn the handkerchief over and fold again, the corners to the center. Turn it
over again and fold corners to the center. Now draw out the edges of the
handkerchief. This will form a cross. No. 16 shows the back, No. 17 the
front and No. 15 the center, with the corners turned back.
No. 18.—Pleat handkerchief as in No. 8, pin in center, and open both
ends.
No. 21.—Shows two double leaves, like drawing No. 1, one laid over the
other.
The illustrations “B” and “C” will give the reader an idea of the
numerous combinations that may be made from the different folds. With a
little ingenuity you can produce designs without limit. I also show several
windows in which examples of handkerchief folding are prominent, thus
affording the reader an opportunity of selecting a number of designs for his
own use.
Nos. 14 and 19.—Pleat as in No. 8, and draw both ends together. This
will form a large half circle—two pinned together form No. 14.
Nos. 15, 16 and 17.—Fold the corners to the center of handkerchief, then
turn the handkerchief over and fold again, the corners to the center. Turn it
over again and fold corners to the center. Now draw out the edges of the
handkerchief. This will form a cross. No. 16 shows the back, No. 17 the
front and No. 15 the center, with the corners turned back.
No. 18.—Pleat handkerchief as in No. 8, pin in center, and open both
ends.
No. 21.—Shows two double leaves, like drawing No. 1, one laid over the
other.
The illustrations “B” and “C” will give the reader an idea of the
numerous combinations that may be made from the different folds. With a
little ingenuity you can produce designs without limit. I also show several
windows in which examples of handkerchief folding are prominent, thus
affording the reader an opportunity of selecting a number of designs for his
own use.
Page 188
DIAGRAM EXPLAINING HANDKERCHIEF FOLDS.
If you have a big window to decorate with fancy handkerchief folds it
will be a good plan to get two or three salesgirls to assist in the folding.
Show them how to fold the designs you require and their work will save
you much valuable time. The pinning together on the frames is quick work.
If you have a big window to decorate with fancy handkerchief folds it
will be a good plan to get two or three salesgirls to assist in the folding.
Show them how to fold the designs you require and their work will save
you much valuable time. The pinning together on the frames is quick work.
Page 189
FOLDED HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY.—Morton.
Page 190
FOLDED HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY.—Mohukern.
The diagram will give you a better idea of the folds than the other
pictures, which are reproductions of direct photographs from the goods
themselves.
To produce the figure of “The Greek Cross,” proceed as follows: After
the handkerchief is spread out full size turn down all four corners exactly to
the center, producing No. 1. Then turn face downward and again fold the
corners to the center, along the dotted lines A, B, C, D. This makes No. 2,
which is also turned face down and the corners turned to the center along
the lines A, B, C, D, and secured with bent pins. The pattern is now turned
with the face upwards and the final figure is easily completed, as shown in
No. 3. Four loose laps appear, and by placing the forefinger of each hand
within these laps at point AA, and lifting the same the flaps straighten out
The diagram will give you a better idea of the folds than the other
pictures, which are reproductions of direct photographs from the goods
themselves.
To produce the figure of “The Greek Cross,” proceed as follows: After
the handkerchief is spread out full size turn down all four corners exactly to
the center, producing No. 1. Then turn face downward and again fold the
corners to the center, along the dotted lines A, B, C, D. This makes No. 2,
which is also turned face down and the corners turned to the center along
the lines A, B, C, D, and secured with bent pins. The pattern is now turned
with the face upwards and the final figure is easily completed, as shown in
No. 3. Four loose laps appear, and by placing the forefinger of each hand
within these laps at point AA, and lifting the same the flaps straighten out
Page 191
and form B (No. 3). When all the flaps are raised and straightened the cross
is formed and the figure completed.
Having formed this figure you may proceed to the more intricate folds
derived from this foundation. While making these first folds a couple of
sheets of stiff paper will be of assistance in keeping them in place while
turning them over. Another thing is to have the handkerchiefs ironed
smooth, and if they are stiff from starch all the better.
is formed and the figure completed.
Having formed this figure you may proceed to the more intricate folds
derived from this foundation. While making these first folds a couple of
sheets of stiff paper will be of assistance in keeping them in place while
turning them over. Another thing is to have the handkerchiefs ironed
smooth, and if they are stiff from starch all the better.
Page 192
Fold A.—Starting with No. 5 as a base, turn it over, then turn corners E,
F, G, H, to center. Allow it to remain with same face upward. Turn new
corner to the center and secure it. Now turn the handkerchief face upward
F, G, H, to center. Allow it to remain with same face upward. Turn new
corner to the center and secure it. Now turn the handkerchief face upward
Page 193
and center points will turn themselves outward. The inner points are turned
back from the center, making the complete figure as shown.
GRAND ARCH, COVERED WITH FOLDED HANDKERCHIEFS.—Morton.
back from the center, making the complete figure as shown.
GRAND ARCH, COVERED WITH FOLDED HANDKERCHIEFS.—Morton.
Page 194
FRONTAL ARCH OF FOLDED HANDKERCHIEFS.—Shogran.
Fold B.—This is the same as the center portion of fold A. It is made in
precisely the same manner, but with the addition that the loose outer points
of A are turned to the back and secured.
Fold C.—This is an effect produced by the use of two handkerchiefs
folded one within the other. Except as regards the use of the inner
handkerchief the pattern is nearly the same as fold B, differing from it only
in the first and last folds, by which the inside handkerchief is arranged
spread outside the handkerchief as in No. 1, and placed upon the other as
shown in No. 6. Fold the outer handkerchief as in No. 5, turn over, turn
corners E, F, G, H to center and secure them; turn face up, shake out outer
points, and turn back points A, B, C, D as shown in No. 7. Grasp points E,
F, G, H, roll them under, as shown in cut of fold C, and secure with pins.
Fold D.—Use two handkerchiefs laid evenly together corner to corner.
Make No. 2. Turn corners E, F, G, H to center; repeat and fasten. Turn face
up and turn back center points. When these points are turned back the under
Fold B.—This is the same as the center portion of fold A. It is made in
precisely the same manner, but with the addition that the loose outer points
of A are turned to the back and secured.
Fold C.—This is an effect produced by the use of two handkerchiefs
folded one within the other. Except as regards the use of the inner
handkerchief the pattern is nearly the same as fold B, differing from it only
in the first and last folds, by which the inside handkerchief is arranged
spread outside the handkerchief as in No. 1, and placed upon the other as
shown in No. 6. Fold the outer handkerchief as in No. 5, turn over, turn
corners E, F, G, H to center and secure them; turn face up, shake out outer
points, and turn back points A, B, C, D as shown in No. 7. Grasp points E,
F, G, H, roll them under, as shown in cut of fold C, and secure with pins.
Fold D.—Use two handkerchiefs laid evenly together corner to corner.
Make No. 2. Turn corners E, F, G, H to center; repeat and fasten. Turn face
up and turn back center points. When these points are turned back the under
Page 195
one is drawn a little further out than the upper, thus showing the borders of
both. It is well to have the borders of prettily contrasting colors.
Fold E.—Make No. 2. Turn corners E, F, G, H to center; turn over and
turn corners A, B, C, D to center and fasten. Turn face upwards. Take the
projecting points in the center and turn them outward; draw them a little
toward the corner, and the figure is complete.
both. It is well to have the borders of prettily contrasting colors.
Fold E.—Make No. 2. Turn corners E, F, G, H to center; turn over and
turn corners A, B, C, D to center and fasten. Turn face upwards. Take the
projecting points in the center and turn them outward; draw them a little
toward the corner, and the figure is complete.
Page 196
CHAPTER XIII.
ILLUSION WINDOWS.
One of the best modes of attraction for window displays is the “illusion”
centerpiece. It originated with dime museums and side shows, but is none
the less sure to arouse the curiosity of the observer. The illusion consists of
a beautiful young lady, the lower half of whose body is invisible to the
spectator, the upper portion so resting on a pedestal as to appear to have an
independent existence. The effect of the illusion is very striking. It is
ILLUSION WINDOWS.
One of the best modes of attraction for window displays is the “illusion”
centerpiece. It originated with dime museums and side shows, but is none
the less sure to arouse the curiosity of the observer. The illusion consists of
a beautiful young lady, the lower half of whose body is invisible to the
spectator, the upper portion so resting on a pedestal as to appear to have an
independent existence. The effect of the illusion is very striking. It is
Page 197
produced in a very simple manner: A pedestal of wood is arranged as shown
in the accompanying sketch, the upper portion being a hollow bowl resting
on a solid pillar or post, a sufficient portion of the bowl being cut away to
allow room for the young lady who is to take part in the illusion to stand
immediately behind the pillar and within the upper portion of the pedestal.
Extending at right angles from the pillar at either side are mirrors imbedded
in the pedestal and having the edges A B and G H concealed by sprays of
artificial flowers or other ornament extending from top of pedestal to
platform on which it rests. Similar sprays are placed at front. The lower
portion of the mirror is concealed by the drapery which constitutes a part of
the window display or of the background. The drapery at either side of the
window corresponds to that of the background. Its reflection in the mirrors
deceives the spectator into the belief that he sees the drapery of the
background beneath and around the pedestal.
This attraction could be used to advantage for the display of millinery,
fans, parasols, etc. The best effect is obtained by having the figure quite a
distance above the spectator.
in the accompanying sketch, the upper portion being a hollow bowl resting
on a solid pillar or post, a sufficient portion of the bowl being cut away to
allow room for the young lady who is to take part in the illusion to stand
immediately behind the pillar and within the upper portion of the pedestal.
Extending at right angles from the pillar at either side are mirrors imbedded
in the pedestal and having the edges A B and G H concealed by sprays of
artificial flowers or other ornament extending from top of pedestal to
platform on which it rests. Similar sprays are placed at front. The lower
portion of the mirror is concealed by the drapery which constitutes a part of
the window display or of the background. The drapery at either side of the
window corresponds to that of the background. Its reflection in the mirrors
deceives the spectator into the belief that he sees the drapery of the
background beneath and around the pedestal.
This attraction could be used to advantage for the display of millinery,
fans, parasols, etc. The best effect is obtained by having the figure quite a
distance above the spectator.
Page 198
THE VANISHING LADY.
“THE VANISHING LADY.”
“THE VANISHING LADY.”
Page 199
An amplification of the foregoing illusion is called “The Vanishing
Lady,” and we reproduce a picture of a window in which this effect was a
recent attraction. It occupied but a small space in the center of the display,
showing the bust and head of a pretty young woman, supported on a thin
pedestal with a large bowl top. From the waist down the young woman was
invisible; at the same time one could see all around the pedestal, which
produced a startling illusion. At short intervals this young woman would
disappear right into the pedestal (or so it would seem), and presently would
reappear with new hat, waist, gloves, etc. This would continue, showing
every ten minutes or so a complete change of hat, etc. The following
diagram with description will explain the workings. A platform 2 feet 6
inches high is built in the window, with three frames around, 7 feet high,
draped in green plush. Erect a thin pedestal, with two large wooden meat
chopping bowls, one on top, one on bottom, neatly enameled. One-quarter
of the bowls at back are cut away, two grooves cut in pedestal and two
mirrors set in, as in diagram. The mirrors reflect the sides of frame, which
Lady,” and we reproduce a picture of a window in which this effect was a
recent attraction. It occupied but a small space in the center of the display,
showing the bust and head of a pretty young woman, supported on a thin
pedestal with a large bowl top. From the waist down the young woman was
invisible; at the same time one could see all around the pedestal, which
produced a startling illusion. At short intervals this young woman would
disappear right into the pedestal (or so it would seem), and presently would
reappear with new hat, waist, gloves, etc. This would continue, showing
every ten minutes or so a complete change of hat, etc. The following
diagram with description will explain the workings. A platform 2 feet 6
inches high is built in the window, with three frames around, 7 feet high,
draped in green plush. Erect a thin pedestal, with two large wooden meat
chopping bowls, one on top, one on bottom, neatly enameled. One-quarter
of the bowls at back are cut away, two grooves cut in pedestal and two
mirrors set in, as in diagram. The mirrors reflect the sides of frame, which
Page 200
gives the appearance of seeing all around. A trap door in the floor allows the
girl to disappear down a simply constructed elevator into the basement,
where she changes her hat, neckwear, etc., to again reappear. The elevator is
balanced by two bags of sand. When the girl gets off, a bolt is put in the
beam to keep the platform from flying up. This window was a great
success. The second day the firm using it was compelled to put up an iron
rail in front of plate glass for fear it would be broken by the crowds. The
young woman was very pretty, and every hat was becoming; and her
changes were many during the day.
girl to disappear down a simply constructed elevator into the basement,
where she changes her hat, neckwear, etc., to again reappear. The elevator is
balanced by two bags of sand. When the girl gets off, a bolt is put in the
beam to keep the platform from flying up. This window was a great
success. The second day the firm using it was compelled to put up an iron
rail in front of plate glass for fear it would be broken by the crowds. The
young woman was very pretty, and every hat was becoming; and her
changes were many during the day.
Page 201
A CLEVER ILLUSION.
Fig. 1 shows an original method for a novel window attraction. It consists
in having a plush covered box on a table in the center of the show window,
and arranged in the rear as shown in Fig. 2.
The box should be about the right size to accommodate the head and
shoulders of a person. A hole is cut in the cover, through which the person’s
head projects. The entire bottom of the box is removed and a corresponding
opening is cut in the top of the table. By looking at the arrangement from
the front, the head, flags, box and table are seen, and every one wonders
where is the rest of the person. The box is of course much too small to hold
a person, and as the space beneath the table appears perfectly clear, the
mystery is increased. This illusion is easily performed. Fig. 2 shows a side
and rear view.
The whole plan is effected by means of two pieces of plate mirror, A and
B. These pieces should be high enough to reach from the floor to the lower
side of the table top, and wide enough to extend at an angle with each, of
about 45 degrees, the angle forming C, where the sides join, and ending far
enough back to cover the person. The angular formation of the mirrors will
reflect the floor in front, and if the edges of the mirror are draped so as not
to show from the front, the appearance from the street is that the space
Fig. 1 shows an original method for a novel window attraction. It consists
in having a plush covered box on a table in the center of the show window,
and arranged in the rear as shown in Fig. 2.
The box should be about the right size to accommodate the head and
shoulders of a person. A hole is cut in the cover, through which the person’s
head projects. The entire bottom of the box is removed and a corresponding
opening is cut in the top of the table. By looking at the arrangement from
the front, the head, flags, box and table are seen, and every one wonders
where is the rest of the person. The box is of course much too small to hold
a person, and as the space beneath the table appears perfectly clear, the
mystery is increased. This illusion is easily performed. Fig. 2 shows a side
and rear view.
The whole plan is effected by means of two pieces of plate mirror, A and
B. These pieces should be high enough to reach from the floor to the lower
side of the table top, and wide enough to extend at an angle with each, of
about 45 degrees, the angle forming C, where the sides join, and ending far
enough back to cover the person. The angular formation of the mirrors will
reflect the floor in front, and if the edges of the mirror are draped so as not
to show from the front, the appearance from the street is that the space
Page 202
below the table top is open, and that the person of the individual whose
head projects from the box is in some mysterious way confined in the very
limited room which the box affords. The plate mirror is the only costly
article, and as this is not injured by use for a few weeks, it can be resold, or
perhaps rented in the beginning.
head projects from the box is in some mysterious way confined in the very
limited room which the box affords. The plate mirror is the only costly
article, and as this is not injured by use for a few weeks, it can be resold, or
perhaps rented in the beginning.
Page 203
THE HIGH COLLAR ILLUSION.
The effect shown in figure 1 never fails to attract a great deal of notice. It
is easily performed by two persons as illustrated in figure 1. The former is a
front view, and from the street the people see a person sitting comfortably
in a chair in the center of the show window. The remarkable feature is the
very long neck of the person, on which is a collar two or three feet high.
The trick is done with mirrors as in figure 2. First, quite a tall man is
required to stand upright like the figure at the back. The upper part of the
high collar circles this man’s neck. The collar is cut open at the back so that
the shoulders are on the outside. The collar extends down and over the head
of the second man. The latter is of small size, generally a boy. He is placed
on chair G, facing to the front. Plate mirrors C and D are now set up at an
angle with each other of about 65 degrees. The edges of the mirrors join at
F, completely obscuring the body of the man at the rear from the front view.
It is necessary that the mirrors be cut out at E for the shoulders and
correctly matched at B, so that from the front or the street, only the man’s
head and the collar show. If rightly adjusted, persons looking in from the
front will see only the man in the chair, the high collar and the head. Of
course the effect is startling and novel, but it always interests. The edges of
the mirrors should be trimmed with any goods which it is desired to
advertise. The reflection in the mirrors make it appear as if the space back
of the chair were vacant.
The effect shown in figure 1 never fails to attract a great deal of notice. It
is easily performed by two persons as illustrated in figure 1. The former is a
front view, and from the street the people see a person sitting comfortably
in a chair in the center of the show window. The remarkable feature is the
very long neck of the person, on which is a collar two or three feet high.
The trick is done with mirrors as in figure 2. First, quite a tall man is
required to stand upright like the figure at the back. The upper part of the
high collar circles this man’s neck. The collar is cut open at the back so that
the shoulders are on the outside. The collar extends down and over the head
of the second man. The latter is of small size, generally a boy. He is placed
on chair G, facing to the front. Plate mirrors C and D are now set up at an
angle with each other of about 65 degrees. The edges of the mirrors join at
F, completely obscuring the body of the man at the rear from the front view.
It is necessary that the mirrors be cut out at E for the shoulders and
correctly matched at B, so that from the front or the street, only the man’s
head and the collar show. If rightly adjusted, persons looking in from the
front will see only the man in the chair, the high collar and the head. Of
course the effect is startling and novel, but it always interests. The edges of
the mirrors should be trimmed with any goods which it is desired to
advertise. The reflection in the mirrors make it appear as if the space back
of the chair were vacant.
Page 204
TO SHOW THREE DISPLAYS AT ONCE.
Fig. 1 is a section through the basement, ground floor and second floor of
a store in which an arrangement of reflecting mirrors makes it possible for a
person who is looking into the show window from G to see what is
displayed on the floors above and below. First the window floor is cut out at
A and the top at B. Mirrors, C and D, are adjusted on the back of the
openings, inclined twenty to thirty degrees. Each mirror is the width of the
opening, which would be about two-thirds the width of the window. The
mirrors must be pivoted on adjustable frames so as to permit a proper
setting for a good effect. The height of each mirror would be about five and
one-half feet, and swung so that about three feet is inside the floor and
ceiling line of the window. The large mirrors, E and F, are arranged as
shown. That in the basement should reach nearly to the ceiling, and should
be wide enough to take in the floor. The upper mirror is arranged similarly.
The next move consists in so placing the goods in the ground floor show
window that the edges of the small mirrors are covered, also the edges of
the openings to the basement and top floor. The spectator standing on the
sidewalk at G sees not only the goods in the ground show window, but his
sight line is reflected from H to I and he sees all that is displayed in the
basement. By glancing upward, his sight line is reflected to J, thence to K,
and he sees the second floor display.
Fig. 1 is a section through the basement, ground floor and second floor of
a store in which an arrangement of reflecting mirrors makes it possible for a
person who is looking into the show window from G to see what is
displayed on the floors above and below. First the window floor is cut out at
A and the top at B. Mirrors, C and D, are adjusted on the back of the
openings, inclined twenty to thirty degrees. Each mirror is the width of the
opening, which would be about two-thirds the width of the window. The
mirrors must be pivoted on adjustable frames so as to permit a proper
setting for a good effect. The height of each mirror would be about five and
one-half feet, and swung so that about three feet is inside the floor and
ceiling line of the window. The large mirrors, E and F, are arranged as
shown. That in the basement should reach nearly to the ceiling, and should
be wide enough to take in the floor. The upper mirror is arranged similarly.
The next move consists in so placing the goods in the ground floor show
window that the edges of the small mirrors are covered, also the edges of
the openings to the basement and top floor. The spectator standing on the
sidewalk at G sees not only the goods in the ground show window, but his
sight line is reflected from H to I and he sees all that is displayed in the
basement. By glancing upward, his sight line is reflected to J, thence to K,
and he sees the second floor display.
Page 205
Page 206
CHAPTER XIV.
MOTORS FOR MECHANICAL DISPLAYS.
The best motor for all general purposes is without doubt an electric
motor. These can be procured at a moderate cost as small as ¼-horse power,
which is sufficient for an ordinary mechanical effect.
MOTORS FOR MECHANICAL DISPLAYS.
The best motor for all general purposes is without doubt an electric
motor. These can be procured at a moderate cost as small as ¼-horse power,
which is sufficient for an ordinary mechanical effect.
Page 207
THE ELECTRIC MOTOR
May be attached to the regular supply wire, and is so little trouble to the
trimmer that it is preferable to all other motors whenever it can be used. It is
frequently necessary
May be attached to the regular supply wire, and is so little trouble to the
trimmer that it is preferable to all other motors whenever it can be used. It is
frequently necessary
Page 208
TO REDUCE SPEED
Of an electric or fan motor, and the simplest method is to attach
incandescent lights to it. For a fan motor two 32-candle power
incandescents will materially reduce the speed, as they cut off just the
amount of power required to run them.
In towns where there is no electricity one of the following simple motors
will be found serviceable and easily constructed:
Of an electric or fan motor, and the simplest method is to attach
incandescent lights to it. For a fan motor two 32-candle power
incandescents will materially reduce the speed, as they cut off just the
amount of power required to run them.
In towns where there is no electricity one of the following simple motors
will be found serviceable and easily constructed:
Page 209
A WATER MOTOR.
The water motor is made of tin, in the same form as an ordinary overshot
water wheel, is 30 inches in diameter by 3 inches wide, with a ½-inch rod
through the center. A 2-inch pulley is fastened to one end of the rod, for the
belt. Any tinner will make one of these motors and incase it in tin for $5 or
$6.
The water motor is made of tin, in the same form as an ordinary overshot
water wheel, is 30 inches in diameter by 3 inches wide, with a ½-inch rod
through the center. A 2-inch pulley is fastened to one end of the rod, for the
belt. Any tinner will make one of these motors and incase it in tin for $5 or
$6.
Page 210
ANOTHER TYPE OF SMALL WATER MOTORS.
There is usually plenty of water available in stores, and it does not
require much pressure to get from two to five horse power from a little
motor of so simple design that almost any one can construct one with a few
tools and at small cost. The accompanying description is for making a
motor from which to obtain air for a sand blast, wind power for window
devices, etc. The wheel consists of a cylinder on a shaft, having nearly
semi-circular buckets on its periphery. The water is directed by the nozzle
nearly tangential to the upper side of the bucket, and after traversing around
the wall of the bucket it leaves in a nearly horizontal line in the opposite
direction to that from which it entered. As the water leaves the bucket it
drops slightly below the level of the wheel and falls into the basin, from
which it passes off through a drain pipe. The water power is direct from a
hose. The motor will be very useful for operating mechanical window
devices. The wheel is sixteen inches diameter, and the buckets are one and
one-eighth inches square and two inches apart, and they are made of
galvanized iron, soldered together, while the wheel is one off from an old
ordinary bicycle.
There is usually plenty of water available in stores, and it does not
require much pressure to get from two to five horse power from a little
motor of so simple design that almost any one can construct one with a few
tools and at small cost. The accompanying description is for making a
motor from which to obtain air for a sand blast, wind power for window
devices, etc. The wheel consists of a cylinder on a shaft, having nearly
semi-circular buckets on its periphery. The water is directed by the nozzle
nearly tangential to the upper side of the bucket, and after traversing around
the wall of the bucket it leaves in a nearly horizontal line in the opposite
direction to that from which it entered. As the water leaves the bucket it
drops slightly below the level of the wheel and falls into the basin, from
which it passes off through a drain pipe. The water power is direct from a
hose. The motor will be very useful for operating mechanical window
devices. The wheel is sixteen inches diameter, and the buckets are one and
one-eighth inches square and two inches apart, and they are made of
galvanized iron, soldered together, while the wheel is one off from an old
ordinary bicycle.
Page 211
A SIMPLE WATER MOTOR FOR RUNNING WINDOW
DEVICES.
The axle is a piece of old water pipe. An empty box will do for the case
for the wheel. A wheel of these proportions, run with about sixty-five
pounds pressure per square inch at the nozzle the latter having ⅞-inch jet,
should revolve the wheel at a speed sufficient to develop two-horse power.
The water pressure is taken in at the nozzle, and the outlet is at the bottom.
If possible, take the water from the main pipe coming from the street main
and reduced to one and a half inches, just before reaching the motor. With a
head of water of forty feet, a power amounting to about 1½ horse power is
obtained, using one nozzle. This is sufficient to run an 8 or 10-inch fan, a
small dynamo or other light machinery in the store.
DEVICES.
The axle is a piece of old water pipe. An empty box will do for the case
for the wheel. A wheel of these proportions, run with about sixty-five
pounds pressure per square inch at the nozzle the latter having ⅞-inch jet,
should revolve the wheel at a speed sufficient to develop two-horse power.
The water pressure is taken in at the nozzle, and the outlet is at the bottom.
If possible, take the water from the main pipe coming from the street main
and reduced to one and a half inches, just before reaching the motor. With a
head of water of forty feet, a power amounting to about 1½ horse power is
obtained, using one nozzle. This is sufficient to run an 8 or 10-inch fan, a
small dynamo or other light machinery in the store.
Page 212
THE SAND MOTOR.
For slowly moving mechanical displays the following motor is reliable
and satisfactory:
A frame of wood (a) is first made, in which is placed a shaft (c) and a
wooden pulley (b). The pulley should be tightly secured to the shaft, the end
of the latter resting in a step (d) secured to the bottom of the frame. Upon
the top of the shaft place a circular board, which holds your display. A cord
is run once around your pulley, and then over a small wheel (e) at either
side, from whence both ends drop through a hole in the window floor. One
end of the cord is weighted, the other connected with a flat weight resting
upon the sand, which is your motive power. Make an upright box, as shown
in the illustration, with a partition in the middle. In the center of the
partition make a small hole for the sand to filter through. The size of the
hole regulates the speed of your motor. The box should have a cover for
each end. As the sand falls through the hole in the partition the weight
which rests upon the sand falls also, your pulley wheel being revolved at
the same time. When the sand has run through, which may be in an hour or
six hours, as you will arrange, cover the top of the box, reverse it, and place
the weight upon the sand again. It is the same principle as the hour glass,
and is easily made and operated.
For slowly moving mechanical displays the following motor is reliable
and satisfactory:
A frame of wood (a) is first made, in which is placed a shaft (c) and a
wooden pulley (b). The pulley should be tightly secured to the shaft, the end
of the latter resting in a step (d) secured to the bottom of the frame. Upon
the top of the shaft place a circular board, which holds your display. A cord
is run once around your pulley, and then over a small wheel (e) at either
side, from whence both ends drop through a hole in the window floor. One
end of the cord is weighted, the other connected with a flat weight resting
upon the sand, which is your motive power. Make an upright box, as shown
in the illustration, with a partition in the middle. In the center of the
partition make a small hole for the sand to filter through. The size of the
hole regulates the speed of your motor. The box should have a cover for
each end. As the sand falls through the hole in the partition the weight
which rests upon the sand falls also, your pulley wheel being revolved at
the same time. When the sand has run through, which may be in an hour or
six hours, as you will arrange, cover the top of the box, reverse it, and place
the weight upon the sand again. It is the same principle as the hour glass,
and is easily made and operated.
Page 213
Page 214
THE CLOCK MOTOR.
This is not very strong, but is capable of running simple and evenly
balanced mechanical displays.
Procure a common wooden weight clock, such as is called a “Columbus
Clock.” Any jeweler can purchase it for you at a small price, if he has not
one in stock. Run a wire through the highest geared wheel, sharp on one
end, to run on a pivot acting below. Connect your fixture to this pivot
wheel. Pull up the weight, and the mechanism will run very easily. It needs
to be rewound every three hours. To increase speed, add to the weight. If
your mechanism is nicely adjusted, it will require no more power to run it
than may be obtained from one of these clock motors.
This is not very strong, but is capable of running simple and evenly
balanced mechanical displays.
Procure a common wooden weight clock, such as is called a “Columbus
Clock.” Any jeweler can purchase it for you at a small price, if he has not
one in stock. Run a wire through the highest geared wheel, sharp on one
end, to run on a pivot acting below. Connect your fixture to this pivot
wheel. Pull up the weight, and the mechanism will run very easily. It needs
to be rewound every three hours. To increase speed, add to the weight. If
your mechanism is nicely adjusted, it will require no more power to run it
than may be obtained from one of these clock motors.
Page 215
CHAPTER XV.
MECHANICAL DISPLAYS.
Mechanical window dressing has made great strides during the past few
years, and has become an important factor in successful displays. When you
hear a decorator sneer at mechanical features you may be sure he has
himself no mechanical genius or he would not endeavor to belittle so
genuine an attraction. Not that mechanical displays are suitable for all
occasions, but there are times in every decorator’s experience when a
“motion window” is really a necessity, and many other times when
mechanism is a desirable adjunct to a display that otherwise would be
commonplace. People are naturally curious. They will always stop to
examine anything that moves, and will enjoy studying out the mechanism
or wondering how the effect has been obtained. Any decorator is capable of
figuring out for himself diverse attractive mechanical displays, but for the
benefit of those who may require preliminary instructions, or need on
occasion a device already planned, I shall describe several effects that have
been used by prominent decorators during the past few months, as well as
the staple mechanical appliances. One of the simplest centerpieces is the
MECHANICAL DISPLAYS.
Mechanical window dressing has made great strides during the past few
years, and has become an important factor in successful displays. When you
hear a decorator sneer at mechanical features you may be sure he has
himself no mechanical genius or he would not endeavor to belittle so
genuine an attraction. Not that mechanical displays are suitable for all
occasions, but there are times in every decorator’s experience when a
“motion window” is really a necessity, and many other times when
mechanism is a desirable adjunct to a display that otherwise would be
commonplace. People are naturally curious. They will always stop to
examine anything that moves, and will enjoy studying out the mechanism
or wondering how the effect has been obtained. Any decorator is capable of
figuring out for himself diverse attractive mechanical displays, but for the
benefit of those who may require preliminary instructions, or need on
occasion a device already planned, I shall describe several effects that have
been used by prominent decorators during the past few months, as well as
the staple mechanical appliances. One of the simplest centerpieces is the
Page 216
REVOLVING STAND.
To make this fixture use four solid wheels five and one-half, four and
one-half, three and one-half and two and one-half feet in diameter. Fasten
them three feet apart to a 3 × 3 in. post extending from the floor to the
ceiling; the post to have bearings at each end. The largest wheel to be
attached at the bottom 6 in. from the floor. Under this wheel, and fastened
to the post, a large pulley is used.
To make this fixture use four solid wheels five and one-half, four and
one-half, three and one-half and two and one-half feet in diameter. Fasten
them three feet apart to a 3 × 3 in. post extending from the floor to the
ceiling; the post to have bearings at each end. The largest wheel to be
attached at the bottom 6 in. from the floor. Under this wheel, and fastened
to the post, a large pulley is used.
Page 217
Make the turn in the belt by the use of small pulleys attached to the
motor. Regulate the speed to about one revolution a minute, and you have a
window that no man need be ashamed of.
motor. Regulate the speed to about one revolution a minute, and you have a
window that no man need be ashamed of.
Page 218
CONTRA-REVOLVING PILLARS.
The following mechanical fixture will serve to display almost any class
of merchandise:
Make four boxes, ten inches square and seven and one-half feet long, by
using 1-in. boards 10 in. square for the ends and 1-inch strips for the
corners. Cover all four sides with pasteboard, it being puffed with
cheesecloth. Then make a hexagonal box the same length, ten inches on a
side. Treat this the same as the others. Now fasten across the window, eight
feet from the floor, three two-inch strips. Place the first one 18 inches from
the glass, making them as far apart as the window will admit of, the
distance being equal, and the last one being at least ten inches from the back
of the window. On the underside of the two end strips fasten a curtain
fixture 12 inches from each end, and one of the same kind in the center of
middle strip; on one end of each box fasten a curtain fixture to fit those on
the strips. On the other end of each box fasten a 10-inch wood pulley; the
pulley to be 2 inches from the end of the box and 3 inches from the floor.
Make the connection from the floor to the end of the box with a 2-inch
square post; fit curtain fixtures in the floor and to the end of the posts; then
place the belt around the pulleys and attach to the motor; then trim the
posts. Place a false bottom in the window just above the pulleys, cover with
cloth, and the window is ready. Start your motor and the entire display is in
motion.
The following mechanical fixture will serve to display almost any class
of merchandise:
Make four boxes, ten inches square and seven and one-half feet long, by
using 1-in. boards 10 in. square for the ends and 1-inch strips for the
corners. Cover all four sides with pasteboard, it being puffed with
cheesecloth. Then make a hexagonal box the same length, ten inches on a
side. Treat this the same as the others. Now fasten across the window, eight
feet from the floor, three two-inch strips. Place the first one 18 inches from
the glass, making them as far apart as the window will admit of, the
distance being equal, and the last one being at least ten inches from the back
of the window. On the underside of the two end strips fasten a curtain
fixture 12 inches from each end, and one of the same kind in the center of
middle strip; on one end of each box fasten a curtain fixture to fit those on
the strips. On the other end of each box fasten a 10-inch wood pulley; the
pulley to be 2 inches from the end of the box and 3 inches from the floor.
Make the connection from the floor to the end of the box with a 2-inch
square post; fit curtain fixtures in the floor and to the end of the posts; then
place the belt around the pulleys and attach to the motor; then trim the
posts. Place a false bottom in the window just above the pulleys, cover with
cloth, and the window is ready. Start your motor and the entire display is in
motion.
Page 219
Page 220
REVOLVING STAR.
In the picture is shown a mechanical window which was very simple,
very attractive and which sold a great many goods. The center star, which
revolved slowly, was ten feet across, or from tip to pit, and had a green
incandescent light placed in the center, which flashed three times to each
revolution. The half-stars on the sides each contained a red incandescent
light which burned continuously. This display, while very simple, was one
of the most attractive windows I have seen, it being almost impossible for a
person to pass on either side of the street without it attracting their attention.
The goods shown were French ginghams arranged in regard to their
respective colors. The power used to move the star was a small fan motor
geared to gain power at the expense of speed.
In the picture is shown a mechanical window which was very simple,
very attractive and which sold a great many goods. The center star, which
revolved slowly, was ten feet across, or from tip to pit, and had a green
incandescent light placed in the center, which flashed three times to each
revolution. The half-stars on the sides each contained a red incandescent
light which burned continuously. This display, while very simple, was one
of the most attractive windows I have seen, it being almost impossible for a
person to pass on either side of the street without it attracting their attention.
The goods shown were French ginghams arranged in regard to their
respective colors. The power used to move the star was a small fan motor
geared to gain power at the expense of speed.
Page 221
A SKIRT SALE.
Here is a very pretty idea of a skirt sale, which the designer has
transposed to a “skirt sail.” The illustration will give you a fair idea of the
window. The background and floor were of pink colored material, the boat
being covered with white crepe paper and trimmed with red, white and blue
Here is a very pretty idea of a skirt sale, which the designer has
transposed to a “skirt sail.” The illustration will give you a fair idea of the
window. The background and floor were of pink colored material, the boat
being covered with white crepe paper and trimmed with red, white and blue
Page 222
ribbon. The sail itself was a handsome skirt of illuminated silk, thrown into
stronger relief by having all the other skirts black. Water, of course, was
represented by light blue goods, and ladder effects with rope covered with
3-inch strips of fringed crepe paper. The boat was given a rocking motion
by means of a simple device which we illustrate, attached to a ⅛-horse
power electric motor, geared down to a 5-inch crank. A rope is run through
a small pulley on the floor to another pulley under the boat, and then
attached to the end of the boat. A roller shade spring is fastened to the other
end, the boat being hinged in the middle.
stronger relief by having all the other skirts black. Water, of course, was
represented by light blue goods, and ladder effects with rope covered with
3-inch strips of fringed crepe paper. The boat was given a rocking motion
by means of a simple device which we illustrate, attached to a ⅛-horse
power electric motor, geared down to a 5-inch crank. A rope is run through
a small pulley on the floor to another pulley under the boat, and then
attached to the end of the boat. A roller shade spring is fastened to the other
end, the boat being hinged in the middle.
Page 223
MECHANICAL SHIPS.
Another method of imitating a ship riding the waves is shown herewith.
The hull, A, is a plain piece of board, and the masts are strips of wood
nailed to this. Purchase a common bed spring and attach it to the center of
Another method of imitating a ship riding the waves is shown herewith.
The hull, A, is a plain piece of board, and the masts are strips of wood
nailed to this. Purchase a common bed spring and attach it to the center of
Page 224
the keel, as at B, and attach the lower part of the spring to a piece of wood
on the window floor. If the balance is right it will be simply necessary to tip
the ship a little to set it rocking to and fro in imitation of riding the waves.
A little wheel can be set at C, and a cord put under it and connected with the
hull. The cord can run to a point inside the store, where it can be pulled
occasionally by hand, thus setting the ship to rocking. Or this cord can be
connected to a door or to an electric motor. Next, the ship is trimmed. The
hull, railing, mast, etc., are covered or wound with white or colored stuff,
and the sails are made of lace or any desired fabric. The surface of the sea is
represented with appropriate cloth. A slit should be cut, into which to put
the hull, and the edges are tacked to the wood several inches below the
ship’s rail. The cloth will then follow the motion of the ship, and closely
represent waves.
on the window floor. If the balance is right it will be simply necessary to tip
the ship a little to set it rocking to and fro in imitation of riding the waves.
A little wheel can be set at C, and a cord put under it and connected with the
hull. The cord can run to a point inside the store, where it can be pulled
occasionally by hand, thus setting the ship to rocking. Or this cord can be
connected to a door or to an electric motor. Next, the ship is trimmed. The
hull, railing, mast, etc., are covered or wound with white or colored stuff,
and the sails are made of lace or any desired fabric. The surface of the sea is
represented with appropriate cloth. A slit should be cut, into which to put
the hull, and the edges are tacked to the wood several inches below the
ship’s rail. The cloth will then follow the motion of the ship, and closely
represent waves.
Page 225
A WINDMILL.
A cheap windmill frame and wheel can be made as in the accompanying
drawing. The stand is wood, and the two upright pieces are bored out at the
top for the broom handle shaft A. A hub of wood, B, is attached to one end,
and four blades cut from thin wood are inserted. A large spool, C, is put on
the other end of the shaft, and a cord run over this to a wheel, D, below. The
frame, shaft and wheel should be trimmed with appropriate material, and a
pasteboard front put up in representation of the old-fashioned grinding mill.
The pasteboard should be painted in imitation of stone work.
A cheap windmill frame and wheel can be made as in the accompanying
drawing. The stand is wood, and the two upright pieces are bored out at the
top for the broom handle shaft A. A hub of wood, B, is attached to one end,
and four blades cut from thin wood are inserted. A large spool, C, is put on
the other end of the shaft, and a cord run over this to a wheel, D, below. The
frame, shaft and wheel should be trimmed with appropriate material, and a
pasteboard front put up in representation of the old-fashioned grinding mill.
The pasteboard should be painted in imitation of stone work.
Page 226
ANOTHER WINDMILL.
Another style of windmill can be made in this way: Place on the floor in
the middle of the window a box 24 in. square, 4 ft. high. On top of this box
fasten a wheel 5 ft. in diameter. On top of this wheel fasten an octagonal
box 3½ ft. across at the bottom and 2 ft. at the top, 3 ft. high. On the top of
this box fasten bearings for a shaft 3 ft. long. On the end of this shaft fasten
four arms to measure 24 in. from shaft; also fasten a large pulley to this
shaft in the center of the box. Over this pulley the belt is run to the motor
below. Over the top of the box construct a roof; then at the back of the box
that rests on the floor build a frame as wide as the box and 3 ft. high, this to
extend to back of the window. Over this make a roof so that the apex is just
a little above the large wheel. Cover all the wood with cloth, then with any
kind of goods you may desire. Start your motor and you will have an old-
fashioned windmill in operation.
Another style of windmill can be made in this way: Place on the floor in
the middle of the window a box 24 in. square, 4 ft. high. On top of this box
fasten a wheel 5 ft. in diameter. On top of this wheel fasten an octagonal
box 3½ ft. across at the bottom and 2 ft. at the top, 3 ft. high. On the top of
this box fasten bearings for a shaft 3 ft. long. On the end of this shaft fasten
four arms to measure 24 in. from shaft; also fasten a large pulley to this
shaft in the center of the box. Over this pulley the belt is run to the motor
below. Over the top of the box construct a roof; then at the back of the box
that rests on the floor build a frame as wide as the box and 3 ft. high, this to
extend to back of the window. Over this make a roof so that the apex is just
a little above the large wheel. Cover all the wood with cloth, then with any
kind of goods you may desire. Start your motor and you will have an old-
fashioned windmill in operation.
Page 227
Page 228
MECHANICAL SKIRT WINDOW.
I show herewith drawings for the construction of a wheel upon which
skirts may be displayed. The face of the wheel concaves, or slopes in
toward the center. White skirts, under which colored paper has been placed,
may be fastened around the outside, either in the form of a circle or a
hexagon, the bottoms of the skirts being at the side of the wheel. Then,
almost at the center, arrange four more skirts the same as the others. Then
cover the tops of the last skirts with a large, round ticket, fastened to the
wheel with a hat pin, and weighted, so that the ticket will remain stationary
while the wheel revolves. The wheel may be of any size, to suit your
window, and should be constructed of pine or other light material. It is
extremely simple, and may be constructed by any one, while, as may be
seen at a glance, it is sure to be a very attractive display.
I show herewith drawings for the construction of a wheel upon which
skirts may be displayed. The face of the wheel concaves, or slopes in
toward the center. White skirts, under which colored paper has been placed,
may be fastened around the outside, either in the form of a circle or a
hexagon, the bottoms of the skirts being at the side of the wheel. Then,
almost at the center, arrange four more skirts the same as the others. Then
cover the tops of the last skirts with a large, round ticket, fastened to the
wheel with a hat pin, and weighted, so that the ticket will remain stationary
while the wheel revolves. The wheel may be of any size, to suit your
window, and should be constructed of pine or other light material. It is
extremely simple, and may be constructed by any one, while, as may be
seen at a glance, it is sure to be a very attractive display.
Page 229
THE FOLDING STAR.
The design is a background, to be used in connection with any line of
goods. When the star is closed all that fronts the spectator is a mass of white
puffing. It slowly opens and reveals a recess in which is a display of goods
strongly lighted by hidden incandescents. The effect is beautiful and is sure
to attract attention. The back of the points, which form the star when it is
opened, are puffed in yellow or some other color harmonizing with your
display. Upon each point, the framework of which is shown here, is
fastened a spring hinge, such as is used on screen doors. These hinges
operate to close the points. Strong picture wire is used to draw back the
points, and this must be fastened as near the hinges as possible in order that
it may be concealed by the puffing, as it is on the face of the display, pulling
the points out. By covering the hinges and wire with stiff paper, and puffing
over that, a space will be left for the wire to run in and render it invisible.
The pulleys at the three corners of the framework, as shown in the drawing,
should be double, the wires running over them being spliced a few inches
beyond the pulleys. The large drive wheel shown in the basement should be
set up with one standard to allow the wires to make a complete revolution.
The design is a background, to be used in connection with any line of
goods. When the star is closed all that fronts the spectator is a mass of white
puffing. It slowly opens and reveals a recess in which is a display of goods
strongly lighted by hidden incandescents. The effect is beautiful and is sure
to attract attention. The back of the points, which form the star when it is
opened, are puffed in yellow or some other color harmonizing with your
display. Upon each point, the framework of which is shown here, is
fastened a spring hinge, such as is used on screen doors. These hinges
operate to close the points. Strong picture wire is used to draw back the
points, and this must be fastened as near the hinges as possible in order that
it may be concealed by the puffing, as it is on the face of the display, pulling
the points out. By covering the hinges and wire with stiff paper, and puffing
over that, a space will be left for the wire to run in and render it invisible.
The pulleys at the three corners of the framework, as shown in the drawing,
should be double, the wires running over them being spliced a few inches
beyond the pulleys. The large drive wheel shown in the basement should be
set up with one standard to allow the wires to make a complete revolution.
Page 230
Page 231
Page 232
If you have mirrors, and can set them on each side of the star at an angle
of about 45 degrees, they will by reflection give your display the effect of
three stars.
Where this idea is used for a millinery window the face of the display
could be covered by white flowers instead of puffing, and the points of the
stars with bunches of violets.
of about 45 degrees, they will by reflection give your display the effect of
three stars.
Where this idea is used for a millinery window the face of the display
could be covered by white flowers instead of puffing, and the points of the
stars with bunches of violets.
Page 233
THE MECHANICAL STAR.
First build a large star, six, eight or ten points, according to number of
articles to be displayed, which can be twice as many as the number of
points on large star. To the center of this star fasten a round shaft or axle,
allowing it to extend on back of star only, and be flush with front of star
(see B, fig. 2). On this shaft, and about 3 inches from the star fasten a wheel
with a groove in edge to receive a round belt (A, fig. 2). Then build upright
(C, figs. 2 and 3). On top of this upright fasten two bearings (D, figs. 2 and
3). Through these bearings pass the shaft (B) and fasten in place with pins
(E, E, fig. 2), these to prevent shaft pan coming out when in motion.
First build a large star, six, eight or ten points, according to number of
articles to be displayed, which can be twice as many as the number of
points on large star. To the center of this star fasten a round shaft or axle,
allowing it to extend on back of star only, and be flush with front of star
(see B, fig. 2). On this shaft, and about 3 inches from the star fasten a wheel
with a groove in edge to receive a round belt (A, fig. 2). Then build upright
(C, figs. 2 and 3). On top of this upright fasten two bearings (D, figs. 2 and
3). Through these bearings pass the shaft (B) and fasten in place with pins
(E, E, fig. 2), these to prevent shaft pan coming out when in motion.
Page 234
Next make twice as many small 5-pointed stars as points on large star. On
back, and exactly in center of these, glue some small pieces of heavy
back, and exactly in center of these, glue some small pieces of heavy
Page 235
cardboard, about the size of a penny, and in center of back of same star, at
bottom, fasten some lead or other weights. See fig. 1.
Next decorate face of large star by pleating the points in cheesecloth, or
any other way desired, and after having lettered the face of each of the
small stars pass a large pin through the re-enforcement in center of them
and fasten one to each of the points of the large star, as shown in fig. 1. The
large star, shown in center of fig. 1 should be treated the same as the small
ones. If you take hold of the grooved wheel or shaft and turn it now, it
should cause the large star to revolve carrying the small ones with it; but the
small weights on back of small stars will cause them to remain right side
up, as will also the star in center, and if not run too fast will produce a very
pretty effect.
bottom, fasten some lead or other weights. See fig. 1.
Next decorate face of large star by pleating the points in cheesecloth, or
any other way desired, and after having lettered the face of each of the
small stars pass a large pin through the re-enforcement in center of them
and fasten one to each of the points of the large star, as shown in fig. 1. The
large star, shown in center of fig. 1 should be treated the same as the small
ones. If you take hold of the grooved wheel or shaft and turn it now, it
should cause the large star to revolve carrying the small ones with it; but the
small weights on back of small stars will cause them to remain right side
up, as will also the star in center, and if not run too fast will produce a very
pretty effect.
Page 236
Figure 3 shows rear view and fig. 2 side view.
The dotted line shown in fig. 2 shows the background of window, which
should pass immediately in back of large star, and front of grooved wheel,
thereby concealing all other mechanism.
This design may be varied by removing the small stars and in their place
substituting small swinging shelves.
Should these shelves be used instead of stars, almost any kind of articles
(not too heavy or large) can be displayed, as could also slippers or shoes
hung in the same manner. In fact, this contrivance can be used in many
ways.
Now that the effect is all ready it becomes necessary to cause it to
revolve and it is imperative to in some way reduce the speed of the motor.
A practical speed reducer is shown in fig. 4. It is made as follows:
The dotted line shown in fig. 2 shows the background of window, which
should pass immediately in back of large star, and front of grooved wheel,
thereby concealing all other mechanism.
This design may be varied by removing the small stars and in their place
substituting small swinging shelves.
Should these shelves be used instead of stars, almost any kind of articles
(not too heavy or large) can be displayed, as could also slippers or shoes
hung in the same manner. In fact, this contrivance can be used in many
ways.
Now that the effect is all ready it becomes necessary to cause it to
revolve and it is imperative to in some way reduce the speed of the motor.
A practical speed reducer is shown in fig. 4. It is made as follows:
Page 237
Two cast iron side frames, between which I run a worm gear. Against this
gear is run a worm. On the end of the worm shaft I have a pulley with two
different sized grooves in the edge. To this pulley I run my motor belt, on
the shaft which runs through the worm gear and is allowed to extend
outside of frames. I fasten another pulley wheel with different size grooves
in edge and by running my power belt from this wheel to my display I get
whatever speed I desire, depending on which groove I run the belt from. I
do not expect many window dressers will be able to construct these gears
themselves, but any good machinist can make it and once secured it will
always be ready for use, take up very little room in window and pay for
itself many times over.
gear is run a worm. On the end of the worm shaft I have a pulley with two
different sized grooves in the edge. To this pulley I run my motor belt, on
the shaft which runs through the worm gear and is allowed to extend
outside of frames. I fasten another pulley wheel with different size grooves
in edge and by running my power belt from this wheel to my display I get
whatever speed I desire, depending on which groove I run the belt from. I
do not expect many window dressers will be able to construct these gears
themselves, but any good machinist can make it and once secured it will
always be ready for use, take up very little room in window and pay for
itself many times over.
Page 238
REVOLVING WHEEL.
Figs. 2 to 4 illustrate how to make a revolving wheel for showing goods.
The stand is made of four pieces of 1 × 1½ pine, A, three feet high, and the
top joined with cross pieces, B, of the same stock. Bore an inch hole for the
wheel shaft on each side. The wheel is three and a half feet in diameter.
Hooping will do for the rims, C, and these are nailed to wood spokes and
the latter wired to a hub made from a block of wood, and bored out for the
inch shaft on which the wheel is to turn. The wheel is strengthened by
nailing on a second hoop at D. The whole affair should be covered with
cloth, and swinging boxes attached to the rims, in which to put goods. The
view 3 shows the width of the wheel and a wood grooved pulley fastened to
the wheel shaft at F. Fig. 4 shows how to make the wheel turn about four
times per minute. After the wheel and frame are set up in the window, make
a stand of wood pieces, C C, and put a 2-inch diameter round piece of
wood, H, in holes cut for same and arrange for turning by means of the
crank, J. Put up a grooved wood pulley at L, and run a cord over this. One
end of the cord is weighted with a few bricks, M. The pulley, K, is the same
as pulley, F, in fig. 3. Another cord encircles this and also the round piece,
H. The crank, J, is turned, and thirty or forty turns of the cord taken on the
Figs. 2 to 4 illustrate how to make a revolving wheel for showing goods.
The stand is made of four pieces of 1 × 1½ pine, A, three feet high, and the
top joined with cross pieces, B, of the same stock. Bore an inch hole for the
wheel shaft on each side. The wheel is three and a half feet in diameter.
Hooping will do for the rims, C, and these are nailed to wood spokes and
the latter wired to a hub made from a block of wood, and bored out for the
inch shaft on which the wheel is to turn. The wheel is strengthened by
nailing on a second hoop at D. The whole affair should be covered with
cloth, and swinging boxes attached to the rims, in which to put goods. The
view 3 shows the width of the wheel and a wood grooved pulley fastened to
the wheel shaft at F. Fig. 4 shows how to make the wheel turn about four
times per minute. After the wheel and frame are set up in the window, make
a stand of wood pieces, C C, and put a 2-inch diameter round piece of
wood, H, in holes cut for same and arrange for turning by means of the
crank, J. Put up a grooved wood pulley at L, and run a cord over this. One
end of the cord is weighted with a few bricks, M. The pulley, K, is the same
as pulley, F, in fig. 3. Another cord encircles this and also the round piece,
H. The crank, J, is turned, and thirty or forty turns of the cord taken on the
Page 239
round piece H. Then the device is left alone, and the weight of the bricks
steadily pulls on the cord, gradually unwinding it, causing the round piece,
H, to turn and slowly revolve the big wheel. After an hour or so the cord is
unwound and is rewound by turning the crank again.
steadily pulls on the cord, gradually unwinding it, causing the round piece,
H, to turn and slowly revolve the big wheel. After an hour or so the cord is
unwound and is rewound by turning the crank again.
Page 240
HALF REVOLVING BUSTS.
For a millinery display, or any other attraction of a like character, two
bust forms may be made to turn half way around, in opposite directions,
then pause, and turn back to their original positions. This is accomplished
by means of a large wheel to which two eccentrics are attached, each
eccentric being connected with a standard holding a bust. Our diagram
shows the floor plan of the mechanism, the large 18-inch wheel, which is
run by means of an electric motor, turning the eccentrics as indicated. The
standards supporting the wax figures run through the centers of the side
pillars. The bowls at the top remain stationary, while the busts turn.
For a millinery display, or any other attraction of a like character, two
bust forms may be made to turn half way around, in opposite directions,
then pause, and turn back to their original positions. This is accomplished
by means of a large wheel to which two eccentrics are attached, each
eccentric being connected with a standard holding a bust. Our diagram
shows the floor plan of the mechanism, the large 18-inch wheel, which is
run by means of an electric motor, turning the eccentrics as indicated. The
standards supporting the wax figures run through the centers of the side
pillars. The bowls at the top remain stationary, while the busts turn.
Page 241
STRAW HAT MACHINE.
A novel mechanical display of straw hats is arranged as follows:
Make a box 4½ ft. high and 18 in. wide; open two sides 15 in. from the
top; set this box on end, the open side to the top. The open side also to face
the glass and to be about half way back and to one side of the window.
Make a little platform 12 × 18, about 6 in. below the opening in front; a like
platform, only to be longer and even with the opening in the back. Now
A novel mechanical display of straw hats is arranged as follows:
Make a box 4½ ft. high and 18 in. wide; open two sides 15 in. from the
top; set this box on end, the open side to the top. The open side also to face
the glass and to be about half way back and to one side of the window.
Make a little platform 12 × 18, about 6 in. below the opening in front; a like
platform, only to be longer and even with the opening in the back. Now
Page 242
bore a hole in each side of the box about the center of the opening and
insert a shaft. On this shaft inside the box nail four light boards, 6 in. wide
and 15 in. long; then fasten a 4-in. pulley to the end of the shaft and connect
with the motor. Now fill the back of the window up 3 or 4 ft. with straw,
letting it slope down toward the glass. Cover the entire floor with straw, and
also the platform in the back. Then place hats on stands on the floor and
suspend hats from rods above them. Place three or four hats on the stand in
front, and make a sign which reads, “Straw hats while you wait.” Start your
motor and you have a window that will sell hats.
EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY WITH HALF REVOLVING
BUSTS.—McFaddin.
insert a shaft. On this shaft inside the box nail four light boards, 6 in. wide
and 15 in. long; then fasten a 4-in. pulley to the end of the shaft and connect
with the motor. Now fill the back of the window up 3 or 4 ft. with straw,
letting it slope down toward the glass. Cover the entire floor with straw, and
also the platform in the back. Then place hats on stands on the floor and
suspend hats from rods above them. Place three or four hats on the stand in
front, and make a sign which reads, “Straw hats while you wait.” Start your
motor and you have a window that will sell hats.
EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY WITH HALF REVOLVING
BUSTS.—McFaddin.
Page 243
Page 244
“AN ERUPTION OF VESUVIUS.”
The designer describes this effect as follows:
“In describing the window as seen through the plate glass, one can easily
imagine he is looking at a bit of nature, only in a miniature form. In the
foreground, moored to a dock, is seen a gondola, majestically rising and
falling upon an effect that looks precisely like a deep, clear body of water,
with a slow, even motion so perfect that it is impossible to determine when
it begins or stops. In the distance old Vesuvius is belching fire and lava,
which looks so real it is hard to believe it is only an illusion.”
The drawing will at a glance give a fair idea of the mechanical
contrivance used to obtain these effects.
The designer describes this effect as follows:
“In describing the window as seen through the plate glass, one can easily
imagine he is looking at a bit of nature, only in a miniature form. In the
foreground, moored to a dock, is seen a gondola, majestically rising and
falling upon an effect that looks precisely like a deep, clear body of water,
with a slow, even motion so perfect that it is impossible to determine when
it begins or stops. In the distance old Vesuvius is belching fire and lava,
which looks so real it is hard to believe it is only an illusion.”
The drawing will at a glance give a fair idea of the mechanical
contrivance used to obtain these effects.
Page 245
DIAGRAM SHOWING MECHANISM OF THE VOLCANO AND MOON EFFECTS’.
The rising and falling motion to the water effect was made on the plan of
scale beams, as can be seen in drawing. Cords were fastened to ends of
levers marked ‘B’ and passing them under rollers ‘E’ and hooking the other
ends to crank-wheel ‘C.’ As wheel ‘C’ would revolve it pulled levers down,
causing center, containing water effect, on which was placed the gondola, to
rise, and in turn the weight of the gondola would cause the center to fall
when levers were released by wheel. I used window weights to balance it,
allowing center to be heavy enough to sink of its own weight.
The rising and falling motion to the water effect was made on the plan of
scale beams, as can be seen in drawing. Cords were fastened to ends of
levers marked ‘B’ and passing them under rollers ‘E’ and hooking the other
ends to crank-wheel ‘C.’ As wheel ‘C’ would revolve it pulled levers down,
causing center, containing water effect, on which was placed the gondola, to
rise, and in turn the weight of the gondola would cause the center to fall
when levers were released by wheel. I used window weights to balance it,
allowing center to be heavy enough to sink of its own weight.
Page 246
Page 247
DESIGN SHOWING THE “ERUPTION OF VESUVIUS.”—Shogran.
The water effect was obtained by placing a piece of double strength
window glass, 3 ft. × 3 ft. 6 in. on the frame, the detail of which you will
find illustrated. Underneath it I placed a canvas frame painted near the same
shade as the water in the foreground of my canvas representing Vesuvius.
On the top of said frame I puffed loosely very fine veiling. I also puffed the
veiling on top glass. The painted canvas frame gave me the water color, the
glass, the realistic reflection, and the veiling mystified the whole. Hence a
perfect water illusion, well worth trying. The fire and lava belching from
the crater of mountain I obtained in the following manner: I first covered
the entire canvas on back with heavy paper, making it perfectly opaque,
then I tore a hole, beginning at the top or crater of mountain, about 5 inches
wide, widening gradually as I went upwards, and to one side. Then I cut
several openings large enough to admit little streaks of light on the left
slope of mountain to represent lava running down the side, above which I
cut a round hole for the moon; all which can be plainly seen in the picture.
Back of opening representing lava I pasted different shades of red paper
The water effect was obtained by placing a piece of double strength
window glass, 3 ft. × 3 ft. 6 in. on the frame, the detail of which you will
find illustrated. Underneath it I placed a canvas frame painted near the same
shade as the water in the foreground of my canvas representing Vesuvius.
On the top of said frame I puffed loosely very fine veiling. I also puffed the
veiling on top glass. The painted canvas frame gave me the water color, the
glass, the realistic reflection, and the veiling mystified the whole. Hence a
perfect water illusion, well worth trying. The fire and lava belching from
the crater of mountain I obtained in the following manner: I first covered
the entire canvas on back with heavy paper, making it perfectly opaque,
then I tore a hole, beginning at the top or crater of mountain, about 5 inches
wide, widening gradually as I went upwards, and to one side. Then I cut
several openings large enough to admit little streaks of light on the left
slope of mountain to represent lava running down the side, above which I
cut a round hole for the moon; all which can be plainly seen in the picture.
Back of opening representing lava I pasted different shades of red paper
Page 248
(tissue paper) and back of moon yellow. Back of the large opening at the
top of mountain I placed a large wheel made of two layers of red tissue
paper with little tufts of grey wadding between. Back of this wheel, exactly
opposite the opening representing the crater, I placed a lamp. When set in
motion I had the most beautiful representation of real, burning fire. As the
different thicknesses of the wheel would pass the lamp they were
illuminated, and as they passed on up they would cool off and finally die,
disappearing in the smoke and steam, which was represented by carefully
tufted white and grey cotton on the front of canvas. Two lamps higher up
illuminated the smoke and steam in the sky; another to light up streaks of
lava seen on the left slope; and the fifth lamp for the moon, which threw its
yellow glow in beautiful contrast to the ever raging, burning flames from
the crater of Vesuvius. In conclusion, I wish to say that I know my attempt
at describing these effects is a failure, compared to seeing them in reality.
Mr. Shogran won a gold medal for inventing this fine effect.
top of mountain I placed a large wheel made of two layers of red tissue
paper with little tufts of grey wadding between. Back of this wheel, exactly
opposite the opening representing the crater, I placed a lamp. When set in
motion I had the most beautiful representation of real, burning fire. As the
different thicknesses of the wheel would pass the lamp they were
illuminated, and as they passed on up they would cool off and finally die,
disappearing in the smoke and steam, which was represented by carefully
tufted white and grey cotton on the front of canvas. Two lamps higher up
illuminated the smoke and steam in the sky; another to light up streaks of
lava seen on the left slope; and the fifth lamp for the moon, which threw its
yellow glow in beautiful contrast to the ever raging, burning flames from
the crater of Vesuvius. In conclusion, I wish to say that I know my attempt
at describing these effects is a failure, compared to seeing them in reality.
Mr. Shogran won a gold medal for inventing this fine effect.
Page 249
A STUDY IN ASTRONOMY.
One of the most remarkable mechanical displays yet conceived is that
designed by M. M. Mohnkern, called “A Study in Astronomy.” It is not
theoretical, but has been made and exhibited by Mr. Mohnkern and has
attracted and delighted thousands. It is, to be sure, rather complicated in
construction, and requires a mechanic to build it, so that it will work
smoothly; but it is thoroughly practical, and so very novel and beautiful
when completed that it will repay the labor expended to produce it.
The device is intended as a background for any display of goods, and
may be utilized by any merchant who has a show window, the expense
being very little aside from labor.
In his description Mr. Mohnkern says: “In looking at this display through
the show window one can easily imagine he has been transferred to some
other planet and is looking at the solar system, where old mother earth
revolves slowly around the sun. In the distance the moon is changing, first
in the dark of the moon to the first quarter, then to the half, the third quarter
and the full moon, decreasing again in the same way. The stars twinkle as
naturally as they do in the heavens; the whole display is grand and awe
inspiring.” We can well believe this.
Fig. 1 is the front view of the window, showing the sun, moon, earth and
stars, and the orbit of the earth where it revolves around the sun. A strip of
lumber was bent into a large circle, almost the full size of the window.
Black cambric was stretched from this to the four sides of the window, and
openings cut in the corners for the stars and moon, as represented, C C C
being the stars, and D the moon. Back of each of the three stars in each
corner small wheels were placed (see F F F, Fig. 2). These wheels were
twice as large as the stars, and placed so that the center of each wheel was
directly opposite a point of a star. Then half of each wheel was covered with
black cambric and the other half with bright red. As the wheels revolved
very fast, it made them twinkle like real stars. The moon was a large round
hole cut in the cambric with yellow tissue paper pasted back of it, and an
electric light suspended behind the opening. A disk is made, a little larger
than the opening, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6. A, Fig. 5, is the opening of the
One of the most remarkable mechanical displays yet conceived is that
designed by M. M. Mohnkern, called “A Study in Astronomy.” It is not
theoretical, but has been made and exhibited by Mr. Mohnkern and has
attracted and delighted thousands. It is, to be sure, rather complicated in
construction, and requires a mechanic to build it, so that it will work
smoothly; but it is thoroughly practical, and so very novel and beautiful
when completed that it will repay the labor expended to produce it.
The device is intended as a background for any display of goods, and
may be utilized by any merchant who has a show window, the expense
being very little aside from labor.
In his description Mr. Mohnkern says: “In looking at this display through
the show window one can easily imagine he has been transferred to some
other planet and is looking at the solar system, where old mother earth
revolves slowly around the sun. In the distance the moon is changing, first
in the dark of the moon to the first quarter, then to the half, the third quarter
and the full moon, decreasing again in the same way. The stars twinkle as
naturally as they do in the heavens; the whole display is grand and awe
inspiring.” We can well believe this.
Fig. 1 is the front view of the window, showing the sun, moon, earth and
stars, and the orbit of the earth where it revolves around the sun. A strip of
lumber was bent into a large circle, almost the full size of the window.
Black cambric was stretched from this to the four sides of the window, and
openings cut in the corners for the stars and moon, as represented, C C C
being the stars, and D the moon. Back of each of the three stars in each
corner small wheels were placed (see F F F, Fig. 2). These wheels were
twice as large as the stars, and placed so that the center of each wheel was
directly opposite a point of a star. Then half of each wheel was covered with
black cambric and the other half with bright red. As the wheels revolved
very fast, it made them twinkle like real stars. The moon was a large round
hole cut in the cambric with yellow tissue paper pasted back of it, and an
electric light suspended behind the opening. A disk is made, a little larger
than the opening, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6. A, Fig. 5, is the opening of the
Page 250
cambric; B is the disk; C is where the disk is connected with the axle. This
disk is covered with black cambric and placed between the cambric
background and the window pane. Thus it will be seen that as the disk
slowly swung around, the changes of the moon would occur.
Two more strips of lumber were now bent into circles, about eighteen to
twenty inches smaller in diameter than the first circle. One of these was
placed flush with the first circle and held in position by means of braces I I.
This circle was then covered by stretching black cambric snugly over it, and
an opening was cut in the center to represent the sun (B, Fig. 1). Yellow
tissue paper was pasted over this, and an electric light suspended directly
back of it.
disk is covered with black cambric and placed between the cambric
background and the window pane. Thus it will be seen that as the disk
slowly swung around, the changes of the moon would occur.
Two more strips of lumber were now bent into circles, about eighteen to
twenty inches smaller in diameter than the first circle. One of these was
placed flush with the first circle and held in position by means of braces I I.
This circle was then covered by stretching black cambric snugly over it, and
an opening was cut in the center to represent the sun (B, Fig. 1). Yellow
tissue paper was pasted over this, and an electric light suspended directly
back of it.
Page 251
Star-shaped openings were now cut in this cambric, as shown by the stars
in the central portion of Fig. 1.
The second circle was placed about six inches back of this (see Fig. 3, A
1 and A 2). It was held in position by braces F F, Fig. 3. These two circles
formed a track on which the earth slowly revolved. Another circle was next
formed, similar to the first one, except that this had four spokes, I I I and J,
Fig. 2. The spoke marked J was long enough to reach the center of the globe
and connect to an axle, as seen in Fig. 3. This circle was also covered with
black cambric, and irregular holes cut in it (H H H, Fig. 2), over which
pieces of red tissue paper were pasted. These are represented by the
irregular patches in Fig. 2. This rear disk was fastened to a pivot (Fig. 3)
and placed three inches back of the front disk in which the stars and sun
were cut. As it slowly revolved it carried the globe around with it, and the
irregular tissue paper opening coming opposite each star caused the stars to
twinkle like those in the corners.
The earth was constructed as follows: Two bushel baskets were procured,
the handles cut off, and a brace nailed across the center of each. Holes were
bored in the middle of these braces, and an axle inserted (B, Fig. 4) and
made fast to the bottom of the basket. Then the spoke J, Fig. 4, which has a
hole in the end, is slipped over the axle and the other basket placed in
position and fastened opposite the first. The baskets were left far enough
apart to allow them to revolve. In Fig. 4, A A, are the baskets, B is the axle,
c c c c braces, J the spoke, corresponding with J in Figs. 2 and 3.
The profile drawing in Fig. 3 will enable you to see the mechanism at a
glance. A1 and A2 are the circles on which the globe representing the earth
revolves; B is the disk with the long spoke, J, placed between these two
circles; C is the pivot which causes disk B to revolve. D D are the braces
holding disk B in position. F F and I I are the braces holding A1 and A2 in
position; G is the pulley on pivot C that run the different parts; K is the
main belt leading from the basement; L L L are belts running to pivots H H
H. All framework liable to show should be made black; also have the cords
you use for belts black.
in the central portion of Fig. 1.
The second circle was placed about six inches back of this (see Fig. 3, A
1 and A 2). It was held in position by braces F F, Fig. 3. These two circles
formed a track on which the earth slowly revolved. Another circle was next
formed, similar to the first one, except that this had four spokes, I I I and J,
Fig. 2. The spoke marked J was long enough to reach the center of the globe
and connect to an axle, as seen in Fig. 3. This circle was also covered with
black cambric, and irregular holes cut in it (H H H, Fig. 2), over which
pieces of red tissue paper were pasted. These are represented by the
irregular patches in Fig. 2. This rear disk was fastened to a pivot (Fig. 3)
and placed three inches back of the front disk in which the stars and sun
were cut. As it slowly revolved it carried the globe around with it, and the
irregular tissue paper opening coming opposite each star caused the stars to
twinkle like those in the corners.
The earth was constructed as follows: Two bushel baskets were procured,
the handles cut off, and a brace nailed across the center of each. Holes were
bored in the middle of these braces, and an axle inserted (B, Fig. 4) and
made fast to the bottom of the basket. Then the spoke J, Fig. 4, which has a
hole in the end, is slipped over the axle and the other basket placed in
position and fastened opposite the first. The baskets were left far enough
apart to allow them to revolve. In Fig. 4, A A, are the baskets, B is the axle,
c c c c braces, J the spoke, corresponding with J in Figs. 2 and 3.
The profile drawing in Fig. 3 will enable you to see the mechanism at a
glance. A1 and A2 are the circles on which the globe representing the earth
revolves; B is the disk with the long spoke, J, placed between these two
circles; C is the pivot which causes disk B to revolve. D D are the braces
holding disk B in position. F F and I I are the braces holding A1 and A2 in
position; G is the pulley on pivot C that run the different parts; K is the
main belt leading from the basement; L L L are belts running to pivots H H
H. All framework liable to show should be made black; also have the cords
you use for belts black.
Page 252
REVOLVING CYLINDER.
This is a simple but very effective mechanical contrivance, and may be
constructed by any amateur:
Make three circular pieces from one-inch planed boards, A A A. Through
the exact centers of these run a rod, EE. Nail two-inch strips, c c c, placed a
little distance apart, over the discs, one of which is placed at either end, and
the third in the center. This forms the barrel, AAA, with the rod, EE, as
pivot. This pivot rests on crotches, DD, allowing the barrel to revolve when
the motive power below (at G) causes the fly-wheel, which is securely
fastened to E, to turn by means of the circular band, B. The crotches, DD,
should be high enough to bring the barrel to the center and middle of the
window.
This is a simple but very effective mechanical contrivance, and may be
constructed by any amateur:
Make three circular pieces from one-inch planed boards, A A A. Through
the exact centers of these run a rod, EE. Nail two-inch strips, c c c, placed a
little distance apart, over the discs, one of which is placed at either end, and
the third in the center. This forms the barrel, AAA, with the rod, EE, as
pivot. This pivot rests on crotches, DD, allowing the barrel to revolve when
the motive power below (at G) causes the fly-wheel, which is securely
fastened to E, to turn by means of the circular band, B. The crotches, DD,
should be high enough to bring the barrel to the center and middle of the
window.
Page 253
THE READING CYLINDER.
Cover the barrel with cloth—a dark material is best—and upon this pin
or tack the articles to be displayed. Almost any articles, not too large, may
be shown, and they should be so arranged as to present variety as the wheel
revolves. Suspend a screen in your window that will cover the mechanical
apparatus, only allowing the front section of the barrel to show. Thus, as the
barrel slowly revolves, a panorama of merchandise is shown the observer,
and the constant change will undoubtedly attract much attention. You may
letter the screen in any manner that suits your fancy, and this arrangement
will not prevent your placing other goods in the window before your screen,
Cover the barrel with cloth—a dark material is best—and upon this pin
or tack the articles to be displayed. Almost any articles, not too large, may
be shown, and they should be so arranged as to present variety as the wheel
revolves. Suspend a screen in your window that will cover the mechanical
apparatus, only allowing the front section of the barrel to show. Thus, as the
barrel slowly revolves, a panorama of merchandise is shown the observer,
and the constant change will undoubtedly attract much attention. You may
letter the screen in any manner that suits your fancy, and this arrangement
will not prevent your placing other goods in the window before your screen,
Page 254
as the revolving barrel will be high enough not to interfere with anything
shown on the window floor.
shown on the window floor.
Page 255
WIND POWER.
One good use to which the wind force obtained from a fan motor can be
put is shown in Figs. 1 and 2. In Fig. 1 is a section of a water tank, which
tank should sit in the show window, filled with water.
A toy ship is on the water and is guided in a track, A, which track is
attached to bottom of tank. Guide wires, B, B, extend from the ship to
grooves in the track. Fans, C, C, are set up at each end and are covered with
window trimmings in front so that they are not in view. The fans are run by
means of cords from the motor. The arrangement of the fans is as shown in
the top view of the tank in Fig. 2. The fan at the left is at D, and the wind it
produces sends the ship across the tank at opposite side, on line with the
arrow. The grooved track holds the guide wires B, B, of the ship, and steers
the ship around G, and the momentum carries the ship to H, where the blast
of air from the fan at E sends the ship along course I to J, and thence
opposite D again, where the course is commenced over again.
One good use to which the wind force obtained from a fan motor can be
put is shown in Figs. 1 and 2. In Fig. 1 is a section of a water tank, which
tank should sit in the show window, filled with water.
A toy ship is on the water and is guided in a track, A, which track is
attached to bottom of tank. Guide wires, B, B, extend from the ship to
grooves in the track. Fans, C, C, are set up at each end and are covered with
window trimmings in front so that they are not in view. The fans are run by
means of cords from the motor. The arrangement of the fans is as shown in
the top view of the tank in Fig. 2. The fan at the left is at D, and the wind it
produces sends the ship across the tank at opposite side, on line with the
arrow. The grooved track holds the guide wires B, B, of the ship, and steers
the ship around G, and the momentum carries the ship to H, where the blast
of air from the fan at E sends the ship along course I to J, and thence
opposite D again, where the course is commenced over again.
Page 256
PERPETUAL MOTION.
A perpetual motion wheel never fails to attract attention in a show
window. There is one form of perpetual wheel device which can be made
very easily, as it consists of a simple mechanism such as is shown here.
The wheel is three feet in diameter, of light wood and crude construction,
provided with eight arms disposed radially so as to be separated by angles
of 45 degrees, as shown. The axle is supported in bearings of wood. Each
arm is provided with a movable weight of five pounds, being movable on a
pivot or hinge on the arms so as to transfer the weight from the axis to the
periphery, whereby, as it appears to the eye, the wheel is continually
overweighted on one side, and revolves slowly. Attached to the base, A, is
an upright piece of wood, B, and a spring hooked wire, G, extends from the
top of this to the point D. Here the hook part tips up the weights as they
come around in turn, causing each to drop over on its arm, thus placing the
weight further from the center, and making the wheel turn. The center of
gravity of the wheel varies from a point on the left of the center to a point at
an equal distance on the right, according to the location of the arms at the
A perpetual motion wheel never fails to attract attention in a show
window. There is one form of perpetual wheel device which can be made
very easily, as it consists of a simple mechanism such as is shown here.
The wheel is three feet in diameter, of light wood and crude construction,
provided with eight arms disposed radially so as to be separated by angles
of 45 degrees, as shown. The axle is supported in bearings of wood. Each
arm is provided with a movable weight of five pounds, being movable on a
pivot or hinge on the arms so as to transfer the weight from the axis to the
periphery, whereby, as it appears to the eye, the wheel is continually
overweighted on one side, and revolves slowly. Attached to the base, A, is
an upright piece of wood, B, and a spring hooked wire, G, extends from the
top of this to the point D. Here the hook part tips up the weights as they
come around in turn, causing each to drop over on its arm, thus placing the
weight further from the center, and making the wheel turn. The center of
gravity of the wheel varies from a point on the left of the center to a point at
an equal distance on the right, according to the location of the arms at the
Page 257
particular point in the rotation of the wheel. The wheel can be draped with
light goods and made attractive. The notice “Perpetual Motion” should be
attached on a card.
light goods and made attractive. The notice “Perpetual Motion” should be
attached on a card.
Page 258
MECHANICAL HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY.
We show a picture of a mechanical handkerchief display in which the
central figure is a girl in a canoe, who works the paddle by a simple device.
A stiff wire attached to one side of center of paddle, passing through
bottom of canoe, fixed on a wooden wheel under the fixture. A rubber band
is fixed on one side of paddle to canoe. As the wheel revolves it sets the
paddle in motion. It is worked by a small motor. The entire display is made
outside in sections and is rapidly fixed together in the window. The canoe is
of heavy paper.
We show a picture of a mechanical handkerchief display in which the
central figure is a girl in a canoe, who works the paddle by a simple device.
A stiff wire attached to one side of center of paddle, passing through
bottom of canoe, fixed on a wooden wheel under the fixture. A rubber band
is fixed on one side of paddle to canoe. As the wheel revolves it sets the
paddle in motion. It is worked by a small motor. The entire display is made
outside in sections and is rapidly fixed together in the window. The canoe is
of heavy paper.
Page 259
MECHANICAL PANELS.
To make a double mechanical panel, that will open and close alternately,
follow the device shown in the below diagram.
Cover the faces of the panels, or “doors” with cloth or puffing, and
arrange them so as to cover two alcoves on opposite sides of the window.
One cord is wound around the barrel and the other is unwound. When the
barrel is turned, either by hand or by a motor, one door is raised while the
other drops of its own weight, the doors being balanced by each other. The
motion is reversed by reversing the barrel, or cylinder.
To make a double mechanical panel, that will open and close alternately,
follow the device shown in the below diagram.
Cover the faces of the panels, or “doors” with cloth or puffing, and
arrange them so as to cover two alcoves on opposite sides of the window.
One cord is wound around the barrel and the other is unwound. When the
barrel is turned, either by hand or by a motor, one door is raised while the
other drops of its own weight, the doors being balanced by each other. The
motion is reversed by reversing the barrel, or cylinder.
Page 260
“A SCENE IN VENICE.”
The mechanical device called “A Scene in Venice” consists of a
reproduction of the Trocadero palace, before which constantly passes a
procession of floats or gondolas. The following diagram shows a ground
plan of the framework of this window.
A procession of floats bearing dolls dressed as gondoliers, etc., passes
constantly around the palace. The interior of the building was lit by colored
electric lights. Six thousand handkerchiefs were used in this display, but the
palace may be trimmed with linens or other goods.
The mechanical device called “A Scene in Venice” consists of a
reproduction of the Trocadero palace, before which constantly passes a
procession of floats or gondolas. The following diagram shows a ground
plan of the framework of this window.
A procession of floats bearing dolls dressed as gondoliers, etc., passes
constantly around the palace. The interior of the building was lit by colored
electric lights. Six thousand handkerchiefs were used in this display, but the
palace may be trimmed with linens or other goods.
Page 261
MECHANICAL FAN.
DESIGN SHOWING MECHANICAL BOAT.—Morton.
DESIGN SHOWING MECHANICAL BOAT.—Morton.
Page 262
A SCENE IN VENICE.—Morton.
This display was arranged with a high grille at top, supported by columns
resting upon a pedestal or base. Upon this an enormous fan opened and
closed every fifty seconds. When opened out, only the fan was visible;
when folded, the fan seemed suspended at one side, revealing a 5-foot
circle, studded with lights and covered with roses, in the center of which
was a bust figure. On each side of the circle was a 2-foot wreath tied with
white satin ribbon. The color scheme was white, top blue and ivory, with
narrow moldings. Grille, fan and cornice at base were covered with dark
blue velvelette. The photograph shows fan partly open and also decorations
behind fan.
The ribs were fastened together with straps under the base, and also on
the back of the fan, above base. Ribs were of light framework, and extended
below base, as in the drawing. Front or first rib extended down three feet
and had a slot through which a screw was fastened to drive wheel, which
propelled it backward and forward, or, rather, from side to side; an evenly
balanced weight assisted motor to open fan.
This display was arranged with a high grille at top, supported by columns
resting upon a pedestal or base. Upon this an enormous fan opened and
closed every fifty seconds. When opened out, only the fan was visible;
when folded, the fan seemed suspended at one side, revealing a 5-foot
circle, studded with lights and covered with roses, in the center of which
was a bust figure. On each side of the circle was a 2-foot wreath tied with
white satin ribbon. The color scheme was white, top blue and ivory, with
narrow moldings. Grille, fan and cornice at base were covered with dark
blue velvelette. The photograph shows fan partly open and also decorations
behind fan.
The ribs were fastened together with straps under the base, and also on
the back of the fan, above base. Ribs were of light framework, and extended
below base, as in the drawing. Front or first rib extended down three feet
and had a slot through which a screw was fastened to drive wheel, which
propelled it backward and forward, or, rather, from side to side; an evenly
balanced weight assisted motor to open fan.
Page 263
The sketch will explain mechanical apparatus.
Fig. 1 shows fan, spread open, looking from back of window. A is drive
wheel on a pivot, smooth side facing slot of first or front rib, and to which
screw in slot is attached. B is an upright supporting rack (C) through which
lower ends of all but first and last rib work to avoid wobbling. Dotted lines
D are heavy rubber bands fastened to ends of second and third rib, and to
end of rack, as indicated. D D are similar bands fastened to end of fourth,
fifth and sixth ribs, and to floor, as in the drawing. These bands prevent
sudden jerking in opening and closing. E is small weight on cord, run over
pulley to basement, to assist in spreading fan. This relieves the strain on
drive wheel when screw in slot is at the top. EE are straps that hold fan
together, and must be proper length to allow each rib to overlap the next, in
order that decorations behind fan are concealed when fan is open.
Fig. 1 shows fan, spread open, looking from back of window. A is drive
wheel on a pivot, smooth side facing slot of first or front rib, and to which
screw in slot is attached. B is an upright supporting rack (C) through which
lower ends of all but first and last rib work to avoid wobbling. Dotted lines
D are heavy rubber bands fastened to ends of second and third rib, and to
end of rack, as indicated. D D are similar bands fastened to end of fourth,
fifth and sixth ribs, and to floor, as in the drawing. These bands prevent
sudden jerking in opening and closing. E is small weight on cord, run over
pulley to basement, to assist in spreading fan. This relieves the strain on
drive wheel when screw in slot is at the top. EE are straps that hold fan
together, and must be proper length to allow each rib to overlap the next, in
order that decorations behind fan are concealed when fan is open.
Page 264
Frame of fan was covered with cambric ovals, shown in photo, which
were decorated in water colors, and body was of velvelette. Rack was made
of thin wood strips the proper distance apart to hold ribs in proper position.
Lower portions of ribs were thicker than the upper, to prevent top from
catching when closing. Iron washers were put on axle between each two
ribs to reduce friction; drive wheel or one at back, was stationary, the others
revolved in direction of arrow, last rib moving to and fro.
were decorated in water colors, and body was of velvelette. Rack was made
of thin wood strips the proper distance apart to hold ribs in proper position.
Lower portions of ribs were thicker than the upper, to prevent top from
catching when closing. Iron washers were put on axle between each two
ribs to reduce friction; drive wheel or one at back, was stationary, the others
revolved in direction of arrow, last rib moving to and fro.
Page 265
THE MECHANICAL BUTTERFLY.
This is a very novel and easily constructed device.
DESIGN SHOWING “THE MECHANICAL FAN.”—Walker.
This is a very novel and easily constructed device.
DESIGN SHOWING “THE MECHANICAL FAN.”—Walker.
Page 266
DESIGN SHOWING THE MECHANICAL BUTTERFLY.—Lundy.
The window was put in to show a line of black ostrich tips, and the
butterfly was mechanical, opening and closing its wings in a natural
manner. The background is figured cotton crepe, put on plain. The
groundwork is crepe, a rich cream base with figures of heliotrope and
green. In the center is placed the butterfly. It has eyes of bright green and a
body of black and green. The long feelers were made of large black plumes,
the ends being tipped with white plumes. The wings were made of black
tips, the marking in the upper wings being of yellow, while in the lower
wings are two marks, one of white and one of red. To the right is a pillar
with black velvet base and a green column, and to the left a pillar with
black velvet base and blue column, both pillars supporting palms. The
festoon drapery is of black velvet. In front of the butterfly is a square
pedestal, covered with red with a line of black velvet “lovers knots” down
the center of each side. Palms and trimmed hats make up the floor
decorations. We show a drawing of the mechanism used to open and close
the butterfly’s wings. As the butterfly was tipped forward at the top the
The window was put in to show a line of black ostrich tips, and the
butterfly was mechanical, opening and closing its wings in a natural
manner. The background is figured cotton crepe, put on plain. The
groundwork is crepe, a rich cream base with figures of heliotrope and
green. In the center is placed the butterfly. It has eyes of bright green and a
body of black and green. The long feelers were made of large black plumes,
the ends being tipped with white plumes. The wings were made of black
tips, the marking in the upper wings being of yellow, while in the lower
wings are two marks, one of white and one of red. To the right is a pillar
with black velvet base and a green column, and to the left a pillar with
black velvet base and blue column, both pillars supporting palms. The
festoon drapery is of black velvet. In front of the butterfly is a square
pedestal, covered with red with a line of black velvet “lovers knots” down
the center of each side. Palms and trimmed hats make up the floor
decorations. We show a drawing of the mechanism used to open and close
the butterfly’s wings. As the butterfly was tipped forward at the top the
Page 267
wings closed of their own weight. The motor is connected with a reduction
gear and then with a pulley with a cam, instead of connecting direct.
The butterfly itself is 9 feet wide at the extremes and 6 feet high and is
raised about two feet from the floor.
The wings of the butterfly are but the thickness of heavy pasteboard at
the edge and ¾ inch towards where the wings join the body. The two one-
inch rods which open the wings run through the floor to basement and are
covered with same goods as background and are barely visible. On the ends
of these two rods (see cut) are two levers at right angles with rod and are
placed in opposition to each other. On the end of each lever is attached a
cord running to a common point about 3 feet back of levers. They then go
through two pulleys and combine in a single cord which is attached to a
cam placed 7 inches from center of pulley. The levers being shorter than the
width of a single wing, this gives the outer edge of wing a stroke of about
three feet.
gear and then with a pulley with a cam, instead of connecting direct.
The butterfly itself is 9 feet wide at the extremes and 6 feet high and is
raised about two feet from the floor.
The wings of the butterfly are but the thickness of heavy pasteboard at
the edge and ¾ inch towards where the wings join the body. The two one-
inch rods which open the wings run through the floor to basement and are
covered with same goods as background and are barely visible. On the ends
of these two rods (see cut) are two levers at right angles with rod and are
placed in opposition to each other. On the end of each lever is attached a
cord running to a common point about 3 feet back of levers. They then go
through two pulleys and combine in a single cord which is attached to a
cam placed 7 inches from center of pulley. The levers being shorter than the
width of a single wing, this gives the outer edge of wing a stroke of about
three feet.
Page 268
Page 269
THE MECHANICAL EGG.
I show an illustration of a mechanical Easter window, in which the
Folding Star, previously described, was used as a centerpiece. In this case,
however, the points are fitted with shade rollers, making the pull from
behind and out of sight. The roller springs pull it out, and the wires in.
The above sketch explains the working. There was a sleeping wax infant
in an egg, surrounded by light blue China silk; the other decorations were
purple and white, with flowers of same shades. The points were made from
wire and then covered with cloth.
The star closed every twenty-five seconds—the egg wire, being attached
to the center of the two levers, had a longer pull and would begin to close
before the star, and would also take a few seconds longer to open.
I show an illustration of a mechanical Easter window, in which the
Folding Star, previously described, was used as a centerpiece. In this case,
however, the points are fitted with shade rollers, making the pull from
behind and out of sight. The roller springs pull it out, and the wires in.
The above sketch explains the working. There was a sleeping wax infant
in an egg, surrounded by light blue China silk; the other decorations were
purple and white, with flowers of same shades. The points were made from
wire and then covered with cloth.
The star closed every twenty-five seconds—the egg wire, being attached
to the center of the two levers, had a longer pull and would begin to close
before the star, and would also take a few seconds longer to open.
Page 270
DESIGN SHOWING THE MECHANICAL EGG.—Lorch.
The description of the egg diagram is as follows:
The description of the egg diagram is as follows:
Page 271
THE EGG DIAGRAM.
A, heavy wire axle in wood bearings; C is wire attached to back of E, top
part of egg; B is some wire running to the levers; D is weight which pulls E
open; when the lever pulls down it closes egg.
The egg frame was made of wire in two parts, and made of tissue paper
and carpenter’s glue, painted with white zinc, and sprinkled with white
flickers or diamond dust. This was made separate and then placed between
star and back of window.
A, heavy wire axle in wood bearings; C is wire attached to back of E, top
part of egg; B is some wire running to the levers; D is weight which pulls E
open; when the lever pulls down it closes egg.
The egg frame was made of wire in two parts, and made of tissue paper
and carpenter’s glue, painted with white zinc, and sprinkled with white
flickers or diamond dust. This was made separate and then placed between
star and back of window.
Page 272
A PANORAMIC DISPLAY.
The mechanical feature attached to this dress goods display consists of a
frame in the center of which appears a panorama of bright pictures, portraits
of prominent men, etc. The frame is made of ordinary boards and puffed in
two colors. In the picture shown there was an electric light in each corner of
the frame. Within the frame the panorama moved constantly from top to
bottom.
The panorama consists of pictures fastened together endwise upon a belt
of ticking and forming an endless band about two 7-inch rollers, which are
placed at the top and bottom of the background. As the rolls revolve by
means of an electric motor, the pictures pass across the frame.
The mechanical feature attached to this dress goods display consists of a
frame in the center of which appears a panorama of bright pictures, portraits
of prominent men, etc. The frame is made of ordinary boards and puffed in
two colors. In the picture shown there was an electric light in each corner of
the frame. Within the frame the panorama moved constantly from top to
bottom.
The panorama consists of pictures fastened together endwise upon a belt
of ticking and forming an endless band about two 7-inch rollers, which are
placed at the top and bottom of the background. As the rolls revolve by
means of an electric motor, the pictures pass across the frame.
Page 273
CHAPTER XVI.
ELECTRICITY IN THE WINDOW.
Electric power, as applied to the show window, may be divided into two
sections: (a) Electric lighting, and (b) electric mechanism. We will consider
these sections separately.
ELECTRICITY IN THE WINDOW.
Electric power, as applied to the show window, may be divided into two
sections: (a) Electric lighting, and (b) electric mechanism. We will consider
these sections separately.
Page 274
LIGHTING THE WINDOW.
The most approved method of stationary electric lights for windows are
those placed at the top, next to the window pane, and so arranged as to
throw their light downward and backward from the observer. Thus the
entire window space is fully illuminated and the incandescents are
themselves hidden from view. Separate reflectors or a long reflecting trough
of tin should be placed back of the lights. Special lighting effects are
explained in detail further on, but the regular lighting is best arranged as
above.
The most approved method of stationary electric lights for windows are
those placed at the top, next to the window pane, and so arranged as to
throw their light downward and backward from the observer. Thus the
entire window space is fully illuminated and the incandescents are
themselves hidden from view. Separate reflectors or a long reflecting trough
of tin should be placed back of the lights. Special lighting effects are
explained in detail further on, but the regular lighting is best arranged as
above.
Page 275
COLORING ELECTRIC LAMPS.
Where colored effects are desired the incandescent lamp globes may be
tinted to throw distinct or combined colorings over the entire display.
There are several preparations that answer the purpose, and indeed are
best at times. Pikron for glass is excellent, or a lacquer will answer.
However, they sometimes become spotted from the heat.
Another and better method is by using white shellac, thinned down with
wood alcohol, and by dipping the globe this produces a splendid imitation
of ground glass when a white light is needed.
If you wish to use purple, green, blue, etc., or any of the more delicate
tints, such as violet, buy five cents’ worth of aniline dye of the color you
wish; dissolve it in wood alcohol and pour it into the shellac, taking care the
shellac is quite thin, as otherwise it will not cover evenly.
Where colored effects are desired the incandescent lamp globes may be
tinted to throw distinct or combined colorings over the entire display.
There are several preparations that answer the purpose, and indeed are
best at times. Pikron for glass is excellent, or a lacquer will answer.
However, they sometimes become spotted from the heat.
Another and better method is by using white shellac, thinned down with
wood alcohol, and by dipping the globe this produces a splendid imitation
of ground glass when a white light is needed.
If you wish to use purple, green, blue, etc., or any of the more delicate
tints, such as violet, buy five cents’ worth of aniline dye of the color you
wish; dissolve it in wood alcohol and pour it into the shellac, taking care the
shellac is quite thin, as otherwise it will not cover evenly.
Page 276
DESIGN SHOWING PANORAMIC EFFECTS.—Sawyer.
By using these or any other transparent coloring a vast number of
beautiful tints can be made that will blend perfectly with your color scheme.
Another excellent coloring is egg dye, treated in the same way.
Now I will explain how to go about it. After preparing your shellac pour
it into a vessel deep enough to immerse your lamp.
Take a piece of wire, and fasten it around the socket end of lamp; then
bring one end of the wire back over the end, and fasten to opposite side to
form a loop to hang it up to drip and dry.
This done, dip lamp in the coloring and hang it up, so it will dry evenly,
when it will be found to be beautifully frosted.
When mixing your color, bear in mind the more dye and the less shellac
the deeper your tint will be, and vice versa.
This method will apply to all colors except a deep red or deep yellow,
when I recommend the other colorings I have mentioned, any of which can
be removed with wood alcohol.
By using these or any other transparent coloring a vast number of
beautiful tints can be made that will blend perfectly with your color scheme.
Another excellent coloring is egg dye, treated in the same way.
Now I will explain how to go about it. After preparing your shellac pour
it into a vessel deep enough to immerse your lamp.
Take a piece of wire, and fasten it around the socket end of lamp; then
bring one end of the wire back over the end, and fasten to opposite side to
form a loop to hang it up to drip and dry.
This done, dip lamp in the coloring and hang it up, so it will dry evenly,
when it will be found to be beautifully frosted.
When mixing your color, bear in mind the more dye and the less shellac
the deeper your tint will be, and vice versa.
This method will apply to all colors except a deep red or deep yellow,
when I recommend the other colorings I have mentioned, any of which can
be removed with wood alcohol.
Page 277
GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTRUCTIONS.
Before proceeding with explanations of designs requiring special wiring,
it is well for the amateur to become acquainted with the primary principles
of electricity, without which he is helpless. The following notes we culled
from writings of experienced electricians.
Before proceeding with explanations of designs requiring special wiring,
it is well for the amateur to become acquainted with the primary principles
of electricity, without which he is helpless. The following notes we culled
from writings of experienced electricians.
Page 278
POTENTIAL OR ELECTRO-MOTIVE FORCE.
This (commonly E. M. F.) is the term used for electrical energy or power
of doing work, and is used in the same manner as “pressure” is applied to
steam; in other words, it is the term used to express the force which tends to
move electricity from one place to another, and is proportional to the
difference of potential at the two places.
The earth’s surface is called “Zero Potential,” and is a reference point to
measure the relative condition of other bodies. A positively electrified body
is said to have a higher potential than the earth, which in turn has a higher
potential than a negatively electrified body.
When two dissimilar metals touch each other, there is a difference of
potential at point of contact. If zinc is in contact with copper it is of higher
potential. In a series of disks of copper, zinc and wet cloths, arranged one
over the other in above order, the wet cloth is the conductor, and current
will flow on joining last copper and zinc by wire, etc.
This arrangement is called a voltaic pile (after its inventor, Volta), and the
difference of potential produced is proportionate to the number of pairs of
disks.
A difference of potential between two points connected will cause current
to flow till the potentials of both points are the same.
This (commonly E. M. F.) is the term used for electrical energy or power
of doing work, and is used in the same manner as “pressure” is applied to
steam; in other words, it is the term used to express the force which tends to
move electricity from one place to another, and is proportional to the
difference of potential at the two places.
The earth’s surface is called “Zero Potential,” and is a reference point to
measure the relative condition of other bodies. A positively electrified body
is said to have a higher potential than the earth, which in turn has a higher
potential than a negatively electrified body.
When two dissimilar metals touch each other, there is a difference of
potential at point of contact. If zinc is in contact with copper it is of higher
potential. In a series of disks of copper, zinc and wet cloths, arranged one
over the other in above order, the wet cloth is the conductor, and current
will flow on joining last copper and zinc by wire, etc.
This arrangement is called a voltaic pile (after its inventor, Volta), and the
difference of potential produced is proportionate to the number of pairs of
disks.
A difference of potential between two points connected will cause current
to flow till the potentials of both points are the same.
Page 279
ELECTRIC RESISTANCE.
Resistance is offered by all substances to the electric current, and varies
with the nature of the substance.
Most metals are good conductors; wood and stone offer considerable
resistance, and silk, glass and ebonite are practical non-conductors; but
remember if a non-conductor is wet or even damp it becomes a good
conductor, moisture or water being a first-class conductor. On the other
hand, conductivity is diminished by an increase of temperature—otherwise
dryness. The following table will give a good idea of the conductivity of
metals:
That of silver being 100
That of copper is 97
That of gold is 74
That of platinum is 17
That of iron is 16
That of lead is 8
That of German silver is 7.5
That of mercury is 1.6
Therefore, generally, good conductors are all the metals, carbon, water,
aqueous solutions, moist bodies besides wood, cotton, hemp, etc. Good
insulators or non-conductors are paraffine, solid or liquid, turpentine, silk,
sealing wax, india rubber, dry glass or porcelain. The best electrical
conductors are the best thermal conductors, and a “red hot” temperature
converts insulators into fairly good conductors.
Resistance is offered by all substances to the electric current, and varies
with the nature of the substance.
Most metals are good conductors; wood and stone offer considerable
resistance, and silk, glass and ebonite are practical non-conductors; but
remember if a non-conductor is wet or even damp it becomes a good
conductor, moisture or water being a first-class conductor. On the other
hand, conductivity is diminished by an increase of temperature—otherwise
dryness. The following table will give a good idea of the conductivity of
metals:
That of silver being 100
That of copper is 97
That of gold is 74
That of platinum is 17
That of iron is 16
That of lead is 8
That of German silver is 7.5
That of mercury is 1.6
Therefore, generally, good conductors are all the metals, carbon, water,
aqueous solutions, moist bodies besides wood, cotton, hemp, etc. Good
insulators or non-conductors are paraffine, solid or liquid, turpentine, silk,
sealing wax, india rubber, dry glass or porcelain. The best electrical
conductors are the best thermal conductors, and a “red hot” temperature
converts insulators into fairly good conductors.
Page 280
ELECTRICAL MEASURES.
Electricity being invisible and imponderable (i. e., not having sensible
weight, such as light, heat or electricity), it is impossible to apply ordinary
standards of measure. Electricians have devised special units of measure of
two kinds, called absolute units and practical units, the ratio between the
two being always some power of 10.
It has been decided in these measurements, length, mass and time shall
be expressed respectively in centimeters, grams and seconds—called C. G.
S., or centimeter gram-second method.
A gram equals 15.432 grains, a centimeter 0.3937 of an inch. The weight
of a body must not be confused with its mass; the mass is the amount of
matter contained, while the weight is its specific gravity, which may be
expressed by multiplying mass by accelerating effect of gravity, which
varies at different parts of the earth’s surface, and may be averaged at 32.2
feet (or 981 centimeters) per second.
The above absolute units are too large or too small for practical use, but
the following examples are given:
The dyne (absolute unit of force) is that force which, acting for one
second on a mass of one gram, imparts a velocity of one centimeter per
second.
The weight of one gram, as above shown, is equal to a force of 1 × 981 =
981 dynes.
The erg, or absolute unit of work is the work requisite to move a body of
one centimeter against a force of one dyne.
The weight of one gram is equal to 981 dynes, the work of raising one
gram one centimeter, against the force of 981 ergs.
An erg is about equal to 1/13,560,000 of a foot-pound. A foot-pound
represents the work required to raise one pound one foot high.
The practical units of most frequent occurrence are: The volt, the ohm
and the ampere.
The volt, or measure of E. M. F., or difference of potential, is equal
approximately to the E. M. F. possessed by one “Daniell” cell; accurately it
Electricity being invisible and imponderable (i. e., not having sensible
weight, such as light, heat or electricity), it is impossible to apply ordinary
standards of measure. Electricians have devised special units of measure of
two kinds, called absolute units and practical units, the ratio between the
two being always some power of 10.
It has been decided in these measurements, length, mass and time shall
be expressed respectively in centimeters, grams and seconds—called C. G.
S., or centimeter gram-second method.
A gram equals 15.432 grains, a centimeter 0.3937 of an inch. The weight
of a body must not be confused with its mass; the mass is the amount of
matter contained, while the weight is its specific gravity, which may be
expressed by multiplying mass by accelerating effect of gravity, which
varies at different parts of the earth’s surface, and may be averaged at 32.2
feet (or 981 centimeters) per second.
The above absolute units are too large or too small for practical use, but
the following examples are given:
The dyne (absolute unit of force) is that force which, acting for one
second on a mass of one gram, imparts a velocity of one centimeter per
second.
The weight of one gram, as above shown, is equal to a force of 1 × 981 =
981 dynes.
The erg, or absolute unit of work is the work requisite to move a body of
one centimeter against a force of one dyne.
The weight of one gram is equal to 981 dynes, the work of raising one
gram one centimeter, against the force of 981 ergs.
An erg is about equal to 1/13,560,000 of a foot-pound. A foot-pound
represents the work required to raise one pound one foot high.
The practical units of most frequent occurrence are: The volt, the ohm
and the ampere.
The volt, or measure of E. M. F., or difference of potential, is equal
approximately to the E. M. F. possessed by one “Daniell” cell; accurately it
Page 281
is 0.95 of the E. M. F. of a cell.
The ohm, or measure of resistance (sometimes called the British
Association or B. A. unit), is approximately equal to the resistance of 129
yards of copper wire ¹⁄₁₆ inch in diameter, or to 106 centimeters of mercury,
one square millimeter in section.
The ampere (formerly called the “Weber”) is the measure of strength of
current. If an E. M. F. of one volt be applied to send a current through a
resistance of one ohm, the strength of current will be one ampere. That is to
say, the strength of a current in amperes varies directly as the E. M. F.
applied to produce it, and inversely as the resistance of the circuit.
The watt or practical unit of work (or rather, the rate of doing work) is
equal to 10,000,000 ergs per second, or to the work produced in one second
by one ampere of current of an E. M. F. of one volt, acting through the
resistance of one ohm.
The practical electrical units are called after the eminent scientific
investigators whose names they bear.
The ohm, or measure of resistance (sometimes called the British
Association or B. A. unit), is approximately equal to the resistance of 129
yards of copper wire ¹⁄₁₆ inch in diameter, or to 106 centimeters of mercury,
one square millimeter in section.
The ampere (formerly called the “Weber”) is the measure of strength of
current. If an E. M. F. of one volt be applied to send a current through a
resistance of one ohm, the strength of current will be one ampere. That is to
say, the strength of a current in amperes varies directly as the E. M. F.
applied to produce it, and inversely as the resistance of the circuit.
The watt or practical unit of work (or rather, the rate of doing work) is
equal to 10,000,000 ergs per second, or to the work produced in one second
by one ampere of current of an E. M. F. of one volt, acting through the
resistance of one ohm.
The practical electrical units are called after the eminent scientific
investigators whose names they bear.
Page 282
BATTERIES.
The portion of the copper plate (or carbon) from which the current flows
through the wire is called the positive pole (sometimes anode), and the zinc
plate the negative pole (sometimes cathode).
Elements, or the parts that produce current, are usually understood as the
lower portion of the cell contents, in which the plates are immersed. When
the term “pole” is reversed, the zinc being the positive element, and the
copper or carbon the negative element, it will be noted current flows from
positive pole (copper or carbon) and returns by the negative (or zinc) pole.
The bubbles of hydrogen gas liberated at the negative element (copper or
carbon) resist the passage of the current, and being readily oxidizable, will
set up an opposing E. M. F.
A battery in this condition is polarized—that is, neutralized—and must be
renewed.
The E. M. F. of a cell is equivalent to the difference of potential between
its electrode when unconnected, and is independent of the size of the
elements, and is determined solely by the materials of which it is
constructed.
The difference of potential between zinc and carbon being greater than
that between zinc and copper, a cell of greater E. M. F. will result from zinc
and carbon.
The cells commonly used for annunciators, bells, etc., are the “Laclede”
and “Laclanche,” and are generally taken to have an E. M. F. of one and
one-half volts; the “Danniell,” one volt; others vary from one to two volts
when in good order.
To renew these cells fill the jar two-thirds full of clean water, add six
ounces sal ammoniac, let it dissolve; then put in the zinc and carbon; be
sure they are perfectly clean; and that the zinc is not worn out or eaten
away. There are two ways to connect up these cells; the first is “in series”
for E. M. F., the second “in parallel” for quantity. The first method “in
series” is as shown. This way the E. M. F. is in proportion to the number of
cells, three cells having three times the E. M. F. of one volt.
The portion of the copper plate (or carbon) from which the current flows
through the wire is called the positive pole (sometimes anode), and the zinc
plate the negative pole (sometimes cathode).
Elements, or the parts that produce current, are usually understood as the
lower portion of the cell contents, in which the plates are immersed. When
the term “pole” is reversed, the zinc being the positive element, and the
copper or carbon the negative element, it will be noted current flows from
positive pole (copper or carbon) and returns by the negative (or zinc) pole.
The bubbles of hydrogen gas liberated at the negative element (copper or
carbon) resist the passage of the current, and being readily oxidizable, will
set up an opposing E. M. F.
A battery in this condition is polarized—that is, neutralized—and must be
renewed.
The E. M. F. of a cell is equivalent to the difference of potential between
its electrode when unconnected, and is independent of the size of the
elements, and is determined solely by the materials of which it is
constructed.
The difference of potential between zinc and carbon being greater than
that between zinc and copper, a cell of greater E. M. F. will result from zinc
and carbon.
The cells commonly used for annunciators, bells, etc., are the “Laclede”
and “Laclanche,” and are generally taken to have an E. M. F. of one and
one-half volts; the “Danniell,” one volt; others vary from one to two volts
when in good order.
To renew these cells fill the jar two-thirds full of clean water, add six
ounces sal ammoniac, let it dissolve; then put in the zinc and carbon; be
sure they are perfectly clean; and that the zinc is not worn out or eaten
away. There are two ways to connect up these cells; the first is “in series”
for E. M. F., the second “in parallel” for quantity. The first method “in
series” is as shown. This way the E. M. F. is in proportion to the number of
cells, three cells having three times the E. M. F. of one volt.
Page 283
The second method, “in parallel” for quantity, is as shown; all the
negatives (zinc) are connected, and all the positives (carbon) connected,
making the current obtained of much greater volume, but only of the E. M.
F. or intensity of one cell.
The strength of a current given by a battery varies with the resistance, as
well as with the E. M. F., and can be increased not only by adding more
cells “in series,” but also by lessening the internal resistance, viz., by
increasing the size of battery plates, or more simply by coupling all the +
(positive) poles together, and all the - (negative) poles together. The E. M.
F. of cells coupled in this way is only equal to that of a single cell, but the
current will be greater because the internal resistance will be only one-third
that of a single cell. This plan is called coupling up for quantity, or “in
parallel,” to distinguish it from the plan of “in series,” or for intensity.
The E. M. F. of a large and small cell are both the same (using same size
elements). To increase E. M. F. multiply the cells “in series.”
The ordinary battery carbon is a mixture of carbon and peroxide of
manganese—“Oh, Mr. Window Trimmer, please see if you can make this
bell ring.” Bell No. 7 is dead, and there is no end of trouble; this is
something met with occasionally. Examine the battery, see that it has not
become crystallized (polarized), and if so, disconnect one cell at a time.
Clean it well, without wetting the outside of jar, recharge with new zinc (if
required) and six ounces powdered sal ammoniac, jar being first filled two-
thirds full of warm water, or enough to avoid overflow; replace cell,
connect up and take out another. Be sure to reconnect the cells left in
negatives (zinc) are connected, and all the positives (carbon) connected,
making the current obtained of much greater volume, but only of the E. M.
F. or intensity of one cell.
The strength of a current given by a battery varies with the resistance, as
well as with the E. M. F., and can be increased not only by adding more
cells “in series,” but also by lessening the internal resistance, viz., by
increasing the size of battery plates, or more simply by coupling all the +
(positive) poles together, and all the - (negative) poles together. The E. M.
F. of cells coupled in this way is only equal to that of a single cell, but the
current will be greater because the internal resistance will be only one-third
that of a single cell. This plan is called coupling up for quantity, or “in
parallel,” to distinguish it from the plan of “in series,” or for intensity.
The E. M. F. of a large and small cell are both the same (using same size
elements). To increase E. M. F. multiply the cells “in series.”
The ordinary battery carbon is a mixture of carbon and peroxide of
manganese—“Oh, Mr. Window Trimmer, please see if you can make this
bell ring.” Bell No. 7 is dead, and there is no end of trouble; this is
something met with occasionally. Examine the battery, see that it has not
become crystallized (polarized), and if so, disconnect one cell at a time.
Clean it well, without wetting the outside of jar, recharge with new zinc (if
required) and six ounces powdered sal ammoniac, jar being first filled two-
thirds full of warm water, or enough to avoid overflow; replace cell,
connect up and take out another. Be sure to reconnect the cells left in
Page 284
battery, so as to keep it working while you are cleaning each one. A good
way, if you don’t think the cells need changing, is to take a small call bell or
buzzer, with short wires, disconnect both ends of battery, then test every cell
by placing a wire on each pole of the cell at same time. If cell is all right,
bell will ring. Suppose you find cells all right, proceed to bell No. 7, the
dead one, examine the push button, and trace the wires from bell to battery,
being sure they are not grounded by lying on some steam or gas pipe with
the insulation worn off. (If it should be a case of continual ringing, the wires
are crossed.) You may expect a “ground” if the battery has run down
suddenly or too quick. If the trouble is found in the annunciator, don’t
bother with it, unless you are expert or want trouble. Send for an electrician;
it will save time—in other words, money.
way, if you don’t think the cells need changing, is to take a small call bell or
buzzer, with short wires, disconnect both ends of battery, then test every cell
by placing a wire on each pole of the cell at same time. If cell is all right,
bell will ring. Suppose you find cells all right, proceed to bell No. 7, the
dead one, examine the push button, and trace the wires from bell to battery,
being sure they are not grounded by lying on some steam or gas pipe with
the insulation worn off. (If it should be a case of continual ringing, the wires
are crossed.) You may expect a “ground” if the battery has run down
suddenly or too quick. If the trouble is found in the annunciator, don’t
bother with it, unless you are expert or want trouble. Send for an electrician;
it will save time—in other words, money.
Page 285
SPECIAL WINDOW WIRING.
Many houses have ample facilities for electrical work, but as they do not
employ a house electrician many beautiful and attractive effects are barred
in their windows. Even when an attempt is made to introduce electrical
effects into displays the results are tame and insignificant, because of a lack
of special wiring. Yet we know that the success of many windows depends
largely upon their illumination.
In some mercantile establishments the trimmer has an electrician at his
beck and call, and when a design is ready he simply pushes the button and
Mr. Electrician does the rest. But I know that these are exceptional cases,
and that in the majority of establishments the trimmer is thrown upon his
own resources, and has no one to help him out of his difficulties. And if he
is not posted on electrical appliances, his designs are not properly
illuminated—a deficiency that annoys the conscientious trimmer as much as
it does his employer.
Electricity, properly applied, is an important factor in selling goods
through the show window. Therefore the window trimmer who understands
wiring his own windows is a more valuable man to his employer than one
without this knowledge. I shall endeavor to be plain and avoid the use of
unnecessary technical terms.
No doubt your windows have permanent lights. The first thing to do is to
have a switch or “cut-out” run in for special work. Any electrician will do
this for you in an hour or so, and it saves you from tapping your permanent
wires, which should never be done.
Be sure to ascertain the voltage and amperes; or, to be plainer, find out
how many lights your “cut-out” will carry.
Before you begin work you must have proper tools to work with, and
sufficient supplies to meet any case of emergency.
Many houses have ample facilities for electrical work, but as they do not
employ a house electrician many beautiful and attractive effects are barred
in their windows. Even when an attempt is made to introduce electrical
effects into displays the results are tame and insignificant, because of a lack
of special wiring. Yet we know that the success of many windows depends
largely upon their illumination.
In some mercantile establishments the trimmer has an electrician at his
beck and call, and when a design is ready he simply pushes the button and
Mr. Electrician does the rest. But I know that these are exceptional cases,
and that in the majority of establishments the trimmer is thrown upon his
own resources, and has no one to help him out of his difficulties. And if he
is not posted on electrical appliances, his designs are not properly
illuminated—a deficiency that annoys the conscientious trimmer as much as
it does his employer.
Electricity, properly applied, is an important factor in selling goods
through the show window. Therefore the window trimmer who understands
wiring his own windows is a more valuable man to his employer than one
without this knowledge. I shall endeavor to be plain and avoid the use of
unnecessary technical terms.
No doubt your windows have permanent lights. The first thing to do is to
have a switch or “cut-out” run in for special work. Any electrician will do
this for you in an hour or so, and it saves you from tapping your permanent
wires, which should never be done.
Be sure to ascertain the voltage and amperes; or, to be plainer, find out
how many lights your “cut-out” will carry.
Before you begin work you must have proper tools to work with, and
sufficient supplies to meet any case of emergency.
Page 286
ELECTRICAL TOOLS.
The following is a list of tools required:
Pair of nippers to cut and twist wire.
Brace and bit.
Screw driver.
An old pocket knife.
Burner. (Similar to that used by painters to burn off paint.)
That is not a formidable list, nor difficult to procure; but each item is
necessary.
The following is a list of tools required:
Pair of nippers to cut and twist wire.
Brace and bit.
Screw driver.
An old pocket knife.
Burner. (Similar to that used by painters to burn off paint.)
That is not a formidable list, nor difficult to procure; but each item is
necessary.
Page 287
STANDARD ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES.
The list of supplies you should keep on hand is as follows:
No. 10 or No. 12 insulated wire.
Insulating tape.
Bushing.
Clay bushings.
Sockets.
Lamps.
Porcelain knobs.
Solder.
This last item you can get prepared with resin, and it needs no acid to
make it adhere.
No quantities are specified in the list. Your judgment will enable you to
determine how much you will need or can use to advantage.
The list of supplies you should keep on hand is as follows:
No. 10 or No. 12 insulated wire.
Insulating tape.
Bushing.
Clay bushings.
Sockets.
Lamps.
Porcelain knobs.
Solder.
This last item you can get prepared with resin, and it needs no acid to
make it adhere.
No quantities are specified in the list. Your judgment will enable you to
determine how much you will need or can use to advantage.
Page 288
ARCS AND INCANDESCENTS.
Perhaps I would better explain here the difference between arc and
incandescent wiring. If we had a row of arc lights to put up we could run
our wires as in Fig. 1. The current going to the first light passes through to
the next, and so on until it reaches the last light, when it returns to the
dynamo.
With incandescents we run two wires parallel, and make our connections
as in Fig. 2. This is called “multiple arc.” Each lamp is independent of the
others, and if one “dies” the current passes through the others uninterrupted.
Suppose you have a “cut-out” of 110 volts, carrying sixteen or twenty
lamps, and wish to run six lamps on a strip. (This is figurative, and only
used to demonstrate, for you can use any number up to the capacity of your
Perhaps I would better explain here the difference between arc and
incandescent wiring. If we had a row of arc lights to put up we could run
our wires as in Fig. 1. The current going to the first light passes through to
the next, and so on until it reaches the last light, when it returns to the
dynamo.
With incandescents we run two wires parallel, and make our connections
as in Fig. 2. This is called “multiple arc.” Each lamp is independent of the
others, and if one “dies” the current passes through the others uninterrupted.
Suppose you have a “cut-out” of 110 volts, carrying sixteen or twenty
lamps, and wish to run six lamps on a strip. (This is figurative, and only
used to demonstrate, for you can use any number up to the capacity of your
Page 289
switch.) You proceed as follows: Lay out the place for each lamp. Bore two
holes the size of bushings, and between each two lamps place two knobs, as
in Fig. 3. Cut two pieces of wire, long enough for all the lights, allowing
enough extra to knot each knob and for the last lamp, and also leaving
enough to reach the switch. Fasten the wire to the knobs nearest the last
lamp, as in Fig. 4. Stretch tightly to the next knob, and repeat until the wire
is all laid. For each lamp remove about one and one-half inches of
insulation on each wire. Take pieces of wire five inches long for
connections, and remove one and one-half inches of insulation from the
ends of each. Twist these ends tightly around your lead wires, as in Fig. 5,
and solder them. The simplest way to solder is to heat your exposed wires
until they are hot enough to melt the solder when it is held against them.
Let me say here that when I have laid out my wires, and marked my
connections, I then unloose the wires, make my cross-connections and
replace them. It takes time, but it is easier, and is the proper way to work.
When the soldering is finished take your tape and carefully wrap each
exposed wire. Then through each hole put a piece of bushing, and run your
connections through the bushings. Run the two ends through for the last
lamp. No short wires are attached for these, and your work should now
appear as in Fig. 6.
Then you are ready for your lamps. Turn the strip over and fasten the
sockets in place, positive sides all on the same edge of your strip. Cut the
connecting wires the required length and remove one-half inch of insulation
from the ends. Loosen the brass screws, place the ends of the wires under
them, and fasten down. Fig. 7 shows one side of socket connected. Attach
brass hoops and rubber rings, and you are all ready for placing and
holes the size of bushings, and between each two lamps place two knobs, as
in Fig. 3. Cut two pieces of wire, long enough for all the lights, allowing
enough extra to knot each knob and for the last lamp, and also leaving
enough to reach the switch. Fasten the wire to the knobs nearest the last
lamp, as in Fig. 4. Stretch tightly to the next knob, and repeat until the wire
is all laid. For each lamp remove about one and one-half inches of
insulation on each wire. Take pieces of wire five inches long for
connections, and remove one and one-half inches of insulation from the
ends of each. Twist these ends tightly around your lead wires, as in Fig. 5,
and solder them. The simplest way to solder is to heat your exposed wires
until they are hot enough to melt the solder when it is held against them.
Let me say here that when I have laid out my wires, and marked my
connections, I then unloose the wires, make my cross-connections and
replace them. It takes time, but it is easier, and is the proper way to work.
When the soldering is finished take your tape and carefully wrap each
exposed wire. Then through each hole put a piece of bushing, and run your
connections through the bushings. Run the two ends through for the last
lamp. No short wires are attached for these, and your work should now
appear as in Fig. 6.
Then you are ready for your lamps. Turn the strip over and fasten the
sockets in place, positive sides all on the same edge of your strip. Cut the
connecting wires the required length and remove one-half inch of insulation
from the ends. Loosen the brass screws, place the ends of the wires under
them, and fasten down. Fig. 7 shows one side of socket connected. Attach
brass hoops and rubber rings, and you are all ready for placing and
Page 290
connecting. It is probably unnecessary to state that the same principles
above explained will enable one to place lights in circles, horseshoes or any
other designs that may be required. Once you know how to wire a window,
a great field of operations is open to you.
above explained will enable one to place lights in circles, horseshoes or any
other designs that may be required. Once you know how to wire a window,
a great field of operations is open to you.
Page 291
THE FUSE.
The next important step in show window wiring is the proper fusing of
circuits. The fuse is to the lighting wire what the safety valve is to the steam
boiler. A fuse is composed of a fusible metal, which contains lead, zinc, etc.,
and becomes fusible at a certain degree of temperature. The fuse is
supposed to be “the watch dog” of safety. Ninety-five per cent of the
electrical fires are caused by improper fusing.
My advice to the amateur is to apply to the nearest office of the National
Board of Fire Underwriters for a copy of the rules on incandescent wiring.
They may be obtained for the asking.
The next important step in show window wiring is the proper fusing of
circuits. The fuse is to the lighting wire what the safety valve is to the steam
boiler. A fuse is composed of a fusible metal, which contains lead, zinc, etc.,
and becomes fusible at a certain degree of temperature. The fuse is
supposed to be “the watch dog” of safety. Ninety-five per cent of the
electrical fires are caused by improper fusing.
My advice to the amateur is to apply to the nearest office of the National
Board of Fire Underwriters for a copy of the rules on incandescent wiring.
They may be obtained for the asking.
Page 292
THE TRANSFORMER.
Usually the electric fluid (?) is conveyed into the building from the alley,
where the high tension wires are strung, carrying a pressure of 2,500 to
3,500 volts from this line. By the aid of a “transformer” the current is
reduced to a pressure of 110, 105 or 50 volts, as required, entering the
building, when it is conveyed to a double-pole switch; that is, a switch
which cuts off both positive and negative wires at the same instant.
The “transformer” is a device for reducing the current from one potential
or tension to another, and consists of a ring of many turns of insulated wire;
the high tension wire is then wound around and through this ring several
turns, and the low tension wire carrying the current into the building is
wound around the opposite side of the ring in like manner. The difference in
pressure is controlled by the number of turns around the ring on either side,
as shown.
All the wires being insulated, the reduction is made by “induction” only.
The size of the wire makes no difference in the voltage or pressure, but it
makes all the difference in the “amperes” or quantity used to supply the
building.
The electric light company will supply a sufficiently large wire from
transformer to switch; the firm does the remainder of the wiring.
Usually the electric fluid (?) is conveyed into the building from the alley,
where the high tension wires are strung, carrying a pressure of 2,500 to
3,500 volts from this line. By the aid of a “transformer” the current is
reduced to a pressure of 110, 105 or 50 volts, as required, entering the
building, when it is conveyed to a double-pole switch; that is, a switch
which cuts off both positive and negative wires at the same instant.
The “transformer” is a device for reducing the current from one potential
or tension to another, and consists of a ring of many turns of insulated wire;
the high tension wire is then wound around and through this ring several
turns, and the low tension wire carrying the current into the building is
wound around the opposite side of the ring in like manner. The difference in
pressure is controlled by the number of turns around the ring on either side,
as shown.
All the wires being insulated, the reduction is made by “induction” only.
The size of the wire makes no difference in the voltage or pressure, but it
makes all the difference in the “amperes” or quantity used to supply the
building.
The electric light company will supply a sufficiently large wire from
transformer to switch; the firm does the remainder of the wiring.
Page 293
FEEDERS.
From this large double-pole switch (which is the main cut-off) radiate
“feeder” wires to the various parts of the building, to supply the lamp
circuits. These feeders have to be carefully gauged according to the number
of lamps, or rather, amperes, they are required to carry, in order to avoid
resistance in the wire; or in other words, must not crowd the carrying
capacity of the wire, or the resistance will make the wire hot and might
cause fire.
A “feeder” to the circuits for fifty incandescent 16-candle power lamps
should be of somewhat higher capacity, say a No. 10 Brown & Thorp
Gauge (B. & S. G.) which has a safe carrying capacity of thirty-two
amperes or sixty-four 16-candle power lamps, allowing one-half ampere to
each lamp; a No. 12 B. & S. G. wire is allowed to carry twenty-three
amperes, or about forty-five 16-candle power lamps; No. 13 B. & S. G.
wire is allowed to carry sixteen amperes, or about thirty 16-candle power
amps.
The “feeder” should have considerably more carrying capacity than is
required in order to permit the addition of extra lights, as occasion may
require, and to provide for the addition of extra window lights, if there be
not a special feeder for the purpose.
The feeder wires are tapped for lamp circuits by a branch block carrying
a fuse for the protection of the circuit. The construction and operation of the
branch block, or cut-out, will be understood at once on inspection. The fuse
here is the important part; it must be of smaller carrying capacity than the
wire it is to protect, and not depend upon the amount of current in the
feeder; thus, a No. 10 B. & S. G. might be protected with a 20-ampere fuse
(forty lamps, sixteen candle power), or with a 25-ampere fuse, leaving a
margin of seven amperes, the wire being allowed to carry thirty-two
amperes. It will be understood that “open work” is meant in every case, and
wires that are concealed are not allowed to carry so much. The No. 12 wire
B. & S. G. is allowed twenty-three amperes, and would be protected by fuse
of fifteen to twenty amperes capacity.
From this large double-pole switch (which is the main cut-off) radiate
“feeder” wires to the various parts of the building, to supply the lamp
circuits. These feeders have to be carefully gauged according to the number
of lamps, or rather, amperes, they are required to carry, in order to avoid
resistance in the wire; or in other words, must not crowd the carrying
capacity of the wire, or the resistance will make the wire hot and might
cause fire.
A “feeder” to the circuits for fifty incandescent 16-candle power lamps
should be of somewhat higher capacity, say a No. 10 Brown & Thorp
Gauge (B. & S. G.) which has a safe carrying capacity of thirty-two
amperes or sixty-four 16-candle power lamps, allowing one-half ampere to
each lamp; a No. 12 B. & S. G. wire is allowed to carry twenty-three
amperes, or about forty-five 16-candle power lamps; No. 13 B. & S. G.
wire is allowed to carry sixteen amperes, or about thirty 16-candle power
amps.
The “feeder” should have considerably more carrying capacity than is
required in order to permit the addition of extra lights, as occasion may
require, and to provide for the addition of extra window lights, if there be
not a special feeder for the purpose.
The feeder wires are tapped for lamp circuits by a branch block carrying
a fuse for the protection of the circuit. The construction and operation of the
branch block, or cut-out, will be understood at once on inspection. The fuse
here is the important part; it must be of smaller carrying capacity than the
wire it is to protect, and not depend upon the amount of current in the
feeder; thus, a No. 10 B. & S. G. might be protected with a 20-ampere fuse
(forty lamps, sixteen candle power), or with a 25-ampere fuse, leaving a
margin of seven amperes, the wire being allowed to carry thirty-two
amperes. It will be understood that “open work” is meant in every case, and
wires that are concealed are not allowed to carry so much. The No. 12 wire
B. & S. G. is allowed twenty-three amperes, and would be protected by fuse
of fifteen to twenty amperes capacity.
Page 294
The lamp circuits from feeders are in many cities restricted to a certain
number of amperes, usually six to ten, or say from ten to twenty lamps
(sixteen candle power). Each of these circuits must be protected by its own
fuse and have an independent switch. All fuse boxes must have their
porcelain cover kept on, and no inflammable material allowed near them.
“Twin wires,” or two wires encased, are objectionable.
Drop cords are not allowed except for drop lamps, and must be protected
by one-ampere fuse in rosette or cut-out. All wires where joined must be
soldered—to prevent an arc forming by making the path of the current
continuous or tight.
It is well for the beginner to know that a current of 110 volts does not
kill, though it might make the recipient seriously ill. Therefore, be careful
not to get yourself in the path of the current. Never touch both naked ends
or openings in wires at the same time, nor stand upon the ground while
working live wires. Always stand on some non-conductor, a dry board, for
instance. The inexpert can always protect himself by disconnecting a fuse
behind him both sides; or, better, open the “main cut-off” or first switch.
number of amperes, usually six to ten, or say from ten to twenty lamps
(sixteen candle power). Each of these circuits must be protected by its own
fuse and have an independent switch. All fuse boxes must have their
porcelain cover kept on, and no inflammable material allowed near them.
“Twin wires,” or two wires encased, are objectionable.
Drop cords are not allowed except for drop lamps, and must be protected
by one-ampere fuse in rosette or cut-out. All wires where joined must be
soldered—to prevent an arc forming by making the path of the current
continuous or tight.
It is well for the beginner to know that a current of 110 volts does not
kill, though it might make the recipient seriously ill. Therefore, be careful
not to get yourself in the path of the current. Never touch both naked ends
or openings in wires at the same time, nor stand upon the ground while
working live wires. Always stand on some non-conductor, a dry board, for
instance. The inexpert can always protect himself by disconnecting a fuse
behind him both sides; or, better, open the “main cut-off” or first switch.
Page 295
CONNECTIONS.
When your design is wired and set up in your window, your next step is
to connect it to your “cut-out.” You will find two wires leading from it; to
these you connect the two wires leading from your design.
It is not necessary to solder this connection; simply remove sufficient
insulation and twist the wires together tightly.
When your design is wired and set up in your window, your next step is
to connect it to your “cut-out.” You will find two wires leading from it; to
these you connect the two wires leading from your design.
It is not necessary to solder this connection; simply remove sufficient
insulation and twist the wires together tightly.
Page 296
There is a way to do this that every one should know, and I will tell you
how to make a
how to make a
Page 297
WESTERN UNION HITCH.
After removing the insulation from the wires at the ends to be connected,
bend the wires as in Fig. 1, lay them together as in Fig. 2, then with a pair
of pliers hold one side, and with another pair twist the end around the lead
wire tightly and closely, as in Fig. 3. When this is done hold the twisted
wires with pliers and repeat the twisting process on the other side. This is a
perfectly safe connection, and does not waste electricity as does a loose
joint.
After removing the insulation from the wires at the ends to be connected,
bend the wires as in Fig. 1, lay them together as in Fig. 2, then with a pair
of pliers hold one side, and with another pair twist the end around the lead
wire tightly and closely, as in Fig. 3. When this is done hold the twisted
wires with pliers and repeat the twisting process on the other side. This is a
perfectly safe connection, and does not waste electricity as does a loose
joint.
Page 298
DIFFERENT VOLTAGES.
Sometimes it happens that your electric system is of higher voltage than
you need use in special work; for instance, you may have a 220-volt circuit,
whereas 110-volt lamps are amply strong for your work; or again, you have
a 110-volt circuit, and want to use a number of small lamps, 1-candle
power, for example.
These are usually of lower voltage, fifty-five or thereabouts.
In these instances we resort to a method known as wiring in series, which
is done as in Fig. 4.
Of course the number of lamps to a series is to be governed entirely by
the voltage, and the trimmer must resort to his own judgment in
determining this.
You will see by the diagram in Fig. 4 that you have two lights for each
connection with your lead wires, therefore, if using a 220-volt circuit and
110-volt lamps you have each connection using the full 220 volts, otherwise
your lamps would soon burn out, as every connection must consume as
many volts as your circuit carries.
Special Designs.—These few instructions answer for a single string of
lights, such as a circle, arch, cornice, etc., where your leads run
uninterruptedly from first to last lamp; but “how about a design that is
impossible to wire that way?” you ask. It is simple, and I have made a few
diagrams to illustrate the method employed.
You may have a cornice about your windows, and must bring your wires
from the corner. Fig. 5 will show how to do it. A cross, or such designs as
have two breaks, are wired as in Fig. 6.
Sometimes it happens that your electric system is of higher voltage than
you need use in special work; for instance, you may have a 220-volt circuit,
whereas 110-volt lamps are amply strong for your work; or again, you have
a 110-volt circuit, and want to use a number of small lamps, 1-candle
power, for example.
These are usually of lower voltage, fifty-five or thereabouts.
In these instances we resort to a method known as wiring in series, which
is done as in Fig. 4.
Of course the number of lamps to a series is to be governed entirely by
the voltage, and the trimmer must resort to his own judgment in
determining this.
You will see by the diagram in Fig. 4 that you have two lights for each
connection with your lead wires, therefore, if using a 220-volt circuit and
110-volt lamps you have each connection using the full 220 volts, otherwise
your lamps would soon burn out, as every connection must consume as
many volts as your circuit carries.
Special Designs.—These few instructions answer for a single string of
lights, such as a circle, arch, cornice, etc., where your leads run
uninterruptedly from first to last lamp; but “how about a design that is
impossible to wire that way?” you ask. It is simple, and I have made a few
diagrams to illustrate the method employed.
You may have a cornice about your windows, and must bring your wires
from the corner. Fig. 5 will show how to do it. A cross, or such designs as
have two breaks, are wired as in Fig. 6.
Page 299
Again, you may wish to use more than one design in a window; for
example, you may have three circles, one at back and one at either side. Fig.
7 shows the easiest method.
These principles apply to many varieties of designs, and it is only the
principles I am endeavoring to make plain.
And now I will give a few hints or, better yet, some don’ts which will be
valuable for amateurs.
example, you may have three circles, one at back and one at either side. Fig.
7 shows the easiest method.
These principles apply to many varieties of designs, and it is only the
principles I am endeavoring to make plain.
And now I will give a few hints or, better yet, some don’ts which will be
valuable for amateurs.
Page 300
SOME “DON’TS.”
Don’t be negligent in handling your connections. Insulate every joint, and
don’t leave loose joints; they consume too much current.
Don’t cross wires that are insulated without bushing the overlying wires,
and never cross uncovered wires.
Don’t bring a wire through the floor or back of window without using
clay bushings; that’s what they are for.
Don’t run wires (as in Fig. 8) without using a lamp, or cutting wires
where X is marked; it saves a short circuit.
Don’t let the wires to your lamps touch brass, except under the screw.
Don’t attempt to connect your design to your “cut-out” until you are sure
your switch is open. You may short circuit yourself. It is not necessarily
fatal, but is decidedly unpleasant.
Don’t handle live wires; 110 volts won’t kill you, but through
carelessness you may some day touch a stronger circuit. Practice caution.
Don’t leave an uncovered wire to show in your window. If you suspend a
design, wrap the wires with the same color as your background.
Don’t imagine you are an electrician because you can run a string of
lights. Keep digging away; you’ll learn something every day.
Don’t try to do all kinds of joint soldering by heating the wires merely.
When you become a little more accustomed to the work, get a larger tool
kit, and among the first things get a soldering iron. In many places it is
necessary.
Don’t be negligent in handling your connections. Insulate every joint, and
don’t leave loose joints; they consume too much current.
Don’t cross wires that are insulated without bushing the overlying wires,
and never cross uncovered wires.
Don’t bring a wire through the floor or back of window without using
clay bushings; that’s what they are for.
Don’t run wires (as in Fig. 8) without using a lamp, or cutting wires
where X is marked; it saves a short circuit.
Don’t let the wires to your lamps touch brass, except under the screw.
Don’t attempt to connect your design to your “cut-out” until you are sure
your switch is open. You may short circuit yourself. It is not necessarily
fatal, but is decidedly unpleasant.
Don’t handle live wires; 110 volts won’t kill you, but through
carelessness you may some day touch a stronger circuit. Practice caution.
Don’t leave an uncovered wire to show in your window. If you suspend a
design, wrap the wires with the same color as your background.
Don’t imagine you are an electrician because you can run a string of
lights. Keep digging away; you’ll learn something every day.
Don’t try to do all kinds of joint soldering by heating the wires merely.
When you become a little more accustomed to the work, get a larger tool
kit, and among the first things get a soldering iron. In many places it is
necessary.
Page 301
LETTERS IN ELECTRIC LIGHT.
In the following illustrations are shown plans of a sign to be electrically
illuminated. The electrical work is necessarily done in the electric working
shops, but as many illuminated signs are being used nowadays, the
description may be useful to decorators who contemplate putting in
something of the kind. In the first figure the letter is on a casing, A, having
a back or support carrying incandescent lamps in channels. The form of the
letter is sheet metal and is set-screwed to the base piece at the places
marked C. The disks B are plate glass colored to conform to the
requirements. The commutator is shown in the other figures. In the first, E
is a wood cylinder, which turns in bearings, D. F F are spring contractors,
and G G wire connections which join those of the lights. Another view is in
the next drawing, in which the cylinder is B, bearings D and spring
contractors C. The cylinder is driven by a small electric motor, G, through a
reduction gear, consisting of a train of wheels or worm gearing, as at F and
E. The spring contacts are electrically joined to the terminals of the lights.
The terminals are joined by a combined return to one pole of the source of
electric supply, and the other pole is connected to the contact pieces. The
rotation of the cylinder consequently breaks and joins the circuit as desired,
producing alternate changing of the lights and colors, resulting in attractive
effects.
In the following illustrations are shown plans of a sign to be electrically
illuminated. The electrical work is necessarily done in the electric working
shops, but as many illuminated signs are being used nowadays, the
description may be useful to decorators who contemplate putting in
something of the kind. In the first figure the letter is on a casing, A, having
a back or support carrying incandescent lamps in channels. The form of the
letter is sheet metal and is set-screwed to the base piece at the places
marked C. The disks B are plate glass colored to conform to the
requirements. The commutator is shown in the other figures. In the first, E
is a wood cylinder, which turns in bearings, D. F F are spring contractors,
and G G wire connections which join those of the lights. Another view is in
the next drawing, in which the cylinder is B, bearings D and spring
contractors C. The cylinder is driven by a small electric motor, G, through a
reduction gear, consisting of a train of wheels or worm gearing, as at F and
E. The spring contacts are electrically joined to the terminals of the lights.
The terminals are joined by a combined return to one pole of the source of
electric supply, and the other pole is connected to the contact pieces. The
rotation of the cylinder consequently breaks and joins the circuit as desired,
producing alternate changing of the lights and colors, resulting in attractive
effects.
Page 302
Page 303
THE WEBER COMMUTATOR.
FIG. 1.
Fig. 1 is end view. H is a wooden cylinder six inches in diameter and
twelve inches long (length is optional according to number of lights), this,
as well as all other bearings, run on bearings of curtain fixtures. G is pulley
wheel connected with reducer in Fig. 3, D are projections of soft rubber ¼
inch thick placed on cylinder H, and work as follows:
When D reaches E it forces E to the left and forms a contact at F F, thus
closing the line and causing lamp or lamps to burn. The position of D on
cylinder, and length of same, must be determined by the length of time the
lamp or lamps continue to burn and when they shall burn.
The distance from A B to B is 5¾ inches, from A C to C is 7¼ inches.
F F are made of spring copper cut in strips ⅜ of an inch wide and bent to
shape, then fastened in base with screws and washer.
FIG. 1.
Fig. 1 is end view. H is a wooden cylinder six inches in diameter and
twelve inches long (length is optional according to number of lights), this,
as well as all other bearings, run on bearings of curtain fixtures. G is pulley
wheel connected with reducer in Fig. 3, D are projections of soft rubber ¼
inch thick placed on cylinder H, and work as follows:
When D reaches E it forces E to the left and forms a contact at F F, thus
closing the line and causing lamp or lamps to burn. The position of D on
cylinder, and length of same, must be determined by the length of time the
lamp or lamps continue to burn and when they shall burn.
The distance from A B to B is 5¾ inches, from A C to C is 7¼ inches.
F F are made of spring copper cut in strips ⅜ of an inch wide and bent to
shape, then fastened in base with screws and washer.
Page 304
FIG. 2.
Fig. 2 shows front view of commutator and needs no explanation. The
above can be operated with water, motor or electricity; but where electricity
is used it becomes necessary to reduce speed of motor (which is 2,200
revolutions) to about 40 or 50 revolutions; this is done by building the
reducer as shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 3 shows machine made at an outlay of labor only. Procure six
tobacco pail lids, join them face to face with screws and you have three
grooved wheels. Make axles of curtain poles twelve inches long, then make
frame, again using curtain fixtures as bearings.
FIG. 3.
Fig. 2 shows front view of commutator and needs no explanation. The
above can be operated with water, motor or electricity; but where electricity
is used it becomes necessary to reduce speed of motor (which is 2,200
revolutions) to about 40 or 50 revolutions; this is done by building the
reducer as shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 3 shows machine made at an outlay of labor only. Procure six
tobacco pail lids, join them face to face with screws and you have three
grooved wheels. Make axles of curtain poles twelve inches long, then make
frame, again using curtain fixtures as bearings.
FIG. 3.
Page 305
Attach motor to No. 1, then from axle of No. 1 run belt to No. 2, from
axle of No. 2 run belt to No. 3, then attach axle of No. 3 to pulley G on
cylinder and you have a machine on which you can operate from 1 to 100
incandescent lamps alternately.
The Weber commutator is very inexpensive, and has been made by a
decorator with an outlay of only fifty cents for the three parts.
axle of No. 2 run belt to No. 3, then attach axle of No. 3 to pulley G on
cylinder and you have a machine on which you can operate from 1 to 100
incandescent lamps alternately.
The Weber commutator is very inexpensive, and has been made by a
decorator with an outlay of only fifty cents for the three parts.
Page 306
THE REYNOLDS FLASHER.
The most reliable machine we now have is one manufactured by a
Chicago firm, which is perfect in its construction and operation and will not
break down or cause danger from sparks. The expense is about fifteen
dollars and the adjustment is so easy that any one can operate it.
The most reliable machine we now have is one manufactured by a
Chicago firm, which is perfect in its construction and operation and will not
break down or cause danger from sparks. The expense is about fifteen
dollars and the adjustment is so easy that any one can operate it.
Page 307
A CHEAP HUB SWITCH.
No doubt every one has seen revolving wheels, stars, pyramids, spiral
stairs, etc., strung with lights, and many have envied the man who had the
facilities for this work; but by following these instructions they can make an
appliance that will do the work perfectly.
First make a pulley wheel twelve inches in diameter; then make two
circles of one-inch wood six inches in diameter; nail together and fasten in
exact center of pulley; insulate the 6-inch circles perfectly.
Next take two strips of spring copper three-eighths inch wide, and make
two hoops to fit snugly over the insulation and to each hoop fasten a wire
eighteen inches long; then put your hoops on your 6-inch circles about one
inch apart, taking care to have them even and tight.
Bore a hole through pulley wheel, and run wire from hoop nearest it
through hole; then bore a hole through 6-inch circles and pulley, and run the
other wire through it. Use bushings in holes, and insulate uncovered wires.
Next take two pieces of copper three-eighths inch wide, six inches long,
bend in half circles, attach wire to end of each, fasten to a piece of 1×2, so
they will form contacts with copper bands on circles.
No doubt every one has seen revolving wheels, stars, pyramids, spiral
stairs, etc., strung with lights, and many have envied the man who had the
facilities for this work; but by following these instructions they can make an
appliance that will do the work perfectly.
First make a pulley wheel twelve inches in diameter; then make two
circles of one-inch wood six inches in diameter; nail together and fasten in
exact center of pulley; insulate the 6-inch circles perfectly.
Next take two strips of spring copper three-eighths inch wide, and make
two hoops to fit snugly over the insulation and to each hoop fasten a wire
eighteen inches long; then put your hoops on your 6-inch circles about one
inch apart, taking care to have them even and tight.
Bore a hole through pulley wheel, and run wire from hoop nearest it
through hole; then bore a hole through 6-inch circles and pulley, and run the
other wire through it. Use bushings in holes, and insulate uncovered wires.
Next take two pieces of copper three-eighths inch wide, six inches long,
bend in half circles, attach wire to end of each, fasten to a piece of 1×2, so
they will form contacts with copper bands on circles.
Page 308
Fig. 1 shows band of copper, two half circles on 1 × 2, and pulley when
finished.
Now suppose you want to use revolving wheel on pivot. Fasten your
appliance in center of wheel, run wires from lamps to wires running through
pulley and connect them; then when your wheel is in position, fasten piece
of wood with two half circles so each presses tightly on one of the copper
bands; connect the wires from half circles to wires from switch, and as your
wheel revolves you have a steady contact.
Fig. 2 shows front of wheel, and 3 shows wheel from rear with half
circles in position.
For a pyramid or such fixtures simply fasten your appliance to bottom or
top as serves your purpose best.
Make your work as near perfect as possible, so the half circles never
leave the bands, and exercise great care in insulating, for, while neglect
does not always result disastrously it is well to be on the safe side.
finished.
Now suppose you want to use revolving wheel on pivot. Fasten your
appliance in center of wheel, run wires from lamps to wires running through
pulley and connect them; then when your wheel is in position, fasten piece
of wood with two half circles so each presses tightly on one of the copper
bands; connect the wires from half circles to wires from switch, and as your
wheel revolves you have a steady contact.
Fig. 2 shows front of wheel, and 3 shows wheel from rear with half
circles in position.
For a pyramid or such fixtures simply fasten your appliance to bottom or
top as serves your purpose best.
Make your work as near perfect as possible, so the half circles never
leave the bands, and exercise great care in insulating, for, while neglect
does not always result disastrously it is well to be on the safe side.
Page 309
THE RUBENS DOUBLE-REVOLVING EFFECT.
The idea is novel and simple. The construction of this machine is
inexpensive. Go to any machine shop and have them bore out a piece of
shafting so that one will fit into the other snugly. The contact plates are
made of copper, lined with asbestos, mounted on wooden circles. In fact,
the entire machine can be built for $12. There is no limit to designs that can
be made for this arrangement. The novelty of two large pieces revolving in
opposite directions, apparently from the point of a single shaft, is in itself a
worthy attraction in any window. You will observe in photo that there are
two pulleys on main shaft, also a countershaft below. One belt is up
straight, the other belt is twisted so as to reverse either shaft. The large
pulley on the countershaft is the main driver. The belt attached to this pulley
The idea is novel and simple. The construction of this machine is
inexpensive. Go to any machine shop and have them bore out a piece of
shafting so that one will fit into the other snugly. The contact plates are
made of copper, lined with asbestos, mounted on wooden circles. In fact,
the entire machine can be built for $12. There is no limit to designs that can
be made for this arrangement. The novelty of two large pieces revolving in
opposite directions, apparently from the point of a single shaft, is in itself a
worthy attraction in any window. You will observe in photo that there are
two pulleys on main shaft, also a countershaft below. One belt is up
straight, the other belt is twisted so as to reverse either shaft. The large
pulley on the countershaft is the main driver. The belt attached to this pulley
Page 310
leads to your motor or whatever power you wish to employ. This device is
safe as well as simple, as you have ample room for cut-outs.
A—Inner shaft, ⁷⁄₁₆ inch diameter.
B—Outer shaft, 1³⁄₁₆ inch diameter.
C—Contact plate.
D—Holder for brushes.
E—Driving pulley for outer shaft.
F—Driving pulley for inner shaft.
G—Contact for feed, inner shaft.
H—Boxing for shaft.
I—Flange for inner shafting.
J—Flange for outer shafting.
K—Cut-outs.
L—Binding posts for outer shaft.
M—Feed wires.
safe as well as simple, as you have ample room for cut-outs.
A—Inner shaft, ⁷⁄₁₆ inch diameter.
B—Outer shaft, 1³⁄₁₆ inch diameter.
C—Contact plate.
D—Holder for brushes.
E—Driving pulley for outer shaft.
F—Driving pulley for inner shaft.
G—Contact for feed, inner shaft.
H—Boxing for shaft.
I—Flange for inner shafting.
J—Flange for outer shafting.
K—Cut-outs.
L—Binding posts for outer shaft.
M—Feed wires.
Page 311
Page 312
THE TYLER AUTOMATIC SWITCH.
A is a wooden cylinder, twelve inches long and six inches in diameter. B
is brush made of three layers of copper, and is screwed down at lower end,
No. 1, so as to work as a spring. C is piece of copper one-half inch wide
fastened around cylinder, and comes in contact with B, so as to make one
feed wire run to switch. D is piece of copper running one-third of the way
around, and comes in contact with another brush, E. Then fasten a small
piece of wire from C to D that carries the current to No. 2, while E is on
copper. The other feed wire is direct from main circuit to window. F is
pulley wheel running to reducer. No. 3 is fuse blocks, which can be used
and are much safer than without. This switch cost me twenty-five cents. Of
course, I am my own electrician. It will cost no more to any one, as it is
very simple.
A is a wooden cylinder, twelve inches long and six inches in diameter. B
is brush made of three layers of copper, and is screwed down at lower end,
No. 1, so as to work as a spring. C is piece of copper one-half inch wide
fastened around cylinder, and comes in contact with B, so as to make one
feed wire run to switch. D is piece of copper running one-third of the way
around, and comes in contact with another brush, E. Then fasten a small
piece of wire from C to D that carries the current to No. 2, while E is on
copper. The other feed wire is direct from main circuit to window. F is
pulley wheel running to reducer. No. 3 is fuse blocks, which can be used
and are much safer than without. This switch cost me twenty-five cents. Of
course, I am my own electrician. It will cost no more to any one, as it is
very simple.
Page 313
HOW TO MAKE AN ELECTRIC WAVING FLAG.
This would appear to the uninitiated as a hard one to build, yet it is one of
the simplest electrical devices to construct.
First ascertain size of flag you want to make, as there is no limit to size.
Build the body of your flag of thin boards, say half an inch thick. The next
important thing is to outline on your woodwork an exact flag. Be sure you
get the requisite number of stars and stripes. You are now ready to proceed
to fasten on your sockets. I may further add here, the flag should not be
square. Have a wave running through your stripes; saw out your edges (see
cut) accordingly. You now have the general outline, as far as the flag is
concerned.
This would appear to the uninitiated as a hard one to build, yet it is one of
the simplest electrical devices to construct.
First ascertain size of flag you want to make, as there is no limit to size.
Build the body of your flag of thin boards, say half an inch thick. The next
important thing is to outline on your woodwork an exact flag. Be sure you
get the requisite number of stars and stripes. You are now ready to proceed
to fasten on your sockets. I may further add here, the flag should not be
square. Have a wave running through your stripes; saw out your edges (see
cut) accordingly. You now have the general outline, as far as the flag is
concerned.
Page 314
FRONT VIEW OF THE WAVING FLAG.
REAR VIEW OF THE WAVING FLAG.
Now, then, for the mechanical part of it: Saw out two wooden disks,
twelve inches in diameter, with a ⅞-in hole in the center. Next you procure
a piece of slate, fourteen inches square. Take a compass and strike a 12-inch
circle. By drawing your compass around several times, you will find it will
cut a fairly deep line. You can then take a hammer and by a few light taps
break the square edges of your slate, leaving a perfectly round disk of slate.
Next, you want a ⅞-inch hole in the center of the slate. Now mount this on
the wooden disk; next, cut the copper contacts and shape them the same as a
REAR VIEW OF THE WAVING FLAG.
Now, then, for the mechanical part of it: Saw out two wooden disks,
twelve inches in diameter, with a ⅞-in hole in the center. Next you procure
a piece of slate, fourteen inches square. Take a compass and strike a 12-inch
circle. By drawing your compass around several times, you will find it will
cut a fairly deep line. You can then take a hammer and by a few light taps
break the square edges of your slate, leaving a perfectly round disk of slate.
Next, you want a ⅞-inch hole in the center of the slate. Now mount this on
the wooden disk; next, cut the copper contacts and shape them the same as a
Page 315
keystone. It will require fifteen of them for that number of circuits. To each
one of them solder a piece of No. 14 wire, as shown in cut G. Then bore the
holes in the slate so that the wires will go through the back of the disks, as
each wire must run from the disk to the flag; that is the negative side, and
the positive side runs right straight from your feeder to the flag. For your
second wooden disk cut out a copper ring, two inches wide, and fasten it
securely to the wood, and solder your wire on the back of this, say a No. 8
wire. This will need contacts, as shown in cut E.
You next make a brush holder. This is a very simple arrangement. The
holder is made of wood. Fasten brushes on securely, as shown in F of cut.
When automatic switch is set up, it will appear as shown in cut E. Now
fasten belt to pulley J, and then to motor, as shown in cut. This switch
should make 300 revolutions per minute. As the brushes strike each section
on the contact plate, it causes a wave of light to pass through that section of
stripes or stars, as the case may be.
This may seem complicated and difficult, but I will venture to say, if you
will study this ten or fifteen minutes you can without much difficulty or
expense proceed to duplicate it.
Remember, each wire running from the disk must run into cut-out and
from cut-out to the flag (see cut B). Also note how wire is soldered on in G.
You can bunch and group all wires from A, and form them into a cable, as
shown in cut I, as they are all of one polarity.
This description is for flag 4½ × 6 feet, to contain about 450 lamps.
There are a number of different ways of producing this effect, but I have
tried this one as described, and found it very satisfactory, likewise
inexpensive to construct.
one of them solder a piece of No. 14 wire, as shown in cut G. Then bore the
holes in the slate so that the wires will go through the back of the disks, as
each wire must run from the disk to the flag; that is the negative side, and
the positive side runs right straight from your feeder to the flag. For your
second wooden disk cut out a copper ring, two inches wide, and fasten it
securely to the wood, and solder your wire on the back of this, say a No. 8
wire. This will need contacts, as shown in cut E.
You next make a brush holder. This is a very simple arrangement. The
holder is made of wood. Fasten brushes on securely, as shown in F of cut.
When automatic switch is set up, it will appear as shown in cut E. Now
fasten belt to pulley J, and then to motor, as shown in cut. This switch
should make 300 revolutions per minute. As the brushes strike each section
on the contact plate, it causes a wave of light to pass through that section of
stripes or stars, as the case may be.
This may seem complicated and difficult, but I will venture to say, if you
will study this ten or fifteen minutes you can without much difficulty or
expense proceed to duplicate it.
Remember, each wire running from the disk must run into cut-out and
from cut-out to the flag (see cut B). Also note how wire is soldered on in G.
You can bunch and group all wires from A, and form them into a cable, as
shown in cut I, as they are all of one polarity.
This description is for flag 4½ × 6 feet, to contain about 450 lamps.
There are a number of different ways of producing this effect, but I have
tried this one as described, and found it very satisfactory, likewise
inexpensive to construct.
Page 316
ELECTRIC ILLUMINATED FOUNTAIN.
A really beautiful center feature, with the addition of a few potted plants,
a little moss and some pebbles.
How to construct it: First, have a tinsmith make the center bowl A out of
tin, any size you wish, according to your window. This resembles a large
cake tin, hollow in the center. Have it enameled white (it will not cost very
much). Then cut a hole in the center of your window; place this tin over the
hole; secure a circular glass shelf, B, from any ordinary notion or perfumery
counter stand; put a large rubber band around the center tin cone and rest
the glass shelf B upon it. Have a fancy stem, C, made of tin and enameled
white and soldered to water pipe, which passes through the hole in center of
glass shelf B, and is attached to main pipe in the basement. A rubber washer
on the glass shelf makes it water tight. Fine holes are punched into the stem,
C, at top and bottom. The water flow is regulated by water stop. The surplus
is carried off through waste pipe. The skeleton pulley D is arranged so that
half of it is in center of the fountain. In the four openings of pulley are four
pieces of colored glass, red, green, yellow and blue, held in position by
tacks.
A strong electric light with reflector, F, sends its rays through the colored
glass upward and through the center cone on to the water, giving a very
beautiful effect. The changing of the colors can be reduced in speed by
means of the reducer E. Three electric bulbs, colored green, with wires
made waterproof, are well insulated and enameled white and laid in the
lower bowl. A few pond lilies and gold fish, together with other accessories
suggested, makes a magnificent center feature.
A really beautiful center feature, with the addition of a few potted plants,
a little moss and some pebbles.
How to construct it: First, have a tinsmith make the center bowl A out of
tin, any size you wish, according to your window. This resembles a large
cake tin, hollow in the center. Have it enameled white (it will not cost very
much). Then cut a hole in the center of your window; place this tin over the
hole; secure a circular glass shelf, B, from any ordinary notion or perfumery
counter stand; put a large rubber band around the center tin cone and rest
the glass shelf B upon it. Have a fancy stem, C, made of tin and enameled
white and soldered to water pipe, which passes through the hole in center of
glass shelf B, and is attached to main pipe in the basement. A rubber washer
on the glass shelf makes it water tight. Fine holes are punched into the stem,
C, at top and bottom. The water flow is regulated by water stop. The surplus
is carried off through waste pipe. The skeleton pulley D is arranged so that
half of it is in center of the fountain. In the four openings of pulley are four
pieces of colored glass, red, green, yellow and blue, held in position by
tacks.
A strong electric light with reflector, F, sends its rays through the colored
glass upward and through the center cone on to the water, giving a very
beautiful effect. The changing of the colors can be reduced in speed by
means of the reducer E. Three electric bulbs, colored green, with wires
made waterproof, are well insulated and enameled white and laid in the
lower bowl. A few pond lilies and gold fish, together with other accessories
suggested, makes a magnificent center feature.
Page 317
CHAPTER XVII.
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL DISPLAY.
The combination of electrical effects with mechanical devices adds to the
complication of work but produces the most attractive displays yet known
to the art. Such designs range from very simple effects to the most
bewildering productions, and are only limited by the skill and genius of the
decorator.
We explain in this chapter examples of the different grades of this work.
ELECTRIC ILLUMINATED FOUNTAIN.
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL DISPLAY.
The combination of electrical effects with mechanical devices adds to the
complication of work but produces the most attractive displays yet known
to the art. Such designs range from very simple effects to the most
bewildering productions, and are only limited by the skill and genius of the
decorator.
We explain in this chapter examples of the different grades of this work.
ELECTRIC ILLUMINATED FOUNTAIN.
Page 318
ILLUMINATED SCENIC BACKGROUND.
First the outlines of the trees are painted on heavy board and cut out, as
are the “wings” in a scene at the theater. A village, with a pretty scene,
houses and churches in the distance, etc., is then painted, and the profile of
the steeples, chimneys, gables, etc., also cut out. About two inches back of
this is set a frame in which is puffed a sunburst of white china silk. Behind
this, again at a distance of two inches, is set another frame covered with
tissue paper, as is shown in the next diagram.
A short distance back of this tissue frame is placed a window glass, as a
protection to the paper from the electric lights, twenty-four of which were
hung in circular forms back of all, the lights following the form of the
sunburst. The effect is simply gorgeous, the silk sunburst taking all the
tintings of the tissue paper screen and the colors blending in perfect
harmony, from the rosy tints of the rising sun to the deep purple tones of the
sky. It puzzles observers to know how this brilliant effect is created; but you
know how to do it now, and can try it yourself. It will be sure to attract
attention and excite admiration. This is the invention of Leonard Shogran.
First the outlines of the trees are painted on heavy board and cut out, as
are the “wings” in a scene at the theater. A village, with a pretty scene,
houses and churches in the distance, etc., is then painted, and the profile of
the steeples, chimneys, gables, etc., also cut out. About two inches back of
this is set a frame in which is puffed a sunburst of white china silk. Behind
this, again at a distance of two inches, is set another frame covered with
tissue paper, as is shown in the next diagram.
A short distance back of this tissue frame is placed a window glass, as a
protection to the paper from the electric lights, twenty-four of which were
hung in circular forms back of all, the lights following the form of the
sunburst. The effect is simply gorgeous, the silk sunburst taking all the
tintings of the tissue paper screen and the colors blending in perfect
harmony, from the rosy tints of the rising sun to the deep purple tones of the
sky. It puzzles observers to know how this brilliant effect is created; but you
know how to do it now, and can try it yourself. It will be sure to attract
attention and excite admiration. This is the invention of Leonard Shogran.
Page 319
DESIGN SHOWING ELECTRIC SCENIC BACKGROUND.—Shogran.
Page 320
THE “OCTOPUS” WINDOW ATTRACTION.
THE ELECTRIC SCENIC BACKGROUND.
This consists in cutting the form of the octopus from dark fabric, and
stitching it to a white cloth. The scales can be made on the octopus with
black paint. The eyes should be cut out, and pink cloth or paper pasted over
the openings on the back of the cloth. Then a number of cards should be
obtained from white board, and the letters of various inscriptions cut out
with a sharp knife. A few suggestive cards are shown in the sketch.
The top card is simply pinned above the form of the octopus, and the
several little cards are entwined in the arms. Colored paper, or cloth, is
glued to the back of each card, so that, like the eyes of the octopus, a
striking effect is obtained when the rear lights are put on and allowed to
shine through.
THE ELECTRIC SCENIC BACKGROUND.
This consists in cutting the form of the octopus from dark fabric, and
stitching it to a white cloth. The scales can be made on the octopus with
black paint. The eyes should be cut out, and pink cloth or paper pasted over
the openings on the back of the cloth. Then a number of cards should be
obtained from white board, and the letters of various inscriptions cut out
with a sharp knife. A few suggestive cards are shown in the sketch.
The top card is simply pinned above the form of the octopus, and the
several little cards are entwined in the arms. Colored paper, or cloth, is
glued to the back of each card, so that, like the eyes of the octopus, a
striking effect is obtained when the rear lights are put on and allowed to
shine through.
Page 321
The lighting arrangement is shown next.
The wood frame, to which the cloth that holds the form of the octopus is
tacked, is marked a. (The view is a sectional one.) This frame is secured to
a stand, d, and the latter to the floor of the window. A tinner can make the
tin reflector b, which reflector serves to support brackets for the lights e.
The reflector is placed just back of the frame and is supported by stand c.
Electric wires, f, carry the current to the lights, and the light shining through
the white cloth shows the form of the octopus, while the eyes and the
lettering are most vivid. If electric lights are not available gas or oil lighting
can be arranged on same. plan.
The wood frame, to which the cloth that holds the form of the octopus is
tacked, is marked a. (The view is a sectional one.) This frame is secured to
a stand, d, and the latter to the floor of the window. A tinner can make the
tin reflector b, which reflector serves to support brackets for the lights e.
The reflector is placed just back of the frame and is supported by stand c.
Electric wires, f, carry the current to the lights, and the light shining through
the white cloth shows the form of the octopus, while the eyes and the
lettering are most vivid. If electric lights are not available gas or oil lighting
can be arranged on same. plan.
Page 322
Page 323
SHOWING BACK OF OCTOPUS DISPLAY.
Page 324
OLD DUTCH WINDMILL WITH CHANGEABLE COLORS
AND FLASHER EFFECTS.
The design here submitted is one that will attract attention as far as it can
be seen, and requires nothing practically of a special order, and is applicable
to almost any kind of stock. The first proceeding naturally will be the frame
for the mill house (see Fig. 2). For a design, say five and one-half feet high,
let this be four feet high to top, eighteen inches square at the gables, two
feet square at the base, made of stock say 1 × 3 inches, and strong enough
to stand the weight and vibrations of the revolving wheel. About three feet
from the floor put in two cross pieces for the bearings for the wheel. The
frame can either be covered with painted canvas or filled in with boxes of
shoes or corsets, bolts of ribbon, etc., or covered with white cloth pinned
full of bunches of flowers or other millinery goods. The wheel (see Fig. 1)
is made of two pieces of 1 × 3 wood, five feet long, crossed at right angles
in the center, and be careful to have it securely fastened to a substantial hub,
in case you cannot get the flange described further on.
AND FLASHER EFFECTS.
The design here submitted is one that will attract attention as far as it can
be seen, and requires nothing practically of a special order, and is applicable
to almost any kind of stock. The first proceeding naturally will be the frame
for the mill house (see Fig. 2). For a design, say five and one-half feet high,
let this be four feet high to top, eighteen inches square at the gables, two
feet square at the base, made of stock say 1 × 3 inches, and strong enough
to stand the weight and vibrations of the revolving wheel. About three feet
from the floor put in two cross pieces for the bearings for the wheel. The
frame can either be covered with painted canvas or filled in with boxes of
shoes or corsets, bolts of ribbon, etc., or covered with white cloth pinned
full of bunches of flowers or other millinery goods. The wheel (see Fig. 1)
is made of two pieces of 1 × 3 wood, five feet long, crossed at right angles
in the center, and be careful to have it securely fastened to a substantial hub,
in case you cannot get the flange described further on.
Page 325
The wings for the wheel can be made of lath frames, say eight inches
wide at the top, six inches at the bottom, and twenty-two inches long,
covered the same as you decide to cover the mill house, and provision made
for the lamps projecting through when the lamp sockets are screwed to the 1
× 3-inch pieces behind. Next is the shaft, as shown in Fig. 3. Get a piece of
gas pipe eight inches longer than your frame is square at the bearings, screw
it securely into a 3-inch flange, which in turn is screwed to the center of the
wheel and acts as a hub. Parallel with the shaft, in its center, fasten two
strips of ¼-inch wood, opposite each other (see Fig. 4), and about one foot
long. Next make nine rings of ¹⁄₁₆ × ½-inch brass, whose inside diameter
will be such as to cause them to fit snugly over the wooden strips on the
shaft, about one-quarter inch apart. Thus you will see the duty of the strips
is to hold the rings away from the shaft, and allow the intervening space
under the rings for drawing in the wires. To ring No. 9 connect a wire
running to one side of each circuit on the wheel, and known as the return
wire. (See Fig. 6.) Connect ring No. 8 to circuit No. 8 on the wheel, No. 7
wide at the top, six inches at the bottom, and twenty-two inches long,
covered the same as you decide to cover the mill house, and provision made
for the lamps projecting through when the lamp sockets are screwed to the 1
× 3-inch pieces behind. Next is the shaft, as shown in Fig. 3. Get a piece of
gas pipe eight inches longer than your frame is square at the bearings, screw
it securely into a 3-inch flange, which in turn is screwed to the center of the
wheel and acts as a hub. Parallel with the shaft, in its center, fasten two
strips of ¼-inch wood, opposite each other (see Fig. 4), and about one foot
long. Next make nine rings of ¹⁄₁₆ × ½-inch brass, whose inside diameter
will be such as to cause them to fit snugly over the wooden strips on the
shaft, about one-quarter inch apart. Thus you will see the duty of the strips
is to hold the rings away from the shaft, and allow the intervening space
under the rings for drawing in the wires. To ring No. 9 connect a wire
running to one side of each circuit on the wheel, and known as the return
wire. (See Fig. 6.) Connect ring No. 8 to circuit No. 8 on the wheel, No. 7
Page 326
ring to No. 7 circuit, etc. These wires must all be run under the rings, so as
to leave their face unobstructed, and at the point of the shaft bearing they
must run inside the shaft and out again at the flange. Attach a 5-inch pulley
anywhere, put on a collar to prevent lateral motion, and the shaft is
completed.
to leave their face unobstructed, and at the point of the shaft bearing they
must run inside the shaft and out again at the flange. Attach a 5-inch pulley
anywhere, put on a collar to prevent lateral motion, and the shaft is
completed.
Page 327
Next nail a 1 × 2-inch strip, covered with asbestos, across the frame (see
Fig. 5), parallel with the shaft and one-half inch clearance from the rings.
This is for a bridge to support the brushes, which project up and press on
the rings to form a contact. Make the brushes of thin brass, three inches
Fig. 5), parallel with the shaft and one-half inch clearance from the rings.
This is for a bridge to support the brushes, which project up and press on
the rings to form a contact. Make the brushes of thin brass, three inches
Page 328
long, and set one opposite and in line with each ring, and screw to the
bridge. Each brush will be known by the same number as its corresponding
ring. Shaft brush No. 9 connects to the service main direct; shaft brush No.
8 connects to flasher brush No. 8; shaft brush No. 7 connects to flasher
brush No. 7, and so on. Place your flasher in such position that you can belt
direct from a 1¼-inch pulley on the countershaft of your flasher to the 5-
inch pulley on the shaft of the windmill with a quarter-inch leather belt.
Divide the flasher circumference into twelve parts. Arrange the lugs as
shown in Fig. 7. Connect and start the motor, and the following will be
produced:
1. Red center.
2. Add white to center.
3. Change center to yellow.
4. Add green to center.
5. Red border, yellow and red center.
6. Red border, red and white center.
7. Red border, green and red center.
8. Red border, green and white center.
9. Red and white border, green and white center.
10. Yellow and green border, green and red center.
11. Red and green border, green and white center.
12. Green and white border, green and red center.
bridge. Each brush will be known by the same number as its corresponding
ring. Shaft brush No. 9 connects to the service main direct; shaft brush No.
8 connects to flasher brush No. 8; shaft brush No. 7 connects to flasher
brush No. 7, and so on. Place your flasher in such position that you can belt
direct from a 1¼-inch pulley on the countershaft of your flasher to the 5-
inch pulley on the shaft of the windmill with a quarter-inch leather belt.
Divide the flasher circumference into twelve parts. Arrange the lugs as
shown in Fig. 7. Connect and start the motor, and the following will be
produced:
1. Red center.
2. Add white to center.
3. Change center to yellow.
4. Add green to center.
5. Red border, yellow and red center.
6. Red border, red and white center.
7. Red border, green and red center.
8. Red border, green and white center.
9. Red and white border, green and white center.
10. Yellow and green border, green and red center.
11. Red and green border, green and white center.
12. Green and white border, green and red center.
Page 329
It is possible, with the above, to make 1,620 combinations, but I wouldn’t
advise you to try it just yet. It is also possible to use fewer circuits if you
wish, and get good results; but I have chosen the above as giving the best
results for the labor expended. I have previously told how lamps can be
colored for this kind of work.
advise you to try it just yet. It is also possible to use fewer circuits if you
wish, and get good results; but I have chosen the above as giving the best
results for the labor expended. I have previously told how lamps can be
colored for this kind of work.
Page 330
ELECTRIC REVOLVING CHRISTMAS TREE.
This is an excellent window feature for the holidays, or it would make a
beautiful interior display for the toy department.
Instead of trimming the tree with the old style glass bells, use colored
electric lights and have the tree revolving.
The cost is very small, and can be quickly constructed, and when
artistically trimmed with toys, etc., makes a very beautiful feature.
How to go about it: First, secure a good shaped tree, the size you wish to
use, A. Then trim off the limbs at the bottom; cut a hole through the floor in
the center of window; put the bottom of tree through this hole, resting the
end upon a revolving counter stool D. See that it is well oiled. If you have
no stool, use any suitable pivot. Smooth around the tree below the limbs;
put plenty of graphite on and nail a collar to the window floor. This will
make a good bearing. Next get a split pulley B, and fix around the tree. This
connects with motor. If you wish to reduce the speed, make a reducer, as
shown in electric fountain drawing in last chapter. The wiring is of the
simplest kind, and has already been thoroughly explained. Be careful to
insulate well all connections. C shows block of wood with brushes attached.
The strips of copper nailed on pulley B show the contact and cut-off. You
can use as many or as few lights as you wish. To color the bulbs, use Pikron
for glass, which comes in all colors.
This is so simple in construction that any amateur will grasp the idea
readily. It is an excellent Christmas attraction.
This is an excellent window feature for the holidays, or it would make a
beautiful interior display for the toy department.
Instead of trimming the tree with the old style glass bells, use colored
electric lights and have the tree revolving.
The cost is very small, and can be quickly constructed, and when
artistically trimmed with toys, etc., makes a very beautiful feature.
How to go about it: First, secure a good shaped tree, the size you wish to
use, A. Then trim off the limbs at the bottom; cut a hole through the floor in
the center of window; put the bottom of tree through this hole, resting the
end upon a revolving counter stool D. See that it is well oiled. If you have
no stool, use any suitable pivot. Smooth around the tree below the limbs;
put plenty of graphite on and nail a collar to the window floor. This will
make a good bearing. Next get a split pulley B, and fix around the tree. This
connects with motor. If you wish to reduce the speed, make a reducer, as
shown in electric fountain drawing in last chapter. The wiring is of the
simplest kind, and has already been thoroughly explained. Be careful to
insulate well all connections. C shows block of wood with brushes attached.
The strips of copper nailed on pulley B show the contact and cut-off. You
can use as many or as few lights as you wish. To color the bulbs, use Pikron
for glass, which comes in all colors.
This is so simple in construction that any amateur will grasp the idea
readily. It is an excellent Christmas attraction.
Page 331
ELECTRICAL REVOLVING CHRISTMAS TREE.
Page 332
A SHIP IN A STORM.
This was a prize design of Leonard Shogran’s invention, and depicts in
the foreground a well-rigged ship with the name “Monarch” painted on her
bow and stern was nobly laboring in the heavy seas, with a motion so
accurately perfect that many interested spectators stepped on the window
sash in hopes to see actual waves.
Every five or six seconds a vivid flash of lightning burst forth from the
sullen, stormy clouds, with such surprising reality one would invariably
wait to hear the crashing thunder.
The mechanical contrivance used to obtain the above described effect is
very simple and inexpensive. A painted scene on canvas represents a storm
on the water, about 5 × 7 feet in size, covered on back with cardboard,
making it perfectly opaque. Then cut out streaks representing lightning, and
also openings in the edges of the clouds bending them forward enough to
admit the light from behind. Then paste white tissue paper back of openings
representing lightning, and yellow and orange back of clouds. Then place
an incandescent lamp behind, which is turned on and off every few seconds
by an automatic switch.
To produce the flickering effect, wherein the real novelty consists, place
a large wheel, made of cardboard and thin strips of wood, divided into eight
equal open and closed spaces, between the canvas and lamp, which, when
set in motion, throws a rapid string of shadows, caused by the closed space.
This wheel, as will be understood, was always in motion; so that the
moment the lamp was lit the effect was there; and when it went out
everything seemed dead and quiet, as no trace of the revolving wheel could
then be seen.
This was a prize design of Leonard Shogran’s invention, and depicts in
the foreground a well-rigged ship with the name “Monarch” painted on her
bow and stern was nobly laboring in the heavy seas, with a motion so
accurately perfect that many interested spectators stepped on the window
sash in hopes to see actual waves.
Every five or six seconds a vivid flash of lightning burst forth from the
sullen, stormy clouds, with such surprising reality one would invariably
wait to hear the crashing thunder.
The mechanical contrivance used to obtain the above described effect is
very simple and inexpensive. A painted scene on canvas represents a storm
on the water, about 5 × 7 feet in size, covered on back with cardboard,
making it perfectly opaque. Then cut out streaks representing lightning, and
also openings in the edges of the clouds bending them forward enough to
admit the light from behind. Then paste white tissue paper back of openings
representing lightning, and yellow and orange back of clouds. Then place
an incandescent lamp behind, which is turned on and off every few seconds
by an automatic switch.
To produce the flickering effect, wherein the real novelty consists, place
a large wheel, made of cardboard and thin strips of wood, divided into eight
equal open and closed spaces, between the canvas and lamp, which, when
set in motion, throws a rapid string of shadows, caused by the closed space.
This wheel, as will be understood, was always in motion; so that the
moment the lamp was lit the effect was there; and when it went out
everything seemed dead and quiet, as no trace of the revolving wheel could
then be seen.
Page 333
DESIGN SHOWING SHIP IN A STORM.—Shogran.
The effective motion of the ship was obtained by an equally simple
device, as can be seen in the drawing. The ship was first painted on
cardboard, and cut out and fastened on a rod operated by a wheel below.
The different speeds necessary for these effects was obtained by a series of
pulleys, the arrangement of which you will find illustrated in the drawing.
The effective motion of the ship was obtained by an equally simple
device, as can be seen in the drawing. The ship was first painted on
cardboard, and cut out and fastened on a rod operated by a wheel below.
The different speeds necessary for these effects was obtained by a series of
pulleys, the arrangement of which you will find illustrated in the drawing.
Page 334
MECHANISM OF SHIP IN A STORM.
Page 335
A MOONLIGHT SCENE.
This novel effect, as shown in the picture, is a pleasing centerpiece to any
class of displayed goods. The background was a scene, painted in oil colors
on a 7 × 9 canvas, of a rough, “choppy” sea, the water in natural colors, the
sky nearly black, except where the edges of the clouds are lit up by the
rising moon. At the horizon a hole is cut for moon, and beneath that, and all
the way down to bottom of the canvas, little slits were cut in the crests of
the waves, the width of space in which slits were cut widening while going
downward. White celluloid was glued to back of moon and also all the slits,
and back of celluloid yellow tissue paper was glued. On front of canvas
edges of slits were tipped with gilt and silver metal flitters sprinkled
liberally between. Divide the canvas into two parts by cutting through
where the sky line and water meet. Each part was mounted on a frame, the
water part put on very loosely, allowing three or four inches play. When set
up the water canvas laps over the sky a trifle, and is set one-half inch
forward to allow sail to pass through, which is a piece of cardboard painted
gray, and fastened on an endless band. An incandescent light is placed back
of moon, also one lower down, back of slits, and an electric fan stood back
of water canvas. When set in motion the sail projects through and passes
across the canvas between the two frames at the horizon, and the canvas on
water frame being loose, the fan gives it a pitching, rolling motion. When
seen from sidewalk no division of canvas is detected, and the illusion of the
moving sail and rolling waters, reflecting the moon’s light, is perfect. This
arrangement is so simple and easy that any one can do it, and it is bound to
be an overwhelming attraction anywhere. This display was the invention of
Oscar M. Condit.
This novel effect, as shown in the picture, is a pleasing centerpiece to any
class of displayed goods. The background was a scene, painted in oil colors
on a 7 × 9 canvas, of a rough, “choppy” sea, the water in natural colors, the
sky nearly black, except where the edges of the clouds are lit up by the
rising moon. At the horizon a hole is cut for moon, and beneath that, and all
the way down to bottom of the canvas, little slits were cut in the crests of
the waves, the width of space in which slits were cut widening while going
downward. White celluloid was glued to back of moon and also all the slits,
and back of celluloid yellow tissue paper was glued. On front of canvas
edges of slits were tipped with gilt and silver metal flitters sprinkled
liberally between. Divide the canvas into two parts by cutting through
where the sky line and water meet. Each part was mounted on a frame, the
water part put on very loosely, allowing three or four inches play. When set
up the water canvas laps over the sky a trifle, and is set one-half inch
forward to allow sail to pass through, which is a piece of cardboard painted
gray, and fastened on an endless band. An incandescent light is placed back
of moon, also one lower down, back of slits, and an electric fan stood back
of water canvas. When set in motion the sail projects through and passes
across the canvas between the two frames at the horizon, and the canvas on
water frame being loose, the fan gives it a pitching, rolling motion. When
seen from sidewalk no division of canvas is detected, and the illusion of the
moving sail and rolling waters, reflecting the moon’s light, is perfect. This
arrangement is so simple and easy that any one can do it, and it is bound to
be an overwhelming attraction anywhere. This display was the invention of
Oscar M. Condit.
Page 336
DESIGN SHOWING A MOONLIGHT SCENE.—Condit.
Page 337
AN ALLEGORICAL DESIGN.
In giving a description of this allegorical effect you will at once see that it
is on the “theatrical” order. A great many of our merchants have ideas of
their own in regard to the value of decorations of this kind—in fact, we
know of a merchant who will not allow a wax figure in his windows,
another who considers a landscape effect abominable, another who will not
allow contrasting backgrounds, and so on without end. The fact remains,
nevertheless, that the writer believes show windows were made for the
purpose of showing goods, that the people may see what you have and
patronize you accordingly. It is with the intention of giving you a show
window distinctively attractive in itself, that can be gotten up at a trifling
expense and possess sufficient animation to attract the attention of the
public, that the accompanying design is presented. It is suitable for almost
any line of goods, and requires no materials outside of the average property
room, unless it be the flasher; but as these are now so much used we assume
In giving a description of this allegorical effect you will at once see that it
is on the “theatrical” order. A great many of our merchants have ideas of
their own in regard to the value of decorations of this kind—in fact, we
know of a merchant who will not allow a wax figure in his windows,
another who considers a landscape effect abominable, another who will not
allow contrasting backgrounds, and so on without end. The fact remains,
nevertheless, that the writer believes show windows were made for the
purpose of showing goods, that the people may see what you have and
patronize you accordingly. It is with the intention of giving you a show
window distinctively attractive in itself, that can be gotten up at a trifling
expense and possess sufficient animation to attract the attention of the
public, that the accompanying design is presented. It is suitable for almost
any line of goods, and requires no materials outside of the average property
room, unless it be the flasher; but as these are now so much used we assume
Page 338
you have one either of your own make, such as has been previously
described, or one of the many for sale on the market. Outside of this you
will require fourteen red, fourteen white and seven green lamps for the
figure and border, and the necessary amount of stationary lights to show off
the goods displayed properly, but not strong enough to dim the colors of the
figure. Next select a suitable life-size figure, mount it on a pedestal about
one foot high, and drape in any filmy white material you may have. Set the
figure somewhat back on the pedestal, so as to leave room for three
footlights of different colors in front, which can be screened from the
outside by a piece of new tin set at such angle as to reflect the colored rays
upon the white figure, and properly covered up on the side toward the
street. The sword may be made of a piece of lath covered with silver paper
or white cloth. For the girdle use a modern stock article, and a limited
amount of tinsel properly distributed will improve the looks of the entire
window. For the wings take two thin sticks extending from the bottom of
the wings below the hips to the extreme tip. Draw it into the shape of a bow,
with a string attached to each end, the same as a small boy would make a
bow. About two-thirds of the way down, at a point just behind the shoulders
nail a piece of board about 6 × 12 inches. Now take a number of lath, saw
them in two parts lengthwise and nail to this board, diverging in the
direction shown in the cut forming the frame for the wings. They are to be
covered with a transparent white material for two reasons: The lights on the
wings are behind the cloth, showing through (not in front), and it must be
white because there are colored lamps to be shown through it. The covering
on the wings should be properly gathered and pleated to give the
appearance of feathers, in the same direction as the diverging ribs. A very
thin shellac (almost watery with alcohol) colored with aniline makes a very
good dip for coloring lamps for temporary inside work. Use very little
aniline, as deep colors do not give the desired effect. The background can
be made of panels about one foot wide and eight long, all converging to the
center. In this case, however, it will be found better to put the lamps
studding the panels on the front side. The panels can be made of all white or
alternate white and delicate pink, with lights therein to correspond. Behind
the whole about two feet put a purple background perfectly plain—at least
from the level of the hips up, if not entirely.
described, or one of the many for sale on the market. Outside of this you
will require fourteen red, fourteen white and seven green lamps for the
figure and border, and the necessary amount of stationary lights to show off
the goods displayed properly, but not strong enough to dim the colors of the
figure. Next select a suitable life-size figure, mount it on a pedestal about
one foot high, and drape in any filmy white material you may have. Set the
figure somewhat back on the pedestal, so as to leave room for three
footlights of different colors in front, which can be screened from the
outside by a piece of new tin set at such angle as to reflect the colored rays
upon the white figure, and properly covered up on the side toward the
street. The sword may be made of a piece of lath covered with silver paper
or white cloth. For the girdle use a modern stock article, and a limited
amount of tinsel properly distributed will improve the looks of the entire
window. For the wings take two thin sticks extending from the bottom of
the wings below the hips to the extreme tip. Draw it into the shape of a bow,
with a string attached to each end, the same as a small boy would make a
bow. About two-thirds of the way down, at a point just behind the shoulders
nail a piece of board about 6 × 12 inches. Now take a number of lath, saw
them in two parts lengthwise and nail to this board, diverging in the
direction shown in the cut forming the frame for the wings. They are to be
covered with a transparent white material for two reasons: The lights on the
wings are behind the cloth, showing through (not in front), and it must be
white because there are colored lamps to be shown through it. The covering
on the wings should be properly gathered and pleated to give the
appearance of feathers, in the same direction as the diverging ribs. A very
thin shellac (almost watery with alcohol) colored with aniline makes a very
good dip for coloring lamps for temporary inside work. Use very little
aniline, as deep colors do not give the desired effect. The background can
be made of panels about one foot wide and eight long, all converging to the
center. In this case, however, it will be found better to put the lamps
studding the panels on the front side. The panels can be made of all white or
alternate white and delicate pink, with lights therein to correspond. Behind
the whole about two feet put a purple background perfectly plain—at least
from the level of the hips up, if not entirely.
Page 339
The wiring is done according to Fig. 2. Circuit No. 1 connects to each
alternate light in the border which are to be red; No. 2 goes to each alternate
light in the border which will be white; No. 3 to one red footlight and three
red lights in each wing; No. 4 to one white footlight and three white in each
wing. No. 5 to one green footlight and three green lights in each wing.
While but one line is shown in the cut, it will be understood that two wires
are required. Now take the left hand wire of each of the five circuits and
connect them to the left hand service main, using a fuse in each. Take the
right hand wire of circuit No. 1 and connect to the left hand brush of flasher,
the right hand wire of No. 2 to the next brush, and so on. Connect the right
hand service to the standard of the flasher.
alternate light in the border which are to be red; No. 2 goes to each alternate
light in the border which will be white; No. 3 to one red footlight and three
red lights in each wing; No. 4 to one white footlight and three white in each
wing. No. 5 to one green footlight and three green lights in each wing.
While but one line is shown in the cut, it will be understood that two wires
are required. Now take the left hand wire of each of the five circuits and
connect them to the left hand service main, using a fuse in each. Take the
right hand wire of circuit No. 1 and connect to the left hand brush of flasher,
the right hand wire of No. 2 to the next brush, and so on. Connect the right
hand service to the standard of the flasher.
Page 340
Next divide the circumference of your flasher into six equal parts, and
arrange the lugs as shown in Fig. 3. Set the speed of the flasher at about one
revolution per minute, and the following effect will be produced:
First.—Red and white border, with green wings and footlight.
Second.—Red border, with red and white wings and footlight.
Third.—All white.
Fourth.—All red.
Fifth.—White border, green wings and footlight.
Sixth.—All lamps at once.
arrange the lugs as shown in Fig. 3. Set the speed of the flasher at about one
revolution per minute, and the following effect will be produced:
First.—Red and white border, with green wings and footlight.
Second.—Red border, with red and white wings and footlight.
Third.—All white.
Fourth.—All red.
Fifth.—White border, green wings and footlight.
Sixth.—All lamps at once.
Page 341
The above movements will be repeated every minute, and the current
consumed is about 55 per cent of the capacity of the lamps burning steadily.
consumed is about 55 per cent of the capacity of the lamps burning steadily.
Page 342
ELECTRICAL EMBLEMS.
The following designs for electrical emblems may be used for exterior,
window or interior decorations. The special method of wiring for letters, as
previously described may be applied to any wording.
The design for Washington’s Birthday will do likewise for July 4th, and
shows Washington’s portrait surrounded by incandescents. A circle of lights
is also placed around the name of each of the thirteen original states.
The following designs for electrical emblems may be used for exterior,
window or interior decorations. The special method of wiring for letters, as
previously described may be applied to any wording.
The design for Washington’s Birthday will do likewise for July 4th, and
shows Washington’s portrait surrounded by incandescents. A circle of lights
is also placed around the name of each of the thirteen original states.
Page 343
The Knight of Pythias emblem is an example of an illuminated device for
secret societies and is made of papier mache and fitted with incandescents.
A rather more elaborate design for the Odd Fellows is shown, partly painted
upon a flat board and partly composed of incandescents.
secret societies and is made of papier mache and fitted with incandescents.
A rather more elaborate design for the Odd Fellows is shown, partly painted
upon a flat board and partly composed of incandescents.
Page 344
The Easter Emblem is composed of close puffing through which are
projected the incandescent globes. The bells are covered with artificial
flowers, the tongues being incandescent lights.
projected the incandescent globes. The bells are covered with artificial
flowers, the tongues being incandescent lights.
Page 345
ELECTRIC MILLINERY DISPLAY.
An effect showing revolving busts and millinery stands, with lightning
effects, as may be seen in the illustration. The mechanism is plainly
numbered in the picture of the apparatus, and is described as follows:
No. 1. A fan motor, two 32 candle power lamps used to cut down speed.
No. 2. Gear wheels, three large wheels twelve inches in diameter, small
wheels three and one-half inches.
No. 3. Switch to change lights, power operates it.
ELECTRICAL EASTER EMBLEM.
An effect showing revolving busts and millinery stands, with lightning
effects, as may be seen in the illustration. The mechanism is plainly
numbered in the picture of the apparatus, and is described as follows:
No. 1. A fan motor, two 32 candle power lamps used to cut down speed.
No. 2. Gear wheels, three large wheels twelve inches in diameter, small
wheels three and one-half inches.
No. 3. Switch to change lights, power operates it.
ELECTRICAL EASTER EMBLEM.
Page 346
MECHANISM OF ELECTRIC MILLINERY DISPLAY.
Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Stands for hat stands to revolve, twist the belt line
thus: One long belt does the business. Shoe strings make the best belting—
won’t stretch nor slip. Use shade poles one inch in diameter, bore hole in
center of wheel one inch, make a tight fit. Use shade ends for bearings.
They are cheap and give good service. To make ball bearings and have very
little friction, take a steel ball such as is used in bicycles, imbed it in the
wood, place the socket over it, screw it down, put in your shade end and
you have a perfect bearing, especially so when you wish to make a heavy
wax figure revolve.
Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Stands for hat stands to revolve, twist the belt line
thus: One long belt does the business. Shoe strings make the best belting—
won’t stretch nor slip. Use shade poles one inch in diameter, bore hole in
center of wheel one inch, make a tight fit. Use shade ends for bearings.
They are cheap and give good service. To make ball bearings and have very
little friction, take a steel ball such as is used in bicycles, imbed it in the
wood, place the socket over it, screw it down, put in your shade end and
you have a perfect bearing, especially so when you wish to make a heavy
wax figure revolve.
Page 347
DESIGN SHOWING ELECTRICAL MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Softley.
The idea of having so many wheels enables a trimmer to get any desired
speed, high or low. It can be used for any purpose. Having the wheels
arranged up and down economizes room, and can be arranged in a very
small space. The design above explained is a creation of E. W. Softley.
The idea of having so many wheels enables a trimmer to get any desired
speed, high or low. It can be used for any purpose. Having the wheels
arranged up and down economizes room, and can be arranged in a very
small space. The design above explained is a creation of E. W. Softley.
Page 348
CHAPTER XVIII.
PHOTOGRAPHING SHOW WINDOWS.
It is natural that all trimmers should be interested in the proper
reproduction of their displays. The photograph is an imperishable evidence
of the trimmer’s skill and genius. It counts more with employers than any
other one thing. If you wish a position the merchant at once asks, “What
kind of work can you do?” Your photograph answers the question. He
cannot dispute its evidence. Besides, photographs taken at various times in
your career afford a record of your progress. You can see how far you have
advanced, and profit by the comparison.
There are a few points that it is well to know and remember concerning
the process of photographing show windows:
If there is a broad street before your window, or an open space, it will be
almost impossible to take a picture by day; for, plant your camera where
you will, it is always darker in your window than it is outside, and the
opposite condition should prevail. But you can get it at night. See that your
electric lights, while flooding the window, are themselves hidden from the
street. If you have a good lens from twenty to thirty seconds’ exposure will
be enough. A lens not especially rapid will require more time. The size of
the diaphragm also counts. The smaller the diaphragm, the more time is
required; but the small diaphragm also gives an additional sharpness to your
picture. And then, people can walk between the camera and the window
without injuring the picture—provided they don’t stop short. The time
required is also influenced by the rapidity and make of the plate. Therefore
you have three things to consider in timing your picture—lens, plate and
diaphragm.
A good time to photograph a window is early morning, on a clear day,
just before sunrise. The light is strong and penetrating, and a good picture
PHOTOGRAPHING SHOW WINDOWS.
It is natural that all trimmers should be interested in the proper
reproduction of their displays. The photograph is an imperishable evidence
of the trimmer’s skill and genius. It counts more with employers than any
other one thing. If you wish a position the merchant at once asks, “What
kind of work can you do?” Your photograph answers the question. He
cannot dispute its evidence. Besides, photographs taken at various times in
your career afford a record of your progress. You can see how far you have
advanced, and profit by the comparison.
There are a few points that it is well to know and remember concerning
the process of photographing show windows:
If there is a broad street before your window, or an open space, it will be
almost impossible to take a picture by day; for, plant your camera where
you will, it is always darker in your window than it is outside, and the
opposite condition should prevail. But you can get it at night. See that your
electric lights, while flooding the window, are themselves hidden from the
street. If you have a good lens from twenty to thirty seconds’ exposure will
be enough. A lens not especially rapid will require more time. The size of
the diaphragm also counts. The smaller the diaphragm, the more time is
required; but the small diaphragm also gives an additional sharpness to your
picture. And then, people can walk between the camera and the window
without injuring the picture—provided they don’t stop short. The time
required is also influenced by the rapidity and make of the plate. Therefore
you have three things to consider in timing your picture—lens, plate and
diaphragm.
A good time to photograph a window is early morning, on a clear day,
just before sunrise. The light is strong and penetrating, and a good picture
Page 349
will usually result. Remember that the interior of your window must be
light. If your window is darker than the street the glass acts as a mirror,
reflecting everything on the opposite side of the street. If the sun shines on
your window, and the opposite side of the street is dark, there will be no
reflections of foreign objects in your picture.
By keeping these important items of information in mind any country
photographer can get a good picture of a show window. If the photographer
doesn’t know them, it would be well to call his attention to these facts. He
may not have had experience in “shooting” show windows.
A method often adopted with good success is as follows: Make a cloth
screen of black cambric, sufficiently large to shut off all reflections when
raised before the window. Fasten the two upper corners to poles, and when
about to take the picture have two men or boys raise the screen just back of
the camera. All reflections will be avoided, and a clear picture result. As it
is not probable many photographers will prepare such a screen, we advise
trimmers to have one made, and keep in readiness for occasions when they
want their windows photographed. Flashlight pictures will not avoid
reflections.
You must not attempt to use the screen on windy days, however, for the
wind will render it unmanageable.
A prominent decorator describes his experience in photographing
windows in the following words:
“Under ordinary circumstances it is extremely difficult to photograph a
window display, owing to reflections caused by dark objects in the display.
These, acting in a similar manner to mercury on the back of a mirror, make
the plate glass a strong reflector of objects outside the window. Frequently a
photograph contains not only the window display, but trees, buildings,
people, and even the camera itself, often to the total exclusion of important
portions of the trim. If the glass is extra thick the reflections may be caused
by a light colored display as well. Having suffered many severe
disappointments in photographing my windows, I have been driven to resort
to almost every known method in photography to endeavor to eliminate this
very objectionable feature from my pictures. But I always met with failure
until I accidentally noticed, while looking at a window one evening, that
while the windows across the street were dark, and the arc lights opposite
were extinguished, there was absolutely no reflection on the glass. This
light. If your window is darker than the street the glass acts as a mirror,
reflecting everything on the opposite side of the street. If the sun shines on
your window, and the opposite side of the street is dark, there will be no
reflections of foreign objects in your picture.
By keeping these important items of information in mind any country
photographer can get a good picture of a show window. If the photographer
doesn’t know them, it would be well to call his attention to these facts. He
may not have had experience in “shooting” show windows.
A method often adopted with good success is as follows: Make a cloth
screen of black cambric, sufficiently large to shut off all reflections when
raised before the window. Fasten the two upper corners to poles, and when
about to take the picture have two men or boys raise the screen just back of
the camera. All reflections will be avoided, and a clear picture result. As it
is not probable many photographers will prepare such a screen, we advise
trimmers to have one made, and keep in readiness for occasions when they
want their windows photographed. Flashlight pictures will not avoid
reflections.
You must not attempt to use the screen on windy days, however, for the
wind will render it unmanageable.
A prominent decorator describes his experience in photographing
windows in the following words:
“Under ordinary circumstances it is extremely difficult to photograph a
window display, owing to reflections caused by dark objects in the display.
These, acting in a similar manner to mercury on the back of a mirror, make
the plate glass a strong reflector of objects outside the window. Frequently a
photograph contains not only the window display, but trees, buildings,
people, and even the camera itself, often to the total exclusion of important
portions of the trim. If the glass is extra thick the reflections may be caused
by a light colored display as well. Having suffered many severe
disappointments in photographing my windows, I have been driven to resort
to almost every known method in photography to endeavor to eliminate this
very objectionable feature from my pictures. But I always met with failure
until I accidentally noticed, while looking at a window one evening, that
while the windows across the street were dark, and the arc lights opposite
were extinguished, there was absolutely no reflection on the glass. This
Page 350
was, of course, a very natural circumstance, but one a person might easily
overlook. As an experiment I planted my camera before the window, and
made a flash light exposure of the display, only to find that in the center of
the picture I had a great white blotch caused by the flash—it being reflected
by the glass. Again I tried. The incandescent lights are placed in a strip
running along the inside front of the window, just above the sash, and fitted
with cone-shaped reflectors, which is the best system of window
illumination ever used, and one that is being universally adopted. The
display was a millinery window, done chiefly in white. I allowed an
exposure before the camera of twenty minutes under the light ordinarily
used in the window, and I got a beautiful picture entirely free from
reflection.”
The length of exposure depends entirely upon the nature of the goods
displayed, darker goods requiring a longer exposure. An oriental rug display
I give thirty minutes, and a white window does not really require more than
fifteen minutes. Passing street cars, all having their lights in about the same
place, will cause a streak in the plate if the lens is not covered while they go
by. This can be easily done, without danger of moving the camera, by
simply holding the cover of your plate holder before the lens. The same
thing may be done when a person stops before the window. You must make
allowances for the time the plate is thus covered, so that your total exposure
will be from fifteen to thirty minutes, as your judgment dictates is the time
required.
I have found this method of photographing at night, by the electric light
of the window itself, by far the most satisfactory of any I have attempted, as
the results are uniformly good.
overlook. As an experiment I planted my camera before the window, and
made a flash light exposure of the display, only to find that in the center of
the picture I had a great white blotch caused by the flash—it being reflected
by the glass. Again I tried. The incandescent lights are placed in a strip
running along the inside front of the window, just above the sash, and fitted
with cone-shaped reflectors, which is the best system of window
illumination ever used, and one that is being universally adopted. The
display was a millinery window, done chiefly in white. I allowed an
exposure before the camera of twenty minutes under the light ordinarily
used in the window, and I got a beautiful picture entirely free from
reflection.”
The length of exposure depends entirely upon the nature of the goods
displayed, darker goods requiring a longer exposure. An oriental rug display
I give thirty minutes, and a white window does not really require more than
fifteen minutes. Passing street cars, all having their lights in about the same
place, will cause a streak in the plate if the lens is not covered while they go
by. This can be easily done, without danger of moving the camera, by
simply holding the cover of your plate holder before the lens. The same
thing may be done when a person stops before the window. You must make
allowances for the time the plate is thus covered, so that your total exposure
will be from fifteen to thirty minutes, as your judgment dictates is the time
required.
I have found this method of photographing at night, by the electric light
of the window itself, by far the most satisfactory of any I have attempted, as
the results are uniformly good.
Page 351
CHAPTER XIX.
WORDS OF ADVICE.
CARE OF WAX FIGURES.
Now I wish to say just a few words regarding the care of wax figures. I
think there is nothing that looks so bad, or ruins the effect of the window so
much, as to see handsomely dressed wax figures with faded, dirty or shiny
faces; and too often we do see this. With a very little practice and time a
trimmer can recolor his figures as well as an expert can do it for him. First
take coal oil and a piece of cheesecloth and wash the face; but do not allow
the oil to remain on the face more than a few moments, as it will soften the
wax. When wiped dry and cleaned, take powdered pumice, mixed with a
very little carmine; mix until all the red streaks have been thoroughly
worked in. This will give you a very light pink shade. Then get a large sable
brush, dip it in the preparation and commence at the point of the cheek,
using a circular motion of the brush, and so continue until the face has been
covered. Give the cheeks more time than the rest of the face. It will give
them more color. For the lips, corners of the eyes and nostrils, mix the
carmine and pumice half and half, and use a very small sable brush. With a
little care and practice any trimmer can recolor his figures with slight
trouble.
WORDS OF ADVICE.
CARE OF WAX FIGURES.
Now I wish to say just a few words regarding the care of wax figures. I
think there is nothing that looks so bad, or ruins the effect of the window so
much, as to see handsomely dressed wax figures with faded, dirty or shiny
faces; and too often we do see this. With a very little practice and time a
trimmer can recolor his figures as well as an expert can do it for him. First
take coal oil and a piece of cheesecloth and wash the face; but do not allow
the oil to remain on the face more than a few moments, as it will soften the
wax. When wiped dry and cleaned, take powdered pumice, mixed with a
very little carmine; mix until all the red streaks have been thoroughly
worked in. This will give you a very light pink shade. Then get a large sable
brush, dip it in the preparation and commence at the point of the cheek,
using a circular motion of the brush, and so continue until the face has been
covered. Give the cheeks more time than the rest of the face. It will give
them more color. For the lips, corners of the eyes and nostrils, mix the
carmine and pumice half and half, and use a very small sable brush. With a
little care and practice any trimmer can recolor his figures with slight
trouble.
Page 352
JANUARY SALES.
During the month of January certain lines of goods are pushed to the
front and “sales” inaugurated to induce customers to purchase liberally. The
holidays being over, and the demand for fancy goods and notions
comparatively small, staples and necessary articles are alone capable of
interesting the public.
White goods, linens, cottons and muslin underwear are in natural demand
during the month of January. Perhaps, were the choice left to the housewife,
she might prefer to purchase these lines a little later in the season. But when
she notes the “special sales” inaugurated by all prominent houses, she
wisely decides to take advantage of the opportunity and lay in a stock of
goods for the coming months.
Linen sales are always expected in January, and when the holiday
windows come out the linen windows usually go in. In smaller towns the
sales do not commence until about January 15, and are continued for two or
three weeks.
During the month of January certain lines of goods are pushed to the
front and “sales” inaugurated to induce customers to purchase liberally. The
holidays being over, and the demand for fancy goods and notions
comparatively small, staples and necessary articles are alone capable of
interesting the public.
White goods, linens, cottons and muslin underwear are in natural demand
during the month of January. Perhaps, were the choice left to the housewife,
she might prefer to purchase these lines a little later in the season. But when
she notes the “special sales” inaugurated by all prominent houses, she
wisely decides to take advantage of the opportunity and lay in a stock of
goods for the coming months.
Linen sales are always expected in January, and when the holiday
windows come out the linen windows usually go in. In smaller towns the
sales do not commence until about January 15, and are continued for two or
three weeks.
Page 353
CLEARING SALES.
If ever a window trimmer is useful to his house it is when “clearing up”
sales are in order and it is necessary to reduce stock before inventory.
There are many goods left over from the holiday stocks that should not
be carried another year, and the house prefers to make a reduction in price
in order to close them out promptly.
Now is the trimmer’s opportunity to be useful. He is given a lot of odds
and ends, at attractive prices, and told to “sell them.” His cards should be
carefully and vigorously worded, his displays especially attractive. For he
isn’t catering now to a public in search of goods to purchase, but a public
that must be coaxed and “jollied” into buying what it really doesn’t need—
and that, too, at a time when pocketbooks are especially shrunken and
debilitated. Therefore the man who makes a catchy trim is rendering
himself especially valuable to his employers, and trimmers should use every
endeavor to make their trims count, and try to do conscientious work.
If ever a window trimmer is useful to his house it is when “clearing up”
sales are in order and it is necessary to reduce stock before inventory.
There are many goods left over from the holiday stocks that should not
be carried another year, and the house prefers to make a reduction in price
in order to close them out promptly.
Now is the trimmer’s opportunity to be useful. He is given a lot of odds
and ends, at attractive prices, and told to “sell them.” His cards should be
carefully and vigorously worded, his displays especially attractive. For he
isn’t catering now to a public in search of goods to purchase, but a public
that must be coaxed and “jollied” into buying what it really doesn’t need—
and that, too, at a time when pocketbooks are especially shrunken and
debilitated. Therefore the man who makes a catchy trim is rendering
himself especially valuable to his employers, and trimmers should use every
endeavor to make their trims count, and try to do conscientious work.
Page 354
BUSINESS WINDOW.
It has lately become the fashion to discourage mechanical displays, as
well as “picture” windows and elaborate trims of all sorts, under the plea
that they are not “business windows.”
“Give me a plain, business window,” says the merchant; and the trimmer
does not argue the question very fiercely, for it saves him a lot of thought
and a lot of hard work.
What is a “business” window? What is usually meant by the term is a
window that will sell goods—the final aim of all window trimming. How
can a window sell goods? By placing them before the public in such a
manner that the observer has a desire for them, and enters the store to make
the purchase. Once in, the customer may see other things she wants, and no
matter how much she purchases under these conditions the credit of the sale
belongs to the window.
Now, mark one point in this statement. I said “observer.” All goods
placed in a show window are not observed. Since the street is lined with
windows, all filled with merchandise, few people stop to notice any of them
unless there is something in the window that especially catches the eye. A
“business window” that has no attractive quality is not really a business
window. It is a fool window. The attractive window is the business window.
To make an attractive window requires all the brain power and craft and
taste and handiwork of the most expert trimmer. The inexpert trimmer is the
man who decorated that window which is not attractive and which the
passing throng does not see at all.
In order to make a window stand out from its fellows something more
than a plain arrangement of merchandise is needed. It must be unusual and
distinctive to the extent of arresting the attention of busy people as they
hurry along the street.
Shrewd and observant trimmers have found that the secret of successful
windows is to have a background or mechanical device that will command
attention, and then to place the goods in so ingenious a manner that in
looking at the display people note the excellence of the goods and desire to
purchase them. It’s the old idea of first catching your hare and then cooking
It has lately become the fashion to discourage mechanical displays, as
well as “picture” windows and elaborate trims of all sorts, under the plea
that they are not “business windows.”
“Give me a plain, business window,” says the merchant; and the trimmer
does not argue the question very fiercely, for it saves him a lot of thought
and a lot of hard work.
What is a “business” window? What is usually meant by the term is a
window that will sell goods—the final aim of all window trimming. How
can a window sell goods? By placing them before the public in such a
manner that the observer has a desire for them, and enters the store to make
the purchase. Once in, the customer may see other things she wants, and no
matter how much she purchases under these conditions the credit of the sale
belongs to the window.
Now, mark one point in this statement. I said “observer.” All goods
placed in a show window are not observed. Since the street is lined with
windows, all filled with merchandise, few people stop to notice any of them
unless there is something in the window that especially catches the eye. A
“business window” that has no attractive quality is not really a business
window. It is a fool window. The attractive window is the business window.
To make an attractive window requires all the brain power and craft and
taste and handiwork of the most expert trimmer. The inexpert trimmer is the
man who decorated that window which is not attractive and which the
passing throng does not see at all.
In order to make a window stand out from its fellows something more
than a plain arrangement of merchandise is needed. It must be unusual and
distinctive to the extent of arresting the attention of busy people as they
hurry along the street.
Shrewd and observant trimmers have found that the secret of successful
windows is to have a background or mechanical device that will command
attention, and then to place the goods in so ingenious a manner that in
looking at the display people note the excellence of the goods and desire to
purchase them. It’s the old idea of first catching your hare and then cooking
Page 355
it. But you must catch your hare. You must have an attraction that induces
the pedestrian to stop and look, or your window is a flat failure. That is why
beautiful, artistic and mechanical displays are to be encouraged rather than
discouraged. These are the real “business windows.”
the pedestrian to stop and look, or your window is a flat failure. That is why
beautiful, artistic and mechanical displays are to be encouraged rather than
discouraged. These are the real “business windows.”
Page 356
A HINT TO DEPARTMENT MANAGERS.
If you wish to get the best results from the window and window trimmer,
give him a chance and lay out the goods you desire in the window. Lay
them all out, as nearly as possible, then call the window trimmer and let
him look over them; tell him the story; let him know all about them from
your point of view, when without doubt you will find the window more to
your idea than otherwise. Do not take it for granted the trimmer knows all
you know about these particular goods. No matter how much experience he
may have, tell him what you desire. If you simply hand out a lot of stuff,
just about as it comes, it will appear in the window in pretty much the same
shape. Do not forget that the trimmer’s first thought is, How will they drape
or set best? How will the colors harmonize? What kinds of stands or
pictures can I get or use? These and other considerations are usually the
way it strikes him; he does not think of your point of view, or what you
want to say. Hence, as a matter of course, the window tickets do not express
your idea at all, nor has the most been made of the position of “leaders,”
etc. The window doesn’t draw as it should; there is but little return; the
buyer and every one else concerned are out of temper, and feel like finding
fault with everybody but themselves.
If you have struck any particular arrangement in which you desire to
have your window trimmed, say so. No doubt the trimmer will have seen it,
being always on the lookout, and be happy to please.
Should the goods be yard goods of various colors, patterns and prices,
then particularly is it necessary for the trimmer to see the major portion of
the goods to go in, that he may be able to make the best color arrangement
possible. Giving him two, three or four pieces at a time as he goes along
quite precludes the possibility of any kind of color harmony. The trimmer
can only set the four pieces, one after the other, and then go for four more,
to be set up in like manner. This is the way not to do it. Give all the goods at
once—near as possible—so he can select as he thinks best. That is his
particular business, has been his particular study, and most likely he knows
more of color harmony than you do, and can make a better window
selection. The same idea of course refers to all goods of divers colors and
If you wish to get the best results from the window and window trimmer,
give him a chance and lay out the goods you desire in the window. Lay
them all out, as nearly as possible, then call the window trimmer and let
him look over them; tell him the story; let him know all about them from
your point of view, when without doubt you will find the window more to
your idea than otherwise. Do not take it for granted the trimmer knows all
you know about these particular goods. No matter how much experience he
may have, tell him what you desire. If you simply hand out a lot of stuff,
just about as it comes, it will appear in the window in pretty much the same
shape. Do not forget that the trimmer’s first thought is, How will they drape
or set best? How will the colors harmonize? What kinds of stands or
pictures can I get or use? These and other considerations are usually the
way it strikes him; he does not think of your point of view, or what you
want to say. Hence, as a matter of course, the window tickets do not express
your idea at all, nor has the most been made of the position of “leaders,”
etc. The window doesn’t draw as it should; there is but little return; the
buyer and every one else concerned are out of temper, and feel like finding
fault with everybody but themselves.
If you have struck any particular arrangement in which you desire to
have your window trimmed, say so. No doubt the trimmer will have seen it,
being always on the lookout, and be happy to please.
Should the goods be yard goods of various colors, patterns and prices,
then particularly is it necessary for the trimmer to see the major portion of
the goods to go in, that he may be able to make the best color arrangement
possible. Giving him two, three or four pieces at a time as he goes along
quite precludes the possibility of any kind of color harmony. The trimmer
can only set the four pieces, one after the other, and then go for four more,
to be set up in like manner. This is the way not to do it. Give all the goods at
once—near as possible—so he can select as he thinks best. That is his
particular business, has been his particular study, and most likely he knows
more of color harmony than you do, and can make a better window
selection. The same idea of course refers to all goods of divers colors and
Page 357
patterns. This point is important, as being conducive to good window
display, and profitable results therefrom.
These little points may seem of but small account to those of our buying
confreres who have not studied the matter. It is not for me to tell them that
every great business is made up of just such little things; or in other words,
to arrange every detail so as to avoid loss of time (money), and to get the
best results (money) with the least possible expenditure—system and
discipline count every time.
Every business man who has studied the matter will recognize the fact
that modern and judicious window displays are of greater drawing power
than any other advertising medium extant, and are becoming more so every
day, with enormous strides. Therefore when you deal with a modern
window trimmer give him the courtesy due one who has attained an
indispensable position, by long study, thought and diligence.
display, and profitable results therefrom.
These little points may seem of but small account to those of our buying
confreres who have not studied the matter. It is not for me to tell them that
every great business is made up of just such little things; or in other words,
to arrange every detail so as to avoid loss of time (money), and to get the
best results (money) with the least possible expenditure—system and
discipline count every time.
Every business man who has studied the matter will recognize the fact
that modern and judicious window displays are of greater drawing power
than any other advertising medium extant, and are becoming more so every
day, with enormous strides. Therefore when you deal with a modern
window trimmer give him the courtesy due one who has attained an
indispensable position, by long study, thought and diligence.
Page 358
MONOGRAM CONSTRUCTION.
Suggestions for making monograms for window displays are shown in
the accompanying illustration. The letters may be cut from thick pasteboard
or from thin wood, using a sharp knife for the purpose. Often the letters are
made several feet high, and when covered with white cloth or wound with
decorative material make novel and attractive exhibits. The monogram can
be supported in the center of a window by means of cords from the ceiling
or on a wood rack.
Suggestions for making monograms for window displays are shown in
the accompanying illustration. The letters may be cut from thick pasteboard
or from thin wood, using a sharp knife for the purpose. Often the letters are
made several feet high, and when covered with white cloth or wound with
decorative material make novel and attractive exhibits. The monogram can
be supported in the center of a window by means of cords from the ceiling
or on a wood rack.
Page 359
PROCESS FOR GILDING.
As the window trimmer is frequently required to gild articles for display,
the process may be described. The material to be gilded is first covered with
a solution of gelatine in hot water, to which an equal quantity of alcohol is
added, and the leaf gold put on while wet. Then take a sheet of soft paper
and press and smooth it over the leaf gold until the gelatine below is evenly
distributed. By this spots in the gilding are prevented. Do not use too much
gelatine, as otherwise the gold becomes spotted; nor too little, for in this
case the binding is too weak to enable the gold to withstand subsequent
polishing. The surfaces should be cleaned before gilding. After having the
leaf gold put on, the whole is allowed to dry for ten or twenty minutes,
when the gold is rubbed with cotton, whereby the luster is produced. Then
another layer of gelatine is spread on with one stroke of a full, soft and large
brush, and if especially good work be required, a second layer of leaf gold
is put on and covered with gelatine as before. In this case, however, the
gelatine is best used hot. The same process can be employed for silvering,
but more gelatine should be taken, as leaf silver is thicker than leaf gold.
As the window trimmer is frequently required to gild articles for display,
the process may be described. The material to be gilded is first covered with
a solution of gelatine in hot water, to which an equal quantity of alcohol is
added, and the leaf gold put on while wet. Then take a sheet of soft paper
and press and smooth it over the leaf gold until the gelatine below is evenly
distributed. By this spots in the gilding are prevented. Do not use too much
gelatine, as otherwise the gold becomes spotted; nor too little, for in this
case the binding is too weak to enable the gold to withstand subsequent
polishing. The surfaces should be cleaned before gilding. After having the
leaf gold put on, the whole is allowed to dry for ten or twenty minutes,
when the gold is rubbed with cotton, whereby the luster is produced. Then
another layer of gelatine is spread on with one stroke of a full, soft and large
brush, and if especially good work be required, a second layer of leaf gold
is put on and covered with gelatine as before. In this case, however, the
gelatine is best used hot. The same process can be employed for silvering,
but more gelatine should be taken, as leaf silver is thicker than leaf gold.
Page 360
CHAPTER XX.
HINTS AND SUGGESTIONS.
Chiffon.—The utility of chiffon in window decoration is proved every
day. The material is so soft, fleecy and pliable that it makes an admirable
floor covering or background, and is also adapted for shelves.
An Illumination.—Procure a number of hanging fish globes, of about 4-
quart size. Cover them with colored tissue or crepe paper, smooth on the
surface, with a puffing or shirr at the top. Suspend in various positions in
your window, and drop an incandescent globe into each, or light with small
hand lamps. If the colors are harmonious the illumination will be beautiful
enough to attract unusual attention to your display.
Prisms for Decorating.—Suddenly a fad has sprung up for decorating
trims with prisms, such as used on hanging lamps. They are sold by the
hundred by any crockery house, and are very reasonable in price. To edge
shelving in windows or for trimming more profusely they are very bright
and pretty. In one recent trim 5,000 prisms were used on the background,
and when the display was lighted at evening the bright crystals looked like
so many scintillating diamonds.
Side Hoops.—The sides of windows are always more or less difficult to
trim properly, but by using small hoops, about twelve or fifteen inches in
diameter, nailed in various positions against the side walls, you can suspend
within them many goods that will show advantageously, and serve to
balance your trim. The hoops should be wound with cheesecloth, thus
making a frame for the article you display.
HINTS AND SUGGESTIONS.
Chiffon.—The utility of chiffon in window decoration is proved every
day. The material is so soft, fleecy and pliable that it makes an admirable
floor covering or background, and is also adapted for shelves.
An Illumination.—Procure a number of hanging fish globes, of about 4-
quart size. Cover them with colored tissue or crepe paper, smooth on the
surface, with a puffing or shirr at the top. Suspend in various positions in
your window, and drop an incandescent globe into each, or light with small
hand lamps. If the colors are harmonious the illumination will be beautiful
enough to attract unusual attention to your display.
Prisms for Decorating.—Suddenly a fad has sprung up for decorating
trims with prisms, such as used on hanging lamps. They are sold by the
hundred by any crockery house, and are very reasonable in price. To edge
shelving in windows or for trimming more profusely they are very bright
and pretty. In one recent trim 5,000 prisms were used on the background,
and when the display was lighted at evening the bright crystals looked like
so many scintillating diamonds.
Side Hoops.—The sides of windows are always more or less difficult to
trim properly, but by using small hoops, about twelve or fifteen inches in
diameter, nailed in various positions against the side walls, you can suspend
within them many goods that will show advantageously, and serve to
balance your trim. The hoops should be wound with cheesecloth, thus
making a frame for the article you display.
Page 361
Post Shelves.—Posts in windows frequently annoy and puzzle trimmers,
who find them awkward to contend with. Post brackets are easily made, and
are serviceable, while they obviate the disadvantage of the post. Make
shelves fitting halfway around the post and fronting the window glass.
Place them equal distances apart, and then tack pleats of cheesecloth to the
edges, allowing the pleats to run down to the next shelf, where they are
bunched and tacked. Make the shelves of such width as will accommodate
the goods you wish to display.
Suspended Stands.—Cut a square board large enough for the form to
stand upon, cover it neatly, and suspend from the ceiling by ribbons running
from each corner. One beauty about these is they do not interfere with the
trim below them.
Framed Forms.—Secure a large gilt frame, set it in the center of your
window and build behind it an alcove lined with dark drapery. Set a form,
costumed as desired, in this alcove, and light with electric lights placed
inside the frame and out of view. The effect is similar to that of a lifesized
picture, and is very attractive.
Umbrellas and Neckwear.—Make stands of threes of umbrellas, and lay
neckwear over the crossed handles. Or, fasten canes or umbrellas to the
sides and back of your trim, the ferrules sticking into the bored holes of a
proper size to hold them firmly; and over these improvised fixtures drape
four-in-hands, hosiery, etc. The crooked handles may be used for
suspending made ties.
Ribbon Decoration.—Where the trim occupies only the floor of the
window, the display may be balanced by running broad ribbons from the
four corners, crossing in the center and placed about midway between the
trim and the ceiling. Make a large bow for each corner and one in the center
where the ribbons cross. This idea may often be utilized in millinery trims.
who find them awkward to contend with. Post brackets are easily made, and
are serviceable, while they obviate the disadvantage of the post. Make
shelves fitting halfway around the post and fronting the window glass.
Place them equal distances apart, and then tack pleats of cheesecloth to the
edges, allowing the pleats to run down to the next shelf, where they are
bunched and tacked. Make the shelves of such width as will accommodate
the goods you wish to display.
Suspended Stands.—Cut a square board large enough for the form to
stand upon, cover it neatly, and suspend from the ceiling by ribbons running
from each corner. One beauty about these is they do not interfere with the
trim below them.
Framed Forms.—Secure a large gilt frame, set it in the center of your
window and build behind it an alcove lined with dark drapery. Set a form,
costumed as desired, in this alcove, and light with electric lights placed
inside the frame and out of view. The effect is similar to that of a lifesized
picture, and is very attractive.
Umbrellas and Neckwear.—Make stands of threes of umbrellas, and lay
neckwear over the crossed handles. Or, fasten canes or umbrellas to the
sides and back of your trim, the ferrules sticking into the bored holes of a
proper size to hold them firmly; and over these improvised fixtures drape
four-in-hands, hosiery, etc. The crooked handles may be used for
suspending made ties.
Ribbon Decoration.—Where the trim occupies only the floor of the
window, the display may be balanced by running broad ribbons from the
four corners, crossing in the center and placed about midway between the
trim and the ceiling. Make a large bow for each corner and one in the center
where the ribbons cross. This idea may often be utilized in millinery trims.
Page 362
Wash Day.—For a wash goods window put a form representing a
laundress bending over a wash tub and engaged in washing a piece of goods
of the class the window is draped with. A sign should read, “Yes, these will
wash.”
Easter Panorama.—A panorama of Easter flowers may easily be made
by placing bunches of various flowers on an endless belt, which, when
attached to a motor, carries the flowers across the window in one continual
stream.
Live Canary Birds.—Here is a novel suggestion that will make a capital
background for any window: About three feet from the back of your
window put a screen of illusion or some open material, the color being
cream or some light tint that will render the netting as invisible as possible.
In the space behind the netting place some wires at various distances, so
that the birds may perch upon them. A few canaries in this backing, flying
here and there, as they will, will prove a great attraction. A painted
background of a summer scene will greatly improve the effect.
Human Forms.—The fad just now is to use human forms to show goods.
A handsomely fitted room is shown in the window, and a lady, dressed in
style costume, sits or walks about, showing off her gown to advantage. At
times she displays cards reading, “This lace costs —— a yard,” or “This
dress goods is only —— a yard,” thus calling attention practically to the
goods. The ladies criticise the make and “hang” and appearance of the
fabrics, and the men—well, if the display figure is pretty the men are also
attracted. Bicycle suits for ladies were recently shown in this manner in
Chicago, the display figure, or model, appearing in a different dress every
hour.
Kaleidoscope.—An ingenious display consists of two rapidly revolving
electric fans, throwing about with their strong air currents particles of red,
white and blue paper, forming a scene of kaleidoscopic beauty.
laundress bending over a wash tub and engaged in washing a piece of goods
of the class the window is draped with. A sign should read, “Yes, these will
wash.”
Easter Panorama.—A panorama of Easter flowers may easily be made
by placing bunches of various flowers on an endless belt, which, when
attached to a motor, carries the flowers across the window in one continual
stream.
Live Canary Birds.—Here is a novel suggestion that will make a capital
background for any window: About three feet from the back of your
window put a screen of illusion or some open material, the color being
cream or some light tint that will render the netting as invisible as possible.
In the space behind the netting place some wires at various distances, so
that the birds may perch upon them. A few canaries in this backing, flying
here and there, as they will, will prove a great attraction. A painted
background of a summer scene will greatly improve the effect.
Human Forms.—The fad just now is to use human forms to show goods.
A handsomely fitted room is shown in the window, and a lady, dressed in
style costume, sits or walks about, showing off her gown to advantage. At
times she displays cards reading, “This lace costs —— a yard,” or “This
dress goods is only —— a yard,” thus calling attention practically to the
goods. The ladies criticise the make and “hang” and appearance of the
fabrics, and the men—well, if the display figure is pretty the men are also
attracted. Bicycle suits for ladies were recently shown in this manner in
Chicago, the display figure, or model, appearing in a different dress every
hour.
Kaleidoscope.—An ingenious display consists of two rapidly revolving
electric fans, throwing about with their strong air currents particles of red,
white and blue paper, forming a scene of kaleidoscopic beauty.
Page 363
Shamrocks.—Cut a large shamrock, say two feet high, from thin boards
or cardboard, and cover the surface thickly with the artificial green rose
leaves sold by millinery houses. The effect is very beautiful and it may be
used in the center of your window on St. Patrick’s day.
To Show Ribbons.—A pretty effect is created by pushing out the center of
a bolt of ribbon and extending the coils to as great a length as the width of
the bolt will admit.
Icicles.—Icicles in summer have a cooling tendency. To make a cool
looking window, take strings (hempen cord is best) and dip them in a
solution of glue. While wet scatter cotton along them until they are from a
quarter to a half inch thick. Let them dry. Dissolve gelatine, making a
solution about as thick as ordinary syrup. Dip your cords into this solution
and hang them up again to dry. Result—icicles as long and thick as you
want them; guaranteed not to melt in the sun. Suspend them from the top of
your windows. Fill in the spaces between them, on the ceiling, with vines of
smilax, artificial flowers and green leaves.
or cardboard, and cover the surface thickly with the artificial green rose
leaves sold by millinery houses. The effect is very beautiful and it may be
used in the center of your window on St. Patrick’s day.
To Show Ribbons.—A pretty effect is created by pushing out the center of
a bolt of ribbon and extending the coils to as great a length as the width of
the bolt will admit.
Icicles.—Icicles in summer have a cooling tendency. To make a cool
looking window, take strings (hempen cord is best) and dip them in a
solution of glue. While wet scatter cotton along them until they are from a
quarter to a half inch thick. Let them dry. Dissolve gelatine, making a
solution about as thick as ordinary syrup. Dip your cords into this solution
and hang them up again to dry. Result—icicles as long and thick as you
want them; guaranteed not to melt in the sun. Suspend them from the top of
your windows. Fill in the spaces between them, on the ceiling, with vines of
smilax, artificial flowers and green leaves.
Page 364
House of Linens.—Build a light frame of a small house of any design to
suit your fancy, and cover it with strawboard, except the spaces for
windows and doors. Over the board arrange toweling for the roof, folded
napkins for the sides, with solid colored handkerchiefs for the windows.
Light from within.
Shirt Waists.—Very attractive displays may be made with shirt waists,
which will soon be in season. Make pads of excelsior, wrapped with thin,
flexible paper, and of a size to fill out the waists, and insert one into the
bosom of each waist shown. Smaller pads for sleeves may be used to
advantage. Waists should be fitted with collars, ties and cuffs.
suit your fancy, and cover it with strawboard, except the spaces for
windows and doors. Over the board arrange toweling for the roof, folded
napkins for the sides, with solid colored handkerchiefs for the windows.
Light from within.
Shirt Waists.—Very attractive displays may be made with shirt waists,
which will soon be in season. Make pads of excelsior, wrapped with thin,
flexible paper, and of a size to fill out the waists, and insert one into the
bosom of each waist shown. Smaller pads for sleeves may be used to
advantage. Waists should be fitted with collars, ties and cuffs.
Page 365
Winter Scene.—A good window for winter may be made by cutting down
an old tree (or part of one) and placing it in the center of your window. Run
cotton over the tops of the bare branches to represent snow, and sprinkle it
with flitters. Two or three stuffed robins or sparrows may be placed upon
the branches, which will also hold many articles of merchandise.
Twist Crepe Backgrounds.—Trimmers are using crepe paper for
backgrounds with good effect. One mode is to cut the crepe paper into
three-inch strips, paste together, end to end, until long enough to reach the
height of the window. One end is tacked flat to the floor, and the strip is
slightly twisted until the curls that are formed are about as close as those in
a corkscrew. The strip is then drawn fairly taut and tacked to the ceiling. A
few inches away a strip of contrasting color is fastened in the same way,
and, continuing, a straight or circular backing is thus formed which is bright
and attractive. Sometimes the tops of the twisted columns are centered, and
in a few instances the ends are gathered together at the bottom and spread,
fan-like, from that point.
Handkerchief Racks.—These racks consist of ¼-inch rods fastened under
the back edge of the counter top, running perpendicularly to a height of
eighteen inches above the counter, and then forward horizontally eighteen
inches. The front end is flattened and pierced with a small hole in which to
stick the standard of a price ticket. The bars are placed a foot apart, and run
the length of the counter. Handkerchiefs are fastened to the horizontal
section by means of clasps or cord, and the effect produced by the display is
remarkable, a few dozen handkerchiefs presenting the appearance of a large
stock. The bars are common iron, made by any blacksmith, and gilded.
Use of Wall Paper.—Occasionally one tires of the continuous use of
cheesecloth for backgrounds, and for variety a window lined with wall
paper is effective. Care must be exercised in selecting a small, dainty
pattern, and the entire window space—sides, back, ceiling and floor—
should be covered with the same pattern, as well as any stands used in the
trim. Dark backgrounds, with small white figures, are most desirable.
an old tree (or part of one) and placing it in the center of your window. Run
cotton over the tops of the bare branches to represent snow, and sprinkle it
with flitters. Two or three stuffed robins or sparrows may be placed upon
the branches, which will also hold many articles of merchandise.
Twist Crepe Backgrounds.—Trimmers are using crepe paper for
backgrounds with good effect. One mode is to cut the crepe paper into
three-inch strips, paste together, end to end, until long enough to reach the
height of the window. One end is tacked flat to the floor, and the strip is
slightly twisted until the curls that are formed are about as close as those in
a corkscrew. The strip is then drawn fairly taut and tacked to the ceiling. A
few inches away a strip of contrasting color is fastened in the same way,
and, continuing, a straight or circular backing is thus formed which is bright
and attractive. Sometimes the tops of the twisted columns are centered, and
in a few instances the ends are gathered together at the bottom and spread,
fan-like, from that point.
Handkerchief Racks.—These racks consist of ¼-inch rods fastened under
the back edge of the counter top, running perpendicularly to a height of
eighteen inches above the counter, and then forward horizontally eighteen
inches. The front end is flattened and pierced with a small hole in which to
stick the standard of a price ticket. The bars are placed a foot apart, and run
the length of the counter. Handkerchiefs are fastened to the horizontal
section by means of clasps or cord, and the effect produced by the display is
remarkable, a few dozen handkerchiefs presenting the appearance of a large
stock. The bars are common iron, made by any blacksmith, and gilded.
Use of Wall Paper.—Occasionally one tires of the continuous use of
cheesecloth for backgrounds, and for variety a window lined with wall
paper is effective. Care must be exercised in selecting a small, dainty
pattern, and the entire window space—sides, back, ceiling and floor—
should be covered with the same pattern, as well as any stands used in the
trim. Dark backgrounds, with small white figures, are most desirable.
Page 366
Holly.—Windows trimmed with sprigs of holly, having the red berries
peeping from among the dark green leaves, inspire shoppers with the
thought that Christmas is not far off, and thus stimulate trade.
A Snow Storm.—Cover the bottom of your window with cotton batting
(sides and top may also be covered if you wish). Dust well with powdered
mica or white frosting. Place several incandescent lights, wire guarded, so
that they are hidden from view by the cotton. Some of the lights may have
red bulbs. Secrete several electric fans in various parts of the window, and,
lastly, throw three or four pounds of goose-down into the window and start
up the fans. You will not only have a regular snow storm, but a blizzard, and
any central figure will be seen as having a fight with the elements.
Rainbow.—A very pretty window is where the background is a huge
rainbow, consisting of a broad arch the full width of the window. This arch
is covered with tinted cheesecloth, one tint blending with another, and all
the hues of the rainbow being used. The effect is exceedingly striking. A
show card in front reads: “Don’t Chase Rainbows. We Have the Goods and
the Prices. Trade with Us.”
A Blanket Window.—Make an arch, extending across the window,
covered with rolled blankets. Under the arch build a small hill of irregular
shape, covered with some green material. Place toy sheep in different
positions upon the hill. Use draped blankets for background. Natural wool
may also be effectively used to trim with.
Autumn Leaves.—Natural or artificial leaves, in the exquisite autumnal
colorings, may be effectively employed in decorating windows. They are
seasonable and attractive, and easily procured.
Outfit Displays.—Where a merchant carries all lines of goods, a capital
idea is to make a window of outfit displays. Lay over a form an attractive
piece of dress goods, and upon or around this group articles of ladies’ wear
to match the shade of the cloth, such as gloves, ribbons, neckwear,
peeping from among the dark green leaves, inspire shoppers with the
thought that Christmas is not far off, and thus stimulate trade.
A Snow Storm.—Cover the bottom of your window with cotton batting
(sides and top may also be covered if you wish). Dust well with powdered
mica or white frosting. Place several incandescent lights, wire guarded, so
that they are hidden from view by the cotton. Some of the lights may have
red bulbs. Secrete several electric fans in various parts of the window, and,
lastly, throw three or four pounds of goose-down into the window and start
up the fans. You will not only have a regular snow storm, but a blizzard, and
any central figure will be seen as having a fight with the elements.
Rainbow.—A very pretty window is where the background is a huge
rainbow, consisting of a broad arch the full width of the window. This arch
is covered with tinted cheesecloth, one tint blending with another, and all
the hues of the rainbow being used. The effect is exceedingly striking. A
show card in front reads: “Don’t Chase Rainbows. We Have the Goods and
the Prices. Trade with Us.”
A Blanket Window.—Make an arch, extending across the window,
covered with rolled blankets. Under the arch build a small hill of irregular
shape, covered with some green material. Place toy sheep in different
positions upon the hill. Use draped blankets for background. Natural wool
may also be effectively used to trim with.
Autumn Leaves.—Natural or artificial leaves, in the exquisite autumnal
colorings, may be effectively employed in decorating windows. They are
seasonable and attractive, and easily procured.
Outfit Displays.—Where a merchant carries all lines of goods, a capital
idea is to make a window of outfit displays. Lay over a form an attractive
piece of dress goods, and upon or around this group articles of ladies’ wear
to match the shade of the cloth, such as gloves, ribbons, neckwear,
Page 367
umbrella, shoes and a trimmed hat. Half a dozen such outfits, contrasting
well in colors, make a window very attractive to the fair sex.
Fireplaces.—The soft glow of a fireplace in the center or at the side of a
window brightens any trim, and in cold weather looks very cozy to the
shivering crowds that pass by.
A Good Idea.—Silks and dress Goods may be attractively draped over
short poles suspended from the ceiling of the window by means of chains.
The poles should be about two feet in length. Bows of bright ribbon
fastened to the chains midway between the pole and ceiling add to the
charm of the display.
Illusion.—A very pretty window trim may be made by stretching illusion,
of the quality that hats are lined with, across the center of the window, and
upon its surface pinning fancy handkerchiefs, etc., in artistic, flower shaped
effects. If the illusion is stretched tightly it will be almost invisible, and the
goods will seem to the observer to be suspended in mid-air.
Box Models.—Much attention may be attracted by making from
cardboard a model of some well known building in your town, such as the
court house, public library, college or a church, following the form of its
architecture and painting it to resemble the original structure. Cut out the
windows and cover the openings with colored tissue paper. By putting a
light inside you get a very pretty effect and one that will be appreciated by
your townspeople.
A Prismatic Display.—Take two large panes of common window glass,
and set them in a frame about six inches apart. Have them perfectly clean,
and then fill the space between them with cracked ice of clean and clear
quality. Place the frame in the window, and behind the exact center of it
hang an electric light or place a lamp with a reflector. From the sidewalk the
cracked ice will show the most beautiful prismatic effects, in all the colors
well in colors, make a window very attractive to the fair sex.
Fireplaces.—The soft glow of a fireplace in the center or at the side of a
window brightens any trim, and in cold weather looks very cozy to the
shivering crowds that pass by.
A Good Idea.—Silks and dress Goods may be attractively draped over
short poles suspended from the ceiling of the window by means of chains.
The poles should be about two feet in length. Bows of bright ribbon
fastened to the chains midway between the pole and ceiling add to the
charm of the display.
Illusion.—A very pretty window trim may be made by stretching illusion,
of the quality that hats are lined with, across the center of the window, and
upon its surface pinning fancy handkerchiefs, etc., in artistic, flower shaped
effects. If the illusion is stretched tightly it will be almost invisible, and the
goods will seem to the observer to be suspended in mid-air.
Box Models.—Much attention may be attracted by making from
cardboard a model of some well known building in your town, such as the
court house, public library, college or a church, following the form of its
architecture and painting it to resemble the original structure. Cut out the
windows and cover the openings with colored tissue paper. By putting a
light inside you get a very pretty effect and one that will be appreciated by
your townspeople.
A Prismatic Display.—Take two large panes of common window glass,
and set them in a frame about six inches apart. Have them perfectly clean,
and then fill the space between them with cracked ice of clean and clear
quality. Place the frame in the window, and behind the exact center of it
hang an electric light or place a lamp with a reflector. From the sidewalk the
cracked ice will show the most beautiful prismatic effects, in all the colors
Page 368
of the rainbow. In cold weather the ice will last throughout a day easily, and
perhaps for a longer time.
A Pretty Trim recently shown consisted of an open well, built up of rough
stones and covered with moss, with an old oaken bucket attached to a pole,
which a boy is just raising from the well. Autumn leaves strew the ground,
and at the back of the scene is a fence consisting of two rough rails and
pickets of umbrellas and canes alternating. A cabin built of underwear is at
one side, and a forest scene fills in the back.
An Easter Bouquet.—An appropriate centerpiece for an Easter window is
a large bouquet of artificial flowers, among which are scattered
handkerchiefs, ties, gloves or other small articles, which project from the
bouquet and bear neat price cards. Bouquets may also be made in which
handkerchiefs are folded to represent Calla lilies. Use a jeweled hat pin for
the center of the lily, and green cloth for a stem.
A Waterfall.—One of the department stores in Minneapolis, wishing to
call attention to a ribbon sale, had an attractive window display constructed
as follows: It consisted of a painted representation of Minnehaha Falls. In
place of a picture of the water fall itself, many continuous bands of various
colors of ribbons passed from top to bottom, being rapidly revolved by
rollers, one above and one below, turned by electric motive power.
perhaps for a longer time.
A Pretty Trim recently shown consisted of an open well, built up of rough
stones and covered with moss, with an old oaken bucket attached to a pole,
which a boy is just raising from the well. Autumn leaves strew the ground,
and at the back of the scene is a fence consisting of two rough rails and
pickets of umbrellas and canes alternating. A cabin built of underwear is at
one side, and a forest scene fills in the back.
An Easter Bouquet.—An appropriate centerpiece for an Easter window is
a large bouquet of artificial flowers, among which are scattered
handkerchiefs, ties, gloves or other small articles, which project from the
bouquet and bear neat price cards. Bouquets may also be made in which
handkerchiefs are folded to represent Calla lilies. Use a jeweled hat pin for
the center of the lily, and green cloth for a stem.
A Waterfall.—One of the department stores in Minneapolis, wishing to
call attention to a ribbon sale, had an attractive window display constructed
as follows: It consisted of a painted representation of Minnehaha Falls. In
place of a picture of the water fall itself, many continuous bands of various
colors of ribbons passed from top to bottom, being rapidly revolved by
rollers, one above and one below, turned by electric motive power.
Page 369
CHAPTER XXI.
THE STREET FAIR.
The street fair is the most popular form of modern local enterprise, and
has been growing in popularity for several years.
THE STREET FAIR.
The street fair is the most popular form of modern local enterprise, and
has been growing in popularity for several years.
Page 370
WHAT IT IS.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Brooks.
The street fair consists of a series of temporary booths erected on both
sides of the main street of a town, or around a central square or park, if the
town is laid out that way. These booths are built at the outer edge of the
sidewalk, upon the roadway, leaving the passageway of the sidewalk at one
side and the middle of the street at the other side. Most booths face the
street, although often they are arranged to face both the street and the
sidewalk. Each merchant builds his booth before his own store, making a
display of merchandise in the booth, but selling goods only from his regular
stock. Confectionery, notions, etc., are also sold from booths. At the street
corners or interspersed among the booths of the merchants, are raised
platforms on which free entertainments, such as juggling, acrobatic acts,
legerdemain, etc., are given at stated intervals for the amusement of the
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Brooks.
The street fair consists of a series of temporary booths erected on both
sides of the main street of a town, or around a central square or park, if the
town is laid out that way. These booths are built at the outer edge of the
sidewalk, upon the roadway, leaving the passageway of the sidewalk at one
side and the middle of the street at the other side. Most booths face the
street, although often they are arranged to face both the street and the
sidewalk. Each merchant builds his booth before his own store, making a
display of merchandise in the booth, but selling goods only from his regular
stock. Confectionery, notions, etc., are also sold from booths. At the street
corners or interspersed among the booths of the merchants, are raised
platforms on which free entertainments, such as juggling, acrobatic acts,
legerdemain, etc., are given at stated intervals for the amusement of the
Page 371
people. In connection with the street fair, various special attractions are
arranged, a balloon ascension one day, a parade of floats on another, and so
on, according to the fancy or enterprise of the committee.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Wietlispach.
arranged, a balloon ascension one day, a parade of floats on another, and so
on, according to the fancy or enterprise of the committee.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Wietlispach.
Page 372
THE OBJECT.
The free street fair is intended not only to attract temporary crowds to a
town, but to make the town popular to the farming and outlying community
tributary to it. Many farmers live within reach of two or, perhaps, three
towns; but the enterprising town—the one that entertains the farmers with
free street fairs, is supposed to be thereafter favored with the largest share
of trade.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Siemon.
Moreover, the street fair gives merchants an excellent opportunity to
make the acquaintance of the neighboring farmers and residents of smaller,
near by towns. This acquaintance ripens into a friendship and mutual
respect that not only wins trade, but holds it for all time.
The free street fair is intended not only to attract temporary crowds to a
town, but to make the town popular to the farming and outlying community
tributary to it. Many farmers live within reach of two or, perhaps, three
towns; but the enterprising town—the one that entertains the farmers with
free street fairs, is supposed to be thereafter favored with the largest share
of trade.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Siemon.
Moreover, the street fair gives merchants an excellent opportunity to
make the acquaintance of the neighboring farmers and residents of smaller,
near by towns. This acquaintance ripens into a friendship and mutual
respect that not only wins trade, but holds it for all time.
Page 373
SUCCESS OF STREET FAIRS.
How successful the scheme of free street fairs has been is evinced by the
fact that towns which have once held this sort of entertainment are always
eager to continue them the next year, and the next—and are still holding
street fairs. Seldom has the committee been called upon to collect a dollar
of the original subscription—for the fairs pay their own way, and only cost
each merchant the expense of his individual display. It is stated that no
street fair has ever been a failure since the idea was first conceived,
although of course the measure of their success depends greatly upon the
ability of the committee and the enterprise of the merchants in making
attractive displays.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Landers.
How successful the scheme of free street fairs has been is evinced by the
fact that towns which have once held this sort of entertainment are always
eager to continue them the next year, and the next—and are still holding
street fairs. Seldom has the committee been called upon to collect a dollar
of the original subscription—for the fairs pay their own way, and only cost
each merchant the expense of his individual display. It is stated that no
street fair has ever been a failure since the idea was first conceived,
although of course the measure of their success depends greatly upon the
ability of the committee and the enterprise of the merchants in making
attractive displays.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Landers.
Page 374
ADVANTAGES OVER COUNTY FAIRS.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Walthes.
The street fair has proved itself much superior to the old style county or
state fair. The people are held day and night at the door of the merchants
instead of spending their time two or three miles away from town. The old-
style fair leaves a town deserted, dull and forlorn. Trade is at a standstill,
and merchants agree it is almost as well to close their doors during fair
week. The street fair is a period of excitement, hustling and constant sales
for every merchant. The people are forced to remain where there is a
constant temptation to spend their spare cash—and of course they spend it.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Walthes.
The street fair has proved itself much superior to the old style county or
state fair. The people are held day and night at the door of the merchants
instead of spending their time two or three miles away from town. The old-
style fair leaves a town deserted, dull and forlorn. Trade is at a standstill,
and merchants agree it is almost as well to close their doors during fair
week. The street fair is a period of excitement, hustling and constant sales
for every merchant. The people are forced to remain where there is a
constant temptation to spend their spare cash—and of course they spend it.
Page 375
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Wietlispach.
Page 376
TIME TO HOLD STREET FAIRS.
The season of street fairs is from May to October, although some are
being held in this month of April in the warmer states. They usually open on
Tuesday morning and end Friday night, although in some cases the entire
week, including Monday and Saturday, is not considered too long a period
for the festivities.
The season of street fairs is from May to October, although some are
being held in this month of April in the warmer states. They usually open on
Tuesday morning and end Friday night, although in some cases the entire
week, including Monday and Saturday, is not considered too long a period
for the festivities.
Page 377
HOW TO ORGANIZE A STREET FAIR.
First you must have a guaranteed fund. This is procured as follows: (a)
Subscriptions from merchants; (b) sale of booths and privileges; (c) sale of
advertising space on the daily souvenir programme.
The cost of a street fair is from $2,500 upward, depending on size of your
town, the amount of advertising you do, etc.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Hastings.
You will need a large number of committees to properly handle your
street fair. One object of having a great many committees is to give every
business man in town something to do in connection with the fair, so that
those who are inclined to grow lukewarm will, of necessity, be compelled to
take continued interest in the forthcoming fair. Furthermore, there are too
First you must have a guaranteed fund. This is procured as follows: (a)
Subscriptions from merchants; (b) sale of booths and privileges; (c) sale of
advertising space on the daily souvenir programme.
The cost of a street fair is from $2,500 upward, depending on size of your
town, the amount of advertising you do, etc.
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Hastings.
You will need a large number of committees to properly handle your
street fair. One object of having a great many committees is to give every
business man in town something to do in connection with the fair, so that
those who are inclined to grow lukewarm will, of necessity, be compelled to
take continued interest in the forthcoming fair. Furthermore, there are too
Page 378
many details connected with the work of preparing for the fair and
conducting it, to be placed on the shoulders of one small committee.
Accordingly, there must be separate committees for each department of
street fair work. The finance committee must look after raising the money.
The amusement committee must see that proper attractions and amusements
are provided. The committee on premiums will get up the premium list,
appoint judges in the various departments and see that the awarded
premiums are paid. The committee on parades and special days will look
after the work indicated by its title. You will need also a committee on
contests, such as cake walking, baby shows, old violin players, fat men’s
race, greased pole climbing, greased pig catching and such other diversions
as may be introduced for local talent in addition to the attractions engaged
from abroad. Your committee on privileges and booths will be able to
render great service to the association by using proper judgment and
enterprise. A large revenue can be realized from the sale of booths and
spaces for merry-go-rounds, Ferris wheels, side shows, etc. Your committee
on railroads will have to look after the important work of securing special
reduced rates from all points in territory tributary to your city during the
continuance of the fair. By appointing influential men on this committee
and having them go direct to the main offices of the railroad company you
will be able to secure liberal concessions in the way of reduced excursion
rates that will greatly swell your attendance during the week. Your
committee on advertising will have plenty of work to do. It is a good plan to
appoint the local newspaper men on this committee. They will keep
booming the street fair from the time that the date is fixed upon, and will
see that the field is thoroughly and constantly covered, so far as the
advertising is concerned. You will also need an executive committee. This
committee may include all the members of the above committees, these
being only sub-committees of the executive committee, or it may be
limited, as you think best. In some cities a regular street fair company is
incorporated under the laws of the state, with a president, board of directors,
etc. This is a very good plan. It gives an air of permanence to the
organization and makes all the transactions of the association more
business-like in character.
conducting it, to be placed on the shoulders of one small committee.
Accordingly, there must be separate committees for each department of
street fair work. The finance committee must look after raising the money.
The amusement committee must see that proper attractions and amusements
are provided. The committee on premiums will get up the premium list,
appoint judges in the various departments and see that the awarded
premiums are paid. The committee on parades and special days will look
after the work indicated by its title. You will need also a committee on
contests, such as cake walking, baby shows, old violin players, fat men’s
race, greased pole climbing, greased pig catching and such other diversions
as may be introduced for local talent in addition to the attractions engaged
from abroad. Your committee on privileges and booths will be able to
render great service to the association by using proper judgment and
enterprise. A large revenue can be realized from the sale of booths and
spaces for merry-go-rounds, Ferris wheels, side shows, etc. Your committee
on railroads will have to look after the important work of securing special
reduced rates from all points in territory tributary to your city during the
continuance of the fair. By appointing influential men on this committee
and having them go direct to the main offices of the railroad company you
will be able to secure liberal concessions in the way of reduced excursion
rates that will greatly swell your attendance during the week. Your
committee on advertising will have plenty of work to do. It is a good plan to
appoint the local newspaper men on this committee. They will keep
booming the street fair from the time that the date is fixed upon, and will
see that the field is thoroughly and constantly covered, so far as the
advertising is concerned. You will also need an executive committee. This
committee may include all the members of the above committees, these
being only sub-committees of the executive committee, or it may be
limited, as you think best. In some cities a regular street fair company is
incorporated under the laws of the state, with a president, board of directors,
etc. This is a very good plan. It gives an air of permanence to the
organization and makes all the transactions of the association more
business-like in character.
Page 379
AMUSEMENTS.
Good attractions must be secured for the free entertainments. Do not
make the mistake of hiring cheap performers, as they will disgust your
people rather than entertain them. There are now a number of expert
conductors, or general managers of street fairs, who hire their services to
committees and advise the townsmen in all details. These men, having had
ample experience, are very useful to committees and often insure the
success of the fair. When there is no resident of your town available who
has a genius for carrying out such enterprises, the employment of an expert
director is advised. In this case it is better to secure your man in the
beginning, as he can then assist in organizing the entire festival.
Good attractions must be secured for the free entertainments. Do not
make the mistake of hiring cheap performers, as they will disgust your
people rather than entertain them. There are now a number of expert
conductors, or general managers of street fairs, who hire their services to
committees and advise the townsmen in all details. These men, having had
ample experience, are very useful to committees and often insure the
success of the fair. When there is no resident of your town available who
has a genius for carrying out such enterprises, the employment of an expert
director is advised. In this case it is better to secure your man in the
beginning, as he can then assist in organizing the entire festival.
Page 380
PROMINENT DETAILS.
R. J. McDonald, who is an authority on street fairs, gives the following
excellent advice as to details:
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Boyer.
R. J. McDonald, who is an authority on street fairs, gives the following
excellent advice as to details:
STREET FAIR BOOTH.—Boyer.
Page 381
STATE FAIR BOOTH.—Anthter.
Page 382
STREET FAIR ARCH.
Page 383
GENERAL VIEW OF THE BELVILLE, ILL., STREET FAIR.
Page 384
GENERAL VIEW OF THE STAUNTON, VA., STREET FAIR.
The first step is to interest the city authorities, the manufacturing dealers
of all lines, and the citizens in general. Then, in order, follow the securing
of the necessary subscriptions, concessions from all lines of transportation
and many other sources, advertising, newspaper work, billing the country
for at least 200 miles in all directions, daily souvenir programme, the
formation of the different committees, arranging street parades daily,
securing the use of vacant grounds for the erection of booths for the
merchants and manufacturing displays, for a Midway inclosure, space for
lease to venders of all kinds. Then comes the famous Midway, which,
without doubt, will be the most attractive feature of the street fair. Who can
forget Chicago in 1893, and the people of all nations? For this feature some
large traveling street fair combination should be secured—one which will
have all the features which go to make up a successful Midway.
You would also need tents for the press and visitors, one large tent for
dining hall—would advise that this be in charge of, and under the
management of some congregation—German and Irish villages, with the
The first step is to interest the city authorities, the manufacturing dealers
of all lines, and the citizens in general. Then, in order, follow the securing
of the necessary subscriptions, concessions from all lines of transportation
and many other sources, advertising, newspaper work, billing the country
for at least 200 miles in all directions, daily souvenir programme, the
formation of the different committees, arranging street parades daily,
securing the use of vacant grounds for the erection of booths for the
merchants and manufacturing displays, for a Midway inclosure, space for
lease to venders of all kinds. Then comes the famous Midway, which,
without doubt, will be the most attractive feature of the street fair. Who can
forget Chicago in 1893, and the people of all nations? For this feature some
large traveling street fair combination should be secured—one which will
have all the features which go to make up a successful Midway.
You would also need tents for the press and visitors, one large tent for
dining hall—would advise that this be in charge of, and under the
management of some congregation—German and Irish villages, with the
Page 385
native dance and the Irish piper to warm the hearts of their countrymen,
also two or three free exhibitions, which should be the best in America.
Now, to make the fair a success, the writer would advise making
concessions to some charitable institution or some good cause; then you get
the ladies, clergy and press with you, and if you can do this, it is sure to be a
grand success. The fair must be advertised largely, like a circus, special
rates on all lines of transportation. Every day must be a special day. A
different parade, finishing at the entrance to the fair, should be held every
afternoon—never in the morning. There should be a military day for the
entertainment of the soldiers of the civil war, both union and confederate,
the soldiers of the Spanish-Philippine war, also a school children’s day. This
being campaign year, would advise a democratic and republican day, and
invite some of the most prominent speakers of the country, candidates for
office, etc. I would also advise a public marriage on one of the days, and
each afternoon or evening a genuine old-fashioned cake walk, combined
with fireworks and an abundance of good music. A floral parade, properly
handled, with a popular lady citizen as queen, would be the strongest
feature of the week, and would draw thousands of strangers to any city. This
part of the entertainment will require some one with experience to handle, if
it is to be a success.
also two or three free exhibitions, which should be the best in America.
Now, to make the fair a success, the writer would advise making
concessions to some charitable institution or some good cause; then you get
the ladies, clergy and press with you, and if you can do this, it is sure to be a
grand success. The fair must be advertised largely, like a circus, special
rates on all lines of transportation. Every day must be a special day. A
different parade, finishing at the entrance to the fair, should be held every
afternoon—never in the morning. There should be a military day for the
entertainment of the soldiers of the civil war, both union and confederate,
the soldiers of the Spanish-Philippine war, also a school children’s day. This
being campaign year, would advise a democratic and republican day, and
invite some of the most prominent speakers of the country, candidates for
office, etc. I would also advise a public marriage on one of the days, and
each afternoon or evening a genuine old-fashioned cake walk, combined
with fireworks and an abundance of good music. A floral parade, properly
handled, with a popular lady citizen as queen, would be the strongest
feature of the week, and would draw thousands of strangers to any city. This
part of the entertainment will require some one with experience to handle, if
it is to be a success.
Page 386
FLOATS.
During street fairs, as well as the ordinary country fairs, industrial
parades are frequent, and often the decorator is puzzled how to construct an
effective float.
We show several pictures of floats in the late Milwaukee industrial
parade. The booth was built upon a large wagon truck and had a latticed
roof. The lower sides of the booth hung over the wheels and were
elaborately pleated and puffed. Fancy groceries were shown in the float,
and maidens, dressed to represent the southern climes from whence the
goods came, were seated on each of the sides.
During street fairs, as well as the ordinary country fairs, industrial
parades are frequent, and often the decorator is puzzled how to construct an
effective float.
We show several pictures of floats in the late Milwaukee industrial
parade. The booth was built upon a large wagon truck and had a latticed
roof. The lower sides of the booth hung over the wheels and were
elaborately pleated and puffed. Fancy groceries were shown in the float,
and maidens, dressed to represent the southern climes from whence the
goods came, were seated on each of the sides.
Page 387
PARADE FLOAT—“THE SEASONS.”—Goldsman.
Eight horses, caparisoned in white, with large plumes on their heads,
were attached to the float, and each horse was led by a groom in fancy
dress. This float was one of the most successful in the parade.
Eight horses, caparisoned in white, with large plumes on their heads,
were attached to the float, and each horse was led by a groom in fancy
dress. This float was one of the most successful in the parade.
Page 388
One of the most novel floats ever constructed was that of Mr. Mahana,
shown herewith. It was shaped like a large slipper, and completely covered
the wagon truck on which it was placed. Silver foil covered the entire
surface, and around the edge, or sole, was an ornamental border in white
and gold. Underneath the big umbrella sat a bevy of pretty girls.
In our first picture is shown a clothing float, the star and crescent being
adopted as the design. Although somewhat crudely carried out, the idea is a
good one. While only one coat was shown on each side of the star, the float
attracted much attention.
The Mercantile Co.’s float, was part of a floral parade. Float and horses
were decorated in pure white, and five young girls, seated under the canopy,
wore flowing white draperies. The relief to this was given by the mass of
greenery in the interior of the float, and by the signs, which were lettered in
emerald green.
shown herewith. It was shaped like a large slipper, and completely covered
the wagon truck on which it was placed. Silver foil covered the entire
surface, and around the edge, or sole, was an ornamental border in white
and gold. Underneath the big umbrella sat a bevy of pretty girls.
In our first picture is shown a clothing float, the star and crescent being
adopted as the design. Although somewhat crudely carried out, the idea is a
good one. While only one coat was shown on each side of the star, the float
attracted much attention.
The Mercantile Co.’s float, was part of a floral parade. Float and horses
were decorated in pure white, and five young girls, seated under the canopy,
wore flowing white draperies. The relief to this was given by the mass of
greenery in the interior of the float, and by the signs, which were lettered in
emerald green.
Page 389
THE SEASONS.
This float showed on the four sides the allegorical presentations of
Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter.
“No. 1.—Spring.—Front Section of Float.—Arbor and arch trimmed
with artificial marguerites and morning glories, intertwined with foliage.
Glass prisms hang suspended to represent dew drops.
“‘Spring,’ draped in pure white gauze; wings at shoulders. Butterflies and
aigrette in the hair. She is represented seated on a large mushroom (made of
a 24-inch chopping bowl). Before her are seated four large rabbits on their
hind legs. On the spreading limb of the tree that fronts her are perched two
big crows, a blue jay, an oriole and two small birds, all posed in the act of
singing (beaks high and open). Spring is clasping in one hand a baton and in
the other a piece of music. She is giving the birds and rabbits their first
spring lesson. This section was called ‘An Ode to Spring.’
“No. 2.—Summer.—Right Side Section of float.—‘Summer,’ draped in
light blue cheesecloth and silver tinsel. On head a wreath of pink and white
roses, and on one shoulder butterflies, on the other roses. In her left hand
she carries basket of roses. Arbor and archway are trimmed entirely with
pink and white roses, three gross being used (artificial). Plums and peaches
hang pendent from the top. At her feet (on the right) crouches a large white
swan. At each corner of this section are two full size cranes, three feet high.
“No. 3.—Autumn.—Left Side of Float, Ceres (Wheat).—‘Autumn’ is
represented by a brunette draped in corn-colored cheesecloth. Her long
wreath is of corn flowers, poppies and wheat. On her head a wreath of
poppies and wheat. In her right hand she carries a sickle. Under her left arm
she carries a loosely bound sheaf of wheat. Arbor and archway trimmed
with poppies and wheat. A dozen bunches of artificial, full size grapes hang
from top of the arbor. In the growing wheat, at each side of this section, are
two quail and two hares.
This float showed on the four sides the allegorical presentations of
Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter.
“No. 1.—Spring.—Front Section of Float.—Arbor and arch trimmed
with artificial marguerites and morning glories, intertwined with foliage.
Glass prisms hang suspended to represent dew drops.
“‘Spring,’ draped in pure white gauze; wings at shoulders. Butterflies and
aigrette in the hair. She is represented seated on a large mushroom (made of
a 24-inch chopping bowl). Before her are seated four large rabbits on their
hind legs. On the spreading limb of the tree that fronts her are perched two
big crows, a blue jay, an oriole and two small birds, all posed in the act of
singing (beaks high and open). Spring is clasping in one hand a baton and in
the other a piece of music. She is giving the birds and rabbits their first
spring lesson. This section was called ‘An Ode to Spring.’
“No. 2.—Summer.—Right Side Section of float.—‘Summer,’ draped in
light blue cheesecloth and silver tinsel. On head a wreath of pink and white
roses, and on one shoulder butterflies, on the other roses. In her left hand
she carries basket of roses. Arbor and archway are trimmed entirely with
pink and white roses, three gross being used (artificial). Plums and peaches
hang pendent from the top. At her feet (on the right) crouches a large white
swan. At each corner of this section are two full size cranes, three feet high.
“No. 3.—Autumn.—Left Side of Float, Ceres (Wheat).—‘Autumn’ is
represented by a brunette draped in corn-colored cheesecloth. Her long
wreath is of corn flowers, poppies and wheat. On her head a wreath of
poppies and wheat. In her right hand she carries a sickle. Under her left arm
she carries a loosely bound sheaf of wheat. Arbor and archway trimmed
with poppies and wheat. A dozen bunches of artificial, full size grapes hang
from top of the arbor. In the growing wheat, at each side of this section, are
two quail and two hares.
Page 390
PARADE FLOAT—“CLEOPATRA’S BARGE.”—Lorch.
“No. 4.—Winter.—Rear of Float.—Represented by a young lady draped
in dark green. In one hand she carries a bow, in her belt she has an arrow.
Her wreath for the hair is of holly berries and ivy. Her bower and arch are
trimmed with ivy and dahlias. Her corsage wreath is of dahlias. At her left
crouches a Texan puma, life size; at her right stands a full sized deer.
“No. 4.—Winter.—Rear of Float.—Represented by a young lady draped
in dark green. In one hand she carries a bow, in her belt she has an arrow.
Her wreath for the hair is of holly berries and ivy. Her bower and arch are
trimmed with ivy and dahlias. Her corsage wreath is of dahlias. At her left
crouches a Texan puma, life size; at her right stands a full sized deer.
Page 391
CLEOPATRA’S BARGE.
The combination was green and pink. The figurehead was relief papier
mache work done in gold on bronze green ground. The large leaf (sail) is
also papier mache work. Close scrutiny is necessary to see the best work.
The combination was green and pink. The figurehead was relief papier
mache work done in gold on bronze green ground. The large leaf (sail) is
also papier mache work. Close scrutiny is necessary to see the best work.
Page 392
PATRIOTIC FLOAT.
The framework is light, but substantial, the canopy being supported by
iron bars on which sleeve puffing is used. These bars are turned at top and
bottom, flattened, and furnished with screw holes. The umbrella holders at
the corners are made in the same way, four handsome girls standing beneath
the umbrellas. Quite a few goods were shown in the spaces, and the entire
effect was excellent.
PATRIOTIC FLOAT.—Olson.
The framework is light, but substantial, the canopy being supported by
iron bars on which sleeve puffing is used. These bars are turned at top and
bottom, flattened, and furnished with screw holes. The umbrella holders at
the corners are made in the same way, four handsome girls standing beneath
the umbrellas. Quite a few goods were shown in the spaces, and the entire
effect was excellent.
PATRIOTIC FLOAT.—Olson.
Page 393
ORIGINAL STREET FAIR BOOTH WITH REVOLVING
ILLUMINATED BALL.
It has always been my theory—and I have yet to hear it successfully
disputed—that it is better to have an attractive advertisement costing $1
than a poor one costing twenty-five cents; and on this hypothesis the above
booth will be described. The street fair is one of the best chances for
advertising you will ever get. Your audience is not going to be the same that
critically and leisurely inspected your show windows and the goods and
taste displayed therein the week before. It is going to be a rushing, pushing,
good natured and sight seeing crowd. It will not be one that will be
critically inclined, nor have time for minute details. Knowing this to be a
fact, it is “up to you” to get in your advertising and do it with a booth that
will arrest the eye, whether in a hurry or not. Here is where you can use all
the loud, flashy and contrasting colors you want.
ILLUMINATED BALL.
It has always been my theory—and I have yet to hear it successfully
disputed—that it is better to have an attractive advertisement costing $1
than a poor one costing twenty-five cents; and on this hypothesis the above
booth will be described. The street fair is one of the best chances for
advertising you will ever get. Your audience is not going to be the same that
critically and leisurely inspected your show windows and the goods and
taste displayed therein the week before. It is going to be a rushing, pushing,
good natured and sight seeing crowd. It will not be one that will be
critically inclined, nor have time for minute details. Knowing this to be a
fact, it is “up to you” to get in your advertising and do it with a booth that
will arrest the eye, whether in a hurry or not. Here is where you can use all
the loud, flashy and contrasting colors you want.
Page 394
BICYCLE PARADE FLOAT.—Softley.
Page 395
First you must see if your electric light company has the “strings” of
lights (see Fig. 1), shown running from the center to corners, on hand.
There are companies who keep these on hand, with weatherproof sockets, to
be rented out for just such purposes. The lights shown around the edges can
be put in by any electrician at a small cost on one circuit. Both these and the
“strings” are supposed to burn steadily, and not connected to the flasher.
The carpenter contractor will undoubtedly put in an appearance in due time.
These contractors usually put up the booths for a stipulated price, rent you
the lumber and remove it when the fair is over.
Next is the ball frame (see Fig. 2). This is intended to be six feet in
diameter, made of strips of wood or moulding ¼ × 3 inches, soaked in hot
water and bent to form. The 3-inch width is to give you a base for the lamp
sockets. Between the six ribs shown run hogshead hoops to give fullness
between the ribs shown. The frame can be covered with two contrasting
colors in six equal sized pieces for daylight effect, and the colored lights
will take care of this part in the evening. The shaft should be of 1-inch gas
pipe. Having had a platform built inside the booth flush with the gables, it
will be a length equal from the floor of the platform to the peak of the roof,
lights (see Fig. 1), shown running from the center to corners, on hand.
There are companies who keep these on hand, with weatherproof sockets, to
be rented out for just such purposes. The lights shown around the edges can
be put in by any electrician at a small cost on one circuit. Both these and the
“strings” are supposed to burn steadily, and not connected to the flasher.
The carpenter contractor will undoubtedly put in an appearance in due time.
These contractors usually put up the booths for a stipulated price, rent you
the lumber and remove it when the fair is over.
Next is the ball frame (see Fig. 2). This is intended to be six feet in
diameter, made of strips of wood or moulding ¼ × 3 inches, soaked in hot
water and bent to form. The 3-inch width is to give you a base for the lamp
sockets. Between the six ribs shown run hogshead hoops to give fullness
between the ribs shown. The frame can be covered with two contrasting
colors in six equal sized pieces for daylight effect, and the colored lights
will take care of this part in the evening. The shaft should be of 1-inch gas
pipe. Having had a platform built inside the booth flush with the gables, it
will be a length equal from the floor of the platform to the peak of the roof,
Page 396
plus the height of the ball and six inches for clearance. Have the bottom
drawn to a point or filled with a pointed plug shown at C (Fig. 2), and
provide a socket bearing. This bearing is intended to support the entire ball
and not offer undue friction to its rotation. It will also be necessary to
provide an extra shield near the bottom to prevent a heavy wind forcing it
out of the socket sideways. At a point just under the peak of the roof, which
is also the upper bearing for the shaft, drill two ½-inch holes. Drill two
holes also at a point between the roof outside and the bottom of the ball,
shown at A. The contact rings and brushes at B are fully described in detail
in the March issue of The Show Window. These will be made the same,
only larger. Equip the shaft with a 5-inch grooved pulley belt direct to the
countershaft of your flasher, and it will run about thirty revolutions per
minute.
PARADE FLOAT.—Bittman.
drawn to a point or filled with a pointed plug shown at C (Fig. 2), and
provide a socket bearing. This bearing is intended to support the entire ball
and not offer undue friction to its rotation. It will also be necessary to
provide an extra shield near the bottom to prevent a heavy wind forcing it
out of the socket sideways. At a point just under the peak of the roof, which
is also the upper bearing for the shaft, drill two ½-inch holes. Drill two
holes also at a point between the roof outside and the bottom of the ball,
shown at A. The contact rings and brushes at B are fully described in detail
in the March issue of The Show Window. These will be made the same,
only larger. Equip the shaft with a 5-inch grooved pulley belt direct to the
countershaft of your flasher, and it will run about thirty revolutions per
minute.
PARADE FLOAT.—Bittman.
Page 397
Page 398
PARADE FLOATS.—Brown.
The shield shown in Fig. 3 is made of tin or painted pasteboard, and will
be found absolutely necessary to keep rain out of all sockets pointing
outward from a point above the center of the ball. If water was to get in
between the socket and lamp base, plugs will be blown faster than you can
put them in.
The shield shown in Fig. 3 is made of tin or painted pasteboard, and will
be found absolutely necessary to keep rain out of all sockets pointing
outward from a point above the center of the ball. If water was to get in
between the socket and lamp base, plugs will be blown faster than you can
put them in.
Page 399
The wiring is shown in Fig. 4. There are three circuits, each of different
color, divided into two parts, each half on opposite sides of ball. One side of
each row of lights will be coupled to a common main, which will go inside
the shaft at the upper hole and out again at the lower; thence to the bottom
ring, which is connected to the main direct. Circuit No. 1, red, goes from
color, divided into two parts, each half on opposite sides of ball. One side of
each row of lights will be coupled to a common main, which will go inside
the shaft at the upper hole and out again at the lower; thence to the bottom
ring, which is connected to the main direct. Circuit No. 1, red, goes from
Page 400
the first brush on the flasher to top ring and brush on the shaft and thence to
the remaining sides of the two red rows. Circuit No. 2, white, goes from No.
2 on flasher to No. 2 brush and ring, thence connects to remaining sides of
the two white rows. Circuit No. 3, green, goes from No. 3 on flasher to No.
3 ring and brush, thence to the remaining sides of the two green rows. The
other main goes to the leg of flasher direct. Run one wire from each main
for the motor.
Set your flasher lugs as shown in Fig. 5, and the various color changes
will take place, as shown at the side of diagram in the order given.
After you are through with your wiring, you will probably find your
hands not in condition to hold the dainty hand of Angelina, and which soap
fails to remove. Don’t get scared. This will probably be a combination of
muriatic acid, asphaltum and rubber. They can be cleaned as follows: Wash
first in water, without soap, to remove the acid. Next loosen the asphaltum
with any kind of oil or grease. Lastly, wash them with soap, water and
sawdust, and you will be surprised to see how easily it is done when you
know how.
DECORATED HOSE CART.—Kayser.
the remaining sides of the two red rows. Circuit No. 2, white, goes from No.
2 on flasher to No. 2 brush and ring, thence connects to remaining sides of
the two white rows. Circuit No. 3, green, goes from No. 3 on flasher to No.
3 ring and brush, thence to the remaining sides of the two green rows. The
other main goes to the leg of flasher direct. Run one wire from each main
for the motor.
Set your flasher lugs as shown in Fig. 5, and the various color changes
will take place, as shown at the side of diagram in the order given.
After you are through with your wiring, you will probably find your
hands not in condition to hold the dainty hand of Angelina, and which soap
fails to remove. Don’t get scared. This will probably be a combination of
muriatic acid, asphaltum and rubber. They can be cleaned as follows: Wash
first in water, without soap, to remove the acid. Next loosen the asphaltum
with any kind of oil or grease. Lastly, wash them with soap, water and
sawdust, and you will be surprised to see how easily it is done when you
know how.
DECORATED HOSE CART.—Kayser.
Page 401
PARADE FLOAT.—Designer Unknown.
Page 402
ST. VALENTINE’S DISPLAY.—Baker.
Page 403
ST. VALENTINE’S DISPLAY.—Herr.
Page 404
CHAPTER XXII.
DISPLAYS FOR EASTER.
Easter is especially the season for artistic decoration, and no American
holiday, save Christmas, receives so much attention in decoration from our
merchants. It comes after a season of comparative dullness, and as it is a
time of joy and brightness, of full purses and generous hearts, extraordinary
efforts are made to delight the public with gorgeous and pretty displays, and
to tempt the good folks to purchase liberally all those knick-knacks and
articles of apparel of which orthodox church members have denied
themselves during the penitential days of lent.
If the campaign is well managed, Easter should be a bounteous harvest to
every merchant. Think of all the bonnets, gloves, laces, shoes, ribbons,
silks, satins and furbelows the ladies will require to “look sweet” during the
Easter sermon; all the hats, neckwear, handkerchiefs, shoes, striped
trousers, walking sticks and spring overcoats the gentlemen must have to fit
themselves as escorts for the charming sex; all the rich foodstuffs that will
be eaten off pretty linen and dishes during the Easter dinner; all the floral
offerings and boutonnieres that will spend their fragrance to droop and
wither in a day!
Some one will sell all these things for Easter.
What will your share be?
The answer depends much on the value of your window display as an
attraction and salesman.
Of course you wish to do your best. You are in business to sell goods—to
take advantage of just such warm occasions as Easter.
DISPLAYS FOR EASTER.
Easter is especially the season for artistic decoration, and no American
holiday, save Christmas, receives so much attention in decoration from our
merchants. It comes after a season of comparative dullness, and as it is a
time of joy and brightness, of full purses and generous hearts, extraordinary
efforts are made to delight the public with gorgeous and pretty displays, and
to tempt the good folks to purchase liberally all those knick-knacks and
articles of apparel of which orthodox church members have denied
themselves during the penitential days of lent.
If the campaign is well managed, Easter should be a bounteous harvest to
every merchant. Think of all the bonnets, gloves, laces, shoes, ribbons,
silks, satins and furbelows the ladies will require to “look sweet” during the
Easter sermon; all the hats, neckwear, handkerchiefs, shoes, striped
trousers, walking sticks and spring overcoats the gentlemen must have to fit
themselves as escorts for the charming sex; all the rich foodstuffs that will
be eaten off pretty linen and dishes during the Easter dinner; all the floral
offerings and boutonnieres that will spend their fragrance to droop and
wither in a day!
Some one will sell all these things for Easter.
What will your share be?
The answer depends much on the value of your window display as an
attraction and salesman.
Of course you wish to do your best. You are in business to sell goods—to
take advantage of just such warm occasions as Easter.
Page 405
THE EASTER LILY.
Easter is the season of flowers. All flowers are allowable. White are
preferable. But don’t use white flowers exclusively, for they will give a
funereal air to the entire display. Use lilies, both calla and Easter lilies, and
with them mingle roses, tulips and hyacinths, taking care to employ plenty
of greenery, vines and leaves.
The lily is an emblem of Easter. Make your Easter lilies of mammoth
proportions for centerpieces or corner pieces. This may be done by forming
them out of cardboard, which may be covered with white surah silk,
cheesecloth or white tissue paper. A good sized lily of this variety may be
made by cutting sugar barrel hoops into quarter sections, as seen in the
diagram, and fastening six pieces firmly together at one end. Then cut six
petals from heavy cardboard and fasten to each hoop, on the outside. A
Easter is the season of flowers. All flowers are allowable. White are
preferable. But don’t use white flowers exclusively, for they will give a
funereal air to the entire display. Use lilies, both calla and Easter lilies, and
with them mingle roses, tulips and hyacinths, taking care to employ plenty
of greenery, vines and leaves.
The lily is an emblem of Easter. Make your Easter lilies of mammoth
proportions for centerpieces or corner pieces. This may be done by forming
them out of cardboard, which may be covered with white surah silk,
cheesecloth or white tissue paper. A good sized lily of this variety may be
made by cutting sugar barrel hoops into quarter sections, as seen in the
diagram, and fastening six pieces firmly together at one end. Then cut six
petals from heavy cardboard and fasten to each hoop, on the outside. A
Page 406
similar piece is placed inside, and the edges glued or sewed together. The
bit of hoop is then hidden, but forms a rib to hold the leaf in place. Place
some puffed tissue in the center, if the center shows, and wind the lower
end with cloth, after attaching the stem. Sometimes a doll is seen peeping
from inside the mammoth lily; sometimes a nest of eggs or a brood of
chicks is placed in the center. This depends upon the character of your
theme.
EASTER DISPLAYS.—Stetlar.
bit of hoop is then hidden, but forms a rib to hold the leaf in place. Place
some puffed tissue in the center, if the center shows, and wind the lower
end with cloth, after attaching the stem. Sometimes a doll is seen peeping
from inside the mammoth lily; sometimes a nest of eggs or a brood of
chicks is placed in the center. This depends upon the character of your
theme.
EASTER DISPLAYS.—Stetlar.
Page 407
“THE EASTER ANTHEM.”—Butement.
If the lily alone is shown stamens must protrude from the center of the
leaves, and these are made by covering insulating wires with chrome yellow
silk and placing a small yellow ball at the end of each stamen.
If the lily alone is shown stamens must protrude from the center of the
leaves, and these are made by covering insulating wires with chrome yellow
silk and placing a small yellow ball at the end of each stamen.
Page 408
THE CALLA LILY.
The calla is a beautiful lily, and is used profusely for Easter decorations.
It is quite easily made in any desired size by following the method shown in
the diagram. Take an oblong sheet of cardboard, indicated by the dotted
lines (Fig. 1), and bend it over (Fig. 2) to form a sort of cornucopia with a
projecting corner. Fasten the curled edges with glue or brass paper
fasteners, and then form the projecting corner into an imitation of the curled
end of the leaf in a natural lily. This may be quickly done by rolling it with
your fingers. A single yellow stamen, rather thick, must project from the
center, rising a little above the edges of the leaf. Now fasten on your stem,
and the lily is complete. Large sizes should be covered with cloth. In small,
natural sized lilies the white cardboard is a good representation of the leaf.
Good effects are obtained by planting these artificial lilies in flower pots
and placing these also in jardinieres. They appear more natural when shown
in this way, but then leaves must be made to complete the plant.
The calla is a beautiful lily, and is used profusely for Easter decorations.
It is quite easily made in any desired size by following the method shown in
the diagram. Take an oblong sheet of cardboard, indicated by the dotted
lines (Fig. 1), and bend it over (Fig. 2) to form a sort of cornucopia with a
projecting corner. Fasten the curled edges with glue or brass paper
fasteners, and then form the projecting corner into an imitation of the curled
end of the leaf in a natural lily. This may be quickly done by rolling it with
your fingers. A single yellow stamen, rather thick, must project from the
center, rising a little above the edges of the leaf. Now fasten on your stem,
and the lily is complete. Large sizes should be covered with cloth. In small,
natural sized lilies the white cardboard is a good representation of the leaf.
Good effects are obtained by planting these artificial lilies in flower pots
and placing these also in jardinieres. They appear more natural when shown
in this way, but then leaves must be made to complete the plant.
Page 409
Page 410
FLORAL EMBLEMS.
The cross is the principal emblem of Easter, and is used in connection
with many displays, being suitable for any line of merchandise. To be most
effective it should be a floral cross, and may be formed from natural or
artificial flowers. However, natural flowers are so scarce in most towns, and
artificial flowers so inexpensive, that we need consider only the latter. Of
these, violets are easily procurable, and are pretty and appropriate.
Festoons, or bunches of them, always brighten a display. Such set pieces as
the cross, crown, star, the “gates ajar” may be covered with masses of
mixed flowers, in which the tint of the violet predominates, and the purity
of the Easter or calla lily affords a soothing relief.
Wire netting, supported by a light framework of thin lumber, is the
ground for all these floral emblems. The mesh should be much smaller than
it is drawn in the accompanying design, for there is only need of space to
push the stem through. Begin at one end, thrust a flower through the netting
so that it covers the edge, and wind a thread around the stem from the back
of the netting. When the next flower is placed in position and the thread
given a turn around it, both flowers are firmly fastened. One thread
unwound from the spool as needed, will fasten the entire design securely.
Floral emblems made in this way are remarkably light in weight, and may
be suspended in the window or placed in any desired position.
The cross is the principal emblem of Easter, and is used in connection
with many displays, being suitable for any line of merchandise. To be most
effective it should be a floral cross, and may be formed from natural or
artificial flowers. However, natural flowers are so scarce in most towns, and
artificial flowers so inexpensive, that we need consider only the latter. Of
these, violets are easily procurable, and are pretty and appropriate.
Festoons, or bunches of them, always brighten a display. Such set pieces as
the cross, crown, star, the “gates ajar” may be covered with masses of
mixed flowers, in which the tint of the violet predominates, and the purity
of the Easter or calla lily affords a soothing relief.
Wire netting, supported by a light framework of thin lumber, is the
ground for all these floral emblems. The mesh should be much smaller than
it is drawn in the accompanying design, for there is only need of space to
push the stem through. Begin at one end, thrust a flower through the netting
so that it covers the edge, and wind a thread around the stem from the back
of the netting. When the next flower is placed in position and the thread
given a turn around it, both flowers are firmly fastened. One thread
unwound from the spool as needed, will fasten the entire design securely.
Floral emblems made in this way are remarkably light in weight, and may
be suspended in the window or placed in any desired position.
Page 411
EASTER DESIGN.
Page 412
EASTER DISPLAY.—Hannaford.
Page 413
EASTER DISPLAY.—Hannaford.
Page 414
Page 415
EASTER EGGS.
Easter would not be Easter without eggs, and therefore eggs will be used
in many window designs. Mammoth eggs may be constructed and
decorated in a hundred different ways. The mechanical egg, which opens
into two or four parts, is old but always attractive. A clever idea is to build
several large eggs, over light wood or wire framework, break in the front
sides and show a recess in each egg in which is a “nest” of the goods you
wish to call attention to. White paper cambric—the shiny side out—is the
best representation of an egg shell.
Cut small price cards the shape of eggs, and place them in your Easter
display; or use real eggs, with the prices neatly painted upon them.
Another idea is to blow out the insides of a number of eggs, run a thread
through them and suspend them in your window at different heights. Or,
cover your window floor with hay, to represent a hay mow, and put nests of
decorated or dyed eggs here and there. Or, make a mammoth egg of papier
mache (or a framework), covered with cloth, and use it for the center of
your window. This may be made to open by dividing it into sections which
are hinged a short distance from the bottom, and connecting each section
with a string running to a main cord. A boy can operate it from back of the
window, or it may be connected with a motor. Put a prettily dressed baby
doll, or a chicken, in the center of the egg.
Easter would not be Easter without eggs, and therefore eggs will be used
in many window designs. Mammoth eggs may be constructed and
decorated in a hundred different ways. The mechanical egg, which opens
into two or four parts, is old but always attractive. A clever idea is to build
several large eggs, over light wood or wire framework, break in the front
sides and show a recess in each egg in which is a “nest” of the goods you
wish to call attention to. White paper cambric—the shiny side out—is the
best representation of an egg shell.
Cut small price cards the shape of eggs, and place them in your Easter
display; or use real eggs, with the prices neatly painted upon them.
Another idea is to blow out the insides of a number of eggs, run a thread
through them and suspend them in your window at different heights. Or,
cover your window floor with hay, to represent a hay mow, and put nests of
decorated or dyed eggs here and there. Or, make a mammoth egg of papier
mache (or a framework), covered with cloth, and use it for the center of
your window. This may be made to open by dividing it into sections which
are hinged a short distance from the bottom, and connecting each section
with a string running to a main cord. A boy can operate it from back of the
window, or it may be connected with a motor. Put a prettily dressed baby
doll, or a chicken, in the center of the egg.
Page 416
RABBITS AND CHICKS.
A simple way to make these, in any desired size, is to cut from heavy
cardboard or thin lumber the outline of the rabbit or chicken. Then cut
cloth, to extend one-fifth beyond the edge of the outline (see dotted lines),
leaving more margin where the body is thickest. Glue or tack the edges, and
stuff with cotton or excelsior, as shown in the end section. Paint in eyes,
etc., and color with water colors.
A simple way to make these, in any desired size, is to cut from heavy
cardboard or thin lumber the outline of the rabbit or chicken. Then cut
cloth, to extend one-fifth beyond the edge of the outline (see dotted lines),
leaving more margin where the body is thickest. Glue or tack the edges, and
stuff with cotton or excelsior, as shown in the end section. Paint in eyes,
etc., and color with water colors.
Page 417
THE MECHANICAL LILY.
To render an Easter lily mechanical, so that the petals will open and
close, a small circle of wood is securely fastened to the standard rising from
the floor. Each leaf (there should be six) is then hinged to this circular
piece, a few inches from the lower end of the leaf. At the extreme lower
point of each leaf is now fastened a cord, and all the cords are gathered into
one a short distance down. Run the main cord through the floor of your
window and attach it to the pivot of your water wheel. As the cord is drawn
downward the leaves all close; when it is released the leaves open by their
own weight. In the center of the lily may be placed any design or
arrangement of goods. Sometimes the figure of a doll clinging to a cross is
used.
To render an Easter lily mechanical, so that the petals will open and
close, a small circle of wood is securely fastened to the standard rising from
the floor. Each leaf (there should be six) is then hinged to this circular
piece, a few inches from the lower end of the leaf. At the extreme lower
point of each leaf is now fastened a cord, and all the cords are gathered into
one a short distance down. Run the main cord through the floor of your
window and attach it to the pivot of your water wheel. As the cord is drawn
downward the leaves all close; when it is released the leaves open by their
own weight. In the center of the lily may be placed any design or
arrangement of goods. Sometimes the figure of a doll clinging to a cross is
used.
Page 418
EASTER DESIGNS.
The reader will find here a collection of beautiful designs for Easter
displays, all being photographed from life. These will all be useful in
conveying ideas for the arrangement of your own displays. It should be
borne in mind that no window display can be accurately reproduced; yet
often you will find a way to improve upon the suggestion offered you.
The reader will find here a collection of beautiful designs for Easter
displays, all being photographed from life. These will all be useful in
conveying ideas for the arrangement of your own displays. It should be
borne in mind that no window display can be accurately reproduced; yet
often you will find a way to improve upon the suggestion offered you.
Page 419
CHAPTER XXIII.
MEMORIAL DAY DISPLAYS.
A pretty custom it is to set apart one day in memory of our nation’s fallen
heroes, and May 30 is always held in loving, if sad, remembrance by our
people.
Much advice has been offered in past years concerning the appropriate
decorations for this day. Some favor depicting the joy and triumph resulting
from our wars, and the glory of a life given for the nation’s defense. Others
see the sadness of mourning friends only, and think the flower strewn grave
the best recognition of the day. So the matter of design must be left to the
taste and disposition of the decorator. It is well, however, to bear in mind
that mixed with the sorrow of the people is a strain of pride and exaltation
that their loved ones died so nobly and heroically.
Flowers in profusion should be used, and the national colors are not
inappropriate.
Since our late wars there are more soldiers’ and sailors’ graves to
decorate than ever before, and a new interest in Memorial day has been
aroused. Therefore the wise merchant, who persistently caters to the moods
and whims of the great public, will see that his show windows pay a fitting
tribute to the occasion.
MEMORIAL DAY DISPLAYS.
A pretty custom it is to set apart one day in memory of our nation’s fallen
heroes, and May 30 is always held in loving, if sad, remembrance by our
people.
Much advice has been offered in past years concerning the appropriate
decorations for this day. Some favor depicting the joy and triumph resulting
from our wars, and the glory of a life given for the nation’s defense. Others
see the sadness of mourning friends only, and think the flower strewn grave
the best recognition of the day. So the matter of design must be left to the
taste and disposition of the decorator. It is well, however, to bear in mind
that mixed with the sorrow of the people is a strain of pride and exaltation
that their loved ones died so nobly and heroically.
Flowers in profusion should be used, and the national colors are not
inappropriate.
Since our late wars there are more soldiers’ and sailors’ graves to
decorate than ever before, and a new interest in Memorial day has been
aroused. Therefore the wise merchant, who persistently caters to the moods
and whims of the great public, will see that his show windows pay a fitting
tribute to the occasion.
Page 420
A FLORAL FLAG.
A national flag composed of flowers is made by running wires across a
frame for stripes and pinning red and white flowers to them. Wire netting
does nicely for this purpose, and if natural flowers are not available, red,
white and blue artificial flowers may readily be procured.
A national flag composed of flowers is made by running wires across a
frame for stripes and pinning red and white flowers to them. Wire netting
does nicely for this purpose, and if natural flowers are not available, red,
white and blue artificial flowers may readily be procured.
Page 421
RIBBON FLAGS.
Another way to make a flag is to use ribbon for the stripes and puffed
blue silk with white knots of baby ribbon for the stars. I have seen some
handsome flags made entirely of baby ribbons. You can make red, white
and blue backgrounds by using these colors of Velvelette, which is easily
applied. Velvelette is a “flock” which comes in various colors and can be
had at paint stores.
Another way to make a flag is to use ribbon for the stripes and puffed
blue silk with white knots of baby ribbon for the stars. I have seen some
handsome flags made entirely of baby ribbons. You can make red, white
and blue backgrounds by using these colors of Velvelette, which is easily
applied. Velvelette is a “flock” which comes in various colors and can be
had at paint stores.
Page 422
ILLUSTRATIONS.
The illustrations accompanying this chapter are appropriate designs for
Memorial Day. By studying them you will get ideas for your own display,
the details being readily carried out through the instructions furnished in the
opening chapters of this book.
The illustrations accompanying this chapter are appropriate designs for
Memorial Day. By studying them you will get ideas for your own display,
the details being readily carried out through the instructions furnished in the
opening chapters of this book.
Page 423
FOURTH OF JULY DISPLAY.
Trimmers will find no difficulty in securing appropriate subjects for
Independence Day, as our recent history abounds in striking incidents. But
it must not be forgotten that July 4 is dedicated to the heroes of the
revolution and to the signers of the Declaration of Independence.
MEMORIAL DAY WINDOW.—Tobias.
Trimmers will find no difficulty in securing appropriate subjects for
Independence Day, as our recent history abounds in striking incidents. But
it must not be forgotten that July 4 is dedicated to the heroes of the
revolution and to the signers of the Declaration of Independence.
MEMORIAL DAY WINDOW.—Tobias.
Page 424
MEMORIAL DAY WINDOW.
Page 425
MEMORIAL DAY WINDOW.—Feckenscher.
Page 426
MEMORIAL DAY DISPLAY.—Eman.
Page 427
MEMORIAL DAY WINDOW.—Cornwell.
For this reason July 4th is the great patriotic occasion and the national
colors, the national flag and shield and the national heroes are appropriately
employed for decoration. “The Spirit of the Times” and “The Birth of the
Flag,” are grand subjects for window display, and both of these we
illustrate. Other window trims of a patriotic character also accompany this
chapter.
For this reason July 4th is the great patriotic occasion and the national
colors, the national flag and shield and the national heroes are appropriately
employed for decoration. “The Spirit of the Times” and “The Birth of the
Flag,” are grand subjects for window display, and both of these we
illustrate. Other window trims of a patriotic character also accompany this
chapter.
Page 428
EXAMPLE OF PATRIOTIC DISPLAY.
FRONT VIEW OF PATRIOTIC DISPLAY.
Many people, I know, place an electric fan where its powerful breeze
moves the flag in quick waves; but after all, that is not a natural method of
waving “Old Glory.” The sweep of the flag pole itself in a semi-circle is the
proper method of waving the star spangled banner, and this effect may
easily be procured in a show window.
FRONT VIEW OF PATRIOTIC DISPLAY.
Many people, I know, place an electric fan where its powerful breeze
moves the flag in quick waves; but after all, that is not a natural method of
waving “Old Glory.” The sweep of the flag pole itself in a semi-circle is the
proper method of waving the star spangled banner, and this effect may
easily be procured in a show window.
Page 429
In the first illustration is a large frame of red, white and blue, in the
center being a battleship, or whatever else your fancy may dictate for a trim.
You can make this frame and keep it to inclose various incidents of the war
as they may occur. The section of frame marked “white” is beveled, or
placed on an incline, to better carry out the effect of a picture frame. Above
your picture three flags are naturally and continually waved, and the effect
is well worth the slight trouble required to produce it.
center being a battleship, or whatever else your fancy may dictate for a trim.
You can make this frame and keep it to inclose various incidents of the war
as they may occur. The section of frame marked “white” is beveled, or
placed on an incline, to better carry out the effect of a picture frame. Above
your picture three flags are naturally and continually waved, and the effect
is well worth the slight trouble required to produce it.
Page 430
“4th OF JULY” WINDOW.—Morton.
Page 431
JULY 4th DISPLAY.—Goldsman.
Page 432
JULY 4th DISPLAY.—Goldsman.
Page 433
PATRIOTIC WINDOW.—McElwain.
Page 434
PATRIOTIC DISPLAY.—Cornwell.
Page 435
PATRIOTIC DISPLAY.—Weber.
Page 436
PATRIOTIC DISPLAY.—Mueller.
The second illustration, which is the rear plan, explains the waving of the
flags. Three circular slots (3) are cut in the frame, through which the flag
staffs (2) are placed. These are weighted at the ends (7) to make them
balance. Place the pulleys (4) as shown in the cut, and run a cord over the
pulleys connecting with the flags. Opposite each connection place a rubber
cord or weak spring, fastened to the framework in such a position that as the
cord slacks it will pull the flag to the opposite side. The pin and block (5)
for the flag to work on should be loose enough for free motion. The wheel
(6) gives the motion to the cord, and is operated by a small motor. The
apparatus is very easily constructed, and works perfectly. In front of the
picture place stacks of arms and a cannon, to fill in the foreground. The
The second illustration, which is the rear plan, explains the waving of the
flags. Three circular slots (3) are cut in the frame, through which the flag
staffs (2) are placed. These are weighted at the ends (7) to make them
balance. Place the pulleys (4) as shown in the cut, and run a cord over the
pulleys connecting with the flags. Opposite each connection place a rubber
cord or weak spring, fastened to the framework in such a position that as the
cord slacks it will pull the flag to the opposite side. The pin and block (5)
for the flag to work on should be loose enough for free motion. The wheel
(6) gives the motion to the cord, and is operated by a small motor. The
apparatus is very easily constructed, and works perfectly. In front of the
picture place stacks of arms and a cannon, to fill in the foreground. The
Page 437
cannon is made as follows: Cover a frame with oilcloth or carpet paper and
apply black or yellow cloth or paint, to make it resemble iron or brass.
apply black or yellow cloth or paint, to make it resemble iron or brass.
Page 438
THANKSGIVING DISPLAYS.
While much labor, time and expense is devoted to Christmas windows
the trimmer often neglects his Thanksgiving displays. For this reason hardly
anything strictly new is ever seen on this occasion. As a matter of fact, it is
much easier to scheme for Christmas than for Thanksgiving displays, as the
trimmer has a greater variety of attractive material for his work at his
disposal and more liberal allowances are made on his employer’s side for
the occasion. Yet we can without any great expenditure produce many
attractive and new Thanksgiving displays. Winter scenes of different
character can easily, quickly and economically be gotten up and are very
adaptable. On Thanksgiving Day we have usually snowy, wintry weather;
should it happen, however, that this year this is not the case, do not let the
weather interfere with your work. Thanksgiving Day being the opening day
of the season a winter scene is always appropriate, very effective and makes
a winning, pleasing impression upon the passerby.
While much labor, time and expense is devoted to Christmas windows
the trimmer often neglects his Thanksgiving displays. For this reason hardly
anything strictly new is ever seen on this occasion. As a matter of fact, it is
much easier to scheme for Christmas than for Thanksgiving displays, as the
trimmer has a greater variety of attractive material for his work at his
disposal and more liberal allowances are made on his employer’s side for
the occasion. Yet we can without any great expenditure produce many
attractive and new Thanksgiving displays. Winter scenes of different
character can easily, quickly and economically be gotten up and are very
adaptable. On Thanksgiving Day we have usually snowy, wintry weather;
should it happen, however, that this year this is not the case, do not let the
weather interfere with your work. Thanksgiving Day being the opening day
of the season a winter scene is always appropriate, very effective and makes
a winning, pleasing impression upon the passerby.
Page 439
THANKSGIVING DISPLAY.—Green.
If your window is large enough you may construct a pretty background
by building mountains, partly covered with snow. Take old dry goods boxes
of various sizes and pile them up in an irregular fashion so as to form the
shape of mountains. A few boards and strips will also be required to obtain
the desired effect. Cover this frame with carpet paper, that the hills, rocks
and earth will be properly represented. Take care to hide the edges of the
paper. Heavy old packing canvas may be used instead of paper, if you have
it. Cover the paper or canvas with cheap water color, consisting of black
and white mixed with a little umber brown, to give it the proper color. You
do not need to be much of an artist to do this work. After it is painted cover
the tops of the hills, the gullies and the floor with cotton, in such manner as
to imitate snow. Place the display in the back and sides of the window, so as
to leave floor space in front. From the upper parts of the mountains have a
little brook or rill run down till it reaches a pond of water at the bottom. The
pond is made by placing on the floor a flat wash tub, having a hole in the
bottom connected with a waste pipe. The outside of the tub, up to the edge,
If your window is large enough you may construct a pretty background
by building mountains, partly covered with snow. Take old dry goods boxes
of various sizes and pile them up in an irregular fashion so as to form the
shape of mountains. A few boards and strips will also be required to obtain
the desired effect. Cover this frame with carpet paper, that the hills, rocks
and earth will be properly represented. Take care to hide the edges of the
paper. Heavy old packing canvas may be used instead of paper, if you have
it. Cover the paper or canvas with cheap water color, consisting of black
and white mixed with a little umber brown, to give it the proper color. You
do not need to be much of an artist to do this work. After it is painted cover
the tops of the hills, the gullies and the floor with cotton, in such manner as
to imitate snow. Place the display in the back and sides of the window, so as
to leave floor space in front. From the upper parts of the mountains have a
little brook or rill run down till it reaches a pond of water at the bottom. The
pond is made by placing on the floor a flat wash tub, having a hole in the
bottom connected with a waste pipe. The outside of the tub, up to the edge,
Page 440
must be hidden with rocks and snow, and the inside should be painted a
brownish green. Put a few pebbles in it to cover the bottom. The brook can
be arranged by using a runway of tin, painted brown, which must be bent
into an irregular course, and follow the shape of the mountains. One or two
pretty cascades may be made by allowing the water to fall a few inches
from one trough to another. Place small stones and snow at the edges to
give it a natural effect. The water may be supplied from a barrel set up in
the back of the window, or by a connection with water works. A few dry
branches placed here and there will represent trees. A red incandescent light
behind the top of the highest mountain will give a very pretty effect to the
scene, as it will look like the sun setting or a volcanic mountain. The cotton,
or snow, will almost appear as on fire. To complete the picture scatter some
diamond dust over the cotton to make it sparkle like snow. Some rabbits in
the foreground, a form dressed as a hunter, etc., are additions which will
suggest themselves to a trimmer able to procure them. Put a few goods at
the front of the window and don’t forget the price cards.
For a thanksgiving scene paint a background on cloth, showing a farm,
with barn, rail-fence, trees, etc., in the distance. From this background a
block of turkeys is seen marching forward like a file of soldiers. All this is
painted. The real scene now begins. Show the corner of a house at one side,
and a farmer’s form with axe in hand, beside a stump. Two or three dead
brownish green. Put a few pebbles in it to cover the bottom. The brook can
be arranged by using a runway of tin, painted brown, which must be bent
into an irregular course, and follow the shape of the mountains. One or two
pretty cascades may be made by allowing the water to fall a few inches
from one trough to another. Place small stones and snow at the edges to
give it a natural effect. The water may be supplied from a barrel set up in
the back of the window, or by a connection with water works. A few dry
branches placed here and there will represent trees. A red incandescent light
behind the top of the highest mountain will give a very pretty effect to the
scene, as it will look like the sun setting or a volcanic mountain. The cotton,
or snow, will almost appear as on fire. To complete the picture scatter some
diamond dust over the cotton to make it sparkle like snow. Some rabbits in
the foreground, a form dressed as a hunter, etc., are additions which will
suggest themselves to a trimmer able to procure them. Put a few goods at
the front of the window and don’t forget the price cards.
For a thanksgiving scene paint a background on cloth, showing a farm,
with barn, rail-fence, trees, etc., in the distance. From this background a
block of turkeys is seen marching forward like a file of soldiers. All this is
painted. The real scene now begins. Show the corner of a house at one side,
and a farmer’s form with axe in hand, beside a stump. Two or three dead
Page 441
turkeys (real ones) are lying near, their heads severed from their bodies.
Red paint upon the axe and stump will show the slaughter is real.
The first turkey on the painted scene could bear a placard reading, “We
are ready for you,” or “A Sacrifice of the Innocents,” or something similar.
Be sure the bottom edge of the scene is covered by cotton, branches, or
stones, so that the painted scene will blend into the real one.
Red paint upon the axe and stump will show the slaughter is real.
The first turkey on the painted scene could bear a placard reading, “We
are ready for you,” or “A Sacrifice of the Innocents,” or something similar.
Be sure the bottom edge of the scene is covered by cotton, branches, or
stones, so that the painted scene will blend into the real one.
Page 442
THE TURKEY.
The Turkey being the natural emblem of Thanksgiving Day we show a
most beautiful bird of this species created from linens. We print herewith a
cut of the framework, showing how to construct the foundation. The tail is
made separate from the body and fastened on with screw hooks, so that it
may be handled easily; 194 doilies were used in the covering. A good idea
would be to place a sign on the turkey reading: “Good to eat off.”
“THE THANKSGIVING TURKEY.”—Softley.
The Turkey being the natural emblem of Thanksgiving Day we show a
most beautiful bird of this species created from linens. We print herewith a
cut of the framework, showing how to construct the foundation. The tail is
made separate from the body and fastened on with screw hooks, so that it
may be handled easily; 194 doilies were used in the covering. A good idea
would be to place a sign on the turkey reading: “Good to eat off.”
“THE THANKSGIVING TURKEY.”—Softley.
Page 443
FRAMEWORK OF TURKEY.
Page 444
CHRISTMAS DISPLAYS.
It has been estimated that the value of the merchandise disposed of
during December is equal to that sold during the other eleven months of the
year.
It is no wonder, then, that active preparations have been made for months
in advance to take care of the holiday trade to the best advantage.
It has been estimated that the value of the merchandise disposed of
during December is equal to that sold during the other eleven months of the
year.
It is no wonder, then, that active preparations have been made for months
in advance to take care of the holiday trade to the best advantage.
Page 445
THE MERCHANT’S DUTY.
is to provide for his window display on an elaborate scale. No notion of
false economy should be allowed to interfere with the attractiveness of his
displays. He must remember that his trimmer has the brains and skill to
create beautiful effects, but is powerless without the material to work with.
To be economical—let us speak plainly, and say stingy—in supplying
your decorator with material will lose you more trade than you can afford to
spare. If your competitor’s display is better than yours the reason will
probably be that he has been more liberal than you in providing proper
material for display. You can’t afford to allow any one to outdo you in
window display in these days preceding the holidays, when most of the
shoppers depend upon the windows to guide them in purchasing.
is to provide for his window display on an elaborate scale. No notion of
false economy should be allowed to interfere with the attractiveness of his
displays. He must remember that his trimmer has the brains and skill to
create beautiful effects, but is powerless without the material to work with.
To be economical—let us speak plainly, and say stingy—in supplying
your decorator with material will lose you more trade than you can afford to
spare. If your competitor’s display is better than yours the reason will
probably be that he has been more liberal than you in providing proper
material for display. You can’t afford to allow any one to outdo you in
window display in these days preceding the holidays, when most of the
shoppers depend upon the windows to guide them in purchasing.
Page 446
THE TRIMMER’S DUTY
during this important season is to exercise his talents to his employer’s best
advantage. He has doubtless been planning original displays for months in
advance, and if his house affords him proper scope and material he should
strive to outdo all former efforts to win trade for the firm that pays him his
salary in dull months, as well as busy ones.
Don’t worry about working over time; the entire force must be too much
interested in the success of the house to grumble about work. And do not
expect your employer to allow you a greater expenditure than the size of
your town or the importance of the house renders necessary. Make your
windows as attractive as possible at the smallest outlay of money that may
be required, and in this way consider the interests of your firm.
during this important season is to exercise his talents to his employer’s best
advantage. He has doubtless been planning original displays for months in
advance, and if his house affords him proper scope and material he should
strive to outdo all former efforts to win trade for the firm that pays him his
salary in dull months, as well as busy ones.
Don’t worry about working over time; the entire force must be too much
interested in the success of the house to grumble about work. And do not
expect your employer to allow you a greater expenditure than the size of
your town or the importance of the house renders necessary. Make your
windows as attractive as possible at the smallest outlay of money that may
be required, and in this way consider the interests of your firm.
Page 447
A CHRISTMAS MANTEL.
Accompanying this is a picture of a Christmas mantel and fireplace,
created entirely from underwear. A light frame of wood was first erected,
and the underwear piled before it. Upon the shelf were pieces of bric-a-
brac.
Accompanying this is a picture of a Christmas mantel and fireplace,
created entirely from underwear. A light frame of wood was first erected,
and the underwear piled before it. Upon the shelf were pieces of bric-a-
brac.
Page 448
DOLL DISPLAY.—Tobias.
Page 449
DOLL DISPLAY.—Wiseman.
Page 450
“THE DOLL’S THEATRE.”—Tobias.
Page 451
DOLL DISPLAY.—Moss.
Page 452
DOLL DISPLAY.—Barker.
Page 453
CHRISTMAS DISPLAY.
Page 454
TOY DISPLAY.—Moss.
Page 455
TOY DISPLAY.—Morton.
CHRISTMAS DISPLAY.—Urbaneck.
CHRISTMAS DISPLAY.—Urbaneck.
Page 456
CHRISTMAS DISPLAY.—Jungblut.
“CHRISTMAS MORNING.”—Boyd.
“CHRISTMAS MORNING.”—Boyd.
Page 457
“CHRISTMAS EVE.”—Engle.
Page 458
CHRISTMAS WINDOW.—Brink.
Page 459
SANTA CLAUS GROTTO, INTERIOR DISPLAY.—Morton.
Page 460
SANTA CLAUS GROTTO, INTERIOR DISPLAY.—
Shogran.
Shogran.
Page 461
SANTA CLAUS’ CAVE.
This picture illustrates a stalactite cave, which is rendered even more
attractive by a background showing the northern lights, and constantly
changing by means of an automatic device. The lights are painted on an
ordinary drop curtain, before which at a distance of three feet was placed a
tarletan curtain to lend the effect of distance. The back scene is lighted by
twelve border lights that flash automatically every minute. The front is also
lighted by concealed incandescents which flash when the back lights are
turned off. The stalactites used are hexagon in shape. They are cotton
batting, and covered with ground frosting. The lightning was effected by
rollers and an alternating current. The display was ten feet deep, thirteen
feet high and sixteen feet wide.
SANTA CLAUS’ CAVE.—Goldsman.
This picture illustrates a stalactite cave, which is rendered even more
attractive by a background showing the northern lights, and constantly
changing by means of an automatic device. The lights are painted on an
ordinary drop curtain, before which at a distance of three feet was placed a
tarletan curtain to lend the effect of distance. The back scene is lighted by
twelve border lights that flash automatically every minute. The front is also
lighted by concealed incandescents which flash when the back lights are
turned off. The stalactites used are hexagon in shape. They are cotton
batting, and covered with ground frosting. The lightning was effected by
rollers and an alternating current. The display was ten feet deep, thirteen
feet high and sixteen feet wide.
SANTA CLAUS’ CAVE.—Goldsman.
Page 462
CHRISTMAS DISPLAYS.
We show in this connection several excellent designs for Christmas
window displays, all of which have been used successfully. The methods of
constructing these displays the reader has already been instructed upon. At
once you will see what framework is required and how it must be covered
and decorated. Of course any window shown can be adapted to any sized
window, and many of the illustrations can doubtless be improved upon
when the idea is once presented to your mind.
We show in this connection several excellent designs for Christmas
window displays, all of which have been used successfully. The methods of
constructing these displays the reader has already been instructed upon. At
once you will see what framework is required and how it must be covered
and decorated. Of course any window shown can be adapted to any sized
window, and many of the illustrations can doubtless be improved upon
when the idea is once presented to your mind.
Page 463
CHAPTER XXIV.
INTERIOR DECORATIONS.
INTERIOR DECORATIONS.—Mitchell.
INTERIOR DECORATIONS.
INTERIOR DECORATIONS.—Mitchell.
Page 464
INTERIOR DECORATIONS.—Shogran.
Page 465
INTERIOR ARCH.—Morton.
Page 466
INTERIOR ARCH.—Morton.
Page 467
INTERIOR.—Morton.
Page 468
INTERIOR DECORATION.—Meyers.
Page 469
INTERIOR.
Page 470
INTERIOR.—Crossley.
Page 471
INTERIOR DECORATION.—Langhanke.
Page 472
COSY CORNER.—Welch.
Page 473
INTERIOR—CORNUCOPIA.—Softley.
Page 474
“THE COMING YEAR”—INTERIOR DECORATION.—Hyslop.
Page 475
“THE COMING YEAR”—INTERIOR DECORATION.—Hyslop.
Page 476
INTERIOR EASTER DECORATION.—Goldsman.
Interior display should be simple, harmonious, artistic. Don’t attempt to
bewilder your customers. A woman in search of an apron shies from a great
bunch of aprons swung from the ceiling, but is attracted by a single apron
tastefully displayed. So it is with all goods.
The day has gone by in the dry goods business when a few dummies,
draped with dress goods and placed upon the ledge, will suffice. Something
more attractive is required. Ladies especially like to see pretty goods, and
will invariably do their purchasing where goods are brought out and
displayed in an attractive manner. Some firms have objected to interior
trimming, believing that it requires too many goods to make an effective
trim, thus robbing the stocks. This, however, is a gross mistake, as we know
from experience that pretty, effective trims may be made with the use of
comparatively few goods. One idea which has found favor among trimmers
is that of dividing off a ledge (where there is one of considerable length)
Interior display should be simple, harmonious, artistic. Don’t attempt to
bewilder your customers. A woman in search of an apron shies from a great
bunch of aprons swung from the ceiling, but is attracted by a single apron
tastefully displayed. So it is with all goods.
The day has gone by in the dry goods business when a few dummies,
draped with dress goods and placed upon the ledge, will suffice. Something
more attractive is required. Ladies especially like to see pretty goods, and
will invariably do their purchasing where goods are brought out and
displayed in an attractive manner. Some firms have objected to interior
trimming, believing that it requires too many goods to make an effective
trim, thus robbing the stocks. This, however, is a gross mistake, as we know
from experience that pretty, effective trims may be made with the use of
comparatively few goods. One idea which has found favor among trimmers
is that of dividing off a ledge (where there is one of considerable length)
Page 477
into booths, by the use of draperies, and in each of these displaying
different lines of goods.
This is perhaps one of the easiest effective trims which may be put up,
but where time and space will permit we would suggest that the trimmer get
up some sort of framework or something on which a few goods may be
displayed in such a manner as to show them off to the best possible
advantage.
Admitting all the benefits of good advertising—and surely there are no
enterprising merchants in these days who do not admit them—it only
remains to choose the best methods. The simple display of a bolt of goods is
an advertisement, but a weak one. How much more effective that same
piece of goods would become if spread out, or draped, or made into some
shape that would mean something, create a mental picture, and leave an
impression on the memory.
A little ingenuity, a little taste, an idea of the harmony of colors can do
wonders in the interior of any store, no matter what the character of the
stock may be, or its quality or quantity. The thing to do is to let your goods
tell some clear, legible story that shall be as plain to your customers as was
the handwriting on the wall of Belshazzar’s palace to Daniel, the prophet.
Aside from printer’s ink and show window displays, there is no better
advertising, and it costs very little.
It would seem as though dress goods might afford the very best
opportunities for making an attractive interior display. It is, however, a fact
that ordinarily this important line is shown to the worst possible advantages.
One often sees an effort made at display by piling up a lot of bright goods
on the end of a counter, and by filling a top shelf with pretty folds of goods;
but no attractive effects are obtained. The risk of soiling expensive fabrics
is of course one reason why a better show is not made, but with a little care,
a little ingenuity and more or less trouble to make frequent changes of
goods, an exceedingly handsome display can be made and run no risk
whatever.
different lines of goods.
This is perhaps one of the easiest effective trims which may be put up,
but where time and space will permit we would suggest that the trimmer get
up some sort of framework or something on which a few goods may be
displayed in such a manner as to show them off to the best possible
advantage.
Admitting all the benefits of good advertising—and surely there are no
enterprising merchants in these days who do not admit them—it only
remains to choose the best methods. The simple display of a bolt of goods is
an advertisement, but a weak one. How much more effective that same
piece of goods would become if spread out, or draped, or made into some
shape that would mean something, create a mental picture, and leave an
impression on the memory.
A little ingenuity, a little taste, an idea of the harmony of colors can do
wonders in the interior of any store, no matter what the character of the
stock may be, or its quality or quantity. The thing to do is to let your goods
tell some clear, legible story that shall be as plain to your customers as was
the handwriting on the wall of Belshazzar’s palace to Daniel, the prophet.
Aside from printer’s ink and show window displays, there is no better
advertising, and it costs very little.
It would seem as though dress goods might afford the very best
opportunities for making an attractive interior display. It is, however, a fact
that ordinarily this important line is shown to the worst possible advantages.
One often sees an effort made at display by piling up a lot of bright goods
on the end of a counter, and by filling a top shelf with pretty folds of goods;
but no attractive effects are obtained. The risk of soiling expensive fabrics
is of course one reason why a better show is not made, but with a little care,
a little ingenuity and more or less trouble to make frequent changes of
goods, an exceedingly handsome display can be made and run no risk
whatever.
Page 478
LEDGES.
I show in this connection a large number of ledge displays, which will
serve as examples of what may be done in this style of decoration.
I show in this connection a large number of ledge displays, which will
serve as examples of what may be done in this style of decoration.
Page 479
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Raux.
Page 480
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Daniels.
Page 481
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Pontious.
Page 482
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Urbom.
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Carson.
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Carson.
Page 483
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Williams.
Page 484
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Stritt.
Page 485
LEDGE DISPLAY.—Bittman.
The trimmer should always keep in mind the season for which he is
trimming, and trim accordingly. Make your spring trim light and airy. Your
summer trim should be the lightest of the year, to give your store a cool
appearance. Your fall trim should be of filled up, stocky effect, and your
Christmas trim as gay and elaborate as possible.
The trimmer should always keep in mind the season for which he is
trimming, and trim accordingly. Make your spring trim light and airy. Your
summer trim should be the lightest of the year, to give your store a cool
appearance. Your fall trim should be of filled up, stocky effect, and your
Christmas trim as gay and elaborate as possible.
Page 486
Page 487
The ledge displays herewith presented illustrate some of the best methods
of decoration and will convey many valuable ideas.
The accompanying cut shows an arrangement in which linens are used in
connection with china and lamps, making a very attractive display.
In this ledge display, the arches, six in number, were puffed in white
cheesecloth, the edge being trimmed with coiled crepe paper of a dark green
shade. The six arches represented three departments, the first two silks, the
next two linens, the others dress goods. The wall, back of the arches, was
covered with lace curtains. Palms were placed at intervals between the
arches, and the goods were as carefully displayed as if they were in a show
window. The framework of the arches were built of light strips. The entire
display was imposing and attractive.
of decoration and will convey many valuable ideas.
The accompanying cut shows an arrangement in which linens are used in
connection with china and lamps, making a very attractive display.
In this ledge display, the arches, six in number, were puffed in white
cheesecloth, the edge being trimmed with coiled crepe paper of a dark green
shade. The six arches represented three departments, the first two silks, the
next two linens, the others dress goods. The wall, back of the arches, was
covered with lace curtains. Palms were placed at intervals between the
arches, and the goods were as carefully displayed as if they were in a show
window. The framework of the arches were built of light strips. The entire
display was imposing and attractive.
Page 488
Page 489
SHOW CASE DISPLAYS.
Page 490
Page 491
SHOW CASE DISPLAYS.
I wish to call the attention of my readers to the desirability of trimming
their show-cases artistically, and the cut we show of a show-case trim is an
example of what may be done in that line. The goods shown are laces,
trimmings, handkerchiefs, and gloves, and the beauty of the display
attracted the eye of many customers of the store and induced them to
examine and purchase the goods.
A neatly decorated show-case is shown in the picture. The festooning of
ribbons against the back adds much to the beauty of the display, which is as
carefully arranged as if in a window.
I wish to call the attention of my readers to the desirability of trimming
their show-cases artistically, and the cut we show of a show-case trim is an
example of what may be done in that line. The goods shown are laces,
trimmings, handkerchiefs, and gloves, and the beauty of the display
attracted the eye of many customers of the store and induced them to
examine and purchase the goods.
A neatly decorated show-case is shown in the picture. The festooning of
ribbons against the back adds much to the beauty of the display, which is as
carefully arranged as if in a window.
Page 492
CHAPTER XXV.
SOME MISCELLANEOUS DISPLAYS.
ODD FELLOWS ARCH.
The accompanying illustration is an arch erected in honor of the order of
Odd Fellows, and is a clever conception well carried out. The three links
SOME MISCELLANEOUS DISPLAYS.
ODD FELLOWS ARCH.
The accompanying illustration is an arch erected in honor of the order of
Odd Fellows, and is a clever conception well carried out. The three links
Page 493
were puffed over a heavy cardboard and edged with twisted draping cord.
The arch also was panelled with this cord. The letters “F. L. T.” were
suspended within the links by invisible wires. As this arch was in
connection with an excellent display it attracted much attention and assisted
to sell many goods.
A holiday interior pyramid is here shown. Such a display in a store
during the busy season is sure to win trade.
The arch also was panelled with this cord. The letters “F. L. T.” were
suspended within the links by invisible wires. As this arch was in
connection with an excellent display it attracted much attention and assisted
to sell many goods.
A holiday interior pyramid is here shown. Such a display in a store
during the busy season is sure to win trade.
Page 494
AN ORIENTAL DISPLAY.
We reproduce on the next page four views of an oriental display recently
made in the windows of John Wanamaker, of New York City, by Leon F.
Rubens.
MR. RUBENS’ ORIENTAL DISPLAY.
The conditions unfortunately prohibited taking a satisfactory photograph,
as the trim occupied the space of four panes, widely divided by architectural
iron work. The problem of a successful display was thereby complicated
somewhat, as it was really necessary to make four separate “pictures,”
We reproduce on the next page four views of an oriental display recently
made in the windows of John Wanamaker, of New York City, by Leon F.
Rubens.
MR. RUBENS’ ORIENTAL DISPLAY.
The conditions unfortunately prohibited taking a satisfactory photograph,
as the trim occupied the space of four panes, widely divided by architectural
iron work. The problem of a successful display was thereby complicated
somewhat, as it was really necessary to make four separate “pictures,”
Page 495
having the effect of one when seen from across the street. Mr. Wanamaker’s
windows are of ancient style, set high up and being very narrow.
In a window containing entirely oriental goods the richness of coloring is
one of the main attractions, and in a photographic reproduction this
gorgeousness of color effect is entirely lost; still one can imagine, in
looking at the pictures of this display, that the color harmony must have
been fully equal to the masterly arrangement of the goods.
No very expensive goods were used, and the trim is constructed without
framework or special fixtures.
windows are of ancient style, set high up and being very narrow.
In a window containing entirely oriental goods the richness of coloring is
one of the main attractions, and in a photographic reproduction this
gorgeousness of color effect is entirely lost; still one can imagine, in
looking at the pictures of this display, that the color harmony must have
been fully equal to the masterly arrangement of the goods.
No very expensive goods were used, and the trim is constructed without
framework or special fixtures.
Page 496
UNIQUE RUG DISPLAY.
A very artistic arrangement of rugs is shown. A series of large tubes were
made of carpet paper, and over them were pinned rugs of various sizes.
These tubes or pillars were then stacked in an artistic group and stuffed
birds and ornaments placed upon the tops.
A very artistic arrangement of rugs is shown. A series of large tubes were
made of carpet paper, and over them were pinned rugs of various sizes.
These tubes or pillars were then stacked in an artistic group and stuffed
birds and ornaments placed upon the tops.
Page 497
RIBBON STAR.
RIBBON STAR.
RIBBON STAR.
Page 498
DISPLAY OF TRIMMINGS.
Framework of flat sticks, as used in window shades; height of star, five
feet; composed entirely of numerous solid color ribbons, edged with Roman
stripe ribbon, to give a neat finish. Ribbons were not cut but folded back of
star which was covered at completion of trim with white cheesecloth.
Background, pure white curtains. This was an “overhead trim” at the ribbon
counter, and attracted quite a little attention.
Framework of flat sticks, as used in window shades; height of star, five
feet; composed entirely of numerous solid color ribbons, edged with Roman
stripe ribbon, to give a neat finish. Ribbons were not cut but folded back of
star which was covered at completion of trim with white cheesecloth.
Background, pure white curtains. This was an “overhead trim” at the ribbon
counter, and attracted quite a little attention.
Page 499
A DISPLAY OF TRIMMINGS.
A circular arch is covered with elaborate designs, and the figures in the
center show the proper application of the trimming.
A circular arch is covered with elaborate designs, and the figures in the
center show the proper application of the trimming.
Page 500
A TROLLEY CAR.
Here is a reproduction of a trolley car, trimmed entirely with
handkerchiefs. The details of the car, including brake, controller and bell
rope, are well carried out, and the car stands upon its own rail and sleepers.
The car was first built of wood, and covered with white cloth, after which
the handkerchiefs were pinned on.
Here is a reproduction of a trolley car, trimmed entirely with
handkerchiefs. The details of the car, including brake, controller and bell
rope, are well carried out, and the car stands upon its own rail and sleepers.
The car was first built of wood, and covered with white cloth, after which
the handkerchiefs were pinned on.
Page 501
SKIRT DISPLAY.
In the accompanying sketch is presented the production of a design
which deserves a place here for a double reason, because it is not only an
artistic effort, but eminently practical and easy of imitation in a store of
moderate dimensions. The figure is nothing more than the many you use
from time to time in your suit and cloak windows. For the many who are
not so lucky to have whole forms you can use the bust forms by placing
them on a box until you get the required height. If you have no hands use
the ones you have at the glove department displaying gloves. In order to
have the hands and arms support the skirt you must put a crutch under them.
This is not seen, and helps to keep the skirt in an even position.
In the accompanying sketch is presented the production of a design
which deserves a place here for a double reason, because it is not only an
artistic effort, but eminently practical and easy of imitation in a store of
moderate dimensions. The figure is nothing more than the many you use
from time to time in your suit and cloak windows. For the many who are
not so lucky to have whole forms you can use the bust forms by placing
them on a box until you get the required height. If you have no hands use
the ones you have at the glove department displaying gloves. In order to
have the hands and arms support the skirt you must put a crutch under them.
This is not seen, and helps to keep the skirt in an even position.
Page 502
A window so displayed would, I believe, make a hit, as it is one of the
best ways of displaying skirts in an artistic way.
best ways of displaying skirts in an artistic way.
Page 503
“MISS MODESTY.”
While this display called attention to the fact that corsets are part of
women’s underwear, and therefore might be called immodest for that
reason, still it suggests a good idea for decorating with these goods.
“MISS MODESTY.”
While this display called attention to the fact that corsets are part of
women’s underwear, and therefore might be called immodest for that
reason, still it suggests a good idea for decorating with these goods.
“MISS MODESTY.”
Page 504
FOUNTAIN DISPLAY.
The “Fountain of Chiffon” is cleverly conceived and executed, and is
thus described by the artist:
“Size of window, width, nine feet; height, seven feet six inches; depth,
six feet; white, spotted allover, net draped and festooned on canary yellow
lining for background.
“On top is placed a three-feet-high flower stand with eight pieces of
millinery wire (in two rows) in semi-circular form, on which are thrown
eight lengths of wide silk chiffon (colors to match ruchings), no bluette.
“A hoop, five feet in diameter, made of one-inch wood, is attached to a
standard and fastened to center of window floor. White cotton covers the
skeleton of the whole goblet. Six yards of bluette tinseled angel gauze make
the vessel, including the pillar, and six yards more of the same material
finishes the base. Twelve lengths (five yards each) of chiffon ruching,
artistically selected colors (except bluette), decorates the vessel, trims in
spirals the pillar, and falls in zigzags on base. Five yards of six-inch guipure
lace for the brim.
The “Fountain of Chiffon” is cleverly conceived and executed, and is
thus described by the artist:
“Size of window, width, nine feet; height, seven feet six inches; depth,
six feet; white, spotted allover, net draped and festooned on canary yellow
lining for background.
“On top is placed a three-feet-high flower stand with eight pieces of
millinery wire (in two rows) in semi-circular form, on which are thrown
eight lengths of wide silk chiffon (colors to match ruchings), no bluette.
“A hoop, five feet in diameter, made of one-inch wood, is attached to a
standard and fastened to center of window floor. White cotton covers the
skeleton of the whole goblet. Six yards of bluette tinseled angel gauze make
the vessel, including the pillar, and six yards more of the same material
finishes the base. Twelve lengths (five yards each) of chiffon ruching,
artistically selected colors (except bluette), decorates the vessel, trims in
spirals the pillar, and falls in zigzags on base. Five yards of six-inch guipure
lace for the brim.
Page 505
FOUNTAIN DISPLAY.
“Between each two pieces of chiffon are arranged white ospreys. Five
lengths of white narrow silk chiffon are representing streams overflowing
brim of basin and falling to ground.”
“Between each two pieces of chiffon are arranged white ospreys. Five
lengths of white narrow silk chiffon are representing streams overflowing
brim of basin and falling to ground.”
Page 506
MILLINERY ARCH.
“Size of window.—Width, 9 feet; height, 7 feet 6 inches; depth, 6 feet.
Size of arch.—Width, 7 feet; height, 7 feet 4 inches; depth, 5 feet. Size of
columns, including base, shaft and capital, 4 feet 4 inches. Size of base, 12
× 16 inches; shaft, 2 feet (6 inches in diameter); capital, 12 × 12 inches.
Size of arch from line of capital to center of top, 3 feet 2 inches. Size of
arch from line of capital to center of inside line, 1 foot 8 inches.
“The whole is made of 1½ × ¾-inch wood material.
“Arch and columns, which are one foot from glass plate, are previously
whitewashed, and then trimmed with Shogran puffing of white cheese
cloth.”
“Size of window.—Width, 9 feet; height, 7 feet 6 inches; depth, 6 feet.
Size of arch.—Width, 7 feet; height, 7 feet 4 inches; depth, 5 feet. Size of
columns, including base, shaft and capital, 4 feet 4 inches. Size of base, 12
× 16 inches; shaft, 2 feet (6 inches in diameter); capital, 12 × 12 inches.
Size of arch from line of capital to center of top, 3 feet 2 inches. Size of
arch from line of capital to center of inside line, 1 foot 8 inches.
“The whole is made of 1½ × ¾-inch wood material.
“Arch and columns, which are one foot from glass plate, are previously
whitewashed, and then trimmed with Shogran puffing of white cheese
cloth.”
Page 507
BROOKLYN BRIDGE IN SPOOLS.
On another page is an excellent picture of this successful trim. The
reproduction of the Brooklyn Bridge is so accurate that Mr. Roebling would
probably have been delighted had he lived to see it. We furnish diagrams of
the towers, in which the dimensions are accurately given. The foundations
were covered with grey cotton, to imitate stone, and the balance of the
superstructure with boxes of white. Various vehicles were shown upon the
bridge.
A number of one candle power electric lights were placed upon the
bridge, and a large reflector, which the picture does not show, was placed in
the left upper corner to represent the moon. These, and the torch held by the
Statue of Liberty, were the only lights shown at night, and the effect was
very beautiful. There were 1,225 dozen spools of cotton used in the
construction of the bridge, and after the display was taken out a sale was
made of these—7 spools for 25c.—and they were sold out in a hurry.
On another page is an excellent picture of this successful trim. The
reproduction of the Brooklyn Bridge is so accurate that Mr. Roebling would
probably have been delighted had he lived to see it. We furnish diagrams of
the towers, in which the dimensions are accurately given. The foundations
were covered with grey cotton, to imitate stone, and the balance of the
superstructure with boxes of white. Various vehicles were shown upon the
bridge.
A number of one candle power electric lights were placed upon the
bridge, and a large reflector, which the picture does not show, was placed in
the left upper corner to represent the moon. These, and the torch held by the
Statue of Liberty, were the only lights shown at night, and the effect was
very beautiful. There were 1,225 dozen spools of cotton used in the
construction of the bridge, and after the display was taken out a sale was
made of these—7 spools for 25c.—and they were sold out in a hurry.
Page 508
The picture was enhanced by a good water scene under the bridge,
showing ships, etc., the water being made to move by means of a
mechanical device. There was a sea-wall at the rear, made of brick paper,
cotton being used to represent foam.
The statue of “Liberty Enlightening the World” was cleverly carried out.
The upper part was puffed with white cheesecloth. A diagram explains the
structure. By the way, the photograph of this window sent us was taken by
electric light, a three minutes exposure being given. The picture will be seen
to be perfectly free from reflections.
showing ships, etc., the water being made to move by means of a
mechanical device. There was a sea-wall at the rear, made of brick paper,
cotton being used to represent foam.
The statue of “Liberty Enlightening the World” was cleverly carried out.
The upper part was puffed with white cheesecloth. A diagram explains the
structure. By the way, the photograph of this window sent us was taken by
electric light, a three minutes exposure being given. The picture will be seen
to be perfectly free from reflections.
Page 509
A NOTION DISPLAY.
I offer the following suggestion for a window, and although the central
portion is alone illustrated, and may be applied to any sort of a trim, the
general plan described will be found to harmonize with the central picture.
BROOKLYN BRIDGE IN SPOOL COTTON.—Stetler.
Use green and yellow, in combination, for the wall draperies, and drab
for the floor. Trim, in any manner that commends itself to you, with
handkerchiefs, embroideries and notions, keeping each class of articles in a
separate group. Parasols at the front corners, placed in fan-shaped holders,
look very well and dress a general display.
The central design is a man with a wheelbarrow, and another with a
scoop shovel. The barrow should be loaded with notions, laces,
handkerchiefs, gloves, etc. This feature may be made mechanical by having
I offer the following suggestion for a window, and although the central
portion is alone illustrated, and may be applied to any sort of a trim, the
general plan described will be found to harmonize with the central picture.
BROOKLYN BRIDGE IN SPOOL COTTON.—Stetler.
Use green and yellow, in combination, for the wall draperies, and drab
for the floor. Trim, in any manner that commends itself to you, with
handkerchiefs, embroideries and notions, keeping each class of articles in a
separate group. Parasols at the front corners, placed in fan-shaped holders,
look very well and dress a general display.
The central design is a man with a wheelbarrow, and another with a
scoop shovel. The barrow should be loaded with notions, laces,
handkerchiefs, gloves, etc. This feature may be made mechanical by having
Page 510
the barrow rest on an iron brace just back of the wheel, and another brace
fastened to the floor and running up the pants leg of the man holding the
barrow. Cut a slot in the floor so that the wheel of the barrow just touches
an endless band beneath. Have the man’s knees and hips jointed and
connected with a rod running through another slot in the floor and
connected with a wheel underneath, so that the same motion is obtained as
when a man rides a bicycle. One motor will operate both the man’s legs and
the wheel of the barrow. The floor should be strewn with the same class of
goods contained in the barrow and a small heap should be just in front of
the scoop shovel. It would be well to have a small price card fastened to
each article.
fastened to the floor and running up the pants leg of the man holding the
barrow. Cut a slot in the floor so that the wheel of the barrow just touches
an endless band beneath. Have the man’s knees and hips jointed and
connected with a rod running through another slot in the floor and
connected with a wheel underneath, so that the same motion is obtained as
when a man rides a bicycle. One motor will operate both the man’s legs and
the wheel of the barrow. The floor should be strewn with the same class of
goods contained in the barrow and a small heap should be just in front of
the scoop shovel. It would be well to have a small price card fastened to
each article.
Page 511
PICKING UP.
As a central figure for a notion display you may make a large star,
divided into five diamonds, or points, as shown in the picture. These are
each filled in with small notions, and the remainder of the background
trimmed as you please. The central figure is the main point, and gives
character to any trim, so that if you get the central idea the rest is easy. Two
jointed, or, better yet, flexible forms are needed for this window. One is
stooping down and picking up small notions and placing them in a basket.
The other form bears a mouth card, reading, “How is business?” The
stooping form replies, by a similar mouth card, “Picking up,” etc.
As a central figure for a notion display you may make a large star,
divided into five diamonds, or points, as shown in the picture. These are
each filled in with small notions, and the remainder of the background
trimmed as you please. The central figure is the main point, and gives
character to any trim, so that if you get the central idea the rest is easy. Two
jointed, or, better yet, flexible forms are needed for this window. One is
stooping down and picking up small notions and placing them in a basket.
The other form bears a mouth card, reading, “How is business?” The
stooping form replies, by a similar mouth card, “Picking up,” etc.
Page 512
CHAPTER XXVI.
PRACTICAL TRIMS IN ALL LINES.
I have selected as examples of good trims in every line of dry goods
some of the best designs that have appeared during the past three years in
the popular window-trimming journal, The Show Window. In no other place
could I hope to find such representative work of the best decorators in
America, and as my selection has been made with great care, I feel it is a
panorama of the most artistic and practical window displays ever yet
congregated for the study and consideration of the thoughtful decorator. The
Show Window is published under the auspices of The National Association
of Window Trimmers of America, an organization that includes the most
famous window trimmers in the United States and Canada and has done
more to advance decorative art in America than any other institution.
PRACTICAL TRIMS IN ALL LINES.
I have selected as examples of good trims in every line of dry goods
some of the best designs that have appeared during the past three years in
the popular window-trimming journal, The Show Window. In no other place
could I hope to find such representative work of the best decorators in
America, and as my selection has been made with great care, I feel it is a
panorama of the most artistic and practical window displays ever yet
congregated for the study and consideration of the thoughtful decorator. The
Show Window is published under the auspices of The National Association
of Window Trimmers of America, an organization that includes the most
famous window trimmers in the United States and Canada and has done
more to advance decorative art in America than any other institution.
Page 513
Study with care these illustrations. When you wish to put in a window in
any line turn to this book and select a design that pleases you. Erect your
framework to fit your window, making what alterations in the plan your
judgment or circumstances dictate. Then cover with suitable material,
taking care to use harmonious combinations of colors. Last of all, decorate
with such goods as you have at your command. You cannot fail. You are
sure to create an attractive display, the qualities being of course more or less
dependent upon the skill you acquire. You cannot be an expert decorator the
first time you try; but you can make a successful display, and I really
believe that if my instructions are thoughtfully read and pondered any man
of ability will be able to perfect himself in the necessary details of the art.
After that the matter lies within yourself. If you have confidence in
yourself, energy and perseverance, united to a fair share of heaven-born
talent, you can win your way to prosperity and fame as a professional
decorator.
any line turn to this book and select a design that pleases you. Erect your
framework to fit your window, making what alterations in the plan your
judgment or circumstances dictate. Then cover with suitable material,
taking care to use harmonious combinations of colors. Last of all, decorate
with such goods as you have at your command. You cannot fail. You are
sure to create an attractive display, the qualities being of course more or less
dependent upon the skill you acquire. You cannot be an expert decorator the
first time you try; but you can make a successful display, and I really
believe that if my instructions are thoughtfully read and pondered any man
of ability will be able to perfect himself in the necessary details of the art.
After that the matter lies within yourself. If you have confidence in
yourself, energy and perseverance, united to a fair share of heaven-born
talent, you can win your way to prosperity and fame as a professional
decorator.
Page 514
STEAMBOAT OF SPOOL COTTON. THE SPOOLS ARE STRUNG ON WIRES AND FASTENED
TO A LIGHT FRAME OF WOOD.—Murray.
TO A LIGHT FRAME OF WOOD.—Murray.
Page 515
HOSIERY DISPLAY BUILT OVER TWO CIRCLES, ONE PLACED BACK OF THE OTHER
AND ONE-HALF THE DIAMETER OF THE FIRST.—Griffith.
AND ONE-HALF THE DIAMETER OF THE FIRST.—Griffith.
Page 516
DISPLAY OF SEWING SILKS STRUNG ON CORDS AND ATTACHED TO FRAMEWORK.—
Ross.
Ross.
Page 517
DISPLAY OF NOTIONS ATTACHED TO LARGE
WOODEN CIRCLE, THE FACE OF WHICH IS PUFFED.
CIRCLE SET TWO FEET IN FRONT OF PLEATED
BACKGROUND. RABBITS CUT FROM CARDBOARD.
SHIP OF SPOOLS IN CENTER.—Brink.
WOODEN CIRCLE, THE FACE OF WHICH IS PUFFED.
CIRCLE SET TWO FEET IN FRONT OF PLEATED
BACKGROUND. RABBITS CUT FROM CARDBOARD.
SHIP OF SPOOLS IN CENTER.—Brink.
Page 518
NOTION DISPLAY. HOOPS ARE USED FOR FRAME OF THE CIRCULAR DECORATIONS.
THERE IS A CENTRAL ALCOVE CONTAINING A SCENE WITH DOLLS AS FIGURES.—
Newerf.
THERE IS A CENTRAL ALCOVE CONTAINING A SCENE WITH DOLLS AS FIGURES.—
Newerf.
Page 519
DISPLAY OF TRIMMINGS. GIRL’S FORM ON
CENTRAL PEDESTAL. GOODS ARRANGED OVER
WHITE BACKGROUND.—Morton.
CENTRAL PEDESTAL. GOODS ARRANGED OVER
WHITE BACKGROUND.—Morton.
Page 520
DISPLAY OF PASSEMENTERIES, FASTENED TO WHITE CARDBOARD. CENTRAL
SUNBURST IS LIGHT PINK.—Ross.
SUNBURST IS LIGHT PINK.—Ross.
Page 521
RIBBON DISPLAY. BOLTS ARE STRUNG ON HEAVY CORDS.—Langhanke.
Page 522
RIBBON DISPLAY, DRAPED OVER CURTAIN POLES, WITH BOLTS AT THE BOTTOM OF
EACH PIECE.—Ross.
EACH PIECE.—Ross.
Page 523
RIBBON DISPLAY. SIDES ARE DUMMY BOLTS LAID
UPON PLANKS. CENTRAL CANOPY IS FORMED
OVER HOOPS.—Griffith.
UPON PLANKS. CENTRAL CANOPY IS FORMED
OVER HOOPS.—Griffith.
Page 524
DISPLAY OF FIGURED RIBBONS, OVER WHITE,
PLAIN BACKGROUND.—Richards.
PLAIN BACKGROUND.—Richards.
Page 525
HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY. CAGE CONTAINS STUFFED BIRDS. THE BARS ARE OF
WHITE BABY RIBBON.—Boyer.
WHITE BABY RIBBON.—Boyer.
Page 526
HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY. GOODS ARE ATTACHED TO CORDS FASTENED TO FLOOR
AND CEILING. BLACK BACKGROUND.—Watson.
AND CEILING. BLACK BACKGROUND.—Watson.
Page 527
HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY. SCENIC BACKGROUND. WINDMILL AND HOUSE OF LIGHT
WOOD COVERED WITH CLOTH, TO WHICH HANDKERCHIEFS ARE PINNED.—Van
Derschmidt.
WOOD COVERED WITH CLOTH, TO WHICH HANDKERCHIEFS ARE PINNED.—Van
Derschmidt.
Page 528
HANDKERCHIEF DISPLAY. FRONT GROUPS ARE UPON POLES, HAVING ELECTRIC
LIGHT ON EACH POLE, SURMOUNTED BY WIRE CIRCLE TRIMMED WITH
HANDKERCHIEFS.—Cartwright.
LIGHT ON EACH POLE, SURMOUNTED BY WIRE CIRCLE TRIMMED WITH
HANDKERCHIEFS.—Cartwright.
Page 529
DISPLAY OF LACES.—Shogran.
Page 530
LOCOMOTIVE TRIMMED WITH LACE AND EMBROIDERY, COVERING A THIN WOODEN
FRAMEWORK. CAB AND SMOKESTACK OF CARDBOARD.—Pickett.
FRAMEWORK. CAB AND SMOKESTACK OF CARDBOARD.—Pickett.
Page 531
THE SECOND WEEK OF THIS DISPLAY THE LOCOMOTIVE WAS SHOWN IN A WRECKED
CONDITION, WITH A CARD ANNOUNCING “WRECKED PRICES.”
CONDITION, WITH A CARD ANNOUNCING “WRECKED PRICES.”
Page 532
DISPLAY OF LACE CURTAINS HUNG OVER A
SUCCESSION OF HORIZONTAL POLES.—Morton.
SUCCESSION OF HORIZONTAL POLES.—Morton.
Page 533
DISPLAY OF LINENS.—Ross.
Page 534
LINEN DISPLAY—FRAMEWORK OF INSULATED WIRE AND LIGHT WOOD.—Goldsman.
Page 535
LINEN DISPLAY. FLOWERS MADE OVER INSULATED WIRE.—Condit.
Page 536
LINEN DISPLAY.—Shogran.
Page 537
LINEN DISPLAY WITH MOVING SHIP.—Condit.
Page 538
FIRE ENGINE OF LINENS, BUILT OVER LIGHT WOODEN FRAME. HOUSE OF LINENS IN
BACKGROUND.—Condit.
BACKGROUND.—Condit.
Page 539
LOCOMOTIVE OF LINENS, ON TRACK.—Coe.
Page 540
UMBRELLA DISPLAY.—Watson.
Page 541
UMBRELLA DISPLAY.—Tobias.
Page 542
DISPLAY OF INFANTS’ WEAR—SUNBURSTS OF BABY RIBBON.—Speed.
Page 543
INFANTS’ WEAR. “WEIGHING THE BABY.”—
Goldsman.
Goldsman.
Page 544
INFANTS’ WEAR. “WASHING THE BABY.”—Goldsman.
Page 545
INFANTS’ WEAR.—Walker.
Page 546
INFANTS’ WEAR.—Spence.
Page 547
GLOVE DISPLAY.—Watson.
Page 548
CORSET DISPLAY. MIRROR BACKGROUND.—
Higgins.
Higgins.
Page 549
CORSET DISPLAY. SHIRRED PUFFING ON BACKGROUND, SEPARATED INTO PANELS BY
RODS COVERED WITH BLACK VELVET.—McFaddin.
RODS COVERED WITH BLACK VELVET.—McFaddin.
Page 550
CORSET DISPLAY—ARRANGED IN TERRACES.—Stetlar.
Page 551
CORSET DISPLAY. SHOWING THREE CIRCLES OF GRADED SIZES SET BACK OF EACH
OTHER AND PUFFED IN DIFFERENT TINTS.—Stritt.
OTHER AND PUFFED IN DIFFERENT TINTS.—Stritt.
Page 552
EMBROIDERY SILKS AND LINENS.—Paris.
Page 553
DISPLAY OF ART GOODS.—Warner.
Page 554
DISPLAY OF FANCY LINENS.—Stritt.
Page 555
FANCY GOODS.—Newton.
Page 556
DISPLAY OF FANCY GOODS.—Moss.
Page 557
DISPLAY OF MUSLIN UNDERWEAR.—McKnew.
Page 558
DISPLAY OF MUSLIN UNDERWEAR.—Morton.
Page 559
DISPLAY OF MUSLIN UNDERWEAR.—Walker.
Page 560
DISPLAY OF MUSLIN UNDERWEAR.—Softley.
Page 561
DISPLAY OF MUSLIN UNDERWEAR.—Higgins.
Page 562
DISPLAY OF SILK WAISTS AND SKIRTS.—Higgins.
Page 563
DISPLAY OF KNIT UNDERWEAR.—Hulligan.
Page 564
COTTON GOODS DISPLAY.—Hyslop.
Page 565
DISPLAY OF BLANKETS.—Luz.
Page 566
BLANKET DISPLAY.—Ross.
Page 567
BLANKET DISPLAY.—Kupfer.
Page 568
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Moses.
Page 569
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Green.
Page 570
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—McNiff.
Page 571
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Lundy.
Page 572
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Walker.
Page 573
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Chambers.
Page 574
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Rinehart.
Page 575
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Barnes.
Page 576
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Blumenthal.
Page 577
MILLINERY DISPLAY.—Herr.
Page 578
DISPLAY OF LINING TAFFETAS.—Watson.
Page 579
WASH GOODS DISPLAY.—Luz.
Page 580
GINGHAM DISPLAY.—Ackerman.
Page 581
DRESS GOODS DISPLAY.—Sawyer.
Page 582
DRESS GOODS DISPLAY.—Kelley.
Page 583
DRESS GOODS DISPLAY.—Sawyer.
Page 584
DISPLAY OF SCOTCH GINGHAMS.—Hornbrook.
Page 585
DISPLAY OF SCOTCH FLANNELS.—Anderson.
Page 586
SILK DISPLAY.—Richards.
Page 587
SILKS AND PARASOLS.—Toms.
Page 588
SILK DISPLAY.—Ross.
Page 589
DISPLAY OF WINTER SILKS.—Watson.
Page 590
FOULARD SILKS.—Walker.
Page 591
DRESS SILKS.—Baum.
Page 592
DISPLAY OF JACKETS.—Leppke.
Page 593
DISPLAY OF SHIRT WAISTS.—Kupfer.
Page 594
DISPLAY OF COSTUMES AND DRESS GOODS.—Rondaloux.
Page 595
COSTUME DISPLAY.—Griffith.
Page 596
COSTUME DISPLAY.—Hyslop.
Page 597
COSTUME DISPLAY.—Carl.
Page 598
DISPLAY OF JACKETS.—Chambers.
Page 599
DISPLAY OF FURS.—Shogran.
Page 600
DISPLAY OF RUGS.—Herr.
Page 601
RUG DISPLAY.—Moss.
Page 602
DISPLAY OF TRUNKS AND TRAVELING BAGS.—Elvin.
Page 603
GLOSSARY
OF SUBJECTS TREATED IN THIS BOOK.
A
Allegorical Design, 139
Arrangement of Goods, 23
Arch, Construction, 41
of Handkerchiefs, 81
Odd Fellows, 233
Street Fair, 163
Art Goods Display, 276
Artistic Drapings, 48
Astronomical Display, 101
Autumn Leaves, 151
B
Backgrounds, Material for, 26
Standard, 36
Stock, 35
Open, 39
to Prepare, 35
Barrel-Hoop Fixtures, 42
Bicycle Float, 171
Blankets, 151
Blanket Displays, 286
OF SUBJECTS TREATED IN THIS BOOK.
A
Allegorical Design, 139
Arrangement of Goods, 23
Arch, Construction, 41
of Handkerchiefs, 81
Odd Fellows, 233
Street Fair, 163
Art Goods Display, 276
Artistic Drapings, 48
Astronomical Display, 101
Autumn Leaves, 151
B
Backgrounds, Material for, 26
Standard, 36
Stock, 35
Open, 39
to Prepare, 35
Barrel-Hoop Fixtures, 42
Bicycle Float, 171
Blankets, 151
Blanket Displays, 286
Page 604
Box Models, 152
Box Pleating, 35
Boxing a Window, 10
Brooklyn Bridge, 238
Brushes for Card Writing, 55
Business Windows, 146
Butterfly, Mechanical, 110
C
Care of Wax Figures, 145
Cardboard, 55
Card Writing, 53
Cause of Frosted Windows, 11
Cheesecloth, Use of, 26
Chiffon, 148
Christmas Displays, 144
Eve, 209
Mantel, 198
Tree, 135
Clearing Sales, 146
Cleopatra’s Barge, 170
Clever Illusions, 84
Clock Motors, 87
Color Charts, 24
Harmony, 22
Coloring Electric Lamps, 113
Combination Drapery, 29
Compound Colors, to Make, 54
Contra-revolving Pillows, 88
Box Pleating, 35
Boxing a Window, 10
Brooklyn Bridge, 238
Brushes for Card Writing, 55
Business Windows, 146
Butterfly, Mechanical, 110
C
Care of Wax Figures, 145
Cardboard, 55
Card Writing, 53
Cause of Frosted Windows, 11
Cheesecloth, Use of, 26
Chiffon, 148
Christmas Displays, 144
Eve, 209
Mantel, 198
Tree, 135
Clearing Sales, 146
Cleopatra’s Barge, 170
Clever Illusions, 84
Clock Motors, 87
Color Charts, 24
Harmony, 22
Coloring Electric Lamps, 113
Combination Drapery, 29
Compound Colors, to Make, 54
Contra-revolving Pillows, 88
Page 605
Cornucopia, 221
Corset Displays, 237, 272
Fixtures, 43
Cozy Corner, 220
Costume Displays, 311
Cotton Goods Display, 285
Crepe Paper Backgrounds, 150
Cylinder, Revolving, 103
D
Department Managers, 147
Detail in Decorating, 14
Doll Displays, 200
Draping, Combination, 30
Dress Goods, 44
Fleur-de-lis, 51
How to Make, 28
Plain, 29
Stands for, 44
Dress Goods Displays, 301
Standards, 44
E
Easter Bouquets, 152
Crosses, 185
Displays, 179
Eggs, 185
Emblems, 142, 181
Lilies, 179
Lilies, Mechanical, 186
Rabbits and Chicks, 185
Edges, Puffed, 33
Egg, Mechanical, 111
Corset Displays, 237, 272
Fixtures, 43
Cozy Corner, 220
Costume Displays, 311
Cotton Goods Display, 285
Crepe Paper Backgrounds, 150
Cylinder, Revolving, 103
D
Department Managers, 147
Detail in Decorating, 14
Doll Displays, 200
Draping, Combination, 30
Dress Goods, 44
Fleur-de-lis, 51
How to Make, 28
Plain, 29
Stands for, 44
Dress Goods Displays, 301
Standards, 44
E
Easter Bouquets, 152
Crosses, 185
Displays, 179
Eggs, 185
Emblems, 142, 181
Lilies, 179
Lilies, Mechanical, 186
Rabbits and Chicks, 185
Edges, Puffed, 33
Egg, Mechanical, 111
Page 606
Electric Arcs and Incandescents, 119
Automatic Switch, 126
Batteries, 116
Christmas Tree, 135
Commutator, 123
Connections, 121
Emblems, 141
Fans, 13
Feeders, 120
Fountain, 128
Flasher, 124
Flags, 127
Fuse, 120
Hitches, 121
Hub Switch, 125
Letters for Signs, 123
Mechanism, 128
Measures, 116
Motors, 85
Resistance, 115
Revolving Effects, 125
Supplies, 118
Tools, 118
Transformers, 120
Voltage, 122
Wiring, 118
Electricity in Windows, 113
Embroidery Displays, 257, 275
Emblems, 141
Eruption of Vesuvius, 97
Eye for Colors, An, 25
F
Fancy Linens, 276
Fan, the Mechanical, 109
Automatic Switch, 126
Batteries, 116
Christmas Tree, 135
Commutator, 123
Connections, 121
Emblems, 141
Fans, 13
Feeders, 120
Fountain, 128
Flasher, 124
Flags, 127
Fuse, 120
Hitches, 121
Hub Switch, 125
Letters for Signs, 123
Mechanism, 128
Measures, 116
Motors, 85
Resistance, 115
Revolving Effects, 125
Supplies, 118
Tools, 118
Transformers, 120
Voltage, 122
Wiring, 118
Electricity in Windows, 113
Embroidery Displays, 257, 275
Emblems, 141
Eruption of Vesuvius, 97
Eye for Colors, An, 25
F
Fancy Linens, 276
Fan, the Mechanical, 109
Page 607
Festoon Drapery, 29
Fireplaces, 151
Fixtures, 39
for Corsets, 43
homemade, 40
Flannel Display, 304
Fleur-de-lis Drapery, 51
Floats, 166
Flags, 186
Floor of Window, to Build, 10
Floral Flags, 186
Folding Star, Mechanical, 91
Fireproof Decorations, 27
Fountain, Electric, 128
of Chiffon, 237
Fourth of July Displays, 186
Framed Forms, 149
Framework, to Build, 16
Frosted Windows, to Prevent, 11
Fur Display, 316
G
Gilding, How to Make, 148
Gingham Displays, 300
Glass Shelves, to Make, 44
Glove Display, 271
Gondola, Mechanical, 105
Grotto for Santa Claus, 211
H
Fireplaces, 151
Fixtures, 39
for Corsets, 43
homemade, 40
Flannel Display, 304
Fleur-de-lis Drapery, 51
Floats, 166
Flags, 186
Floor of Window, to Build, 10
Floral Flags, 186
Folding Star, Mechanical, 91
Fireproof Decorations, 27
Fountain, Electric, 128
of Chiffon, 237
Fourth of July Displays, 186
Framed Forms, 149
Framework, to Build, 16
Frosted Windows, to Prevent, 11
Fur Display, 316
G
Gilding, How to Make, 148
Gingham Displays, 300
Glass Shelves, to Make, 44
Glove Display, 271
Gondola, Mechanical, 105
Grotto for Santa Claus, 211
H
Page 608
Half-revealing Bust Stands, 95
Handkerchief Displays, 241
Drapings, 72
Racks, 151
to Fold, 72
Harmony of Colors, 22
Hints and Suggestions, 148
Holly, to Trim with, 151
Hosiery Displays, 242
House of Linens, 150
How to Fold Handkerchiefs, 72
Human Forms, Use of, 149
I
Icicles, Artificial, 150
Illuminations, 148
Illusion Windows, 82
Backgrounds, 152
Illuminated Electric Fountain, 129
Scenic Background, 129
Octopus, 131
Infants’ Wear Displays, 268
Instructions in Electricity, 115
Interior Arches, 215
Cornucopias, 221
Decorations, 213
Displays, 214
Easter Decorations, 224
Pyramid, 233
J
Jacket Displays, 310–315
Handkerchief Displays, 241
Drapings, 72
Racks, 151
to Fold, 72
Harmony of Colors, 22
Hints and Suggestions, 148
Holly, to Trim with, 151
Hosiery Displays, 242
House of Linens, 150
How to Fold Handkerchiefs, 72
Human Forms, Use of, 149
I
Icicles, Artificial, 150
Illuminations, 148
Illusion Windows, 82
Backgrounds, 152
Illuminated Electric Fountain, 129
Scenic Background, 129
Octopus, 131
Infants’ Wear Displays, 268
Instructions in Electricity, 115
Interior Arches, 215
Cornucopias, 221
Decorations, 213
Displays, 214
Easter Decorations, 224
Pyramid, 233
J
Jacket Displays, 310–315
Page 609
January Sales, 146
July 4th Displays, 186
K
Kaleidoscope, 150
Knit Underwear Display, 284
%center%L
Laces, 256
Lace Curtains, 258
Lattice Work, 39
Ledge Displays, 225
Letters, Electric, 123
Lettering Types, Antique, 62
Block, 61
DeVinne, 57
Egyptian, 59
Figures, 63
Indexes, 64
Initials, 64
Medieval, 62
Modern Roman, 59
Old English, 61
Rapid, 58
Script, 60
Unique, 60
Lighting the Window, 112
Linen Decorations, 52
Displays, 259
Drapings, 72
Lining Displays, 298
Lining Show Cards, 54
July 4th Displays, 186
K
Kaleidoscope, 150
Knit Underwear Display, 284
%center%L
Laces, 256
Lace Curtains, 258
Lattice Work, 39
Ledge Displays, 225
Letters, Electric, 123
Lettering Types, Antique, 62
Block, 61
DeVinne, 57
Egyptian, 59
Figures, 63
Indexes, 64
Initials, 64
Medieval, 62
Modern Roman, 59
Old English, 61
Rapid, 58
Script, 60
Unique, 60
Lighting the Window, 112
Linen Decorations, 52
Displays, 259
Drapings, 72
Lining Displays, 298
Lining Show Cards, 54
Page 610
Live Canary Birds, 149
M
Material for Backgrounds, 26
Mechanical Butterfly, 109
Displays, 87
Egg, 111
Fan, 108
Panels, 105
Skirt Holder, 91
Ships, 90
Windmill, 91
Memorial Day Displays, 186
Millinery Arch, 237
Displays, 289
Mixing Colors, 54
Monograms, 148
Moon Effect, 98
Moonlight, 137
Motors, 85
Speed Reducer for, 86
Muslin Underwear Displays, 279
N
Notion Displays, 238–244
O
Octopus, Illuminated, 131
Old Oaken Bucket, 152
Odd Fellows’ Arch, 233
Open Backgrounds, 37
Open Window Trimming, 16
Onyx Standards, 43
M
Material for Backgrounds, 26
Mechanical Butterfly, 109
Displays, 87
Egg, 111
Fan, 108
Panels, 105
Skirt Holder, 91
Ships, 90
Windmill, 91
Memorial Day Displays, 186
Millinery Arch, 237
Displays, 289
Mixing Colors, 54
Monograms, 148
Moon Effect, 98
Moonlight, 137
Motors, 85
Speed Reducer for, 86
Muslin Underwear Displays, 279
N
Notion Displays, 238–244
O
Octopus, Illuminated, 131
Old Oaken Bucket, 152
Odd Fellows’ Arch, 233
Open Backgrounds, 37
Open Window Trimming, 16
Onyx Standards, 43
Page 611
Oriental Display, 233
Original Street Fair Booths, 170
Ornamental Show Cards, 65
Outfit Displays, 151
P
Palm Stands, 43
Panoramas, 113–149
Parade Floats, 174
Patriotic Displays, 152
Paints for Show Cards, 54
Perpetual Motion, 104
Pedestals, 42
Pen Writing,
Photographing Windows, 144
Planning a Window, 27
Pleating, Methods of, 34
Post Shelves, 149
Potential Force, 115
Prisms, Use of, 148
Prismatic Display, 152
Practical Trims, 240
Puffing, Method of, 31
for Headings, 31
Shogran, 32
R
Rainbow, 151
Revolving Busts, 95
Cylinder, 103
Original Street Fair Booths, 170
Ornamental Show Cards, 65
Outfit Displays, 151
P
Palm Stands, 43
Panoramas, 113–149
Parade Floats, 174
Patriotic Displays, 152
Paints for Show Cards, 54
Perpetual Motion, 104
Pedestals, 42
Pen Writing,
Photographing Windows, 144
Planning a Window, 27
Pleating, Methods of, 34
Post Shelves, 149
Potential Force, 115
Prisms, Use of, 148
Prismatic Display, 152
Practical Trims, 240
Puffing, Method of, 31
for Headings, 31
Shogran, 32
R
Rainbow, 151
Revolving Busts, 95
Cylinder, 103
Page 612
Stands, 87
Star, 88
Wheel, 94
Ribbon Decorations, 149
Displays, 248
Flags, 186
Star, 235
Robing Windows, 15
Room for the Trimmer, 15
Rug Display, 235–317
Ruling Show Cards, 54
S
Sand Motors, 86
Santa Claus Cave, 213
Grotto, 211
Seasons, Float, 168
Side Hoops, 149
Sign Shop for Stores, 68
Sign Marking Outfit, 70
Silk Displays, 305
Stands, 44
Shirt Waists Displays, 310
to Prepare, 150
Show Case Displays, 231
Shelving of Glass, 44
Sewing Silk Display, 243
Screen for Windows, 16
Shogran Puffing, 32
Shamrocks, to Make, 150
Star, 88
Wheel, 94
Ribbon Decorations, 149
Displays, 248
Flags, 186
Star, 235
Robing Windows, 15
Room for the Trimmer, 15
Rug Display, 235–317
Ruling Show Cards, 54
S
Sand Motors, 86
Santa Claus Cave, 213
Grotto, 211
Seasons, Float, 168
Side Hoops, 149
Sign Shop for Stores, 68
Sign Marking Outfit, 70
Silk Displays, 305
Stands, 44
Shirt Waists Displays, 310
to Prepare, 150
Show Case Displays, 231
Shelving of Glass, 44
Sewing Silk Display, 243
Screen for Windows, 16
Shogran Puffing, 32
Shamrocks, to Make, 150
Page 613
Skirt Displays, 236
Stand, 44
Sale, 89
Simplicity in Decorating, 14
Single Pleating, 34
Smocking, 33
Snow Storms, 151
Spool Cotton Displays, 242
Standards, Onyx, 43
Standard Framework, 17
Backgrounds, 36
Stands for Dress Goods, 44
Star, Mechanical, 88
Stone Fronts, to Plan, 9
Straw Hat Machine, 195
Study in Astronomy, 100
St. Valentine’s Day, 177
Stencils, Use of, 70
Spacing Show Cards, 56
Speech Makers, 63
Speed Reducers, 94
Street Fairs, Advantages, 156
Amusements, 160
Details, 160
Object of, 154
Organizing, 157
Success of, 156
Time to Hold, 157
What it is, 152
Stand, 44
Sale, 89
Simplicity in Decorating, 14
Single Pleating, 34
Smocking, 33
Snow Storms, 151
Spool Cotton Displays, 242
Standards, Onyx, 43
Standard Framework, 17
Backgrounds, 36
Stands for Dress Goods, 44
Star, Mechanical, 88
Stone Fronts, to Plan, 9
Straw Hat Machine, 195
Study in Astronomy, 100
St. Valentine’s Day, 177
Stencils, Use of, 70
Spacing Show Cards, 56
Speech Makers, 63
Speed Reducers, 94
Street Fairs, Advantages, 156
Amusements, 160
Details, 160
Object of, 154
Organizing, 157
Success of, 156
Time to Hold, 157
What it is, 152
Page 614
Suspended Stands 149
Poles, 152
Sunbursts, to Make, 53
T
Table for Card Writing, 53
Thanksgiving Displays, 196
The Coming Year, Decorations, 222
Thistle Flowers of Linens, 52
Three Displays at Once, 85
Tools to work with, 16
Toy Displays, 205
Trimming Displays, 235–247
Trolley Car, Decorations, 236
Trunks and Travelers’ Goods, 319
Turkey Made of Linens, 197
U
Umbrellas, 149
Umbrella Displays, 266
Underwear Displays, 280
Upholstery Backgrounds, 28
Use of Brushes, 55
V
Valentine’s Day Displays, 177
Vanishing Lady, The, 83
Volcano Effects, 177
W
Waists, 283
Wash Day, 149
Poles, 152
Sunbursts, to Make, 53
T
Table for Card Writing, 53
Thanksgiving Displays, 196
The Coming Year, Decorations, 222
Thistle Flowers of Linens, 52
Three Displays at Once, 85
Tools to work with, 16
Toy Displays, 205
Trimming Displays, 235–247
Trolley Car, Decorations, 236
Trunks and Travelers’ Goods, 319
Turkey Made of Linens, 197
U
Umbrellas, 149
Umbrella Displays, 266
Underwear Displays, 280
Upholstery Backgrounds, 28
Use of Brushes, 55
V
Valentine’s Day Displays, 177
Vanishing Lady, The, 83
Volcano Effects, 177
W
Waists, 283
Wash Day, 149
Page 615
Wash Goods Displays, 299
Washing Windows, Method of, 11
Wall Paper for Backgrounds, 151
Waterfall, to Make, 152
Water Motors, 86
Wax Figures, Care of, 145
What to Display, 15
Windows, to Plan, 27
to Upholster, 28
Window Cards, 56
Wind Power, 104
Windmill, with Electric Effect, 132
Winter Scene, 150
Words of Advice, 145
Workmanship, 14
Work Room for Card Writers, 53
Washing Windows, Method of, 11
Wall Paper for Backgrounds, 151
Waterfall, to Make, 152
Water Motors, 86
Wax Figures, Care of, 145
What to Display, 15
Windows, to Plan, 27
to Upholster, 28
Window Cards, 56
Wind Power, 104
Windmill, with Electric Effect, 132
Winter Scene, 150
Words of Advice, 145
Workmanship, 14
Work Room for Card Writers, 53
Page 616
Page 617
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES
Page Changed from Changed to
33 form of planting radiating in form of pleating radiating in
all directions all directions
37 trips will make a good frame. strips will make a good
Any style frame. Any style
41 not obtainable, don’t not obtainable, don’t
entertain a entertain a trimmer
93 Then build upright (C, figs. 2 Then build upright (C, figs. 2
and 2) and 3)
104 to be separated by angles of to be separated by angles of
15 degrees, as 45 degrees, as
145 place is thus covered, so that plate is thus covered, so that
your total exposure your total exposure
1. Typos fixed; non-standard spelling and dialect retained.
Page Changed from Changed to
33 form of planting radiating in form of pleating radiating in
all directions all directions
37 trips will make a good frame. strips will make a good
Any style frame. Any style
41 not obtainable, don’t not obtainable, don’t
entertain a entertain a trimmer
93 Then build upright (C, figs. 2 Then build upright (C, figs. 2
and 2) and 3)
104 to be separated by angles of to be separated by angles of
15 degrees, as 45 degrees, as
145 place is thus covered, so that plate is thus covered, so that
your total exposure your total exposure
1. Typos fixed; non-standard spelling and dialect retained.
Page 618
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ART OF
DECORATING DRY GOODS WINDOWS AND INTERIORS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
DECORATING DRY GOODS WINDOWS AND INTERIORS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 619
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
Page 620
collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
Page 621
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
Page 622
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
Page 623
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
Page 624
EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
Page 625
distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration,
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact
Page 626
links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Page 627
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.